Autodesk Auto CAD Map 3D 2011 Instruction Manual Autocad En

User Manual: autodesk AutoCAD Map 3D - 2011 - Instruction Manual Free User Guide for Autodesk AutoCAD Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 2180 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

AutoCAD® Map 3D 2011
User's Guide
April 2010
©2010 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries:
3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo),
ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface,
Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backburner, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale,
Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design
Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG
Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Flare,
Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT,
Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, Lustre, MatchMover, Maya,
Mechanical Desktop, Moldflow, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, MPA, MPA (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, Moldflow
Plastics Insight, MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert, Mudbox, Multi-Master Editing, Navisworks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open
Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, Pipeplus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials,
RasterDWG, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage,
Softimage|XSI (design/logo), Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual,
Visual LISP, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo).
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Published by:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 McInnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Overview of AutoCAD Map 3D Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
The AutoCAD Map 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Map Files and Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Map Files and Display Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overview of AutoCAD Map 3D Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Create and Assign Geographic Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . 11
Combine Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . 12
Create and Edit Features and Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Search and Filter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
View and Edit Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Use Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Organize Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Style Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Theme and Analyze Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Manage Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Share and Publish Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Customize Your Working Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Extend Functionality Using Open Source and API . . . . . . . . . 51
Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Watching Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using InfoCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Using the Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
iii
Watching the Welcome Screen Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Navigating the User's Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Getting Help with AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
New in This Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using Other Sources of Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Participating in Autodesk Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Printing This Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
AutoCAD Map 3D Sample Data and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Sample Real-World Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Templates for Maps and Map Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Symbols for Water, Gas, Electric, and Emergency Response . . . . 69
Symbols for General Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
North Arrows, Scale Bars, and Other Map Elements . . . . . . . . 71
Geospatial Data Available for Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tutorial Sample Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
AutoCAD Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
User's Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 2 Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Overview of Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Customizing Your Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Creating New Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Setting Up Object Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Setting Up for Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Setting Up Your Map File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Overview of Setting Up Your Map File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Assigning Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Attaching Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Setting Up a Query Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Setting Up Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Setting Up Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Using Data from Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Overview of Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Setting Task Pane Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Setting Drawing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Setting Multi-user Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Setting System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
iv | Contents
Setting Coordinate System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Setting Coordinate Tracker Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Setting Data View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Setting Geospatial Feature Editing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Setting Metadata Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Setting InfoCenter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions . . . . . . . 242
Setting Query Options (DWG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Using Associative Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Saving Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Setting Raster Image Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Customizing and Automating Import and Export . . . . . . . . 260
Setting Up and Running Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Overview of Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Running Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Editing or Creating Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Changing the Workflow Designer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Chapter 3 Bringing In Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Overview of Bringing In Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Before You Bring In Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Creating a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Organizing Layers in Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Bringing in GIS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Overview of Bringing In GIS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map . . . . . . . . 309
Changing Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Bringing In Features from Oracle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Bringing In Features from ArcSDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Bringing In Features from SQL Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Bringing In Features from SQL Server Spatial . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Bringing In Features From SQLite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Bringing In Features from MySQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Bringing In Features from SHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Bringing In Features from SDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Bringing in Features from PostgreSQL/PostGIS . . . . . . . . . . 340
Accessing Data from ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Bringing In Features from WFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Repairing Broken Feature Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files . . . . . 351
Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers . . . . . . . 355
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Contents | v
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data . . . . . . 363
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology . . . . . . . . . 367
Combining Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Bringing in Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Bringing in LandXML Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Bringing in ASCII Point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Bringing in LiDAR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Bringing in Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects . . . . . . 377
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Styling Drawing Data Converted From a Geospatial Data
Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Supported Import Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Specifying an Area to Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Assigning an Object Class During Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import . . . . . . . 423
Importing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Specifying How to Import Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Importing Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Creating Centroids for Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database . . . . . . 433
Displaying Attribute Data as Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Adding Rasters and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Adding 2D Rasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) . . . . . . . . 445
Making an Image Transparent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Specifying Image Insertion Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Using Other Raster Image Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Joining Data to GIS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Overview of Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Creating a Join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Modifying or Removing Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Editing Joined Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Using Joins with Calculated Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Sharing Joined Data with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Storing Attribute Data in the Drawing (Object Data) . . . . . . . 521
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects . . . . . . . . 522
Creating a Link Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Opening a Linked Database Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Manually Linking Database Records to Objects . . . . . . . . . . 528
vi | Contents
Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects . . . . . . . 530
Converting Object Data to Database Links . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Editing Database Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Editing a Link Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Using Open Source FDO Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Chapter 4 Managing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Overview of Managing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas . . . . . . 551
Overview of Geospatial Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Working with FDO Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Working with Oracle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Working with SQL Server Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Working with SQL Server Spatial Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Working with SQLite Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Working with MySQL Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Working with SDF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Working with SHP Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Working with PostgreSQL/PostGIS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Working with ODBC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Working with WFS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Working with Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Overview of Working with Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Setting Up Database Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Creating a Data Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Creating FDO-Enabled SQL Server Spatial Data Stores . . . . . . 590
Deleting a Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Working with Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Overview of Working with Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Creating a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Exposing a Native Database View in a Schema . . . . . . . . . . 603
Importing and Exporting a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Viewing a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Editing a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Deleting Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Undoing Schema Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Migrating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Overview of Migrating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types . . . . . . 623
Fixing Geometry Issues After a Bulk Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Migrating DWG Data to GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Contents | vii
Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Overview of Visualization and Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Controlling the Display of Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Overview of the Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Controlling Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Setting Map Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Creating Multiple Display Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Styling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Overview of Styling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Defining Scale Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Styling Point Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Styling Line Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Styling Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Labeling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Styling Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Styling a Drawing Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Creating a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Combining Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Modifying a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Saving a Display Style in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Referencing a Library Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Styling Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Overview of Styling Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Changing Brightness, Color, or Transparency for Raster
Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Viewing Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Styling Point Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Overview of Creating and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Working with Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Overview of Working with Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Creating New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Checking In Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Checking Out Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Canceling Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Updating Edits Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Working Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Managing Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
viii | Contents
Working with Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Overview of Working with Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Editing Data in Attached Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Cleaning Up Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Using Map Editing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Working with Polygon Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
Adding and Deleting Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
Using Object Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
Working with Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Overview of Working with Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Working with Survey Data Stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Working with Surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
Working with Point Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Working with Survey Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
Creating Surfaces From Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Working With Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Overview of Point Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Overview of LiDAR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Overview of Point Cloud Files and Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
Managing LiDAR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Using LiDAR Data to Create a Point Cloud Data Store . . . . . 1019
Creating Surfaces From Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
Filtering Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Entering Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands . . . . . . . . . 1027
Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . 1034
Using Bearings from Two Points to Specify a Point . . . . . . . 1036
Using Deflection and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . 1037
Using Distances from Two Points to Specify a Point . . . . . . . 1040
Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . 1042
Using Distance and Offset from a Line to Specify a Point . . . . 1044
Creating an Inverse Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
Working with Attribute Data and Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data . . . . 1047
Entering and Editing Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
Digitizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Overview of Digitizing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Overview of Digitizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
Digitizing Using MAPDIGITIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
Attaching Object Data As You Digitize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize . . . . . . . . . 1084
Chapter 7 Annotating Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Contents | ix
Overview of Annotating Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Adding Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Adding Labels to Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Allowing Labels to Obscure Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
Annotating Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Overview of Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Attaching Annotation to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Refreshing Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
Updating Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Deleting Annotation from Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Working with Text Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
Creating Text Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
Styling a Text Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
Adding Text to a Text Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Editing an Instance on a Text Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
Adding a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
Annotating with AutoCAD Text Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Chapter 8 Analyzing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
Overview of Analyzing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
Getting Information About Features and Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
Getting Information about Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
Getting Information About Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . 1143
Measuring and Tracking Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
Overview of Measuring and Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Tracking Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
Measuring Geodetic Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
Measuring Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Creating Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
Overview of Creating Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163
Theming Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
Theming Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Overview of Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Adding and Modifying Contour Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
Viewing Surfaces in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration . . . . . . . . . . 1199
Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect . . . . 1202
Changing Colors in a Themed Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
Finding and Selecting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
Finding and Selecting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
Analyzing Feature Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
Overview of Analyzing Feature Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
x | Contents
Buffering Features in Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
Overlaying Two Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
Analyzing Drawing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
Performing a Shortest Path Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
Performing a Best Route Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328
Performing a Flood Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Overlaying Two Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Dissolving a Composite Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Buffering a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
Querying a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
Saving a Temporary Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
Overview of Publishing and Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
Publishing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
Overview of Publishing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
Adding a Reference Grid to a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
Publishing a Map to a Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
Publishing to DWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
Publishing to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
Publishing to a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
Using eTransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
Publishing to MapGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
Viewing Publish to MapGuide Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
Publishing Map Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
Converting and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
Overview of Converting and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Supported Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
Supported Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
Exporting To Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File) . . . . . . . . . . 1413
Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
Exporting To ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
Exporting to ESRI ArcSDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
Exporting to ESRI SHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
Exporting To Geographic Markup Language (GML) . . . . . . . 1429
Exporting To MapInfo MIF/MID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
Exporting To MapInfo TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 . . . 1435
Exporting to Multiple Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
Exporting To Shape Multiclass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
Exporting To SQLite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
Exporting To VML (Vector Markup Language) . . . . . . . . . . 1449
Exporting Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
Mapping Drawing Attributes to Feature Class Properties . . . . 1452
Exporting Text Enclosed in a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
Contents | xi
Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology . . . . . . . . . . 1457
Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Exporting Maps to DWG Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
Exporting DWG Data to an Image Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data Store and Back Again . . . 1465
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer . . . . . . . . . . 1469
Exporting Survey Points to a LandXML File . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
Exporting and Printing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
Exporting from the Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
Printing from the Data View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477
Chapter 10 Working with Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
Overview of Working with Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
Setting Metadata Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Creating and Viewing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486
Working with Metadata Style Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488
Working with Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490
Overview of Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490
Using Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
Previewing Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493
Setting a Default Metadata Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
Deactivating Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
Exporting Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496
Removing Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
Editing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498
Overview of Editing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498
Updating Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
Copying and Pasting Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504
Adding and Deleting Records in the Metadata Editor . . . . . . 1504
Working with Compound Metadata Elements . . . . . . . . . . 1505
Using the Record Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506
Auditing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
Sharing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
Overview of Sharing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
Importing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
Exporting Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
Publishing and Printing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517
Chapter 11 Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
xii | Contents
Mapping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
Discontinued Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
Improving Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
Arithmetic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
String-Handling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
Equality and Conditional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
Symbol-Handling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
Conversion Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
Dot Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
Object Data Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Block Attribute Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
SQL Variables and Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Object Classification Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
EED Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
Using Color in Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator . . . . . . . . . . 1553
Chapter 13 Expression Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
Using the Expression Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
Chapter 14 Analyzing Data Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Create Buffer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Buffer Warning dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1560
Generate Contour dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Hillshade Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562
Overlay Analysis dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563
Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Annotation Delete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Annotation Refresh dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Annotation Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570
Annotation Update dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1571
Define Annotation Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572
Edit Expression dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Contents | xiii
Insert Annotation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
New Annotation Template Name dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576
Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
Publish to MapGuide dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
Publish to MapGuide Results dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578
Define New Object Data Field dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578
New Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1579
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580
Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582
Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
Cleanup Methods Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
Error Markers Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587
Select Actions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588
Drawing Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
Select Objects Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
Chapter 18 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
MAPDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . 1599
Coordinate Tracker Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600
Track Coordinates Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Create Reference System Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Chapter 19 Data Connect Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Create a Join / Edit a Join dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Create Data Store dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Edit Spatial Contexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Feature Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Feature Source Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Feature Source Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Feature Source Connection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
Manage Layer Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
Save Features dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608
Select Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
User Credentials dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
View/Create Query Statement dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
Chapter 20 Data Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
Data Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
xiv | Contents
Chapter 21 Digitizing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
Data to Attach dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
Digitize Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
Link Template Data Entry dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
Link Template Key Column Entry dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620
Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (Display Library command) . . . . . . . . . . 1621
MAPDISPLAYMANAGER (Display Manager command) . . . . . . . . 1621
Alter Block Insertion dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
Alter Line Format dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
Alter Linetype dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
Alter Lineweight dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
Alter Plotstyle dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
Copy Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
Define Hatch dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
Define Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
Edit Text Instance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
Import Old Theme dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
New Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
Range of Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
Select Display Element dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
Source Drawing Scope dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
Style Band dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
Style Label dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634
Style Line dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
Style Point dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
Style Polygon dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
Style Text Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
Thematic Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
Thematic Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
Theme dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
MAPCOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651
MAPFEATUREMERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651
MAPFEATURESPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
Contents | xv
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1660
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
MAPPOINTCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
MAPPOLYGONCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
MAPPOLYGONEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
Break Objects at Boundary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666
COGO Input dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668
Split and Merge Rules dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
Trim Objects At Boundary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672
Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675
Associate Database Versions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675
Column dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1676
Column Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
Configure Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
Connect Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1680
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE) . . . . . . . . . . . 1682
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) . . . . . . . . . . 1683
Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684
Disconnect Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684
Header/Footer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685
Link Template Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686
Page Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686
Select Database Version dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688
Select Existing Link Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689
Select Link Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
Select Link Templates dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
Select Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
Sort dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1692
Table Filter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1693
Table Filter History dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696
Table Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696
Zoom Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697
Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
Attribute Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
Block Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
Conflict Resolution dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
Coordinate System Translation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703
xvi | Contents
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . . . 1704
Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704
Export to LandXML dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
Import Data Options dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
Import ASCII Points dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
LandXML Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717
Layer Mapping dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718
Layer Mapping dialog box (Import) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719
Link Template to Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720
Map Data Elements to Block Name dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . 1720
Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . 1721
Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . 1722
Map Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
Map Export Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725
New Property Data Type dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726
Feature Class Property Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727
Property Value Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728
Select Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729
Map Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729
New Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
Object Data Table dialog box (Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
Object Data Table dialog box (Import) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731
Object Data/External Database Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1732
Point Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
Design File Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734
Design File Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736
Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739
Schema Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739
Bulk Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1744
Create Data Store Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747
Manage Versions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748
Resolve Feature Conflicts dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750
Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751
Metadata Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751
Metadata Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754
Attribute Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756
Metadata Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756
Import Metadata Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757
Export Metadata dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757
Create Metadata Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758
Compound Element Metadata Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758
Contents | xvii
Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects command) . . . . 1779
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified Objects
command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects command) . . . 1780
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781
Classified Property List dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
Classify dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
Classify Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783
Color Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783
Define Object Classification dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1785
Layer Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789
Linetype Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789
Lineweight Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790
New Object Class Definition File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790
New Property dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1791
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1792
Chapter 29 Object Data Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793
Attach Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1794
Edit Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795
Rename Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797
Select Link Template Key dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797
Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON (Convert Polylines to Polygons
command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817
MAPUSEMPOLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818
MAPMPEDIT (Edit Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1821
Create Polygons From Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1824
Chapter 32 Printing and Publishing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box . . . . . . . . . 1829
Map Book Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1830
Tile Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1831
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1831
Map Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1832
Plot Map Set dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833
xviii | Contents
Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835
Alternate Font dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835
Change Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835
Data Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1836
Define New Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1838
Define Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1838
Define Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1842
Define Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846
Hatch Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1847
Load Internal Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1848
Location Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1849
New Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852
Output Report Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852
Property Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1855
Query Library Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1858
Rename Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860
Rename Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860
Run Library Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1861
Save Current Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1862
Set Property Alterations dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1863
SQL Condition History dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866
SQL Link Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866
Type SQL Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1870
Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873
Image Correlation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873
Image Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875
Image Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875
Image Management Layout dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1877
Image Select dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1877
Insert Image dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878
Raster Extension Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1879
Transparency Color dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883
Chapter 35 Saving Objects Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1885
ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set command) . . . . . . 1885
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command) . . . . . . . . 1886
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command) . . . . . . . . 1887
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1887
Who Has It Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1889
Chapter 36 Survey Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1891
New Data Store dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1891
Contents | xix
Project Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892
Survey Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893
Point Group Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1894
Field Note Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1894
Create Surface dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1895
Source Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897
Point Cloud Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897
Surface Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1898
Filter Point Cloud dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900
Grid Parameters dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901
Point Cloud Style dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902
Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905
MAPABOUT (About AutoCAD Map 3D command) . . . . . . . . . . 1905
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1906
MAPEDITSETAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906
MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906
MAPWSFOCUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1907
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908
MAPWSREFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1917
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1918
Drawing Maintenance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1920
Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922
Drawing Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1923
Drawing Statistics dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1926
Drive Alias Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928
Feature Editing Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1929
Generate Object Data Index dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931
Index Maintenance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931
Remove Object Data Index dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1933
Select Alias dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1933
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1934
User Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1934
User Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1936
User Login dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937
Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1939
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command) . . . . . . . . . . 1940
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1941
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1942
xx | Contents
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943
MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction of Topology Link command) . . . . 1943
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . 1944
MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944
MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1945
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946
MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1947
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . 1948
MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . 1948
MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . 1949
MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . 1949
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOEDIT . . . . . . 1951
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1951
Centroid Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952
Create Closed Polylines dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1953
Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box . . . . . . 1955
Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1956
Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1957
Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1959
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog box . . . . . 1960
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . 1961
Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box . . . . . . . . 1962
Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1964
Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1965
Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box . . . . . . . 1967
Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1969
Create Topology Warning dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1971
Delete Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1971
Edit Direct Resistance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1972
Edit Direction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1972
Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1973
Edit Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1973
Link Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1975
Load Topology Conflict dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1976
Load Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1976
Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1978
Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box . . . . . . 1978
Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1980
Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1981
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box . . . . . . . . 1983
Node Objects dialog box - Network and Polygon Topologies) . . . . . 1985
Node Objects dialog box (Node topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1987
Contents | xxi
Rename Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1988
Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989
Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box . . . . 1990
Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1991
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1992
Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box . . 1994
Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1996
Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1997
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1998
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box . . . . . . . . 1999
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2002
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . 2003
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Topology dialog box . . . . . . . 2004
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box . . . . . . 2006
Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology dialog box . . . 2007
Topology Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2008
Topology Query Result dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2010
Topology Selection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2011
Topology Statistics dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2011
Chapter 39 Viewing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2013
Quick View Drawings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2013
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2014
Define Document View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2015
Define Key View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2017
Document View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2019
Key View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2019
Chapter 40 Workflow Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2021
MAPWORKFLOWOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2021
MAPWORKFLOWRUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2021
Workflow Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2022
Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2025
Add Feature Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2028
Add Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2029
Add Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2030
Change Feature Layer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2030
Change Feature Layer Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031
Change Group Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033
Connect To Data Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2034
Create Buffer Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2036
Display Feature Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2037
Highlight Features/Remove Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2038
xxii | Contents
List Current Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2039
List Feature Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2039
List Feature Layer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2040
Load Layer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2040
Perform Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2041
Remove Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2043
Remove Feature Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2044
Remove Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2044
Remove Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2045
Rename Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2045
Run AutoCAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2046
Run Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2047
Save Layer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2048
Select Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2049
Switch Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2050
Zoom To Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2050
Chapter 41 Programming Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2053
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2055
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2081
Contents | xxiii
xxiv
Getting Started Guide
This section provides the following:
■An introduction to the main concepts and features of AutoCAD Map 3D
■A description of resources for learning more about the program
■An overview of the available sample data and templates
For a tutorial that provides a tour of the application and leads you through the basic steps of
creating a map, see Introducing AutoCAD Map 3D 2011.
For a general overview of working with geospatial data, see Best Practices for Managing Geospatial
Data.
Overview of AutoCAD Map 3D Concepts
AutoCAD Map 3D is the leading engineering solution for creating and managing
spatial data. AutoCAD Map 3D bridges the gap between Computer Aided Design
(CAD) and Geographic Information Systems (GIS). AutoCAD Map 3D provides
direct access to the leading data formats used in design and GIS. Use AutoCAD®
tools to maintain a broad variety of geospatial information. Integrate GIS
functions in your design processes in a single environment for more efficient
workflows. The results are better designs, increased productivity, and better data
quality.
1
1
The AutoCAD Map 3D Window
The main elements of the AutoCAD Map 3D product window
The Ribbon. The commands for your mapping tasks.
Data Table and Data View. Display attribute data in a table format. Use
the Data Table (page 2059) for viewing spatial data and attribute data for
geospatial features; use the Data View for viewing attribute data linked to
drawing objects.
The Task Pane. Use the Task Pane (page 2076) tabs for the following:
■Managing maps and map data
■Displaying and styling data layers
■Bringing in and managing survey data
■Publishing multi-page map books
Status Bars. Check the current cursor location, change exaggeration and
scale settings, switch between 2D and 3D, and use common tools.
Dynamic input. Launch commands and respond to prompts at the cursor
location. For experienced AutoCAD users, the command interface allows for
efficient editing using keyboard entry.
2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Tell me more
Procedures
■To switch between Tool-based, Task-based, and Map
Classic workspaces (page 86)
■To access the Data Table (page 1127)
■To use the Data View (page 1047)
■To set Task Pane options (page 221)
■To add an item to the status bar
■To use dynamic input
Tutorial
■Lesson 2: Take a Quick Tour of AutoCAD Map 3D
Workflow
■Set Up Your Work Environment
Related topics
■Customizing Your Work Environment (page 84)
■Workspaces
■Setting Options (page 216)
Map Files and Data Sources
What is a map?
An AutoCAD Map 3D map file is a window onto your information. It has links
to all the data and images you include in your map:
■Standard AutoCAD objects
■Spatial data from a database or file
■Raster images
■Attribute data
You can use multiple sources in a single map file. For example, attach a DWG
file to your map file, query in some of its layers, and add them as Display
Manager layers. Then, connect to a SHP file that becomes another layer in
Map Files and Data Sources | 3
your display map, or add features from a geospatial database. The map file
remembers all the connections and which objects you added to the map file.
This map contains a photo raster image, building data stored in a SHP file, and parcel
data stored in a DWG file.
What is the Display Manager?
You coordinate the data in your map using the Display Manager.
Each set of data is a Display Manager layer. For example, a raster layer can
display an aerial photograph of a city. An SDF layer can display an SDF file
representing parcels within the city. A drawing layer can display objects from
the current drawing or from an attached drawing file.
Display Manager layers are not the same as AutoCAD layers.
In the Display Manager, you can style each layer separately, change the order
of the layers, and view and plot the result. You can specify line styles, color,
and weights; fill colors and styles; labels; and more.
What is in a map file?
Each AutoCAD Map 3D map file contains the information for connecting to
the data sources, drawings, raster images, and attribute data for its contents.
4 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
It also stores queries, object data, styling information, printing layouts, and
any customized settings.
Each data set is a layer in the map.
Whenever you open a map file, all this information is immediately available
to you.
What is a data source?
A data source is any source of information that can be used in a map. It can
be any of the following:
■A spatial database created with Oracle, SQL Server, or another relational
database management system
■A file-based spatial data store, such as Autodesk SDF or ESRI SHP
■An AutoCAD drawing file
■A spreadsheet or other ODBC source that contains attribute data
■A raster image, such as a TIFF or DEM file
The relationship between the sources and the map file is dynamic. If the data
in the source file changes, those changes are updated in your map file. When
you change the objects in your map file, you can save those changes back to
their original sources.
Map Files and Data Sources | 5
What can you do with a finished map?
You can share maps even with viewers who do not have access to AutoCAD
Map 3D. For example, you can share maps in the following ways:
■Print maps
■Save maps as DWFs (which can be viewed with Autodesk Design Review,
available from the Autodesk web site)
■Publish maps to MapGuide
■Convert all the data to AutoCAD DWG data
■Post maps on the web
Publish to a MapGuide server to share a map on the web.
AutoCAD cannot read some information in an AutoCAD Map 3D file, such
as links to external spatial data. To share a map with an AutoCAD user, convert
all the data in your map to DWG format, including data from spatial data
stores.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to publish a map to a MapGuide server.
Procedures
■To access data through FDO (page 308)
■To bring drawing objects into your map (page 354)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
6 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
■To create a map with styled drawing layers (page 654)
■To publish your map (page 1361)
Tutorial
■Lesson 3: Get Started
Workflow
■Create a Map Start to Finish
GIS Skills
■Bring in data from multiple image files to a single layer.
■Publish a completed map to a MapGuide server.
Related topics
■Overview of the Display Manager (page 634)
■Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357)
■Converting and Exporting (page 1403)
Map Files and Display Maps
A map file is a drawing that connects to all the sources for your map: geospatial
features, drawing objects, raster images, and attribute data.
Each map file can contain multiple display maps (for printing or for online
distribution), in which you can selectively hide or show items in your map.
Maps exist only as conceptual structures, and are not separate entities or files.
You can apply styles to the items in a display map, based on data, layers, and
other criteria. Changes that you make to the appearance of items in a map do
not affect the actual data in your map file.
Map Files and Display Maps | 7
This map has Display Manager layers for railroads, roads, parks, the river, and
parcels. Each is styled differently. For an introduction to the parts of the AutoCAD
Map 3D window, see Lesson 2: Take a Quick Tour of AutoCAD Map 3D.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to theme a parcels layer.
Procedures
■To create multiple display maps (page 639)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To create a map with styled drawing layers (page 654)
Tutorial
■Lesson 3: Get Started
Workflow
■Use Themes to Reveal Patterns in Data
GIS Skills
■Choose the right type of theme to suit your data.
8 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Related topics
■Overview of the Display Manager (page 634)
■Creating Multiple Display Maps (page 638)
Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects
Use AutoCAD Map 3D to work with both CAD objects and geospatial features.
You can combine them in your map, edit either type of data, and move data
from one format to the other.
Combine data from drawing files and geospatial data stores.
Geospatial Features
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road or a
utility pole. Features are stored in a spatial database or in file formats such as
Oracle, ArcSDE, SDF, or SHP. The spatial database or file is referred to as a
feature source.
Using Open Source FDO Data Access Technology, AutoCAD Map 3D natively
accesses spatial data. To work with features, connect to the database or file
and then select the sets of features (feature classes) to include in your map.
Drawing Objects
A drawing object is any object in a DWG file, such as a line, circle, or closed
polyline.
Create and store drawing objects in the current map, or attach a DWG file to
the current map and query in its objects. AutoCAD Map 3D remembers the
Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects | 9
original location of the objects and saves edited objects back to their original
file.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to bring in objects from a set of attached DWG
files.
■Show me how to bring in features from a feature class.
■Show me how to bring in data from AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Procedures
■To access data through FDO (page 308)
■To bring drawing objects into your map (page 354)
Tutorial
■Tutorial: Building a Map
Workflow
■Create a Map Start to Finish
GIS Skills
■Bring in data from multiple image files to a single layer.
■Bring in a subset of features using a query.
Related topics
■Overview of Bringing In Data (page 291)
■Overview of Creating and Editing Data (page 681)
Overview of AutoCAD Map 3D Features
AutoCAD Map 3D is built on the latest release of AutoCAD® software and is
enhanced with a suite of geospatial tools. It has all the features and
functionality of AutoCAD, which is automatically installed with AutoCAD
Map 3D.
10 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Create and Assign Geographic Coordinate Systems
Work with more than 4,000 real-world coordinate systems or define your own
custom coordinate system. Use tools such as transform, rubber sheeting, and
track coordinates to georeference your AutoCAD design data accurately.
Coordinate systems determine how your map is projected in two dimensions.
Assign a coordinate system to the drawing to locate it in
real space.
Create and Assign Geographic Coordinate Systems | 11
You can enter or select the appropriate coordinate system
for the map.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to set a map to the coordinate system of
the data.
Procedures
■To assign coordinate systems (page ?)
Tutorial
■Exercise 1: Create a map
Workflow
■Work with Coordinate Systems
GIS Skills
■Reproject incoming data to a new coordinate system.
Related topics
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Combine Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects
AutoCAD Map 3D software integrates computer-aided design (CAD) and
geographic information system (GIS) data. After working with the data, you
12 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
can maintain it in a DWG™ file, convert it to an external file, or move it into
a spatial database.
DWG Data
Maps are saved in DWG format. Open an AutoCAD drawing directly, or attach
drawings and query in just the objects you want.
■Combine feature data from a spatial
database with objects from CAD
drawings, raw geometry from a
spreadsheet, and raster images.
■Features and objects are automatically
transformed to the coordinate system
used in the map.
Spatial Data
Connect to the data to include.
■Directly access and edit spatial data in
files and databases.
■Without data translations, data integ-
rity is ensured.
■Connect to publicly available web ser-
vices such as Web Map Services (WMS)
and Web Feature Services (WFS).
Combine Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects | 13
Raster Images
Add aerial photos, contour maps, and DEM surfaces.
■Georeferenced images are displayed
in the correct location.
■Surface rasters are draped over your
elevations.
Connect to the data from the Task pane.
■Select the data source.
■Select the feature classes to add to
your map.
■Each feature class you add becomes a
layer in the Display Manager.
14 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
The layers in Display Manager (page 2060) represent the data
sources to which this map is connected. The Data Table (page
2059) lets you edit the information for individual items in a layer.
Import Data
You can import data, rather than connecting to it. Importing breaks the
connection to the source and adds a “snapshot” of the data to your map. If
the data changes after that, you will not see any changes in your map unless
you import the data again. There is no way to update imported data in its
source. Similarly, when you export data, you export the current data only.
The connection to the live data is lost.
Combine Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects | 15
When you import data, you can structure it in your map. Assign data to layers
or object classes. Add attribute data to object data tables. Assign a coordinate
system. Specify that points come in as points, text, or blocks.
You can read, write, and convert data between standard formats. For a list of
supported formats, see the following topics:
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
■Supported Import Formats (page 387)
■Supported Export Formats (page 1412)
Integrate Database Information
Join CAD objects to commonly used databases using link templates. Join
geospatial data to ODBC data stores and databases using joins.
16 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
When you join a database to a feature layer, the properties
from both data stores are available to that layer for theming
and other purposes.
Add Survey Data
Bring in points you exported from Autodesk Civil 3D (LandXML) or ASCII
data from a GPS device.
Use the Survey tab to import and
organize survey data
Combine Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects | 17
Add Point Cloud Data
Bring in point cloud (page 2071) data from LiDAR (page 2066) Aerial Survey (.LAS)
files or ASCII (.XYZ) files.
Use the Point Cloud Manager to bring in point cloud data
Tell me more
Procedures
■To access data through FDO (page 308)
■To bring drawing objects into your map (page 354)
■To add a raster image to the map (page 440)
■To import data from other formats (page 381)
■To bring LandXML data into a Survey Data Store (page
371)
■To bring ASCII point data into a Survey Data Store (page
373)
■To bring LiDAR data into your map (page 374)
Tutorial
■Tutorial: Building a Map
Workflow
■Create a Feature Map
■Create a CAD Map
18 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
GIS Skills
■Bring in data from multiple image files to a single layer.
■Access data published on a public web server.
■Bring in point data from a Microsoft Access database.
■Bring in a subset of features using a query.
Related topics
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
■Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 350)
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects
(page 377)
■Joining Data to GIS Features (page 507)
■Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects (page 521)
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Bringing in Survey Data (page 370)
■Bringing in LiDAR Data (page 374)
Create and Edit Features and Drawing Objects
When you connect to a feature source, your map is a window onto the data.
Your edits are made directly to the source. The data remains in its source
location. Any changes you make appear in the source. Any changes in the
source are immediately reflected in your map.
When you edit objects from attached drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D tracks the
original location of each object and saves them back to their original source.
Use AutoCAD Tools to Edit All Data
Use the full set of AutoCAD editing tools and commands to add or change
map objects. It does not matter what the object source is. Editing does not
convert the data. AutoCAD Map 3D includes all the AutoCAD editing tools
as well as tools designed for creating maps, such as using coordinate geometry
to specify a point. View and style with the ease of GIS, edit with the power of
CAD.
Create and Edit Features and Drawing Objects | 19
Use the powerful, high-precision AutoCAD tools to
edit a feature, then save your changes back to the
data source.
Lock Data for Secure Editing
For geospatial features, you can choose how to save your changes. Set an
option to save changes to the original source automatically, or work offline
and update the feature source when you finish editing. Check out a feature
to lock it for other users (if the feature source supports this option). Check it
back in to make it available again.
For drawing objects, you can lock the source drawings so no one else can use
them. You can use save set options to control whether your changes are saved
back to the original drawings or affect the current map only.
20 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Drawing objects selected for editing in a save set (the red circle in the
illustration) are locked so others cannot edit them.
Locking CapabilitySpatial Data Type
Individual features are locked when you
check them out.
Oracle and ArcSDE
Individual objects are locked when you
query them into the map.
Attached drawings (DWG)
Clean Up Drawings
Using Drawing Cleanup tools, you can automate the correction of common
drafting and digitizing errors. Delete duplicates, correct undershoots and
dangling objects, and more.
Create and Edit Features and Drawing Objects | 21
Review, mark, and correct errors interactively.
Use Coordinate Geometry Commands
Create and measure simple coordinate geometry (COGO) for lines, curves,
closed polylines, and polygons. When drawing plats and existing conditions,
input geometry in terms of bearing, direction, deflection, and azimuth angle.
22 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Use the Deflection And Distance COGO command to
specify a point by supplying a deflection angle and a
distance from another point.
Use the COGO Input dialog box to enter coordinates manually or select them
in the drawing or in the Data Table. The Inverse Report option gives you
information about the relationship between existing points.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how multi-user editing of drawing files works.
■Show me how to edit features stored in a database or data
store.
■Show me how to create new features from existing AutoCAD
objects.
Procedures
■To work with features (page 683)
■To work with drawing objects (page 727)
■To clean up drawing data (page 765)
■To enter coordinate geometry (page 1026)
Tutorial
■Tutorial: Building a Map
Workflow
■Create and Edit Data
GIS Skills
■Edit DWG files in a multi-user environment.
■Edit feature geometry directly in a SHP file using CAD tools.
Create and Edit Features and Drawing Objects | 23
■Create new features from existing AutoCAD objects.
Related topics
■Working with Features (page 683)
■Working with Drawing Objects (page 727)
■Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings (page 730)
■Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 765)
■Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands (page 1027)
Search and Filter Data
Using DWG query functionality, multiple users can access, search, and edit
the same sets of DWG files or base maps simultaneously.
Use a property filter and a location filter to view the condition of roads in a circular
area.
24 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Use queries to filter data as you add it to
your map. You can also filter data after you
add it to your map. For example, use a
query to select a subset of data.
Use geospatial and DWG queries to find a feature or object based on its
location, its properties, or attribute data linked to it from another source.
Search and Filter Data | 25
Apply a query to any feature layer in the
Display Manager.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to run a query on a set of attached DWG
files.
■Show me how to run a query on a feature class.
Procedures
■To filter feature data when you add it to a map (page
310)
■To find and filter features (page 1209)
■To filter drawing data when you add it to your map
(page 354)
■To find and select drawing objects (page 1219)
Tutorial
■Lesson 5: Find and Edit Features
Workflow
■Find and Edit Objects in Attached Drawings
■Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature Source
26 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
GIS Skills
■Bring in a subset of features using a query.
Related topics
■Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map
(page 309)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG
Files (page 351)
■Finding and Selecting Features (page 1206)
■Finding and Querying Drawing Objects (page 1218)
View and Edit Attribute Data
Attribute data is non-geometry data about a drawing object or feature. For
example, a drawing of parcels can have attribute data that lists the owner and
improvements for each parcel.
For drawing objects, you can do the following:
■Import attribute data.
■Attach drawing objects with links to external data.
■Link database entries to the data already associated with drawing objects.
■Create and manage attribute data within AutoCAD Map 3D using Data
View.
■Use attribute data as the basis of queries.
■Display attribute data on your map as text.
■View attribute data linked to drawing objects using the Data View.
For geospatial feature data, you can do the following:
■Join an attribute data store to an existing feature class.
■Create and manage attribute data within AutoCAD Map 3D.
■Use attribute data as the basis of queries.
View and Edit Attribute Data | 27
■Display attribute data on your map as text.
■View and edit attribute data for features using the Data Table.
Data Table
Use the Data Table to highlight data for specific features in your map. AutoCAD
Map 3D maintains the link between spatial data and attribute data; when you
update the attribute data, the updates are dynamically reflected in your
drawing.
The Data Table displays geometry and attribute data for a feature. You can search and
theme features based on any data in the feature source.
Data View
To link attribute data to drawing objects, attach the database to the current
map. Then use a link template to connect the data to the objects.
28 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Link attribute data to drawing objects, then highlight
objects in your map by selecting the linked data in
the table.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to view the contents of an SDF file.
Procedures
■To display the Data Table
■To use the Data View
Tutorial
■Data Table and Data View
Workflow
■Attach Attribute Data to Drawing Objects
■Add Attribute Data Based on Constraints
■Join Attribute Data to a Geospatial Feature
GIS Skills
■Convert styled DWG objects to features.
Related topics
■Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Fea-
ture Class, or Non-Spatial Data Table (page 1134)
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 204)
View and Edit Attribute Data | 29
■Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects (page 521)
Use Metadata
View, create, and edit metadata (the who, what, when, where, why, and how)
about your spatial information.
View and edit metadata.
Publish metadata in standard formats including International Organization
for Standardization (ISO) (19115 and 19139) and Federal Geographic Data
Committee (FGDC). Share your data with other people in your organization
or externally with contractors and regulatory agencies.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to view and interpret metadata.
■Show me how to create and edit metadata.
Procedure
■To work with metadata (page 1487)
30 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Tutorial
■Lesson 6: Generate Metadata for a Classified Drawing
Workflow
■Create a Feature Map
■Create a CAD Map
GIS Skill
■View and interpret metadata.
■Create metadata for your map.
Related topics
■Creating and Viewing Metadata (page 1486)
■Overview of Sharing Metadata (page 1510)
Organize Data
Organize objects in your drawing by the real-world features that they represent
(for example, roads, parcels, cables, or water pipes).
Object Classification for Drawing Objects
When you create an object using object classification, the object automatically
takes its properties and values from its object class. Classification maintains
consistency and establishes standards in your drawing.
Organize Data | 31
The Object Class tab of the Properties
palette displays the properties
associated with the class of the
selected object.
If you are an AutoCAD Map 3D subscriber, you can download free
industry-specific toolkits. These toolkits fast-track the classification process.
To enroll in or visit the Subscription Center, click in the InfoCenter area
at the top right of the application window.
Feature Classes for Geospatial Data
FDO features use schemas to define their feature classes and feature properties.
A schema is a set of feature classes. Each feature class has properties that
describe its members.
You can do the following with feature classes:
■Define schemas (databases and files)
■Create a data store and add a schema to it
■Load data models with XML Metadata Interchange (XMI) from industry
standard modeling programs
■Edit a schema (for spatial data formats that support editing)
32 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Use the Schema Editor to create or edit properties in a feature
class.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to append a feature class to an SDF file.
Procedure
■To set up object classification (page 118)
■To use object classification (page 981)
■To work with feature schemas (page 595)
■To enroll as a subscriber or visit the Subscription
Center (page 56)
Tutorial
■Tutorial: Classifying Drawing Objects
Workflow
■Set Up Your DWG Data
■Move CAD Data to GIS
Organize Data | 33
GIS Skills
■Edit a schema (SDF)
Related topics
■Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page
117)
■Overview of Object Classification (page 981)
■Overview of Working with Schemas (page 594)
Style Data
Use styles to change the appearance of objects and features in your map.
■Assign visual properties to object groups, or to objects that match certain
criteria.
■Create complex styles, such as roads with a thick black line with a double
yellow stripe down the middle. Use specific colors and line types for
different features.
■Call out details with attribute-driven labels that provide text along a curve
and segment-stitching functionality.
■Blend data using transparency.
■Save and reuse styles in any project, saving time and streamlining map
production.
■Save display layer definitions (which include styling information and
pointers to the data source) for reuse.
■Export styles to share with others.
■Use special formatting options for raster images to show hillshade, contours,
and more.
34 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Style Drawing Objects and Features
Style layers in Display Manager (page 2060) to change the
appearance of your map.
Style Surfaces
Visualize and analyze large-scale topographic information—digital elevation
models (DEM) and ESRI GRID files.
■Show elevation, slope, and aspect.
■Create contours.
■Perform sunlight studies with hill shading.
■Drape aerial photographs and vector data on topography data.
■Publish the results to 3D DWF files for viewing in free Autodesk® Design
Review software. No experience with AutoCAD Map 3D is required.
Style Data | 35
Style raster surfaces to show
elevation.
Styling Point Cloud Data
Style point cloud (page 2071) data by classification, elevation, LiDAR intensity,
and RGB values.
Style point clouds by classification
36 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Tell me more
Video
Procedure
■To apply styles to points (page 646)
■To apply styles to areas (page 650)
■To apply styles to lines (page 649)
■To style point data by classificationIn the Display Manager,
right-click the point cloud layer or gr... (page 677)
Tutorial
■Lesson 2: Style Map Features
Workflow
■Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skills
■Hide and show features as you zoom in and out.
■Replace points in the map with symbols.
■Set transparency for parcels or other features.
Related topics
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Styling Drawing Layers (page 652)
■Creating Themes (page 1162)
■Overview of Styling Raster Images (page 672)
■Styling Point Clouds (page 675)
Theme and Analyze Data
Answer questions about your data and make decisions.
■Sort, filter, and edit information about map items in a tabular format.
■Temporarily join data from external data stores to features in your map
and use that data to theme the features.
Theme and Analyze Data | 37
■Locate specific coordinate points and measure the geodetic distance
between points.
■Visually communicate relative values and scale with themed displays.
■Create contour maps to help you analyze 3D terrain.
■Use raster-based theming to analyze elevation, slope, and aspect, drape
map data over surfaces and view the data in 3D, and more.
■Create buffer zones based on feature properties and select objects based
on their proximity to a buffer. Save the buffer as its own feature class, for
future reuse.
■Overlay two geospatial layers to compare their data. Save the resulting data
as a separate layer, which you can join to attribute data or theme.
38 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Theme Data
Use color themes to show the elevation of terrain or illustrate the population
density of counties.
The colors give the viewer an immediate
sense of the population distribution in
California
Create themes by varying the style based
on an attribute of the feature; for example,
change the color of parcels based on their
size.
Theme and Analyze Data | 39
Analyze Surfaces
Create contour maps and analyze geospa-
tial data by exaggerating elevations or
looking at maps in different light condi-
tions.
Create Buffers
Use buffers to analyze features by proximity.
40 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
The buffer in this map defines an area within 1000 feet of the river.
You can use the buffer to see which parcels lie within the flood zone.
Overlay Two Feature Layers
Use overlays to compare two feature classes or layers.
Theme and Analyze Data | 41
This map overlays two layers (a flood zone and an enterprise zone). You can use the
overlay to see where the two intersect. That area becomes a new layer, which you can
style and save out to a file and use as a separate data store.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to color surfaces based on elevation.
■Show me how to theme a parcels layer.
■Show me how to create a buffer zone around a parcel.
■Show me how to join attribute data to features.
Procedures
■To get information about features and objects (page 1125)
■To find, filter, and query data (page 1206)
■To measure and track coordinates (page 1147)
■To create themes (page 1163)
■To analyze raster-based surfaces (page 1186)
■To create a buffer (page 1308)
■To perform an Overlay operation (page 1316)
Tutorial
■Tutorial: Analyzing Data
Workflow
■Analyze Data
■Analyze Data with Overlays
42 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
GIS Skills
■Join attribute data to features.
■Color a surface by elevation and adjust hill shading.
■Change the elevation ranges for a surface.
■Analyze the slope and aspect of a site.
■Select features by location using a buffer.
Related topics
■Getting Information about Features (page 1125)
■Getting Information About Drawing Objects (page 1143)
■Joining Data to GIS Features (page 507)
■Measuring and Tracking Coordinates (page 1147)
■Adding and Modifying Contour Lines (page 1189)
■Creating Themes (page 1162)
■Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 1186)
■Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1306)
■Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309)
Manage Data
AutoCAD Map 3D acts as a hub for managing large amounts of spatial data.
■Use Schema Editor to create new schemas.
■Add and delete features and properties in existing schemas.
■Use Data Connect to create a data store from within AutoCAD Map 3D.
■Export DWG data to Oracle format, ESRI ArcSDE format (page 1461), or
Autodesk SDF (page 44).
■Export your entire map to DWG format.
■Use Bulk Copy to copy data from one data store to another.
Manage Data | 43
Use Bulk Copy to convert data from
one geospatial format to another.
The Spatial Data File (SDF)
The spatial data file (SDF) format lets you store geometry and attribute
information in a file-based geospatial format.
SDF can hold more information and has faster performance than DWG. SDF
supports rich geometry, multiple tables, and spatial indexing.
44 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
The circle represents an SDF file with a single
schema that defines three feature classes: valves,
pipes, and hydrants.
■Use Data Connect to connect directly to an SDF file. Any edits you make
are made to the SDF file.
■If you import data from SDF, the imported data becomes drawing objects
in your map and the live connection to the SDF file is broken. Importing
is one way to convert the data from SDF to DWG.
■You can copy data to SDF format from other geospatial formats, and from
SDF to those formats, using Bulk Copy.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to create an SDF file and import a
schema.
■Show me how to copy data from one data store to an-
other.
■Show me how to append a feature class to an SDF file.
■Show me how to limit what can be entered in a field.
Procedure
■To create a data store for a file-based data provider
(page 589)
Manage Data | 45
■To create a schema (page 598)
■Other ways to move data into SDF format (page 1417)
■To copy data from one feature source to another
(page 621)
■To import data from other formats (page 381)
Tutorial
■Tutorial: Managing Data From Different Sources
Workflow
■Manage Data
GIS Skill
■Create a GIS data store (SDF) to be populated from
various sources
■Bulk copy data from a SHP file to an SDF file
■Edit a schema (SDF)
■Limit what can be entered in a field
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and
Schemas (page 551)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) (page
387)
■Working with Schemas (page 593)
■Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store (page
1461)
■Bringing In Features from SDF (page 337)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
■Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing
Objects (page 378)
■Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
Share and Publish Data
Distribute your geospatial data, maps, and designs in various ways.
46 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Share Data
AutoCAD Map 3D makes it easy to share data, both within and outside your
organization.
When you edit data in the original source,
your changes are immediately visible to
others in your organization.
Send Maps to the Field
The original map in AutoCAD Map 3D is at the top. On the lower left, the map appears
in Autodesk MapGuide Studio. On the right, the map is displayed in a web browser.
■Plot/print single-page or multi-page maps to paper or to a file.
Share and Publish Data | 47
■Use map books to divide a large map into tiles, which are rendered on
separate pages. You can include a legend, title, and other information on
each page.
You can produce maps with insets using map books.
■Publish maps to the internet using Autodesk MapGuide® Enterprise
software.
All layers, layer definitions, dynamic labels, queries, filters, and styles
(including point, line, raster, and other styles) in your map are published.
If you set up styles for different zoom levels, the appearance of the map
changes as the end-user zooms in our out in a web browser. Zooming
changes the appearance based on the styling rules you established in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
■Publish your map as a single HTML page. The result is a “snapshot” of the
map that anyone can view in a web browser.
■Save maps in Autodesk DWF format to use with Autodesk Design Review
(a free, downloadable viewer). Distribute or post the results on the web or
on an intranet. You can create map books in DWF format.
If you assigned a coordinate system to all the maps in your DWF file, the
publishing operation automatically converts the coordinate information
to latitude/longitude coordinates. Autodesk Design Review 2008 can
automatically navigate to a specific location when you enter coordinates.
It displays coordinates of any location in the map when you move your
mouse over that location.
■Export to another format, such as DGN or SHP.
■Create comma-separated reports as text files, listing information about
objects in attached drawing files. You can import the report files into a
spreadsheet, database, or document.
■Use eTransmit to package all the files your map uses and send them to
another AutoCAD Map 3D user.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to publish a map to a MapGuide server.
■Show me how to create a map book.
■Show me how to publish a map book with attributes to a
DWF file.
48 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Procedures
■To publish your map (page 1361)
■To export drawing objects to other file formats (page
1408)
■To print and export attribute data (page 1472)
Tutorials
■Lesson 7: Publish Your Map
Workflow
■Print and Publish Data
GIS Skills
■Publish a completed map to a MapGuide server.
■Create a map book with appropriate-scale tiling for a city.
■Produce a multi-sheet DWF file for a map book.
Related topics
■Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357)
■Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
■Overview of Exporting Attribute Data (page 1472)
■Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) (page 1477)
Customize Your Working Environment
Customize AutoCAD Map 3D
The layout of the ribbon, toolbars, and dockable windows is saved in a
workspace.
You can customize an existing workspace or create a new one. You can save
different workspaces for different tasks, use them to help you streamline
common tasks, or set up best practices for mapping tasks and workflow.
For example, you can set up a map creation workspace to streamline acquiring,
integrating, and building maps. Set up another workspace for creating and
publishing map books and atlases.
Customize Your Working Environment | 49
Within a session, you can switch between
workspaces.
Customize Your Maps
Customize map settings and optionally save the resulting map as a template.
For each map, you can do the following:
■Set the coordinate system
■Attach drawing files
■Save and organize drawing queries in a library
■Define annotation templates
■Set up object data
■Attach external data and link it to drawing objects
Create and Use Automated Workflows
Automate a task that involves multiple activities with workflows. For each
activity, you can specify input parameters and settings.
You can use the properties of one activity as the input parameter for a later
activity in the workflow. For example, set up an overlay workflow that specifies
the feature classes to compare and the type of overlay to perform.
You can also specify that some settings can be changed at run time. For
example, use the same overlay workflow for any pair of feature classes, selecting
the feature classes when you run the workflow.
See also:
■Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D (page 81)
■Customizing Your Work Environment (page 84)
■Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page 139)
50 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
■Overview of Setting Options (page 217)
■Overview of Workflows (page 275)
Extend Functionality Using Open Source and API
Extensibility Using Open Source
With the power of FDO Data Access Technology, you can take advantage of
the open source world. FDO extends data access. Third party and open source
FDO providers support data stores not currently supported by Autodesk. (For
example, there are FDO providers for ESRI Personal Geodatabase and PostGIS).
To make it easier for developers to extend capabilities of FDO, Autodesk
released FDO as an open source project. Check the http://fdo.osgeo.org site. The
open source project is under the Open Source Geospatial Foundation (OSGeo)
http://www.osgeo.org. This initiative enables developers all over the world to
tap into powerful geospatial data access technology.
Robust API
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with robust .NET application programming interfaces
(APIs) that organizations can use to create custom tools and automate common
procedures. AutoCAD Map 3D and Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise software
share a unified geospatial API, as well as unified FDO data access technology.
Use these tools to build custom applications that share business logic and
common code.
Finding Information
Watching Videos
The GIS Skills file contains nearly one hundred videos that show how to use
the features of AutoCAD Map 3D. The tutorial “Building a Map” also contains
videos for each exercise.
This page lists the GIS Skills videos by category.
Extend Functionality Using Open Source and API | 51
Data Preparation
Data Conversion
Data Access
Show me how to bring multiple image files onto a single layer
Show me how to run a query on a feature class
Data Editing
Show me how to draft a new feature for an existing feature class
Show me how to edit features stored in a database or data store
Show me how to edit features using automatic check-out
Show me how to add a point using distance/distance
Show me how to add a point using bearing/bearing
Show me how to split a parcel feature
Show me how to create new features from existing AutoCAD objects
Show me how to check out features for editing in the field
Show me how to check in features after editing in the field
Show me how to make the Data Table transparent
Show me how automatic zoom works
Show me how automatic scroll works
Show me how to export records for selected features
Data Management
Show me how to create a new SDF file and import a schema
Show me how to copy data from one data store to another
Show me how to append a feature class to an SDF file
Show me how to delete properties in the Schema Editor
Show me how to limit what can be entered in a field
Show me how to join attribute data to features
Show me how to manage joins
52 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Show me how to create a calculated field
Styling and Theming Features
Show me how to make a layer visible only at a certain scale range
Show me how to create a second scale range for a road layer
Show me how to replace points with symbols
Show me how to label features
Show me how to label features with automatic resizing
Show me how to set the number of decimal places for labels
Show me how to create a text layer and add text
Show me how to edit text
Show me how to rotate text
Show me how to make the features on a layer semi-transparent
Show me how to theme a parcels layer
Show me how to manually adjust the ranges of a theme
Show me how to exclude zero values and change colors for the ranges
Show me how to theme based on individual values
Analysis
Show me how to color surfaces based on elevation
Show me how to adjust the settings for hillshading
Show me how to delete elevation ranges and change the color of a range
Show me how to add a new elevation range
Show me how to view and navigate in 3D
Show me how to exaggerate the vertical dimension of a surface
Show me how to drape layers on a surface
Show me how to perform a slope analysis of a surface
Show me how to create a contour layer from a surface
Show me how to create a network topology
Show me how to load a topology
Watching Videos | 53
Show me how to find the shortest path between two points
Show me how to do an overlay analysis using two topologies
Show me how to create an overlay analysis for features
Show me how to create a buffer zone around a parcel
Show me how to use a buffer zone to select parcels
Show me how to create overlapping buffer zones
Show me how to use a location query with multiple buffers
Sharing Data with Others
Show me how to export a layer to SDF
Show me how to import a layer from SDF
Show me how to save a layer to a .layer file
Show me how to drag .layer files into an existing map
Map Layout and Cartography
Show me how to manage layers with draw order and folders
Show me how to include an AutoCAD layer in the Display Manager
Show me how to place a legend in the map and specify its contents
Show me how to edit the table style for the legend
Printing, Plotting, and Publishing
Show me how to create a map book.
Show me how to publish a map book with attributes to a DWF file
Show me how to plot to a PDF file
54 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Using InfoCenter
InfoCenter connects you to Help files and online
resources.
To look up information
1Type a word or phrase in the InfoCenter field.
2To add a location (file or document) to search, click the arrow next to
Search (the magnifying glass) and select Add Search Location.
For example, search the Help, the New Features Workshop, and specified
files at one time.
You can also search a single file or location.
3Click Search.
The results are displayed as links on the InfoCenterSearch Results panel.
Click any link to display the topic, article, or document. To find a
command, click the Find A Command On The Ribbon entry.
You can change some settings for InfoCenter. See Setting InfoCenter
Options (page 242).
To hide InfoCenter
■Click the arrow to the left of the InfoCenter field. Click it again to redisplay
InfoCenter.
Subscription Center
With Autodesk Subscription, you get the latest releases of Autodesk software,
incremental product enhancements, personalized web support from Autodesk
technical experts, and self-paced e-Learning.
Subscription services are available to subscription members only (available in
countries/regions where Autodesk subscriptions are offered).
Using InfoCenter | 55
Subscription resources provide interactive product features over the Internet.
Each time you access subscription resources from Subscription Center in an
Autodesk product, product information (such as the serial number, version,
language, and the subscription contract ID) is sent to Autodesk for verification
that your product is on subscription.
Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent to subscription
resources to monitor how they are being used and how they can be improved.
Autodesk maintains the information provided by or collected from you in
accordance with Autodesk's published privacy policy, which is available at
http://www.autodesk.com/privacy.
To enroll as a subscriber or visit the Subscription Center
■Click .
Communication Center
The online Autodesk Communication Center gives you access to the AutoCAD
Map 3D knowledge base and other user groups discussing AutoCAD Map 3D.
To check the Autodesk Communication Center
■Click .
Favorites
You can define favorite entries in the InfoCenter results list panel, the
Subscription Center panel, or the Communication Center.
To add a topic to the Favorites list
1Use InfoCenter, Subscription Center, or Communication Center to display
a list of results.
2Click the Add To Favorites icon next to the entry to add.
Entries that display a yellow star have been added to the Favorites list.
To view a topic in the Favorites list
■Click and select the topic.
56 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
See also:
■Setting InfoCenter Options (page 242)
■Using the Help (page 57)
■Getting Help with AutoCAD (page 58)
■Using Other Sources of Information (page 59)
Using the Help
AutoCAD Map 3D Help contains the AutoCAD Help, AutoCAD Map 3D User’s
Guide, Reference Guide, Getting Started Guide, and additional information.
To display Help
■Click .
Click the question mark to display the User’s Guide. Click the down arrow
to select a document to view.
Watching the Welcome Screen Videos
The Welcome screen displays when you start AutoCAD Map 3D. It contains
links that launch videos explaining how to get started with AutoCAD Map
3D. It also has links to further information.
If you turn off the display of the Welcome screen, type welcomescreen at the
command prompt to see it again.
Navigating the User's Guide
The User’s Guide contains chapters for each major task area of AutoCAD Map
3D.
The User’s Guide displays related information on three tabs:
■Concept — Conceptual information about performing the task and hints
to help you use the feature.
■Procedure — Step-by-step instructions to perform the task.
Using the Help | 57
■Quick Reference — The commands you need for this task, and where to
find them on the menus and toolbars.
Use the tabs in the left pane to find information:
The Contents groups topics by subject. Browse by selecting and
expanding topics. If you use the Index or Search tabs to find a
topic, the Contents tab updates to show you where that topic is.
Contents
Both AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD Help topics are listed in the
Contents.
In the alphabetical list of keywords, look up the name of a feature,
command, or operation, or an action you want the program to
perform.
Index
You can look up topics for both AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD.
Create your own list of favorite topics. To add a topic to the list,
open the Favorites tab and click Add.
Favorites
Find information using a question phrased in everyday language.
The search ranks resulting topics by relevance.
Search
NOTE Search technology varies by language version of the product.
The Search tab provides either the traditional Microsoft® search
that locates keywords and exact phrases, or a natural-language
search that analyzes phrases or questions.
Using the Tutorials
Try the tutorials to get started or to learn advanced functionality in AutoCAD
Map 3D. Click Help ➤ Learning Resources ➤ Tutorials.
Getting Help with AutoCAD
AutoCAD Map 3D includes the complete functionality of AutoCAD, including
all the AutoCAD commands and system variables. Help for the two programs
is integrated into a single Help file. For help with AutoCAD commands, search
for the command name in the Help.
58 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
New in This Release
■The Readme contains updates about this release of AutoCAD Map 3D,
including late-breaking product news and known software issues. View the
Readme.
■New Features Workshop — View a series of graphical topics designed to help
you learn about the new features in AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD. Click
Help ➤ New Features Workshop.
Using Other Sources of Information
To see the resources available to help you learn AutoCAD Map 3D, see Learning
Resources.
Geospatial Guidelines
■Best Practices for Managing Geospatial Data— Learn the key concepts of
working with geospatial data and the best way to use AutoCAD Map 3D
to achieve your goals.
■GIS Skills for Engineers— See over 90 animations that help you take your
skills to the next level.
Developer Documentation
■Developer Documentation (page 2053) — Learn how to use the AutoCAD
Map 3D Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), including ObjectARX,
ObjectARX Managed Wrappers, ActiveX, and AutoLISP. Click Help ➤
Developer Resources ➤ AutoCAD Map 3D Developer Help.
■FDO Developer Help — Extend the functionality of the feature source
providers. See FDO Developer’s Guide, The Essential FDO, and the API
references for each provider:
■FDO Provider for Oracle API Reference
■FDO Provider for ArcSDE API Reference
■FDO Provider for SQL Server API Reference
■FDO Provider for MYSQL API Reference
■FDO Provider for SHP API Reference
■FDO Provider for SDF API Reference
New in This Release | 59
■FDO Provider for ODBC API Reference
■FDO Provider for Raster API Reference
■FDO Provider for WMS API Reference
Specialized AutoCAD Manuals
■Some AutoCAD manuals, such Build Your World and Getting Started, are
available on the product CD. For information on printing these manuals,
see Printing This Documentation (page 61).
Online Resources
■Product Support Resources— Get answers quickly and efficiently through
email or get Product Support phone numbers.
■AutoCAD Map 3D Discussion Groups— Share product information, ideas,
and solutions with other AutoCAD Map 3D and other Autodesk product
users.
■Training Resources— Learn about the training resources available for
AutoCAD Map 3D and other Autodesk products.
■Developer Center— Learn about programming and development tools to
help customize AutoCAD Map 3D or build your own applications.
■Subscription Center — Access your subscription services including support
and training through the InfoCenter Communication Center. For more
information, see Using InfoCenter (page 55).
■Communication Center — Receive Autodesk company news and product
announcements, breaking news from Autodesk Product Support, new
article notifications, tips, and more. For more information, see Using
InfoCenter (page 55).
Participating in Autodesk Training
Training programs and products from Autodesk help you learn the key
technical features of your Autodesk software and improve your productivity.
For the latest information about Autodesk training, visit
http://www.autodesk.com/autocadarchitecture-training or contact your local
Autodesk office.
60 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
For information on custom training, authorized Autodesk training centers,
how-to tips, and learning tools (such as Autodesk Courseware), go to Training
Resources.
e-Learning
With Autodesk Subscription, you get the latest releases of Autodesk software,
incremental product enhancements, personalized web support from Autodesk
technical experts, and self-paced e-Learning.
Subscription services are available to subscription members only (available in
countries/regions where Autodesk subscriptions are offered).
For more information about subscription, see Subscription Center (page 55).
Printing This Documentation
You can print the Help and other manuals.
Printing PDF Versions of the Help
Most of the Help, including the AutoCAD Map 3D User’s Guide (the help system),
are available in PDF format.
NOTE You must have Adobe® Acrobat Reader™ installed to view and print PDF
documents.
To print the AutoCAD Map 3D Users Guide
1Open the AutoCAD Map 3D User’s Guide.
2Click Print.
WARNING The User’s Guide is over 1000 pages long! To save paper, print
only the chapters you need.
To print the other manuals
1Insert the AutoCAD Map 3D CD or DVD into the drive.
2When the CD browser starts, click the Documentation tab. If the CD
browser does not start automatically, double-click the Setup.exe file.
3On the Documentation tab, select the book to print.
Printing This Documentation | 61
4Click Print.
AutoCAD Map 3D Sample Data and Templates
Use sample data to experiment with map techniques before deploying your
own data.
AutoCAD Map 3D sample data includes the following:
■Symbol sets
■Templates
■Map elements, such as north arrows, scale bars, and legends
Use these elements to create maps quickly and easily, enhance new and existing
maps, promote standards, and improve consistency. They can also serve as
the basis for developing your own templates and data.
© IGN - 2007, NAVTEQ, DigitalGlobe, Intermap Technologies
AutoCAD Map 3D sample data, symbols, and templates
62 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Sample Real-World Data
With Autodesk Subscription, you get any new upgrades of your Autodesk
software and any incremental product enhancements, if these are released
during your subscription term. Product enhancements may include extensions,
bonus packs or other rich content for AutoCAD Map 3D software. To learn
more, visit http://www.autodesk.com/subscription.
For all data connections to be correct and connected automatically, copy your
sample data to this location: C:\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 Sample Data. If you
put it in a different location, you must fix data connections.
The sample data includes the following:
■Redding, California
A real-world data set from the city of Redding, California, in the United
States. The set includes parcel data, soil drawings, water data, metadata,
and more.
■Haute-de-Seine
The Institut Geographique National (the national mapping agency of
France) provides data covering “department 92.” Departments are French
administrative units, roughly analogous to English counties. Department
92 includes several cities near Paris, in an area called Haute-de-Seine.
Sample Real-World Data | 63
© IGN - 2007
Institut Geographique National (IGN)
provides a comprehensive set of sample
data for Haute-de-Seine.
■NAVTEQ data
NAVTEQ provides data sets for 3-km x 3-km areas of seven sample cities
from around the world. NAVTEQ data is used in a broad range of
location-based applications, navigation products, and mapping sites. The
sets include vector data, street centerline map data, and much more. Use
the sample data to get an idea of what NAVTEQ can provide and how to
use it to enhance your maps in AutoCAD Map 3D.
■DigitalGlobe imagery
DigitalGlobe provides imagery for the seven sample cities. DigitalGlobe is
a provider of high resolution aerial and satellite imagery.
■Intermap 3D elevation data
Intermap Technologies provides Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) for the
seven sample cities. Intermap provides high-quality, precise, 3D
digital-elevation data and images.
64 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
■DigitalGlobe ImageConnect
ImageConnect is a plug-in you can install on top of AutoCAD Map 3D. It
allows you to bring in georeferenced satellite and aerial photos from the
DigitalGlobe online image server. ImageConnect is a quick, cost-effective
way to add high-resolution imagery to your maps.
■Map Book Templates
These templates are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D.
These map book templates are installed with AutoCAD Map
3D.
Sample Real-World Data | 65
■More 3D elevation data
AutoCAD Map 3D sample data includes additional DEMs to experiment
with.
■Sample maps
These maps use sample data from NAVTEQ, Intermap Technologies, and
DigitalGlobe. There are also real-world maps from Redding, Grand Forks,
Crater Lake, and more.
■Symbols
The sample data includes a copy of the symbol sets, north arrows, and
scale bars that are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D.
When you download these files to the AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 Sample Data
folder, documentation for their use is also downloaded.
■Additional sample data and maps, including Crater Lake, US Geology, and
Grand Forks, North Dakota are installed here:
\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\Sample\Maps
Templates for Maps and Map Books
Templates allow you to reuse or standardize map settings, layouts, layer
definitions and settings, block definitions, data connections, coordinate system
information, and more.
Instead of manually reproducing the settings and common parts of your maps,
you save them in a template file (.dwt). Then you can use the template as you
create new files.
66 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
When you create a series of maps, templates save time and improve
consistency.
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with two types of templates:
■Templates for creating new maps
There are four templates available to choose from: map2d.dwt, map2diso.dwt,
map3d.dwt, map3diso.dwt. The templates settings optimize 2D and 3D
display for metric (ISO) and imperial (ANSI) units, respectively. Click
➤ New ➤ Drawing. Select a template from the list.
Templates provided with AutoCAD Map 3D include
map2d.dwt
and
map3d.dwt
.
■Templates for creating map books and tiled DWFs
These templates help you create attractive printed map books or tiled DWFs
with a minimal amount of layout work. There are three designs available,
each with numerous paper sizes, both metric (ISO) and imperial (ANSI).
Each design has its own navigation arrows, layout settings, title blocks,
and more.
Templates for Maps and Map Books | 67
Map book templates provided with AutoCAD Map 3D include Elegant,
Classic, and original designs.
You can use both types of templates as-is or adapt them to suit your needs.
Templates are available in \Documents and Settings\<user name>\Local
Settings\Application Data\Autodesk\ AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\R17.2\enu\Templates
If you are an AutoCAD Map 3D subscriber, you can download free
industry-specific toolkits. These toolkits include specialized templates. To
enroll in or visit the Subscription Center, click in the InfoCenter area at
the top right of the application window.
See also:
■Lesson 2: Customize a Map Book Template
68 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Symbols for Water, Gas, Electric, and Emergency
Response
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with sample symbol sets customized for water
networks, gas utilities, electric utilities (North America), and emergency
response planning. You can use the sample symbols as-is or as a basis for
developing your own symbols.
Using symbols can promote standardization and consistency in your
organization, and can also improve communication by using familiar
symbology.
Each set of symbols comes in a separate DWG file. For example, there is Map
- Water.dwg, Map - Electric.dwg, and so on. There are several files for Emergency
Response.
These electric symbols are examples from
Map -
Electric.dwg
.
These gas symbols are examples from
Map - Gas.dwg
.
These water symbols are examples from
Map -
Water.dwg
.
These emergency response symbols are examples from
Map - ER Incident Centers.dwg
.
The symbols are available in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Sample\Symbols.
The symbols are in dynamic block format, making them easy to rotate, resize,
and color. They have block color properties, which optimizes them for use in
DWGs. You can also use them in the Style Editor when styling points.
Symbols for Water, Gas, Electric, and Emergency Response | 69
To set up the symbols for easy drag-and-drop into your maps, you can add
them to a Tool Palette.
Symbols for General Use
AutoCAD Map 3D has sample symbols for general-purpose use, such as points
of interest, transportation, and local government.
Like the industry symbols (page 69), general-purpose symbols are usable as-is,
or as a basis for developing new symbols.
Using symbols can help promote standardization and consistency in your
organization, and can improve communication by using familiar symbology.
The symbols come in two formats:
■Dynamic block versions (Map - Points of Interest.DWG) are in dynamic block
format so you can scale and rotate them easily. You can control outline
and fill colors separately in the Style Editor. The symbols are black by
default when viewed in the DWG.
These general-use symbols are examples
from
Map - Points of Interest.dwg
.
■Bitmap versions in .png format lend a more graphical representation to
your points.
These bitmap symbols are examples
from
Map - Points of Interest.dwg
.
70 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
The general-use symbols are available in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Sample\Symbols.
North Arrows, Scale Bars, and Other Map Elements
Sample north arrows and scale bars (both metric and imperial) are available
as dynamic blocks for you to insert into your maps.
These north arrows are examples from the
Symbols
folder.
These scale bars are examples from the
Symbols
folder.
Because they are in dynamic block format, these symbols are easy to scale,
rotate, and color. Use the scale bar attributes to set the correct scale.
The samples are available in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Sample\Symbols.
A modern, easy-to-read legend style is automatically available when you add
a legend to a map.
North Arrows, Scale Bars, and Other Map Elements | 71
The legend style on the left appears in your onscreen map.
The legend style on the right appears in the published version.
Geospatial Data Available for Purchase
You can add raster elevation data to 3D maps, vector data, such as land plots
or points of interest, or satellite imagery.
Autodesk partners with leading geospatial data providers to provide a geodata
portal with high-resolution, precision, geospatial data. Get data quickly, easily,
and at lower cost.
Visit the geodata portal at http://www.autodesk.com/geodata.
The following types of data are available on the portal:
■Aerial and satellite imagery from DigitalGlobe
■3D raster elevation data from Intermap Technologies
■Vector data, such as roads and land parcels, from NAVTEQ
■Weather data from WeatherBug
72 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
This data is from Intermap Technologies, NAVTEQ, and DigitalGlobe.
Tutorial Sample Files
The tutorials are accessible from the Help menu.
After installation, the tutorial sample files are located in Program Files\AutoCAD
Map 3D 2011\Help\Map 3D Tutorials. The tutorials advise you to copy the
sample files to your My Documents folder so you do not modify the original
files.
AutoCAD Samples
AutoCAD provides sample drawings, sheet sets, blocks, VBA examples, and
more.
After installation, the files are located in C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Sample.
Tutorial Sample Files | 73
74
User's Guide
This section explains AutoCAD Map 3D’s features by introducing concepts, providing
step-by-step procedures, and providing quick reference information.
For information on AutoCAD commands, refer to the AutoCAD Help.
75
76
Setting Up
Overview of Setting Up
You can customize AutoCAD Map 3D and set up each map file you create to
make your work easier and more productive.
The following tables summarize your setup options on a product-wide and
map-wide basis.
To get this result...Use this method...On a product-wide
level...
The system administrator assigns
login names and passwords to
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤
➤ User Administration.
Set up user access.
users, and specifies what each
user can do within the product.
See Setting Up Users and Assign-
ing Rights (page 82).
Customize the ribbons, menus,
toolbars, and dockable windows.
See Customizing Your Work En-
vironment (page 84).
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Tools tab ➤ Customization panel
➤ User Interface.
Set up your workspace.
Create a new coordinate system
or use a predefined coordinate
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate
System panel ➤ Define Global Coordin-
ate System.
Create new coordinate
systems.
system as a basis for creating
your own.
See Defining Coordinate Systems
(page 89).
2
77
To get this result...Use this method...On a product-wide
level...
Define a set of standard objects
for your organization so that new
Set up object classifica-
tion.
1Select a sample object for the
object class.
drawing objects of that type use
the properties you defined.
See Overview of Setting Up Ob-
ject Classification (page 117).
2Attach an object definition file.
3On the Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane, right-click Object
Classes. Click Define Object Class.
Convert paper-based graphical
information into a digital format
Set up for digitizing 1Configure the digitizer in the
AutoCAD Options dialog box.
using drawing commands to
2Register the map using the TAB-
LET command. trace data from the paper map
into a DWG file.
See Setting Up for Digitizing
(page 130) and Overview of Digit-
izing Objects (page 1079).
3Set digitizing specifications in the
Digitize Setup dialog box.
4Use the MAPDIGITIZE command
to digitize the objects.
Change settings that affect the
work environment, how the
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Map Setup tab ➤ Map pan-
el ➤ angle-arrow.
Set default values and set-
tings.
program starts up, whether users
must log in, and settings for your
current drawings, data sources,
and more.
See Setting Options (page 216).
Changes settings related to the
Raster Extension, such as where
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ angle-
arrow.
Set options related to im-
ages you added with Ras-
ter Extension. image-related files are stored,
how images display in maps, and
memory usage options. These
options do not affect images you
added with Data Connect.
Setting Raster Image Options
(page 249)
78 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To get this result...Use this method...On a product-wide
level...
Modify the .ini files that specify
import and export settings.
See Customizing the Import and
Export .ini Files (page 264).
Edit the mapexport.ini file using a text
editor such as WordPad.
Customize and automate
import and export opera-
tions.
To get this result...Use this method...On a map-wide basis...
Specify the coordinate system used for at-
tached drawings and for the current
drawing.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems (page
142)
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Co-
ordinate System panel ➤ As-
sign.
Assign a coordinate system.
Work with objects from other drawings by
attaching those drawings to the current
map and querying in the objects.
See Overview of Attaching Drawings (page
154)
Drag a drawing file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Attach drawings.
Specify how attached drawings work with
the current drawing and view information
about attached drawings.
See Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
(page 163).
At the Command prompt,
enter adedrawings.
Modify the settings for at-
tached drawings.
Save and reuse drawing queries in a library.
See Overview of Using the Query Library
(page 174).
Set up queries. 1To save the current
query, click Home
tab ➤ Data pan-
el ➤ Define Query.
2To run a saved query,
click Create
tab ➤ Object Query
panel ➤ Run.
Overview of Setting Up | 79
To get this result...Use this method...On a map-wide basis...
Define the information to display in a
drawing object annotation and the layout
Click Annotate tab ➤ Map
Annotation panel ➤ Define
Template.
Define annotation tem-
plates.
of that information. Then you can attach
instances of the annotation to drawing
objects in your drawing.
See Defining Annotation Templates (page
190)
Create tables with fields for text and numer-
ical information. Attach records from the
table to drawing objects.
See Creating an Object Data Table (page
200).
Click Map Setup tab ➤ At-
tribute Data panel ➤ Define
Object Data.
Set up object data.
Attach a database to your map and link
records from that table to objects in your
map.
See Attaching a Data Source (page 208).
Drag the database file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Set up data sources for
drawings.
Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D
See also:
■Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page 139)
■Setting Options (page 216)
■To add a new user (page 83)
■To create a new workspace (page 85)
■To add ribbon, menu, and toolbar options (page 85)
■To add entire ribbon tabs, menus, or toolbars to a workspace (page 86)
■To switch between Tool-based, Task-based, and Map Classic workspaces
(page 86)
■To restore the default colors (page 86)
■To show the command line interface for a particular workspace (page 87)
■To hide the map status bar (page 87)
■To enable Update Edits Automatically by default (page 88)
■To disable connection pooling by default (page 88)
■To turn file selection dialog boxes on or off (page 88)
■To turn other dialog boxes on or off (page 88)
80 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D
You can customize AutoCAD Map 3D to make your work easier and more
productive. Your changes affect all future sessions of AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page 139)
■Setting Options (page 216)
The following table summarizes your customization options.
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
Specify the coordinate system used for at-
tached drawings and for the current
drawing.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems (page
142)
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Co-
ordinate System panel ➤ As-
sign.
Assign a coordinate system.
Work with objects from other drawings by
attaching those drawings to the current
map and querying in the objects.
See Overview of Attaching Drawings (page
154)
Drag the drawing file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Attach drawings.
Specify how attached drawings work with
the current drawing and view information
about attached drawings.
See Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
(page 163).
At the Command prompt,
enter adedrawings.
Modify the settings for at-
tached drawings.
Save and reuse queries in a library.
See Overview of Using the Query Library
(page 174).
Set up queries. 1To save the current
query, click Home
tab ➤ Data pan-
el ➤ Define Query.
2To run a saved query,
click Create
Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D | 81
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
tab ➤ Object Query
panel ➤ Run.
Define the information to display in an
annotation and the layout of that informa-
Click Annotate tab ➤ Map
Annotation panel ➤ Define
Template.
Define annotation tem-
plates.
tion. Then you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing.
See Defining Annotation Templates (page
190)
Create tables with fields for text and numer-
ical information. Attach records from the
table to objects.
See Creating an Object Data Table (page
200).
Click Map Setup tab ➤ At-
tribute Data panel ➤ Define
Object Data.
Set up object data.
Attach a database to your map and link
records from that table to objects in your
map.
See Attaching a Data Source (page 208).
Drag the database file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Set up data sources for
drawings.
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights
The system administrator controls who has access to AutoCAD Map 3D by
assigning login names and passwords to users. Also, the system administrator
can specify the privileges or operations available to each user.
AutoCAD Map 3D stores the settings for several AutoCAD Map 3D options
with your login name, which means that these option settings are in effect
whenever you log in under that name to that copy of AutoCAD Map 3D on
that machine. After you log in, AutoCAD Map 3D sets up your user
environment, including user privileges and user-specific options, such as Task
Pane options and Data Source options.
See also:
■Setting Task Pane Options (page 221)
■Setting Data Source Options (page 236)
82 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To add a new user
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ ➤ User Administration.
2In the User Administration dialog box (page 1934), under User Profile, in
the Login Name box, enter a name for the user.
The login name must be unique. It is not case sensitive. Use any characters
except the following: " / \ [ ] : ; | = , + * ? < >
3In the Password box, enter a password for the user. Passwords are case
sensitive.
4Under Privileges, specify the operations available to the user by selecting
one or more of the following:
■Superuser — User can perform user administration tasks, set system
options, and perform any other AutoCAD Map 3D operation.
The default superuser login name is SuperUser (not case sensitive) and
the password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive). If security is an issue,
make sure that you change the default superuser login and password.
■Alter Drawing Set — User can attach and detach drawings. If this
option is not selected, the user can activate and deactivate drawings,
but cannot attach and detach them.
■Alter Object Class — User can define and edit object class definitions.
If this option is not selected, users can only assign object classes and
change the current object classification file.
■Edit Drawing — User can edit objects and save them back to source
drawings. If this option is not selected, the user can edit objects but
cannot save them back to source drawings.
■Draw Query — User can execute Draw mode queries, which copy
objects into the current drawing. If this option is not selected, users
can do Preview and Report mode queries only.
5Click Add.
6Click OK.
To edit a user profile, select the name in the User List and modify the settings
you want. Click Update.
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights | 83
Quick Reference
MAPUSERADMIN
Performs administrative functions
Setup menu ➤ User Administration
Menu
MAPUSERADMINCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ User
Admin
Task Pane
User Administration dialog boxDialog Box
Customizing Your Work Environment
Your work environment – that is, the way the ribbon, menus, toolbars, and
dockable windows are laid out – is saved in a workspace.
You can customize a workspace to look and function just the way you want,
or create a workspace. You can save different workspaces for different tasks,
use them to help you streamline common tasks, or set up best practices for
mapping tasks and workflow.
For example, you can set up a map creation workspace to streamline acquiring,
integrating, and building maps, and another workspace for creating and
publishing map books and atlases.
Within a session, you can easily switch between workspaces.
AutoCAD Map 3D includes three predefined workspaces:
■Tool-based Ribbon Workspace
■Task-based Ribbon Workspace
■Map Classic Workspace
You can customize any of these workspaces and easily switch between them.
See also:
■Workspaces
■To create a new workspace (page 85)
84 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To add ribbon, menu, and toolbar options (page 85)
■To add entire ribbon tabs, menus, or toolbars to a workspace (page 86)
■To switch between Tool-based, Task-based, and Map Classic workspaces
(page 86)
■To restore the default colors (page 86)
■To show the command line interface for a particular workspace (page 87)
■To hide the map status bar (page 87)
■To enable Update Edits Automatically by default (page 88)
■To disable connection pooling by default (page 88)
To create a new workspace
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab ➤ Customization
panel ➤ User Interface.
2In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI FILES, right-click the Workspaces node and select New Workspace,
or right-click an existing workspace and select duplicate.
3Select the new workspace.
4Under Workspace Contents, click Customize Workspace.
5In the Customizations In All CUI Files tree, check the items you want to
include.
6Click Done.
7Click OK.
To add ribbon, menu, and toolbar options
1In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI Files, select the workspace you want to modify.
2Under Customizations In All CUI Files, expand the item you want to
customize so that you can see all the items underneath it.
For example, expand the Topology menu to see the topology options
underneath.
Customizing Your Work Environment | 85
3Under Command List, click and drag the tool you want to include to the
item in Customizations In All CUI Files.
4Click Apply.
5Click OK.
To add entire ribbon tabs, menus, or toolbars to a workspace
1In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI Files, select the workspace you want to modify.
2Under Workspace Contents, click Customize Workspace.
3In the Customizations In All CUI Files tree, check the items you want to
include.
4Click Done.
5Click OK.
To switch between Tool-based, Task-based, and Map Classic workspaces
1Click the Workspace Switching button in the bottom-right corner of the
application window.
A floating toolbar opens with all workspace options available. You can
either dock this toolbar, leave it floating or close it.
2In the toolbar, use the drop-down list to select the workspace you want.
Unless you specify otherwise, AutoCAD Map 3D opens with the Tool-based
workspace.
For more information, see Workspaces.
To restore the default colors
1Click ➤ Options.
2In the Options dialog box, click the Display tab, and then click Colors.
3In the Drawing Window Colors dialog box, select the element you want
to change by clicking the images for the Model tab or Layout tabs.
As you click areas of the images, the selection is displayed in the Window
Element list. You can also change an attribute by selecting it from the
86 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Window Element list. For example, for the Map background, select Model
Tab Background.
4From the Color list, click Select Color.
5In the Select Color dialog box, click the Color Books tab, and then select
AutoCAD Map 3D Colors from the Color Book list.
The AutoCAD Map 3D color book displays the default colors used in the
application. You can select a color or use the color book as a reference.
It does do not control the defaults in the application; do not attempt to
modify it.
6Select a color by clicking a color chip.
For example, click the blue Map Background chip to use the new map
background color (model tab).
7Click OK.
8In the Color Options dialog box, click Apply and Close to record the
current option settings in the system registry and close the dialog box.
9In the Options dialog box, click OK.
To show the command line interface for a particular workspace
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab ➤ Customization
panel ➤ User Interface.
2In the Customize User Interface dialog box, select a workspace.
3In the Workspace Contents area, expand Palettes, scroll to the bottom
of the list, and then click Command Line.
4In the Properties area under Appearance, click Show, and then select Yes
from the drop-down list.
5Under Workspace Contents, click the Customize Workspace button.
6Click OK.
To hide the map status bar
1At the Command prompt, enter mapstatusbar.
2Enter hide.
Customizing Your Work Environment | 87
To enable Update Edits Automatically by default
1At the Command prompt, enter mapeditsetautodefault
2Enter active.
To disable connection pooling by default
1At the Command prompt, enter mapconnectionpooling.
2Enter deactive.
To turn file selection dialog boxes on or off
NOTE If you use scripts to automate some AutoCAD Map 3D functions, you may
find it useful to turn off dialog boxes .
1At the Command prompt, enter filedia.
2To turn on dialog boxes , enter 1. To turn off dialog boxes , enter 0.
To turn other dialog boxes on or off
1At the Command prompt, enter cmddia.
2To turn on dialog boxes , enter 1. To turn off dialog boxes , enter 0.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
OPTIONS
88 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT
Specifies the default setting for updating edits to the feature source
automatically
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULTCommand Line
MAPSTATUSBAR
Toggles the Map status bar on and off
MAPSTATUSBARCommand Line
MAPCONNECTIONPOOLING
Toggles connection pooling on and off
MAPCONNECTIONPOOLINGCommand Line
Creating New Coordinate Systems
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with an extensive library of coordinate systems. If
no suitable coordinate system exists, you can define a customized coordinate
system.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
■To define coordinate systems (page 90)
■To work with grid data files and datum shifts (page 102)
Defining Coordinate Systems
You can define customized coordinate systems in AutoCAD Map 3D.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 89
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing (page 147)
To define coordinate systems
■To define a coordinate system (page 92)
■To define a datum (page 94)
■To define an ellipsoid (page 95)
■To create a coordinate system category (page 97)
■To modify or delete a coordinate system (page 98)
■To modify or delete a datum (page 99)
■To modify or delete an ellipsoid (page 100)
■To edit or delete a coordinate system category (page 101)
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems
You can create acompletely new global coordinate system (page 2065) or use a
predefined coordinate system as a basis for creating your own. You can also
modify or delete any coordinate systems that you define. You cannot delete
any of the predefined coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D.
When you define a coordinate system you must specify the following
parameters:
■map projection (page 2068) — Used to convert points from latitude and
longitude to Cartesian coordinates.
and one of the following:
■datum (page 2059) — Reference point, line, or surface for mapping.
■ellipsoid (page 2062) — Geometric surface whose plane sections are all circles
or ellipses.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
90 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Define, delete, or modify using this
method...
For this item...
To define a coordinate system (page 92)
To modify or delete a coordinate system
(page 98)
global coordinate system (page 2065)
To define a datum (page 94)
To modify or delete a datum (page 99)
Datum
To define an ellipsoid (page 95)
To modify or delete an ellipsoid (page 100)
Ellipsoid
To create a coordinate system category
(page 97)
To edit or delete a coordinate system cat-
egory (page 101)
Coordinate system category
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
Defining a Global Coordinate System
You can define a new global coordinate system (page 2065) based on your own
data or use a predefined coordinate system as a basis for creating your own.
Depending on the projection you use to define a custom coordinate system,
you must provide certain information. For example, if you use the Transverse
Mercator projection, you must specify a longitude value called the central
meridian.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 91
False Origin
When defining a custom coordinate system, you may want to enter a false
origin, with northing and easting values. For example, if you are using the
Transverse Mercator projection, and the central meridian bisects the mapping
region, half of the X coordinates are negative values. Coordinate system
definitions usually include an offset called the false origin that is added to all
coordinates to make them positive. The X coordinate of this offset is called
the false origin easting. The Y coordinate of this offset is called the false origin
northing.
Scale Reduction Factor
To produce the smallest possible distance between the projection surface and
any point in the region you are mapping, you must specify a scale reduction
factor. This is particularly important when you are mapping large regions. For
the Transverse Mercator projection, you enter this value in the Scale Reduction
field in the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To define a coordinate system
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global
Coordinate System.
2In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, select a category.
3Do one of the following:
■To create a new coordinate system, click Define.
■To create a new coordinate system based on an existing, predefined
coordinate system, select the coordinate system from the Coordinate
Systems In Category list. Click Modify.
4On the General tab of the Define Coordinate System dialog box, enter a
unique code in the Code box.
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
92 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
If you are creating a new coordinate system based on an existing
coordinate system, you must change the code before you can change any
of the other information.
5Enter a description.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the description in the Coordinate Systems In
Category list of the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box.
6In the Units box, select the units to use for this coordinate system.
7Under Coordinate System Type, select one of the following:
■To base the coordinate system on a datum (page 2059), select Geodetic.
Click Select to specify the datum.
■To base the coordinate system on an ellipsoid (page 2062), select
Non-Geodetic. Click Select to specify the ellipsoid.
8On the Projection tab, select a projection.
The projection you choose determines how many projection parameters
you must enter and the units you can use.
9Optionally, under False Origin, enter Northing and Easting values.
10 Under Projection Parameters, enter values for the remaining fields in the
dialog box. Click OK.
These fields vary according to the projection you select.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
Defining a New Datum
You can define a new datum based on your own data or use a predefined
datum (page 2059) as a basis for creating your own.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 93
When defining a custom datum, select the conversion technique, either
Molodensky, Bursa/Wolfe, or Seven Parameter Transformation. After choosing
the conversion technique, specify the appropriate conversion parameters for
the technique you chose.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
■Defining an Ellipsoid (page 95)
To define a datum
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global
Coordinate System. Select Define or Modify.
2On the General tab of the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box
or the Modify Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Geodetic.
Click Define.
3In the Datum Manager dialog box, click Define.
4On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box, enter a code and
description for the datum (page 2059).
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the description in the Datums list of the
Datum Manager dialog box.
5Under Ellipsoid, select or define an ellipsoid (page 2062) to use for the new
datum.
For information about defining ellipsoids, see Defining an Ellipsoid (page
95).
6On the Datum Conversion tab, select a conversion technique from the
Datum Conversion Technique list.
7Enter the appropriate conversion parameters for the conversion technique
you selected.
Under Conversion Parameters, under Vector Component Deltas To
WGS-84 In Meters, enter the vector component deltas to WGS-84.
94 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
If you use the Bursa/Wolfe or Seven Parameter Transformation conversion
method, fill in all four edit boxes under Rotation Angle From WGS-84 In
Arc Seconds.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
Defining an Ellipsoid
You can define a new ellipsoid (page 2062) based on your own data or use a
predefined ellipsoid as a basis for creating your own.
When defining a custom ellipsoid, you must specify the calculation method
and values used to determine the dimensions of the ellipsoid. After choosing
the calculation method, you supply two of the required values, and AutoCAD
Map 3D determines the remaining two values for you.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
■Defining a New Datum (page 93)
To define an ellipsoid
1Do one of the following:
■On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box or the Modify
Datum dialog box, under Ellipsoid, click Define.
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global
Coordinate System. Select Define or Modify.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 95
■Under Coordinate System Type on the General tab of the Define
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Non-Geodetic. Click
Define.
2In the Ellipsoid Manager dialog box, click Define.
3In the Define Ellipsoid dialog box, enter a code and description for the
ellipsoid (page 2062).
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the description in the Available Ellipsoids list.
4Under Ellipsoid Dimensions, do the following:
5Select a calculation method.
6Enter values for the two parameters that correspond to the calculation
method you chose. AutoCAD Map 3D computes the other two values
based on the ones you enter.
7Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
Creating a Coordinate System Category
You can organize your coordinate systems by creating categories and moving
coordinate systems into those categories.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
96 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To create a coordinate system category
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global
Coordinate System.
2In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, click Category
Manager.
3In the Coordinate System Category Manager, click New.
4Type a name in the Category Name box.
5From the Available Categories list, select a category that contains
coordinate systems to include in the new category.
6In the Coordinate Systems In Category list, select the coordinate systems
to include in the new category.
7Click Add.
You can select any number of coordinate systems from existing categories
to include in the new category.
8When you have finished adding coordinate systems, click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 97
Modifying or Deleting a Global Coordinate System
You can modify or delete any coordinate systems that you define. You cannot
modify or delete predefined coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map
3D.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
■Creating a Coordinate System Category (page 96)
To modify or delete a coordinate system
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global
Coordinate System.
2In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, select the category
that contains the global coordinate system to modify or delete.
3Select the coordinate system from the Coordinate Systems In Category
list.
4To modify the coordinate system, click Modify.
To delete the coordinate system, click Remove. Click OK.
5If you are modifying the coordinate system, in the Modify Global
Coordinate System dialog box, change information as necessary.
To modify a predefined coordinate system, you must change the code
on the General tab before you can change the other coordinate system
properties.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
98 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
Modifying or Deleting a Datum
You can modify or delete any datum (page 2059) that you define. You cannot
modify or delete predefined datums supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D.
If you modify or delete a datum that you have defined, you must also modify
or delete any coordinate systems that reference that datum.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
■To define an ellipsoid (page 95)
To modify or delete a datum
1On the General tab of the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box
or the Modify Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Geodetic.
Click Define.
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global
Coordinate System. Select Define or Modify.
2In the Datum Manager dialog box, select a datum (page 2059).
3To modify the datum, click Modify.
To remove the datum, click Remove.
4If you are modifying the datum, on the General tab of the Define Datum
dialog box, change the code and description for the datum.
To modify a predefined datum, you must change the code on the General
tab before you can change the other datum properties.
5Under Ellipsoid, select or define an ellipsoid (page 2062) to use for the datum.
For information about defining ellipsoids, see Defining an Ellipsoid (page
95).
6On the Datum Conversion tab, select a conversion technique from the
Datum Conversion Technique list.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 99
7Enter the appropriate conversion parameters for the conversion technique
you selected.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
Modifying or Deleting an Ellipsoid
You can modify or delete any ellipsoid (page 2062) that you define. You cannot
modify or delete predefined ellipsoids supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D.
If you modify or delete an ellipsoid (page 2062) that you have defined, you must
also modify or delete any coordinate systems that reference that ellipsoid.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
■To define an ellipsoid (page 95)
To modify or delete an ellipsoid
1On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box or the Modify Datum
dialog box, under Ellipsoid, click Define.
2In the Ellipsoid Manager dialog box, select an ellipsoid (page 2062).
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global
Coordinate System. Select Define or Modify.
3To modify the ellipsoid, click Modify.
To delete the ellipsoid, click Remove.
100 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
4If you are modifying an ellipsoid, enter a code and description for the
ellipsoid.
To modify a predefined ellipsoid, you must change the code before you
can change the other ellipsoid properties.
5Under Calculation Method, select a calculation method.
6Enter the appropriate ellipsoid dimension parameters for the calculation
method you selected.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
Modifying or Deleting a Coordinate System Category
You can modify categories by adding or removing coordinate systems, or
moving coordinate systems from one category to another. You can also delete
categories.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
■Creating a Coordinate System Category (page 96)
To edit or delete a coordinate system category
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global
Coordinate System.
2In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, click Category
Manager.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 101
3In the Coordinate System Category Manager, select a category.
4To modify the category, click Edit.
To delete the category, click Remove.
5If you are modifying the category, do one or more of the following:
■To remove coordinate systems from the category, click the coordinate
system names in the list under the Category Name box. Click Remove.
■To add coordinate systems to the category, click the coordinate system
names in the list under the Available Categories list. Click Add.
■To add coordinate systems from different categories, select the category
name in the Available Categories list.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
Grid Data Files and Datum Shifts
AutoCAD Map 3D uses grid data files to specify datum (page 2059) shift
information and Grid Data Catalog files to determine the order for those files
when converting from one datum to another.
See also:
■Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 89)
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
To work with grid data files and datum shifts
■To set up a new grid data file (page 105)
■To set up a new grid data file for the United States (page 108)
102 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To set up a new grid data file for France (page 109)
■To set up a new grid data file for Australia or New Zealand (page 110)
■To use the new high accuracy GDA94 datum (page 111)
■To use version 2 of the Canadian National Transformation (page 112)
■To use version 1 of the Canadian National Transformation (page 113)
■To modify a coordinate system definition file (page 116)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues
When converting between certain coordinate systems in North America,
France, Australia, and New Zealand, AutoCAD Map 3D uses grid-based data
files called grid data files to obtain datum (page 2059) shift information.
For the United States, France, Australia, and New Zealand geography, the grid
data files are in the public domain and are distributed with AutoCAD Map
3D. The grid data files which cover Canadian geography are not in the public
domain and must be obtained from the proper authorities in Canada.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses Grid Data Catalog (GDC) files to determine the order
in which grid data files are used in areas of overlap when converting from one
datum (page 2059) to another.
See also:
■Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 89)
■Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 112)
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
■Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105)
■Coordinate System Files (page 113)
■Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
110)
You can do the following with grid data files
See this topic...To do this...
Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files (page 104)Set up a new grid data file
Grid Data Files for the United States (page
105)
Specify a new grid data file for the United
States
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 103
See this topic...To do this...
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zeal-
and (page 109)
Specify a new grid data file for Australia or
New Zealand
Australian Datum Transformation and Co-
ordinate System Changes (page 110)
Use the high accuracy GDA94 datum for
Australia
Datum Shift Issues for North American
Users (page 112)
Specify a grid data version to resolve differ-
ences between source and destination co-
ordinate systems for Canada
Coordinate System Files (page 113)Modify a coordinate system file
Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files
AutoCAD Map 3D uses Grid Data Catalog (GDC) files to determine the order
in which grid data files are used in areas of overlap when converting from one
datum (page 2059) to another in certain parts of the world, such as North
America, France, Australia, and New Zealand.
If there is an overlapping coverage, AutoCAD Map 3D selects the grid data file
with the smallest grid cell in the region of the conversion. If the grid cell sizes
are the same, AutoCAD Map 3D selects the grid data file that appears first in
the GDC file.
Grid Data Catalog files are ASCII text files with a .gdc extension that are stored,
by default, in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems folder. The base name of
a GDC file is based on the transformation with which it is associated. For
example, the GDC file for the NAD27 to NAD83 transformation is
Nad27toNad83.gdc.
Each line in a GDC file points to a grid data file (also known as a datum shift
data file). GDC files also often include comments that are preceded by a pound
sign (#) and a fallback datum definition that is used when none of the grid
data files provide coverage for a point being converted.
See also:
■Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 112)
■Coordinate System Files (page 113)
104 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
■Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105)
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
■Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
110)
To set up a new grid data file
1When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial
Coordinate Systems.
2Open the appropriate GDC file in any text editor or word processor that
can produce an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum (page 2059) definition, or adding
comments.
Grid Data Files for the United States
AutoCAD Map 3D uses North American Datum Conversion (NADCON) grid
data files from the National Geodetic Survey to obtain latitude and longitude
shift information for converting between coordinate systems within the United
States. A pair of grid data files is required for each area or state covered: a .las
file is required for latitude shift values (latitude seconds) and a .los file for
longitude shift values (longitude seconds).
The NADCON files include grid data files for transformations between NAD83
and state readjustments to HARN (High Accuracy Resolution Network) projects.
The .las and .los files are in the public domain and are distributed with
AutoCAD Map 3D. The files are stored in the Autodesk shared coordinate
system folder, by default C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems\Usa\Nadcon.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 105
The following is a list of NADCON grid data files.
Area/StateNADCON (North American
Datum Conversion)
Files (.las and
.los)
United States (USA) - lower 48 states including
EEZ
NAD27 to NAD83conus
AlaskaAlaska to NAD83alaska
HawaiiOld Hawaiian to NAD83hawaii
Puerto Rico, Virgin IslandsPuerto Rico to NAD83prvi
St Lawrence: off the coast of AlaskaSt. Lawrence Island to NAD83stlrnc
St Paul: Pribiloff Islands off the coast of AlaskaSt. Paul Island to NAD83stpaul
St George: Pribiloff Islands off the coast of
Alaska
St. George Island to NAD83stgeorge
HARN Readjust-
ments
AlabamaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)alhpgn
ArizonaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)azhpgn
California, south of 38 degrees NorthNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)cahpgn
California, north of 38 degrees NorthNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)cnhpgn
ColoradoNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)cohpgn
Idaho and Montana, east of 113 degrees WestNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)emhpgn
Texas, east of 100 degrees WestNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)ethpgn
FloridaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)flhpgn
GeorgiaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)gahpgn
KentuckyNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)kyhpgn
106 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Area/StateNADCON (North American
Datum Conversion)
Files (.las and
.los)
LouisianaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)lahpgn
Maryland and DelawareNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)mdhpgn
MaineNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)mehpgn
MichiganNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)mihpgn
MississippiNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)mshpgn
NebraskaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)nbhpgn
North DakotaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)ndhpgn
New England (Connecticut, Massachusetts,
New Hampshire, Rhode Island, and Vermont)
NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)nehpgn
New MexicoNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)nmhpgn
New YorkNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)nyhpgn
OklahomaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)okhpgn
Puerto Rico, Virgin IslandsNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)pvhpgn
South DakotaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)sdhpgn
TennesseeNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)tnhpgn
Virginia, excluding West VirginiaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)vahpgn
WisconsinNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)wihpgn
Idaho and Montana, west of 113 degrees WestNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)wmhpgn
Washington and OregonNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)wohpgn
Texas, west of 100 degrees WestNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)wthpgn
WyomingNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)wyhpgn
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 107
For more information about NADCON grid data files, refer to the National
Geodetic Survey web site.
See also:
■Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 112)
■Coordinate System Files (page 113)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
■Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
110)
To set up a new grid data file for the United States
1When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial
Coordinate Systems\Usa\Nadcon.
2Open the appropriate GDC file in any text editor or word processor that
can produce an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum (page 2059) definition, or adding
comments.
Grid Data Files for France
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with a grid data catalog file (RgfToNtf.gdc) and a
national grid data file (gr3df97a.txt )for France. This file is installed in a folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default C:\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems.
Several French municipalities have developed local grid data files that allow
for more precise transformations within their respective regions. You can
obtain municipal grid data files from the local GIS or Survey department. If
108 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
you add references to such municipal grid data files to the French grid data
catalog file, AutoCAD Map 3D will automatically use them as appropriate.
Points within the boundaries of the municipal grids will be transformed using
the local grid data, and points outside those boundaries will be transformed
using national grid data.
To set up a new grid data file for France
1When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial
Coordinate Systems.
2Open RgfToNtf.gdc in any text editor or word processor that can produce
an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum (page 2059) definition, or adding
comments.
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with grid data files for Australia and New Zealand.
These files are installed in folders under the Autodesk shared coordinate system
folder, by default C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems.
Following is a table of the grid data files and GDC files used for Australia and
New Zealand.
GDC FileGrid Data File (GSB)TransformationArea
Agd84ToGda94.gdcQLD_1299.gsbAGD84 to GDA94Australia
Agd66ToGda94.gdcvic_0799.gsbAGD66 to GDA94Victoria
Agd66ToGda94.gdctas_1098.gsbAGD66 to GDA94Tasmania
Agd66ToGda94.gdcNt_0599.gsbAGD66 to GDA94Northern Territory
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 109
GDC FileGrid Data File (GSB)TransformationArea
Nzgd49ToNzgd2K.gdcnzgd2kgrid9911.gsbNew ZealandNew Zealand
For more information about Australia and New Zealand coordinate systems,
go to http://www.ga.gov.au.
See also:
■Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
110)
■Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 112)
■Coordinate System Files (page 113)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
■Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105)
To set up a new grid data file for Australia or New Zealand
1When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial
Coordinate Systems.
2Open the appropriate GDC file in any text editor or word processor that
can produce an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum (page 2059) definition, or adding
comments.
Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System
Changes
The Geocentric Datum of Australia (GDA) is the new Australian coordinate
system, replacing the Australian Geodetic Datum (AGD). GDA is part of a
110 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
global coordinate reference frame and is directly compatible with the Global
Positioning System (GPS).
Due to differences in the way the two datums were created, the GDA94
coordinates of a point appear to be about 200 meters northeast of the AGD
coordinates of the same point. The precise size and orientation of the difference
varies from place to place. For more technical information on the GDA, go to
http://www.icsm.gov.au/icsm/gda/
The new implementation of GDA94 and the associated datum (page 2059)
transformations are available by using the coordinate system files supplied in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
■Coordinate System Files (page 113)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To use the new high accuracy GDA94 datum
1Reassign one of the following coordinate systems to your drawing:
■AMG66-49-Grid through AMG66-57-Grid
■AMG-49-Grid through AMG-57-Grid
■MGA-48-Grid through MGA-58-Grid
■ISG_54-2-Grid through ISG_56-2-Grid
■SGC-Grid
■VICT-Grid
■LL-AGD84-Grid
For example, if you have a drawing that uses AM666-49, reassign it to
AM666-49-Grid before using GDA94.
2Do one of the following:
■To define a new coordinate system using high accuracy datum (page
2059) transformations, use ASTRLA66-Grid and ASTRLA84-Grid.
■To define a new coordinate system using the 3-Dimensional Similarity
Transformations, use ASTRLA66-7P, STRLA66-Tasm-7P,
ASTRLA66-VictNSW-7P, ASTRLA66-ACT-7P, and ASTRLA84-7P.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 111
Datum Shift Issues for North American Users
If the source and destination coordinate systems use different datums,
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically performs a datum (page 2059) shift. Within
North America, this is most often a shift between the NAD27 and NAD83
datums.
For United States users, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the freely distributable
NADCON grid data files (page 105) supplied by USGS.
Canadian users can use either version 1 or version 2 of the Canadian National
Transformation supplied by Geomatics Canada. If both versions of the
Canadian National Transformation are present, AutoCAD Map 3D uses version
2.
WARNING Geomatics Canada no longer supports version 1, and many Canadian
provinces do not consider it to produce valid results. If you are in Canada and
doing NAD Shifts, it is recommended that you use version 2.
See also:
■Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 89)
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
■Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105)
■Coordinate System Files (page 113)
■Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
110)
To use version 2 of the Canadian National Transformation
1Obtain a copy of the data file.
Contact Information Services, Geodetic Survey Division, Geomatics
Canada
615 Booth Street
Ottawa, Ontario, K1A 0E9
(613) 995-4410
http://www.geod.nrcan.gc.ca
2Once you have the file, copy it into the Autodesk shared coordinate
system folder, by default C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
112 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems\Canada, and give it the
name Ntv2_0.gsb.
3Using a text editor such as Notepad, open Nad27ToNad83.gdc (located
by default in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems folder).
4Delete the initial pound sign (#) from the line that begins:
#.\Canada\Ntv2_0.gsb.
To use version 1 of the Canadian National Transformation
1Obtain a copy of the data file.
2Copy it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems\Canada folder, and give it
the name grid11.dac.
3Open Nad27ToNad83.gdc.
4Delete the initial pound sign (#) from the line that begins:
#.\Canada\grid11.dac.
For more information on editing GDC files, see Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files
(page 104).
Coordinate System Files
AutoCAD Map 3D uses certain files for storing coordinate system definitions
and defining datum (page 2059) transformation information.
Following is a list of these files. Files that should not be modified are marked
with an asterisk (*).
DescriptionFile
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within Australia. Default grid data files:
Agd66ToGda94.gdc
Vic_0799.gsb, nt_0599.gsb, and
TAS_1098.gsb. Default fallback datum
(page 2059): ASTRLA66.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within Australia. Default grid data file:
Agd84ToGda94.gdc
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 113
DescriptionFile
QLD_1299.gsb. Default fallback datum:
ASTRLA84-7P.
Grid Data Catalog file for determining the
geoid height for any position in the United
GeoidHeight.gdc
States. Default data files are
GEO96AN.GEO, GEO96AS.GEO,
GEO96HW.GEO, GEO96NC.GEO,
GEO96NE.GEO, GEO96NW.GEO,
GEO96PR.GEO, GEO96SC.GEO,
GEO96SE.GEO, and GEO96SW.GEO. Fall-
back datum definition is not recommen-
ded.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within North America. Default data files:
Nad27ToNad83.gdc
Conus.l?s, Alaska.l?s, PrVi.l?s, Hawaii.l?s,
STGEORGE.l?s, STLRNC.l?s, and ST-
PAUL.l?s. Default fallback datum: NAD27-
48.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within North America. Default grid data
Nad83ToHarn.gdc
files: alhpgn.l?s, azhpgn.l?s, cnhpgn.l?s,
cohpgn.l?s, cshpgn.l?s, emhpgn.l?s, ethp-
gn.l?s, flhpgn.l?s, gahpgn.l?s, hihpgn.l?s,
kshpgn.l?s, kyhpgn.l?s, lahpgn.l?s, mdhp-
gn.l?s, mehpgn.l?s, mihpgn.l?s, mshp-
gn.l?s, nbhpgn.l?s, ndhpgn.l?s, nehpgn.l?s,
nmhpgn.l?s, nvhpgn.l?s, nyhpgn.l?s, ohh-
pgn.l?s, okhpgn.l?s, pvhpgn.l?s, sdhp-
gn.l?s, tnhpgn.l?s, uthpgn.l?s, vahpgn.l?s,
wihpgn.l?s, wmhpgn.l?s, wohpgn.l?s,
wthpgn.l?s, wvhpgn.l?s, and wyhpgn.l?s.
Fallback datum definition is not recommen-
ded.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within New Zealand. Default grid data file:
Nzgd49ToNzgd2K.gdc
nzgd2kgrid9911.gsb. Default fallback
datum: NZGD49-7P.
114 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
DescriptionFile
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
between the RGF93 and NTF datums used
Rgf93ToNtf.gdc
within France. Default grid data file:
gr3df97a.txt. Default fallback datum: NTF-
G.
Grid Data Catalog file for computing the
modeled difference in orthometric height
Vertcon.gdc
between the North American Vertical
Datum of 1988 (NAVD 88) and the Nation-
al Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929 (NGVD
29) for a given location specified by latit-
ude and longitude. Default grid data files:
VERTCONC.94, VERTCONE.94, and VERT-
CONW.94. Fallback datum definition is not
recommended.
A binary compiled file used for storing co-
ordinate system category definitions. Also
called a dictionary file.
Category.csd *
Coordinate systems dictionary file.Coordsys.csd *
Datums dictionary file.Datums.csd *
Ellipsoids dictionary file.Elipsoid.csd *
Multiple Regression Transformation binary
files that store the coefficients required for
.mrt files *
multiple regression analysis. The base name
of the file is the same as the key name of
the datum with which it is associated.
Grid data files used by Vertcon.gdc..94 files *
Data files for determining the geoid height
for any position in the United States. These
.geo files *
are in GEOID96 format and are used by
GeoidHeight.gdc.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 115
DescriptionFile
Grid data files for Canada, Australia, and
New Zealand. Both latitude and longitude
.gsb files *
shifts (as well as accuracy values) are incor-
porated into a single .gsb file. The file
structure also supports the concept of
multiple grids, and subgrids within a major
grid.
Grid data files for United States geography..las and .los files *
See also:
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
■Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files (page 104)
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
■Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105)
To modify a coordinate system definition file
1Find the file to modify in the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder,
by default C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems.
2Make a backup copy of the file before modifying it.
NOTE Files that should not be modified are marked with an asterisk (*) in
the table on the Concept tab of this topic.
3Edit the file in a text editor.
Setting Up Object Classification
■Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 117)
■Defining an Object Class (page 119)
■Using Base Object Classes (page 122)
■Specifying Ranges and Defaults (page 124)
■Modifying an Object Class Definition (page 127)
■Creating an Object Classification File (page 128)
116 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
■Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 117)
■Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 995)
■To set up object classification (page 118)
■To define an object class (page 120)
■To base a new object class on an existing class (page 123)
■To specify that an object class can be used only as a base class (page 124)
■To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 125)
■To modify an object class definition (page 127)
■To create a new object classification file (page 129)
See also:
■Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 117)
Overview of Setting Up Object Classification
Object classes define a set of standard objects for your organization. When a
user adds one of these standard objects to a drawing that uses object
classification, the object is created using the properties you have defined and
is a “classified” object.
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
A classified object is created using the appropriate object type. It has the object
data, external data, and topology data that you have defined for the object
class, and all properties included in the object class definition have values
that fall within the range you specified for the property.
When users edit the properties of classified objects, they can enter only values
that fall within the ranges you have specified for the property.
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
See also:
■Using Object Classification (page 981)
Setting Up Object Classification | 117
■Understanding Object Classification (page 983)
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To set up object classification
■Determine the standard objects for your organization.
■Determine the hierarchy of object classes.
You can create categories of object classes and have all object classes in a
category inherit certain settings from the base object class for that category.
■Create a sample object that has all the data and properties that to include
in the object class definition file.
■Attach (page 995) an existing object definition file or create (page 129) a new
object class definition file.
■Define (page 120) the new object class.
To use this object class as a base class (page 123), set the default value and
the range of allowable values (page 125) for each object that you include.
■Store the object class definition file in a location that is accessible to all
the people in your organization who need it.
■You can attach the object class definition file to your drawing template so
it is attached to all new drawings.
Quick Reference
ATTACHDEF
Changes the current feature definition file
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Attach Definition
File.
Menu
ATTACHDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Attach Definition File
Task Pane
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog boxDialog Box
118 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
NEWDEF
Creates a new object class definition file
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Definition
File.
Menu
NEWDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ New Definition File
Task Pane
New Object Class Definition File dialog boxDialog Box
Defining an Object Class
Define an object class by selecting a sample object in your drawing, choosing
which of its properties to include in the definition, and specifying the allowable
settings.
For example, if you want to define an object class for maintenance hole covers,
select an existing maintenance hole cover in your drawing.
If you do not have a sample object in your drawing, create an object with the
data and property settings that you want to include in the object class
definition.
For each object class, AutoCAD Map 3D stores information on how to create
the object, what properties it should have, what data should be attached, and
what topology information should be associated with it. All objects you create
using this object class definition have the selected properties and values.
Setting Up Object Classification | 119
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
Editing Object Class Definitions
To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class Privileges (page
82).
WARNING Only one person should edit object class definitions at a time. If two
people edit at the same time, one set of edits may be lost.
If someone has recently edited the definition file, quit AutoCAD Map 3D and
restart to get the updated definitions.
Renaming an Object Class
When you rename an object class, you change the name only in the object
class definition file. Any objects tagged with the object class name are
unchanged. Since these objects point to a name that no longer exists in the
object class definition file, the objects become undefined. You can search for
these undefined objects and update their object class name.
See also:
■Using Base Object Classes (page 122)
■Modifying an Object Class Definition (page 127)
■Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 995)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To define an object class
1Select a sample object for the object class.
The sample object must have the properties, links, and attributes that
you want to include in the definition of the object class.
120 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2If an object definition file is not attached, enter attachdef at the command
prompt and attach the file.
3On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Object Classes.
Click Define Object Class.
4When prompted to select a sample object, select the sample object. Press
Enter.
5In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785), enter a name
and a description.
6To base this object class on an existing object class (page 123), select the
existing object class from the Based On list.
To use this object class as a base only, select Use As Base Object
Classification Only.
7On the Applies To tab, select the object type for this object class.
You must select the object type before you can select properties on the
Properties List tab.
For best results, select the most specific object type that applies to all
objects in this class.
NOTE If you plan to use this object class with objects from a drawing source,
do not select more than one object type.
8On the Properties List tab, select each of the properties you want to
include in the definition. For each property, enter a default value and a
range of possible values (page 125).
To specify a line weight, enter the decimal value as an integer. For
example, to specify a line weight of 0.13, enter 13.
To define a new property, click New Property. In the New Property dialog
box (page 1791), specify the category and name for the new property.
9On the Class Settings tab, select the object to use to create the feature.
For example, if you are defining an object class for roads, select Polyline
as the creation method.
NOTE You can select only objects that match the object type you selected
on the Applies To tab.
You can also specify the icon to display for the object class and whether
you want the object class to appear on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
Setting Up Object Classification | 121
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
Using Base Object Classes
You can create hierarchies of object classes. When you base a new object class
on an existing object class, the new object class has all the properties of the
base class.
You cannot change base properties, but you can modify their attributes,
including the default value and the range of allowable values, and you can
include additional properties.
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
Sample Use
1Define an object class called Roads with the basic properties that you
want to assign to all roads.
2Define object classes called Primary Roads, Local Roads, and Fire Roads,
and base each of them on Roads.
Because the new object classes are based on Roads, they include all the
properties selected for Roads.
122 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
When you select all objects in a base class, objects in object classes based
on that class are also selected.
Using Object Classes as Base Classes Only
Sometimes when you create a base class, you intend to use it only as a base
for other object classes and not to create objects in drawings. For example,
you may not want the to use the Roads object class to create roads. You want
people to create roads using the Primary Roads and Secondary Roads classes
that are based on the Roads class. You can specify that an object class can be
used only as a base class.
Editing Base Classes
To edit a definition for an object class, you must have a sample object in the
drawing. However, if you use an object class as a base class only, you will not
have any example objects. For these object classes, you must edit the .xml
definition file directly.
See also:
■Defining an Object Class (page 119)
■Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To base a new object class on an existing class
1Define the object class (page 120).
2For Based On, select the object class on which you want to base this new
object class.
The selected properties of the base object class appear in the list.
3You cannot clear any of the properties of the base object class, but you
can edit the property attributes, including the default and the range of
allowable values.
Setting Up Object Classification | 123
4Add any additional properties you want, and finish defining the object
class.
To specify that an object class can be used only as a base class
1Define the object class (page 120).
2In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785), select Use As
Base Object Classification Only.
Users can select objects using the base object class, but they cannot create
objects using it.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
Specifying Ranges and Defaults
When you define an object class, you can specify a range of allowable values
and a default value for new objects created using the object class.
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
When someone creates a new object using this object class, AutoCAD Map
3D creates the object using the current settings for the property. If the current
124 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
settings do not match the range, the object is created using the specified
default value.
When users edit the values for properties associated with the object class, they
can only values that are within the allowable range. (This applies only if you
edit the properties using the Object Class Data tab of the Properties palette.)
When users classify existing objects, they can skip objects whose values are
not within the specified range. If they do not skip these objects, the objects
are assigned the default values.
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
See also:
■Defining an Object Class (page 119)
■Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To specify a default value and a range for a property
1Create the object class and select the object type (page 120) on the Applies
To tab of the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785).
2On the Properties List tab, select a property.
3Under Property Attributes, for Default, enter the default value for this
property.
4For Range, specify the range of allowable values.
Click … to select from a list of properties if available, otherwise, enter
the values.
■To enter a list of values, separate them with commas, for example:
1,5,9
Setting Up Object Classification | 125
■To enter a range of numbers, enclose the first and last numbers in
square brackets and separate the numbers with a comma, for example:
[3,7]
■You can combine a range with additional values, for example: 1,[3,7],9
■To delete a range, enter two dashes ( "--" ).
Range values are case sensitive. For example, if you specify "Road" as an
allowable value in the range, "ROAD" will not match this value and will be
considered outside of the range.
See also:
■Color Range Editor dialog box (page 1783)
■Layer Range Editor dialog box (page 1789)
■Linetype Range Editor dialog box (page 1789)
■Lineweight Range Editor dialog box (page 1790)
■Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box (page 1792)
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
126 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Modifying an Object Class Definition
To add properties to an object class definition, you must have a sample object
that includes the properties you want to add.
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
Notes and Warnings
When you rename an object class, you change the name only in the object
classification file. Any objects tagged with the object class name are unchanged.
Since these objects point to an object class name that no longer exists in the
object classification file, the objects become undefined. You can search for
these undefined objects and update their object class name.
NOTE To modify an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges
(page 82).
See also:
■Defining an Object Class (page 119)
■Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
NOTE To modify an object class definition, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges (page 82).
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To modify an object class definition
1Open a drawing that contains an object classified with the object class
you want to modify.
To add properties to the object class definition, the sample object must
have the properties you want to add to the object class definition.
2If an object classification file is not attached, enter attachdef at the
command prompt and attach the file.
Setting Up Object Classification | 127
3On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click the object class
whose definition you want to modify. Click Define Object Class.
4Select the sample object. This object must be classified with the object
class you want to modify.
5In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785), modify
properties.
■You cannot change the object type used for the feature.
■On the Properties List tab, select or clear properties you want to include
in the definition. For each new property, enter a default value and a
range of possible values (page 125).
To specify a line weight, enter the decimal value as an integer. For
example, to specify a line weight of 0.13, enter 13.
■On the Class Settings tab, specify the icon to display for the feature
and whether the data appears on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
Creating an Object Classification File
The object classification file contains information on object classes you have
defined. You can create a new object classification file.
128 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
As a general rule, you want to use the same object classification file across all
your drawings. This ensures that you have the same object class definitions
for all source drawings attached to a drawing. You may want to attach the
object classification file to the drawing template, and make sure that everyone
has the same alias to the path.
If users in your organization share the object classification file, store it on the
network in a place accessible to all users.
To use object classification, users attach the object classification file to their
drawing. They can then create standard objects using the object class
definitions.
Only the object classes defined in the object classification file attached to a
drawing can be assigned to objects or used to create new objects.
NOTE To create a new object classification file, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges (page 83).
See also:
■Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 995)
■Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To create a new object classification file
1On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Object Classes.
Click New Definition File.
2In the New Object Class Definition File dialog box (page 1790), specify a
name for the new object classification file. Click OK.
NOTE To create a new object classification file, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges (page 83).
Setting Up Object Classification | 129
Quick Reference
NEWDEF
Creates a new object class definition file
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Definition
File.
Menu
NEWDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ New Definition File
Task Pane
New Object Class Definition File dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up for Digitizing
■Overview of Digitizing (page 130)
■Configuring the Digitizer (page 131)
■Registering the Map (page 133)
■Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 136)
See also:
■Digitizing Objects (page 1073)
■Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073)
■To prepare for digitizing (page 131)
■To configure the digitizer (page 132)
■To register the map (page 136)
■To set digitizing specifications (page 138)
Overview of Digitizing
Digitizing is the process of converting paper-based graphical information into
a digital format. When you digitize a map, you use drawing commands to
trace data from the paper map into a DWG file.
See also:
■Digitizing Objects (page 1073)
130 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Configuring the Digitizer (page 131)
■Registering the Map (page 133)
■Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 136)
To prepare for digitizing
1Configure the digitizer. (page 132)
2Register the map. (page 136)
3Set the digitizing specifications. (page 138)
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
TABLETCommand Line
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup.
Menu
MAPDIGISETUPCommand Line
Digitize Setup dialog boxDialog Box
Configuring the Digitizer
You must configure the digitizer so a movement on the digitizing tablet can
be recorded directly into an existing drawing file as you digitize.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 131
To configure the digitizing tablet, you define screen pointing areas. A screen
pointing area is a rectangular region on the digitizer surface within which the
digitizer acts like a mouse and can access windows, menus, and dialog boxes.
You can configure two screen pointing areas, one fixed and one floating.
When you digitize, the fixed screen pointing area is disabled. To access the
menus from the digitizer, use the floating screen pointing area.
You can toggle between the fixed and floating screen pointing areas with the
F12 key.
See also:
■Registering the Map (page 133)
■Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 136)
■Digitizing Objects (page 1073)
■Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073)
To configure the digitizer
1Click ➤ Options. In the Options dialog box, click the System tab.
2Select your digitizer in the Current Pointing Device list.
3Start the TABLET command, and use the CFG option to configure the
tablet. Specify the fixed screen pointing area and a floating screen pointing
area in a corner of your tablet area.
4Mark the floating screen area on your tablet with a marker or piece of
paper.
When you complete the configuration, two new options appear on the
status bar at the bottom of the AutoCAD Map 3D window. Tablet and
FLOAT let you toggle the two modes.
Use the Options dialog box to disable the mouse while you are digitizing.
1Click ➤ Options. In the Options dialog box, click the System tab.
2Under Accept Input From, select Digitizer Only.
3Click OK.
132 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
When you complete digitizing, return to the Options dialog box and select
the Digitizer And Mouse option to use both input devices.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
TABLETCommand Line
Registering the Map
Registration is the process of making a map's coordinate system correspond to
the Cartesian coordinate system used by AutoCAD Map 3D.
You select specific calibration and control points for each map that you digitize.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 133
The crosses in this illustration mark the digitizer calibration points.
Choosing the Number of Calibration Points
Selecting a maximum of nine points is a good rule; specifying more only
increases computation time with little increase in precision. If the original is
not badly distorted, four corner points and some intermediate points are
sufficient. It is more important to distribute the points evenly around the
whole map than to concentrate more points in an area.
Calibration Options
To complete the calibration, select one of the following transformation options:
■Orthogonal — Needs only two digitized and specified calibration points
to create a transformation consisting of arbitrary translation, uniform
scaling, and rotation. This method is not recommended unless only two
control points can be found.
■Affine — Requires three calibration points. Allows a tablet transformation
combining translation, independent X and Y scaling, rotation, and some
skewing. Provides an arbitrary linear transformation in two-dimensional
space. This is the preferred method for registering paper maps drawn in a
Cartesian coordinate system.
■Projective — Needs at least four calibration points. Makes a transformation
equivalent to a perspective projection of any plane onto another plane.
Allows for some stretching of an original paper drawing by different
134 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
amounts along a perspective projection. This is the best option for
orthophotos.
The TABLET command calculates the errors associated with the available
transformation options, depending on how many points you digitized. When
the calculations are complete, or when you cancel the calculations, a table
showing the results of your calibration appears.
There are four possible responses from the calibration calculations for each
transformation type:
■Exact — Number of points specified is correct for this type of
transformation.
■Success — More points specified than needed. For a Success, the RMS error
and standard deviation are reported.
■Impossible — Not enough points specified to define a transformation.
■Failure — Points specified are colinear or coincidental. The transformation
may not have a valid definition.
If you get either Impossible or Failure, do not use that transformation. If all
the results are Impossible or Failure, check the calibration on the digitizer,
recalibrate, and digitize the map again.
RMS error, Standard Deviation, and Residual Values
The RMS error indicates how uniform or extreme the required transformation
is: the lower the value, the better the calibration.
Standard deviation is reported at all calibration points. The residual error is
the difference between the actual calibration point and the computed
transformation point. A large difference indicates a procedural error. You may
have entered the wrong coordinates or digitized a wrong point.
If the RMS and standard deviation values seem high, you might have made
an error when entering location values or the map might have slipped during
calibration. In this case, restart the procedure to calibrate the digitizer.
See also:
■Configuring the Digitizer (page 131)
■Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 136)
■Digitizing Objects (page 1073)
Setting Up for Digitizing | 135
■Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073)
To register the map
1Tape the map on the tablet. The map on the tablet should be flat, with
no bumps or wrinkles, and securely fastened.
2Start the TABLET command and use the CAL option.
3Digitize the control points of the map, and enter X and Y coordinate
values for the locations.
4When you complete the control points, press Enter. Wait for the
calculations to complete.
5At the prompt, enter the calibration option to use. Select the
transformation that gave an Exact outcome. If all the transformations
were a Success, select the option with the lowest RMS and standard
deviation errors.
Quick Reference
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
TABLETCommand Line
Setting Digitizing Specifications
To use the options provided by the MAPDIGITIZE command, you must
configure the digitizer and register the map.
Attaching Data
You can link data to objects as you digitize. Although you can store data in
AutoCAD Map 3D as block attributes, you can perform more sophisticated
analysis of the data if you use one of the following methods:
■Data linked to an object is stored as object data in the drawing.
■Data linked to an object is stored in an external database.
136 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Label Point
A label point is the point used to insert text to describe the digitized object.
You can specify a label point for each object as you digitize.
Layer
Plan the layers you will use in your drawing. A layer is a logical grouping of
data, which simplifies organizing and viewing data. For more information,
look up "layers, creating" in the help index.
Each object that represents a different type of map data should go on a separate
layer. For example, a polyline representing a coastline could go on a layer
named COASTLINE, interstate highways on a layer named INTERSTATE, land
boundaries on a layer named LOTS.
If you have not established a scheme for layer names, you can create one using
the numeric feature-classification code found in some digital source data. For
example, major roads might be on a layer named "170-201". A better naming
convention combines names that suggest their function and a structure that
allows selection with wild cards and groups of layer names. For example, you
might decide that all topographic objects should go on layers beginning with
the letters TP. So you might put rivers on a layer named TP_RIVERS, and
contours on a layer named TP_CONTOURS. To freeze, thaw, lock, or unlock
all layers with topographic data, you use the expression TP*. For more
information on wild-card characters, look up "wild-card characters" in the
help index.
Block Name or Linetype
To represent nodes using blocks available in the current drawing, select a block
name or ACAD_POINT for the block name.
Choosing ACAD_POINT places a point object at each node position. For
information about changing the appearance of this point object, look up
DDPTYPE in the help index.
Wherever possible, use the linetypes supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D to
indicate different types of boundaries, road types, and waterways. Using
standard linetypes ensures consistency across maps and helps you keep track
of what you have digitized. Associate each linetype with a different layer.
Object Snap
Use object snap to tie nodes or segments to linear objects that are already in
place. For example, always use object snap to position junctions of pipes,
roads, or railways.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 137
Width
Linear objects that contain three-dimensional information cannot have a
width.
See also:
■Registering the Map (page 133)
■Configuring the Digitizer (page 131)
■Digitizing Objects (page 1073)
■Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073)
To set digitizing specifications
1At the command prompt, enter mapdigisetup.
2In the Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1617), select an object type.
Select Nodes to digitize points or blocks. Select Linear to digitize polylines.
3To attach data to objects as you digitize them, select Attach Data.
Click Data To Attach and select the table to use for the data. As you
digitize the objects, you are prompted for the data to attach to the object.
4To change the label point for objects as you digitize them, select Prompt
For Label Point.
5Specify the layer for new objects.
6Specify the block (for nodes) or the linetype (for linear objects) to use
when creating the new objects.
7Specify whether to snap to the closest endpoint (for nodes) or insertion
point (for linear objects).
8For nodes, select whether to specify the rotation and scale of each node
block.
For linear objects, select whether the objects are 2D or 3D. For 2D objects,
specify a width.
9Click OK to close the dialog box and save your settings.
138 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup.
Menu
MAPDIGISETUPCommand Line
Digitize Setup dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up Your Map File
See also:
■Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D (page 80)
■Setting Options (page 216)
■To log in to AutoCAD Map 3D (page 142)
■To assign coordinate systems (page 143)
■To attach drawings (page 154)
■To set up a query library (page 173)
■To set up annotation templates (page 186)
■To set up object data (page 198)
■To set up data sources for drawings (page 205)
Overview of Setting Up Your Map File
You can set up each map file you create to make your work easier and more
productive.
See also:
■Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D (page 80)
■Setting Options (page 216)
Setting Up Your Map File | 139
The following table summarizes your customization options for a map file.
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
Specify the coordinate system used for at-
tached drawings and for the current
drawing.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems (page
142)
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Co-
ordinate System panel ➤ As-
sign.
Assign a coordinate system.
Work with objects from other drawings by
attaching those drawings to the current
map and querying in the objects.
See Overview of Attaching Drawings (page
154)
Drag the drawing file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Attach drawings.
Specify how attached drawings work with
the current drawing and view information
about attached drawings.
See Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
(page 163).
In the Tool-based Ribbon
Workspace, click Home tab
➤ Data panel ➤ Define
Drawing Set.
Modify the settings for at-
tached drawings.
Save and reuse queries in a library.
See Overview of Using the Query Library
(page 174).
Set up queries. 1To save the current
query, click Home
tab ➤ Data pan-
el ➤ Define Query.
2To run a saved query,
click Create
tab ➤ Object Query
panel ➤ Run.
Define the information to display in an
annotation and the layout of that informa-
Click Annotate tab ➤ Map
Annotation panel ➤ Define
Template.
Define annotation tem-
plates.
tion. Then you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing.
See Defining Annotation Templates (page
190)
140 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
Create tables with fields for text and numer-
ical information. Attach records from the
table to objects.
See Creating an Object Data Table (page
200).
Click Map Setup tab ➤ At-
tribute Data panel ➤ Define
Object Data.
Set up object data.
Attach a database to your map and link
records from that table to objects in your
map.
See Attaching a Data Source (page 208).
Drag the database file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Set up data sources for
drawings.
Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D
When you log into AutoCAD Map 3D, your work environment is automatically
set up as it was last saved, including user privileges and user-specific options.
Depending on your organization, you may be required to log in. System
Administrators can set this AutoCAD Map 3D multi-user option.
If user login is not required, you can work with AutoCAD Map 3D without
logging in. However, you can log in at anytime to restore settings that you
have saved to your user name or to use privileges associated with your user
name.
User Privileges
To perform some AutoCAD Map 3D commands, you must be logged in as a
user with the appropriate privileges.
Example: To change Multi-user settings in the AutodCAD Map Options dialog
box, you must have Superuser privileges.
The default superuser name is SuperUser (not case sensitive), and the default
superuser password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive).
TIP You can customize many AutoCAD Map 3D settings. Some of these
customizations are saved to your user name. To customize the settings differently
for each drawing, set up multiple user names and log in with the appropriate
name for each drawing.
Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D | 141
See also:
■Setting Multi-user Options (page 226)
■Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights (page 82)
To log in to AutoCAD Map 3D
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ ➤ User Login.
2In the User Login dialog box (page 1937), for Login Name, enter the login
name provided to you by your system administrator.
3In the Password box, enter your password.
The default superuser login name is SuperUser (case insensitive) and the
password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive). If security is an issue, make sure
that you change the default superuser login and password. See To add a
new user (page 83).
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPLOGIN
Allows you to log in as an AutoCAD Map 3D user
Setup menu ➤ User Login
Menu
MAPLOGINCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ User
Login
Task Pane
User Login dialog boxDialog Box
Assigning Coordinate Systems
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can combine data from maps that use different
coordinate systems.
142 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
■Defining Coordinate Systems (page 89)
■Grid Data Files and Datum Shifts (page 102)
To assign coordinate systems
■To use coordinate systems with maps (page 145)
■To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing (page 146)
■To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing (page 147)
■To determine if a coordinate system is geodetic (page 149)
■To turn off a global coordinate system (page 150)
■To see the assigned coordinate system for a source drawing (page 151)
■To transform the coordinate system of a drawing (page 152)
Overview of Coordinate Systems
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can combine data from maps using different
coordinate systems. To do this, you specify the coordinate system used for
attached drawings and for the current drawing. When you bring objects from
attached drawings into the current drawing, the objects are transformed to
the coordinate system of the current drawing.
The coordinate system you assign to your drawing specifies the system that
was used when creating the drawing. For example, if you created a map using
Universal Transverse Mercator, Zone 27, US Survey Feet, you assign the code
UTM-27F to the map.
You specify the coordinate system used for the current drawing and for
attached source drawings before querying any items from the source drawings.
When you query objects from source drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D
automatically converts them to the coordinate system of the current drawing.
This operation is called coordinate transformation. When you save objects back
to source drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D reverses the conversion.
The coordinate system code and definition are stored in the drawing file. You
can share the drawing with anyone using Autodesk Map 2000 Release 4 or
later, and they will have the correct coordinate system.
When the coordinate system you select is assigned to the selected attached
drawings, a backup file, with a .bak extension, is made of each source drawing
before assigning the coordinate system information.
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 143
The coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D include the Universal
Transverse Mercator System and the State Plane coordinate systems used in
the USA, as well as many international coordinate systems used around the
world. For a complete listing of supported systems, see the Global Coordinate
System Manager dialog box.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to assign a coordinate
system to my map.
■Show me how to set a map to the co-
ordinate system of the data.
Procedure
■To assign a coordinate system to the
current drawing (page 147)
■To assign a coordinate system to a
source drawing (page 146)
■To turn off a global coordinate system
(page 150)
Tutorial
■Exercise 1: Create a map
Workflow
■Transform a DWG File to a Different
Coordinate System
■Combine Data with Different Coordin-
ate Systems
GIS Skill
■Reproject incoming data to a new co-
ordinate system
Related topics
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate
Systems (page 90)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum
Shift Issues (page 103)
144 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To use coordinate systems with maps
■Assign a coordinate system (page 145) to your current drawing and to the
source drawings.
■Set Coordinate System Options (page 230)
■Define a coordinate system (page 91)
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing
You must specify a coordinate system for each attached source drawing to
take advantage of the coordinate transformation capabilities in AutoCAD Map
3D.
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 145
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing (page 152)
■Viewing the Assigned Coordinate System for a Source Drawing (page 151)
■Removing an Assigned Coordinate System (page 150)
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Assign.
2In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1598), under
Source Drawings, click Select Drawings.
3In the Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box (page 1599),
select the source drawings. You cannot assign a coordinate system to a
source drawing that currently has queried objects in the current drawing.
4Under Source Drawings, enter the coordinate system code for the selected
source drawings.
If you do not know the code, click Select Coordinate System. In the Select
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select from a list
of available coordinate systems. You can also search for coordinate systems
by code or description using the Search box. Click Properties to view the
properties of the selected coordinate system.
To remove an assigned coordinate system, in the Code box in the Assign
Global Coordinate System dialog box, type a period.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
146 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing
You must specify a coordinate system for the current drawing to take advantage
of the coordinate transformation capabilities in AutoCAD Map 3D.
After you bring objects into the current drawing, do not change the coordinate
transformation options if you plan to save changes back to source drawings.
The save-back process uses the original settings to determine whether
adjustments are necessary to restore objects to the correct coordinate system.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing (page 152)
■Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing (page 145)
■Removing an Assigned Coordinate System (page 150)
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Assign.
2In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1598), under
Current Drawing, enter the coordinate system code for the current
drawing.
If you do not know the code, click Select Coordinate System. In the Select
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select from a list
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 147
of available coordinate systems. You can also search for coordinate systems
by code or description using the Search box. Click Properties to view the
properties of the selected coordinate system.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Using a Geodetic Coordinate System
All geographic data is created in some coordinate system, and in the context
of some datum (page 2059). A datum includes ellipsoid (page 2062) information
and a datum definition. For example, the Gauss-Kruger Conformal projection
system used in Germany uses the Bessel ellipsoid and Potsdam datum
definition. Some coordinate systems only specify the ellipsoid; these are
non-geodetic. Coordinate systems that specify the complete datum are
geodetic.
Most of the coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D are geodetic,
but about ten percent are non-geodetic. Therefore, you should determine
whether the coordinate systems you use are geodetic or non-geodetic before
you assign a coordinate system to a drawing. If you have data in a drawing
that uses a non-geodetic coordinate system, but do not know what datum the
data came from, you might introduce errors if you convert the drawing to a
geodetic coordinate system.
148 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing (page 152)
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
■Defining a New Datum (page 93)
■Defining an Ellipsoid (page 95)
To determine if a coordinate system is geodetic
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Assign.
2In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1598), under
Current Drawing or Source Drawings, click Select Coordinate System.
3In the Category list, select the category that contains the coordinate
system you want.
4In the Coordinate Systems In Category list, select a coordinate system.
5Click Properties.
The type of coordinate system is displayed under Coordinate System Type on
the General tab of the Global Coordinate Systems Properties dialog box. If the
coordinate system is geodetic, the datum (page 2059) is displayed in the Datum
box.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 149
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Removing an Assigned Coordinate System
For ADE data, using the AutoCAD Map 3D coordinate systems requires many
complex calculations that can decrease performance when querying objects
from attached drawings and saving back the objects. With FDO data these
calculations are unnecessary, so there is no performance impact.
You can turn off a coordinate system while working in a particular drawing.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
To turn off a global coordinate system
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Assign.
2In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1598), in the Code
box under Current Drawing, enter a period (.). Press Enter.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
150 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Viewing the Assigned Coordinate System for a Source Drawing
If the current drawing has an assigned coordinate system, you can view the
code in the Drawing Settings dialog box.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing (page 152)
■Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing (page 145)
■Removing an Assigned Coordinate System (page 150)
To see the assigned coordinate system for a source drawing
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤
Define Drawing Set.
2Click Drawing Settings.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the global coordinate system code for the active
drawing to the right of the drawing name.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Statistics
Menu
ADEDWGSTATCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Statistics
Task Pane
Drawing Statistics dialog boxDialog Box
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 151
Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing
You can transform an existing map from one coordinate system to another
by querying the objects from the attached source drawing into the current
drawing.
The original source drawing is unchanged, but the objects in the current
drawing use the new coordinate system.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing (page 145)
■Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing (page 147)
■Querying Objects from Attached Drawings (page 1235)
To transform the coordinate system of a drawing
1Open a new drawing.
2Attach the drawing whose coordinate system you want to transform. See
Attaching Drawings (page 154).
3In the new drawing, assign the new coordinate system to the current
drawing. See Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing (page
147).
4If you have not already assigned a coordinate system to the original
drawing, do that now. Assign the coordinate system that was used to
create the original drawing. See Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source
Drawing (page 146).
5Define a query to bring in all objects from the source drawing. The easiest
way to do this is to define a location condition and use the Boundary
Type "All." This retrieves all objects in the source drawing. See Finding
All Objects in a Specified Location (page 1241).
As the objects are retrieved from the source drawing into the current drawing,
they are transformed from the coordinate system of the source drawing to the
coordinate system of the current drawing.
Once the objects are in the new drawing, you can detach the source drawing
and save the new drawing. The objects are unchanged in the source drawing,
but they use the new coordinate system in the new drawing.
152 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 153
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Attaching Drawings
When you attach a drawing to the current drawing, you can work with any
objects and data in that drawing, edit them, and save them back to the attached
drawing.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
See also:
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
To attach drawings
■To create a drawing set (page 156)
■To attach drawings (page 158)
■To activate a drawing (page 160)
■To activate a group of drawings (page 160)
■To create a drive alias (page 161)
■To open an active attached drawing (page 163)
Overview of Attaching Drawings
You can work with objects from other drawings by attaching the other drawings
to the current drawing. The group of drawings attached to the current drawing
is called a drawing set.
Example: You have separate drawings for each quadrant of a town. You attach
those drawings to the current drawing, and then view all the quadrants
simultaneously.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
154 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Aligning Attached Drawings
If an attached drawing has a global coordinate system assigned to it, objects
from that drawing are automatically converted to their appropriate size and
location in the current drawing.
If an attached drawing does not have a global coordinate system assigned to
it, you can specify how to align objects from that drawing when they are
copied into the current drawing.
Current DrawingAttached Drawings
Tile drawings by specifying the drawing offset for each attached drawing, as
shown above.
For each attached drawing, you can specify a drawing offset. You can also
specify how objects from the attached drawings are scaled or rotated when
they are brought into the current drawing.
For information about passwords and security, see AutoCAD help.
See also:
■Setting Transformation Options (page 167)
Attaching Drawings | 155
■Viewing Information about Attached Drawings (page 171)
■Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 752)
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
To create a drawing set
1If necessary, create a drive alias (page 161).
2Attach the drawings (page 157) you plan to use with the project.
3Activate the drawings (page 160) to query.
If you no longer use an attached drawing with the current drawing, you can
remove the drawing from the drawing set.
To modify the settings for attached drawings, such as the offset, scale, or save
back extents, see Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163).
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
156 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Attaching a Drawing
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
Nested Drawings
If you attach a drawing that has other drawings already attached to it, those
other drawings appear in the list as nested drawings.
You can query objects from nested drawings. If a top-level drawing is not
active, you cannot see or activate nested drawings. However, if the top-level
drawing is active, you can deactivate a nested drawing.
Working with Xrefs
To query data in an external reference, delete the external reference from the
attached drawing and attach the reference drawing to the current drawing
The Order of Attached Drawings
The order in which you attach drawings can affect the properties of objects
retrieved by queries.
If two drawings use the same name for a block, layer, group, or text style,
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the definition from the first retrieved object that uses
that item.
For example, if you create a query to retrieve objects on LAYER_A, and LAYER_A
does not exist in the current drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the definition
of LAYER_A in the first active attached drawing that contains objects on
LAYER_A. Objects retrieved from LAYER_A in other drawings acquire the color
and linetype that is defined for LAYER_A in this drawing. This change also
applies when you save changes back to attached drawings.
TIP To maintain consistency between drawings, define blocks, layers, groups,
and text styles in the current drawing. For example, if you define a LAYER_A in
the current drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D applies the current drawing definition of
LAYER_A to objects retrieved from LAYER_A in all attached drawings, and when
you save back, applies the current drawing layer definition to the saved objects.
For information about passwords and security, see AutoCAD help.
Attaching Drawings | 157
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Viewing Information about Attached Drawings (page 171)
■Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 752)
■Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163)
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
To attach drawings
■Drag the file from Windows Explorer to the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
- or -
1Open the drawing to which you want to attach another drawing.
2In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤
Define Drawing Set.
To specify separate filters for file names and for descriptions, click Filter
and use the Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box (page 1922).
To change the drawing description, specify simple transformation settings,
or define save back extents, click Drawing Settings and use the Drawing
Settings dialog box (page 1923).
3In the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1918), click Attach.
4In the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box, select the drawings to attach.
Click Add.
To modify the settings for attached drawings, such as the offset, scale, or save
back extents, see Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163).
For information on viewing the attached drawings, see Viewing All Objects
in Selected Attached Drawings (page 745).
158 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Activating a Drawing
When you run a query to retrieve objects from attached drawings, AutoCAD
Map 3D retrieves objects only from active drawings.
You cannot make a drawing active or inactive when there are locked objects
in the drawing.
NOTE If an attached drawing is active in the current drawing, you cannot open
that drawing directly.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
■Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163)
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
Attaching Drawings | 159
To activate a drawing
➤ In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click the drawing name.
Click Activate.
NOTE To activate a nested drawing, you must first activate the drawing to which
it is attached.
To activate a group of drawings
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤
Define Drawing Set.
2Select the drawings to activate.
3Click Activate.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Drive Alias
If you plan to share drawings with other users, use drive aliases to specify the
location of attached drawings.
Example: You connect to the drawing server as drive J, but another user
connects as drive K. This makes it difficult to share drawings, since your
drawing specifies J as the location for the attached files. However, if you both
160 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
assign the same drive alias to the server, such as ProjectMaps, you can specify
the location of the attached drawings by this drive alias.
AutoCAD Map 3D provides a default drive alias called C. To store drawings
in a location other than drive C, create a drive alias for the location.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305). Geospatial connections do not require drive aliases.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
■Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163)
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305). Geospatial connections do not require drive aliases.
To create a drive alias
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤
Define Drawing Set.
2In the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box, click Attach.
3In the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box, click .
4In the Drive Alias Administration dialog box (page 1928), type a name for
the alias.
The name must use only alphanumeric characters (including hyphen
and underscore), contain no spaces or colons, and start with a character.
NOTE If you are creating a drive alias for a drawing with an undefined alias,
type that alias name exactly.
5Specify a path for the new alias.
6Click Add.
Attaching Drawings | 161
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog BoxDialog Box
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Opening an Active Attached Drawing
You cannot directly open an attached drawing that is activated in the current
drawing. You must first deactivate it in the current drawing.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
■Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163)
162 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
To open an active attached drawing
1Do one of the following:
■Deactivate (page 160) the attached drawing.
■Close the drawing containing the attached drawing.
2To open the drawing, click ➤ Open ➤ Drawing.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
■Overview of Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 164)
■Creating a Drawing Description (page 166)
■Setting Transformation Options (page 167)
■Setting Save Back Extents (page 170)
■Viewing Information about Attached Drawings (page 171)
Attaching Drawings | 163
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
■To create a drawing description (page 166)
■To set transformation options (page 169)
■To set save back extents (page 170)
■To view information about attached drawings (page 172)
Overview of Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
You can specify how attached drawings work with the current drawing. You
can also view information about attached drawings.
NOTE You cannot specify drawing settings for nested drawings.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
Use this method...To do this...
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define
Create a drawing description
Drawing Set. Click the Drawing Settings
tab.
See Creating a Drawing Description (page
166).
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define
Specify how to adjust the scale, rotation,
and XY offset of objects retrieved from an
attached drawing. Drawing Set.Click the Drawing Settings
tab.
See Setting Transformation Options (page
167).
164 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Use this method...To do this...
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define
Specify save back extents that are different
from the drawing extents.
Drawing Set.Click the Drawing Settings
tab.
See Setting Save Back Extents (page 170).
In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane,
right-click Drawings. Click Statistics.
See Viewing Information about Attached
Drawings (page 171).
Vew information about attached drawings
such as the number and type of objects,
symbol tables, object data tables, and ob-
ject classes.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Statistics
Menu
ADEDWGSTATCommand Line
Attaching Drawings | 165
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Statistics
Task Pane
Drawing Statistics dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Drawing Description
Providing a description for an attached drawing helps you and other users
identify the drawing more easily.
TIP You can filter a drawing list by the drawing description. For example, when
you are selecting drawings to Quick View, you could display only drawings with
the word 'sewer' in their description.
NOTE Drawing descriptions apply to drawings only. there is no equivalent for
geospatial feature sources.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
To create a drawing description
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤
Define Drawing Set.
2Click Drawing Settings.
3In the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1923), select the drawing for which
you want to add a description.
4In the Drawing Description box, enter a description.
5Click Apply.
If you later want to modify the description, return to the Drawing Settings
dialog box and enter a new description.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
166 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Transformation Options
Set simple transformation options to specify how to adjust the scale, rotation,
and XY offset of objects retrieved from an attached drawing. Use these settings
to make items from the attached drawings appear at the proper orientation,
size, and placement in the current drawing.
AutoCAD Map 3D stores this information with the current drawing. The
attached drawing does not change, which is useful for overlaying drawings
or tiling them.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. There is no equivalent
for geospatial feature data.
Attaching Drawings | 167
You can rotate objects from attached drawings so they
match the rotation of the current drawing.
Example: You have individual maps for each square-mile sector. You create a
drawing that encompasses a 5-square mile area, and you attach each of the
square-mile maps. You set the appropriate offset for each attached map so it
appears correctly in the current drawing.
If you save edited objects back to attached drawings, the objects are restored
to their original rotation, scale, and offset.
NOTE If you have set a global coordinate system code, these simple transformation
options are unavailable.
Use these simple transformation settings to temporarily adjust objects from
attached drawings so they align correctly in the current drawing. You can also
permanently edit the location, rotation, or scale of an object.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
■Moving, Rotating, and Scaling an Object (page 931)
168 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for
geospatial feature data.
To set transformation options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤
Define Drawing Set.
2Click Drawing Settings.
3In the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1923), select the drawing whose
objects you want to transform.
4Under Simple Transformation, select On/Off.
5In the Scale box, enter the scale factor to scale the objects.
A value of 2 doubles the size of objects; a value of 0.5, halves the size of
objects.
6In the Rotation box, enter the angle in degrees to rotate the objects.
7In the Offset (X,Y) boxes, enter the amount to offset objects using the
drawing units from the attached drawing.
8To select coordinates manually, click Pick.
When prompted, specify the points on which to base the simple
transformation. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the scale, rotation, and
offset based on the four points you specify; the base point for the rotation
is 0,0.
9Click Apply.
This procedure transforms objects from the attached drawing as they are
queried into the current drawing. When objects are saved back to the attached
drawing, the transformation is undone. To permanently transform selected
objects, use the ADETRANSFORM (page 931)command.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Attaching Drawings | 169
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Save Back Extents
For an attached drawing, you can specify save back extents that are different
from the drawing extents.
This is useful if you save objects back to attached drawings based on their
location. If you do not specify save back extents, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the
attached drawing extents as the save back extents.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. There is no equivalent
for geospatial feature data.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
■Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 752)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for
geospatial feature data.
To set save back extents
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤
Define Drawing Set.
2Click Drawing Settings.
3In the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1923), select the drawing for which
you want to define save back extents.
4Under Save Back Extents, click Define <.
170 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
5Specify the boundary by using your pointing device or by entering
coordinates on the command line. When you finish specifying the
boundary, press Enter.
6Click Apply.
TIP To view the save back extents, click Show <.
NOTE Simple transformations modify the default save back extents but do not
affect user-defined save back extents.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Viewing Information about Attached Drawings
Vew information about attached drawings such as the number and type of
objects, symbol tables, object data tables, and object classes:
■Object Counts — The number and type of objects in the attached drawing.
■Symbol Tables — Displays information stored in symbol tables, for example,
block names, layer names, linetypes, and registered applications (regapps).
NOTE Regapps are registered applications that contain extended data (Xdata).
■Object Data — Displays information stored in object data.
Attaching Drawings | 171
■Object Classes — Displays object classes used in the selected drawings and
the number of objects in each object class.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To view information for
geospatial feature data, see Getting Information about Features (page 1125).
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
■Editing Data in Attached Drawings (page 729)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To view information for
geospatial feature data, see Getting Information about Features (page 1125).
To view information about attached drawings
1In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Drawings. Click
Statistics.
2In the Drawing Statistics dialog box (page 1926), select drawings from the
Active Drawings list.
3Click a button:
■Object Counts displays the number of each type of object in the
selected drawings.
■Symbol Tables displays all symbol tables in the selected drawings.
■Object Data displays all link templates, object data tables, and
attributes.
■Object Classes displays objects used in the selected drawings and the
type of data in each object class.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
172 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Statistics
Menu
ADEDWGSTATCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Statistics
Task Pane
Drawing Statistics dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up a Query Library
You can save and organize your drawing queries in the query library.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
■Defining Queries (page 1218)
■Executing Queries (page 1287)
To set up a query library
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
■To use the query library (page 174)
■To save a query (page 177)
■To run a query from the Query Library (page 178)
■To run a query from Map Explorer (page 179)
■To run an external query (page 179)
■To reference an external query in the query library (page 180)
■To add a category to the query library (page 182)
■To edit a query saved with the current drawing (page 184)
■To edit an external query (page 184)
Setting Up a Query Library | 173
Overview of Using the Query Library
If you plan to run a query more than once, you can save it. Once you have
saved a query, you can run it anytime.
■Saving a Query (page 176)— Save the current query to the query library or
to an external file.
■Running a Saved Query (page 178)— Run a query saved in the query library.
Each drawing has a query library where you can organize your saved queries
into categories.
■Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180)
■Using Query Library Categories (page 181)
■Editing a Saved Query (page 183)
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
■Defining Queries (page 1237)
■Executing Queries (page 1287)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To use the query library
1On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click Query Library. Click
Administration.
2In the Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1858), under Category,
select the category for the query you want, or click New to create a new
category (page 182).
3Under Available Queries, select the query.
174 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
You can assign the query to a different category, change the name,
description, or location of the query, or add an external query to the
library.
4If you have modified the settings for an existing query, click Update. If
you have added a new query, click Add.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library
Menu
Query Library
Icon
ADEQUERYLIBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Query
Library ➤ Administration
Task Pane
Query Library Administration dialog boxDialog Box
ADERUNQUERY
Runs queries in the Query Library
Click Map ➤ Query ➤ Run Topology Query.
Menu
Run Query
Icon
ADERUNQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Execute
As Preview-or- Right-click Current Query ➤ Execute
Task Pane
As Defined-or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As
Preview-or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As Defined
Run Library Query dialog boxDialog Box
ADERUNXQUERY
Setting Up a Query Library | 175
Runs externally saved queries
Edit menu ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run
External Query
Menu
ADERUNXQUERYCommand Line
Saving a Query
If you plan to use a query more than once, you can save it.
You can save the query with the current drawing, or you can save it to an
external file. Saving to an external file is useful if you want to share a query
with another user or use it in another drawing.
If you save the query to an external file you can specify several additional
settings:
■Save List Of Active Drawings — Sets the drawing status to Active for
drawings involved in the saved query.
■Save Location Coordinates — Stores the coordinates used for location
queries. If you do not save the location query coordinates, AutoCAD Map
3D prompts you for them when you execute the query.
■Keep Reference In Library — Maintains a list of the external queries in the
Query Library. If you plan to reference the query in the Query Library, you
must provide a name and description for it.
■Save Alter Properties — Saves the property alteration definition with the
query.
■Auto Execute — Executes the query in addition to loading it. If you do not
select Auto Execute, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the query in the Define
Query dialog box and waits for you to click Execute Query. Do not select
this option if you want to modify a query before you run it.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
■Overview of Queries (page 1235)
■Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287)
176 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To save a query
1Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query.
2Make sure the query to save is the current query. If it is not, modify the
current query or click load a different query.
3Click Save Query.
4In the Save Current Query dialog box (page 1862), select a category for the
query.
5Enter a name and description for the query.
6Select any other query options you want.
7To save the query to an external file, select Save To External File and
specify a file name.
To display the external query in the Run Library Query dialog box and
the Query Library Administration dialog box, select Keep Reference In
Library.
8Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
Setting Up a Query Library | 177
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Running a Saved Query
After you save queries, you can load, revise, and execute them.
NOTE If you plan to modify an externally saved query before executing it, do
not set Auto Execute in the Save Current Query dialog box. That way, when you
run the query, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the query in the Define Query dialog
box but does not execute it.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
■Overview of Queries (page 1235)
■Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287)
■Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
■To run a query from the Query Library (page 178)
■To run a query from Map Explorer (page 179)
■To run an external query (page 179)
To run a query from the Query Library
1Click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ Run.
2In the Run Library Query dialog box (page 1861), select the category for
the query.
178 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
3Select the query in the Available Queries list.
4Click Execute Query.
To run a query from Map Explorer
1On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click the query name.
2Do one of the following:
■Click Execute As Preview to execute the query as a preview query,
regardless of whether it was defined as a preview, draw, or report mode
query.
■Click Execute As Defined to execute the query using the query mode
with which it was defined.
To run an external query
1Click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ External.
2In the Run External Query dialog box, select the query.
3Click OK.
If you turned off the Auto Execute option when you saved the query, the
query loads but does not execute. To execute the query, click Home tab ➤ Data
panel ➤ Define Query. In the Define Query dialog box, click Execute
Query.
Quick Reference
ADERUNQUERY
Runs queries in the Query Library
Click Map ➤ Query ➤ Run Topology Query.
Menu
Run Query
Icon
ADERUNQUERYCommand Line
Setting Up a Query Library | 179
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Execute
As Preview-or- Right-click Current Query ➤ Execute
Task Pane
As Defined-or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As
Preview-or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As Defined
Run Library Query dialog boxDialog Box
ADERUNXQUERY
Runs externally saved queries
Edit menu ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run
External Query
Menu
ADERUNXQUERYCommand Line
Adding an External Query to Your Library
You can list an external query in the query library. By adding a reference to
the external query to the library, you can organize the query with your other
queries. In addition, you can give the query a name and a description to help
you identify it.
You can add an external query to the Query Library for more than one drawing.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
■Overview of Queries (page 1235)
■Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To reference an external query in the query library
1Click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ Library.
180 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2In the Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1858), select a
category.
3Under Selected Query, make sure that the Query Type is set to External.
4Click Browse. Select the file that contains the external query.
5Specify a name and description for the query.
6Click OK.
To execute the query, click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ Run.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library
Menu
Query Library
Icon
ADEQUERYLIBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Query
Library ➤ Administration
Task Pane
Query Library Administration dialog boxDialog Box
Using Query Library Categories
The Query Library lets you organize your queries into categories.
You can move a query to a new category, or change the name or description
of a query. If you move an external query, you can specify the new location
for the query.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
Setting Up a Query Library | 181
See also:
■Overview of Queries (page 1235)
■Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287)
■Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To add a category to the query library
1Click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ Library.
2In the Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1858), do one of the
following:
■To add a category, under Category, click New.
Enter a name for the category. Click OK. Do not include spaces in the
name.
■To assign a query to a different category, under Category, select the
current category of the query.
From the Available Queries list, select the query. Click Category.
In the Change Category dialog box (page 1835), under New Category,
select the new category for the query. Click OK.
■To change the name or description of a query, under Category, select
the category for the query.
Under Available Queries, select the query.
Under Selected Query, edit the name or description of the query . For
external queries, you can specify a new location for the query.
Click Update.
■To delete a category, select the category and click Remove.
You cannot remove a category that contains queries. You must first
delete the queries or move the queries to a different category and then
remove the empty category.
■To rename a category, select the category and click Rename.
All queries assigned to the previous category name are assigned to the
new name. The old category name no longer exists.
182 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library
Menu
Query Library
Icon
ADEQUERYLIBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Query
Library ➤ Administration
Task Pane
Query Library Administration dialog boxDialog Box
Editing a Saved Query
Once you have saved a query to the query library, you can reload the query
at any time to review it or revise it.
If you save the query to an external file, it is saved as an AutoLISP script. Using
a text editor, you can modify an external query file and include AutoLISP API
commands. For more information, refer to "Editing Query Files", under "Using
Interface Functions" in the online AutoCAD Map 3D AutoLISP Reference.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
■Overview of Queries (page 1235)
■Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287)
■Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180)
Setting Up a Query Library | 183
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To edit a query saved with the current drawing
1On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click a query name. Click
Edit. The Define Query dialog box (page 1838) appears with the selected
query loaded.
2Modify any conditions (page 1258).
3Modify any property alterations (page 1286).
4In the Define Query dialog box, click Save.
To save the changes to a new query, enter a new name and description.
Click OK.
5In the Define Query dialog box, click OK to save your changes without
running the query.
To edit an external query
1Click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ External.
2In the Run External Query dialog box, select the query.
3Click OK.
The external query runs and becomes the current query.
4Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query.
5Modify any conditions (page 1258).
6Modify any property alterations (page 1286).
7Click Save.
NOTE To be able to edit an external query before you execute it, do not set Auto
Execute in the Save Current Query dialog box. That way, when you execute the
query, AutoCAD Map 3D loads the query in the Define Query dialog box but does
not execute it.
184 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up Annotation Templates
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to label features.
■Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
■Show me how to place a legend in the
map and specify its contents.
■Show me how to edit the table style for
a legend.
Procedure
■To label features (page 1093)
■To insert annotation (page 1103)
■To create a legend (page 1118)
Tutorial
■Tutorial: Annotating Your Map
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 185
■Exercise 3: Add labels
■Lesson 6: Create a Legend
Workflow
■Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skill
■Label features and optimize placement.
■Create and edit a legend.
Related topics
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Setting Up Annotation Templates
(page 185)
To set up annotation templates
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
■To set up annotation (page 189)
■To make an XREFed drawing with annotation templates available in the
current drawing (page 189)
■To define an annotation template (page 192)
■To change an annotation template (page 196)
■To delete all references to a selected annotation template (page 197)
■To delete an annotation template (page 197)
Overview of Annotation Templates
In an annotation template, you define the information to display in the
annotation and the layout of that information. Annotation templates are
stored as specially named blocks within your drawing.
After you create an annotation template, you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing. Creating annotation templates and inserting
annotation is like creating and inserting blocks.
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
186 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Labeling Objects Using Annotation Templates
Use annotation to label drawing objects with data values, such as the following:
■Attributes, such as object data (page 2070) or linked external data (page 2062)
■Display properties, such as line weight
■Geometric values, such as line direction
■Graphics, such as arrows, static text, or other geometry, added with
standard AutoCAD drawing commands
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
You create one “tag” for each item in the annotation template. For example,
one tag might contain the static text, “Area:” followed by a tag containing
the property .AREA. You use the Block Editor to position the tags relative to
each other. When you attach the annotation to an object, the values appear
in the same position as their tags.
Annotation templates are stored in the drawing as blocks. Unlike regular
blocks, annotation templates have the following characteristics:
■The block name is prefixed with "ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_" followed by
the annotation template name as specified in the Define Annotation
Template dialog box (page 1572).
■The extension dictionary of the block contains special table objects.
Using Expressions in Annotation Templates
You can insert static text in the annotation template. It will appear on each
object to which you attach annotation.
You can also specify properties or define values using expressions. The values
of the properties or expressions are determined when the annotation is
inserted.
For example, create an annotation template that specifies the text “Diameter”
followed by an expression that calculates the diameter of a circle. Then insert
instances of the annotation template on several circle objects. Each one will
display “Diameter,” followed by that circle’s diameter.
When you change the text, properties, or expressions in an annotation
template, existing annotations based on that template do not change. Use the
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 187
Refresh or Update command to apply your changes to the annotations that
use the template you changed.
Using Annotation Templates from XREFs
To use an annotation template stored in another drawing, use the XBIND
command to attach that drawing as an XREF.
Block names in the XREFed drawing have a prefix that consists of the XREF
drawing file name followed by a vertical bar. Because the annotation
commands identify annotation templates by looking for the
"ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_" at the beginning of the block name, you must
rename the templates in the XREFed drawing to make them available in the
current drawing.
For more information, see Bind External References in the AutoCAD help.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to label features.
■Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
■Show me how to place a legend in the
map and specify its contents.
■Show me how to edit the table style for
a legend.
Procedure
■To label features (page 1093)
■To insert annotation (page 1103)
■To create a legend (page 1118)
Tutorial
■Tutorial: Annotating Your Map
■Exercise 3: Add labels
■Lesson 6: Create a Legend
Workflow
■Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skill
■Label features and optimize placement.
188 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Create and edit a legend.
Related topics
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Setting Up Annotation Templates
(page 185)
See also:
■Overview of Annotation (page 1100)
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
To set up annotation
1Define an annotation template. (page 192)
2Attach annotation to objects. (page 1103)
3If you BIND an XREFed drawing containing annotation templates, remove
the prefix from the XREFed annotation template block names to make
them available in the current drawing.
To make an XREFed drawing with annotation templates available in the
current drawing
1Using the RENAME command, select Blocks from the Named Objects list.
2Select the annotation template from the list of blocks in the Items list.
You will find blocks with names like
xrefdwgname$0$ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_templatename.
3Remove xrefdwgname$0$ from the name of each template you want.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ķ.
Menu
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 189
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATECommand Line
Define Annotation Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
Edit Annotation Text
Icon
MAPANNTEXTCommand Line
Annotation Text dialog boxDialog Box
Defining Annotation Templates
An annotation template can include text and graphics.
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
You create one “tag” for each item in the annotation template. For example,
one tag might contain the static text, “Area:” followed by a tag containing
the property .AREA. You use the Block Editor to position the tags relative to
each other. When you attach the annotation to an object, the values appear
in the same position as their tags.
You can add graphics by drawing them in the Block Editor. You determine
the text contents using static text, properties, and expressions.
The specific values of the properties and expressions are determined when
you attach an annotation template to drawing objects.
For example, you can define the annotation template to include a static label
(such as “Area:”), followed by a property (for example, .AREA). You can specify
the label location as .CENTER. When you attach the annotation template to
a drawing object, the annotation appears in the center of that object and
displays the word Area, followed by the area of that object.
When you change the text, properties, or expressions in an annotation
template, the existing annotations based on that template do not change. Use
the Refresh or the Update command to apply the changes.
190 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to label features.
■Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
■Show me how to place a legend in the
map and specify its contents.
■Show me how to edit the table style for
a legend.
Procedure
■To label features (page 1093)
■To insert annotation (page 1103)
■To create a legend (page 1118)
Tutorial
■Tutorial: Annotating Your Map
■Exercise 3: Add labels
■Lesson 6: Create a Legend
Workflow
■Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skill
■Label features and optimize placement.
■Create and edit a legend.
Related topics
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Setting Up Annotation Templates
(page 185)
See also:
■Attaching Annotation to Objects (page 1103)
■Refreshing Annotation (page 1105)
■Updating Annotation (page 1106)
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 191
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
To define an annotation template
1Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Define Template.
2In the Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 1572), click New.
You can change the other settings in this dialog box later in the procedure.
3In the New Annotation Template Name dialog box (page 1576), type a name
for the template, and click OK.
The ribbon changes to show the Block Editor tab. You use the Block Editor
to define the annotation template, which is a special type of block.
4Click Block Editor tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Edit Annotation Text
Then press Enter to create a new annotation tag.
A single annotation template can contain multiple tags, as well as graphic
elements.
5In the Annotation Text dialog box (page 1570), specify the text to include
in this annotation tag.
■For Attribute, enter a Tag name and Value for the annotation text.
For the value, enter static text or click to use the Expression
Chooser to specify an expression whose value varies depending on
the object being annotated.
The Expression Chooser lists the properties, object data, block
attributes, and other data associated with the current drawing.
NOTE Each tag name must be unique within the template.
■Specify the Object Properties and Text Options for the annotation
text.
For most of the options, you can choose a static value from the
dropdown list or specify an expression that is evaluated against the
object when you insert the annotation.
192 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Click to create an expression. Within the Edit Expression dialog
box, click to select from a list of available properties and attributes.
Click to use a value from within the Block Editor.
If you select ByBlock for Color or Lineweight, the settings in the Define
Annotation Template dialog box will be used.
■Click OK to return to the Block Editor.
6In the Block Editor, click a location for this tag.
Since an annotation template can have multiple tags, you need to specify
their locations relative to each other. Clicking a location here allows you
to position this tag relative to any others in the template. When you
insert an annotation, it appears at the Insertion Point specified in the
Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 1572), with all its tags shown
in their relative locations, as defined in the template.
7Optionally, to include graphical elements as a part of the annotations,
create them in the Block Editor.
Use AutoCAD drawing commands to create geometry or insert graphical
elements.
8When you finish adding elements to the template, click Close Block
Editor on the Block Editor toolbar.
You are prompted to save your changes. When you do, the Define
Annotation Template dialog box is redisplayed.
9In the Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 1572), specify default
properties and insertion options.
These settings control the appearance of the annotation template block.
If you selected ByBlock for Color or Lineweight in the Annotation Text
dialog box, these are the settings that will be used.
10 Click OK.
The Block Editor closes and your drawing is redisplayed. You can now
attach the annotation template to a drawing object or objects (page 1103).
When you do, the annotation (showing the appropriate values and
settings for the selected object) will appear.
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 193
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ķ.
Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATECommand Line
Define Annotation Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
Edit Annotation Text
Icon
MAPANNTEXTCommand Line
Annotation Text dialog boxDialog Box
Changing Annotation Templates
You can change the contents of an existing template. For example, you can
change the expression that determines the value or location of the text
element. You can add or remove text or graphics.
If you change only the graphic elements in the template, the elements update
automatically. However, if you change text elements, refresh or update the
annotations associated with that template to see the changes in your drawing.
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to label features.
■Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
194 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Show me how to place a legend in the
map and specify its contents.
■Show me how to edit the table style for
a legend.
Procedure
■To label features (page 1093)
■To insert annotation (page 1103)
■To create a legend (page 1118)
Tutorial
■Tutorial: Annotating Your Map
■Exercise 3: Add labels
■Lesson 6: Create a Legend
Workflow
■Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skill
■Label features and optimize placement.
■Create and edit a legend.
Related topics
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Setting Up Annotation Templates
(page 185)
See also:
■Overview of Annotation (page 1100)
■Refreshing Annotation (page 1105)
■Updating Annotation (page 1106)
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 195
To change an annotation template
1Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Define Template.
2In the Template Name list, click the template to change.
3Do one or more of the following:
■Click Copy to make a copy of the template.
■Click Rename to rename the template.
■Click Edit Template Contents to modify the text or graphical elements
of the template.
■Change any properties or insertion options.
See Defining Annotation Templates (page 190) for information about
changing the contents, properties, or options for an annotation template.
4If you changed any text elements, use Refresh (page 1105) or Update (page
1106) to apply your changes to existing annotations that use this template.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ķ.
Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATECommand Line
Define Annotation Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
Edit Annotation Text
Icon
MAPANNTEXTCommand Line
196 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Annotation Text dialog boxDialog Box
Deleting Annotation Templates
You can delete an annotation template only if you first delete all references
to that template from the drawing.
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
See also:
■Overview of Annotation (page 1100)
■Deleting Annotation from Drawings (page 1108)
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
To delete all references to a selected annotation template
1Delete all references to the annotation template you plan to delete.
2Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Delete Annotation.
3Select an annotation template. Click OK.
All annotation based on the selected template is deleted.
To delete an annotation template
1Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Define Template.
2Select the annotation template to delete from the Template Name list.
3Click Delete.
The selected annotation template is deleted.
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 197
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ķ.
Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATECommand Line
Define Annotation Template dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up Object Data
Object data is attribute data that is attached to individual objects and stored
in tables in the drawing. To use object data, first define the format for the
table, and then create each record as you attach it to an object.
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
See also:
■Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061)
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data (page 1245)
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 1267)
To set up object data
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
■To set up object data (page 199)
■To create an object data table (page 201)
■To modify an object data table (page 203)
198 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To rename or remove an object data table (page 203)
Overview of Setting Up Object Data
Object data tables store text and numerical information related to an object.
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
See also:
■Creating an Object Data Table (page 200)
■Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061)
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data (page 1245)
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 1267)
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
To set up object data
1Specify a set of fields for the table. (page 200)
2Assign a name, description, data type, and default value to each field.
3Use a separate procedure (page 1064) to attach a record from the table to
an object.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data
Menu
Setting Up Object Data | 199
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATACommand Line
Define Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Creating an Object Data Table
You can create multiple object data tables in a single drawing. For example,
you can create one table with pipe flow information and a separate table with
inspection information.
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
Using the Same Table Name in Other Drawings
Take care when naming your tables. If you use the same table name in more
than one source drawing, be sure that all tables with same name have the
same fields and field types. If your current drawing has more than one source
drawing with the same object data table name, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the
object table definition (or structure) for the first drawing that you activate. If
the other source drawings have tables with the same name but with different
fields, you cannot use those tables in the current drawing. If necessary, you
can rename or redefine an object data table.
See also:
■Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061)
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data (page 1245)
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 1267)
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
200 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To create an object data table
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ Define Object Data.
2In the Define Object Data dialog box (page 1805), select a table to modify,
or click New Table to create a new table.
■If you select an existing table, the Object Data Fields list displays fields
already defined for the table.
■If you click New Table, enter a name for the new table.
3To create a new data field, fill in the Field Definition area:
■Enter a name and description for the field.
■Select the field type. The type specifies what kind of information can
be entered in the field. For example, if you specify a numeric type,
you cannot enter letters in the field.
■Specify the default value for the field. This value is attached to the
object unless you change it.
4Click Add to add the new field to the table.
5Add any additional fields to the table.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data
Menu
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATACommand Line
Define Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up Object Data | 201
Modifying an Object Data Table
You can add, modify, and delete fields in newly defined object data tables
until you perform a save operation (either saving objects back to source
drawings or saving the current drawing). Once you perform a save operation,
only a Superuser can modify the table. Also, if you have already queried any
object from a source drawing, you cannot modify an object data table.
When you modify an object data field, AutoCAD Map 3D updates all instances
of the field attached to objects. If the object data table is large, this process
can take a long time.
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
Renaming and Deleting Tables
If you have Superuser privileges, you can rename or delete object data tables.
if you have already queried any object from a source drawing, you cannot
rename or delete an object data table .
If you rename a table, the new name must not duplicate an existing table
name.
WARNING When you delete an object data table from a drawing, the table is
deleted from all attached, active source drawings.
See also:
■Creating an Object Data Table (page 200)
■Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061)
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data (page 1245)
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 1267)
Use the MAPLOGIN command to log in as a Superuser, or contact your system
administrator.
202 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
To modify an object data table
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ Define Object Data.
2In the Define Object Data dialog box (page 1805), for Table, select the object
data table to modify.
3Click Modify.
4In the Define New Object Data Table dialog box (page 1803), delete, add,
or update the fields:
■To add a field, under Field Definition, enter a name, type, description,
and default value for the field. Click Add.
■To modify a field, under Object Data Fields, select the field to modify.
Under Field Definition, change any information. Click Update.
AutoCAD Map 3D updates the object data field and all instances of
it attached to objects. If you change the data type of a field from Real
to Integer, AutoCAD Map 3D drops everything to the right of the
decimal point, leaving only the value to the left of the decimal point.
■To delete a field, under Object Data Fields, select the field to delete.
Click Delete.
To rename or remove an object data table
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ Define Object Data.
2In the Define Object Data dialog box, under Table, select the object data
table you want to rename or remove.
3To rename the table, click Rename. In the Rename Table dialog box (page
1797), enter a new table name and click OK.
To delete the table, click Delete. The table and its object data fields and
field values are deleted from every object to which they are attached.
Setting Up Object Data | 203
NOTE When you delete an object data table from a drawing, the table is
deleted from all attached, active source drawings.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data
Menu
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATACommand Line
Define Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Using Data from Feature Sources
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road, a utility
pole, or a river. Features are stored in a spatial database or file. The spatial
database or file is referred to as a feature source. You can bring feature source
data into your map using Data Connect. For detailed information about using
feature sources, see Working with Feature Sources (page 582).
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings
You can attach a database to your drawing and link records from that table
to objects in your drawing.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
204 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To set up data sources for drawings
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
■To use a database in a drawing (page 206)
■To display information about a database table (page 206)
■To open a table or database query (page 206)
■To open a linked table or query (page 206)
■To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane
(page 209)
■To attach a data source by right-clicking the Data Sources folder in the
Task Pane (page 209)
■To configure a data source automatically (page 213)
■To configure a data source manually (page 213)
■To modify an existing data link file (page 213)
■To connect a data source (page 215)
■To disconnect a data source (page 215)
Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings
A data source is a database table or a set of tables.
When you attach a data source to a drawing, the data source is listed on the
Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane. You can view and edit data in the data
source or link records from the data source to objects in the drawing.
While keeping the data source attached, you can disconnect the data source
to save resources and reconnect when you are ready to work with the data.
TIP You can work with an external database table without using the database
application itself.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 205
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
■To use a database in a drawing (page 206)
■To display information about a database table (page 206)
■To open a table or database query (page 206)
■To open a linked table or query (page 206)
To use a database in a drawing
Do one of the following:
■From Windows Explorer, drag a database file to the Map Explorer tab of
the Task Pane.
If the Map Explorer tab does not immediately display the data source,
right-click a blank space in the Map Explorer tab. Click Refresh.
■Right-click the Data Sources folder on the Map Explorer tab and select
Attach.
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically creates the files it needs to communicate
with the database application. However, for some database types, you must
configure these files yourself.
■Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ Attach Data Source.
To display information about a database table
■Right-click the table name in the Map Explorer tab. Click Properties.
You can see information such as column names and types.
To open a table or database query
■Double-click the item.
To open a linked table or query
■Double-click the link template name.
206 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE If you connect your database using the dbConnect command, the
instructions in this section of the Help will not work . For information on using the
dbConnect command and features, look up "dbconnect" in the help index.
Quick Reference
MAPATTACHDB
Attaches a data source to the current drawing
File menu ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach External
Records
Menu
MAPATTACHDBCommand Line
Drag a data source onto the Map Explorer tabTask Pane
MAPCONFIGDB
Configures the connection to an external data source
Click Setup ➤ Create/Edit a Source of Data ➤ External
Records.
Menu
MAPCONFIGDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Data Sources ➤ Configure
Task Pane
Configure Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
MAPCONNECTDB
Connects to an attached data source
File menu ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Connect To
External Records
Menu
MAPCONNECTDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source or a link
template ➤ Connect-or- To connect all data sources:
Right-click Data Sources ➤ Connect All
Task Pane
Connect Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDETACHDB
Detaches a data source from the current drawing
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 207
File menu ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Detach External
Records
Menu
MAPDETACHDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Detach
Task Pane
Source dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDISCONNECTDB
Disconnects an attached, connected database
File menu ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Disconnect
From External Records
Menu
MAPDISCONNECTDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data
source ➤ Disconnect-or- To disconnect all data
sources: Right-click Data Sources ➤ Disconnect All
Task Pane
Disconnect Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
Attaching a Data Source
To use data from an external data source, attach the data source to the drawing.
When you attach a data source, it appears in the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane along with the tables and database queries associated with it.
For the following data sources, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically creates the
files it needs to communicate with the data source:
■.dbf
■.db
■.mdb
■.xls (must have at least one named range)
■.udl
For other data sources, you must manually create the files (page 210) before
you can attach the data source.
208 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
Tips
You can set an option (page 235) to have AutoCAD Map 3D prompt you for
the database version each time you attach a data source or you can specify a
default version.
AutoCAD Map 3D stores the UDL (Universal Data Link) (page 2078) files in a
specific directory. If it does not find a UDL file in this directory, it creates a
new UDL file. You can change the directory used for UDL files.
See also:
■Configuring a Data Source (page 210)
■Associating Database Versions with File Extensions (page 242)
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane
1Using Explorer or My Computer, select the database file and drag it to
the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
You can drag and drop databases with the following extensions: .udl, .db,
.dbf, .mdb, and .xls.
2If prompted, select a version and click OK.
3If prompted, enter your user name and password.
To attach a data source by right-clicking the Data Sources folder in the Task
Pane
1Right-click the Data Sources folder on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane and select Attach.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 209
2In the Attach Data Source dialog box, select the file location and type.
You can attach databases with the following extensions: .udl, .db, .dbf,
.mdb, and .xls.
3Click Attach.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates the necessary configuration files and attaches the
database.
For information on using specific database types with AutoCAD Map 3D, see
the AutoCAD help.
Quick Reference
MAPATTACHDB
Attaches a data source to the current drawing
File menu ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach External
Records
Menu
MAPATTACHDBCommand Line
Drag a data source onto the Map Explorer tabTask Pane
MAPDETACHDB
Detaches a data source from the current drawing
File menu ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Detach External
Records
Menu
MAPDETACHDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Detach
Task Pane
Source dialog boxDialog Box
Configuring a Data Source
Microsoft Windows uses UDL (Universal Data Link) (page 2078) files to point to
specific data sources. The UDL file lists the location of the data, the type of
database, the version of the database, and the appropriate database driver.
For each data source that you use with AutoCAD Map 3D, you must have a
UDL file in the AutoCAD Map 3D data source directory. Once the UDL file
210 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
exists in the data source directory, you can attach the data source to any
drawing.
For most data sources, AutoCAD Map 3D creates the UDL file automatically
when you attach a database. However, for some database types, you must
create the UDL file manually.
When you edit or create a UDL file, you use the Microsoft Windows Data Link
Properties dialog box. For more information on using this dialog box, refer to
your Microsoft Windows documentation.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
Drivers
To read external data files, AutoCAD Map 3D uses drivers that translate the
data to a standard format. The first time you use a data source with AutoCAD
Map 3D, AutoCAD Map 3D determines the appropriate driver for the data
source. It stores this information in the UDL file.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports these drivers:
■Jet provider, which works with Microsoft Access database files
■SQL Server provider
■Oracle provider
■ODBC driver, which works with ODBC-compliant databases
These drivers are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D.
Because the ODBC provider works with many different database types, it
requires additional information about each specific database type. It gets this
information from a Data Source Name (DSN) that registers information about
the database type. You need only one DSN for each database type.
For the following ODBC-compliant databases, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a
DSN for you when you attach the database:
■Microsoft Access
■dBase
■Microsoft Excel
■Paradox
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 211
■Microsoft Visual FoxPro
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D connects to Microsoft Access using the Jet
provider, which does not require a DSN. If you want to connect to Microsoft
Access using the ODBC driver, you must create a DSN.
For information on creating a DSN, refer to your Microsoft Windows
documentation.
Displaying Configuration Dialog Boxes
When you attach a data source that does not already have a UDL file, AutoCAD
Map 3D creates the UDL file and determines the settings for Windows data
source configuration.
If the Expert variable is set to 3 or more, AutoCAD Map 3D determines the
settings, and displays the data source configuration dialog boxes so you can
review or modify the settings.
NOTE If you are using the ODBC provider, before you manually create the data
link file, you must have a DSN (Data Source Name) for the database software.
Windows may have created this file when you installed your database software.
See also:
■Accessing Data from ODBC (page 342)
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
■To configure a data source automatically (page 213)
■To configure a data source manually (page 213)
■To modify an existing data link file (page 213)
212 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To configure a data source automatically
➤ Drag and drop one of the following database types onto the Map Explorer
tab of the Task Pane:
■Microsoft Access
■dBASE
■Microsoft Excel (must have at least one named range; do not use
DATABASE or other reserved words as a range name)
■Paradox
■Microsoft Visual FoxPro
To configure a data source manually
1At the command prompt, enter mapconnectdb.
2Type a name for the data source and click OK. The data link file will have
the same name.
3On the Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box, select the
database provider. If you are using the ODBC provider, select the name
of the DSN.
4Enter additional information as needed and click OK. The Data Link
Properties dialog box is a Microsoft Windows dialog box.
For help on database configuration, see the AutoCAD help. Additional
information is available by clicking Help in the Data Link Properties dialog
box.
To modify an existing data link file
1At the command prompt, enter mapconnectdb.
2Select the data source and click OK.
3Make the modifications and click OK. The Data Link Properties dialog
box is a Microsoft Windows dialog box.
NOTE If you modify a data link file for a data source that is currently attached
and connected, the changes will not take effect until the next time you connect
the data source.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 213
NOTE If you have more than one copy of a UDL file, be sure to edit the copy in
the AutoCAD Map 3D data links directory.
Quick Reference
EXPERT
Controls whether certain prompts are issued (system variable)
EXPERTCommand Line
MAPCONFIGDB
Configures the connection to an external data source
Click Setup ➤ Create/Edit a Source of Data ➤ External
Records.
Menu
MAPCONFIGDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Data Sources ➤ Configure
Task Pane
Configure Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
Connecting a Data Source
To free up memory or database connections, you can disconnect a data source
but keep it attached to the current drawing. When you want to use the data
source again, reconnecting is a one-step process.
TIP You can set an option to automatically connect (page 235) to all attached data
sources each time you open a drawing.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
See also:
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
■Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings (page 205)
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
214 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
To connect a data source
■On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, double-click the data source.
To disconnect a data source
■Right-click the data source. Click Disconnect.
Quick Reference
MAPCONNECTDB
Connects to an attached data source
File menu ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Connect To
External Records
Menu
MAPCONNECTDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source or a link
template ➤ Connect-or- To connect all data sources:
Right-click Data Sources ➤ Connect All
Task Pane
Connect Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDISCONNECTDB
Disconnects an attached, connected database
File menu ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Disconnect
From External Records
Menu
MAPDISCONNECTDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data
source ➤ Disconnect-or- To disconnect all data
sources: Right-click Data Sources ➤ Disconnect All
Task Pane
Disconnect Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 215
Setting Options
You can change many settings that affect the work environment, how the
program starts up, whether users must log in, and settings for your current
drawings, data sources, and more.
See also:
■Setting Raster Image Options (page 249)
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
■Setting AutoCAD Options (look up “interface options, setting” in the help
index)
■To use the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 218)
■To set Task Pane options (page 221)
■To hide or display the Task Pane at startup (page 221)
■To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session (page 221)
■To refresh Map Explorer (page 221)
■To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane (page 222)
■To set drawing options (page 225)
■To set multi-user options (page 227)
■To set system options (page 229)
■To specify coordinate system options (page 231)
■To specify coordinate tracker options (page 232)
■To set coordinate geometry options (page 234)
■To change the azimuth bearing quickly (page 234)
■To set data source options (page 236)
■To change the expert setting (page 236)
■To change the default data link file directory (page 236)
■To set Data View options (page 238)
■To specify Feature Edit Options (page 240)
■To set metadata options (page 241)
■To associate database versions with files extensions (page 243)
■To set query options (page 245)
■To have hatch created by property alteration be associative (page 247)
■To set AutoCAD Map 3D options (page 249)
216 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Overview of Setting Options
The following table summarizes the options you can set and where these
settings are located.
Go to...To change settings for...
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤ Task
Pane (page 1909) tab.
Default display of the Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Current Drawing (page 1909) tab.
The current drawing
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Multi-User (page 1915) tab
Login and object locking
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
System (page 1916) tab
Log files and data sources
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Current Drawing (page 1909) tab
Coordinate systems
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box
(page 1917)
Coordinate geometry
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Data Source (page 1914) tab
Data sources for drawings (and file exten-
sion associations for them) and the Data
View window
Metadata Options dialog box (page 1484)Metadata
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Query (page 1911)tab
NOTE There are also query-related settings
on the following tabs:
■Save Back (page 1913)
■System (page 1916)
■Task Pane (page 1909)
Queries
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Query (page 1911)tab
Associative hatch for drawing objects with
boundaries
Overview of Setting Options | 217
Go to...To change settings for...
Raster Extension Options dialog box (page
1879)
Raster images
mapimport.ini (page 271) and mapforeign-
fileproperties.ini (page 274)
Import defaults
mapexport.ini (page 269)Export defaults
To use the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2Click a tab.
3In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), modify options.
4Click OK to save the settings.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
218 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE
Docks and undocks the Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACECommand Line
Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar
at the top of the pane (docked)
Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command)Dialog Box
MAPWSPACE
Shows or hides the Task Pane
View menu ➤ Task Pane
Menu
MAPWSPACECommand Line
Right-click a blank area ➤ Close
Task Pane
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command)Dialog Box
MAPWSREFRESH
Redisplays the Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESHCommand Line
Right-click a blank area ➤ Refresh
Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESHDialog Box
MAPCGAZBASE
Sets the azimuth base
MAPCGAZBASECommand Line
MAPCGSETUP
Specifies coordinate geometry settings
At the Command prompt, enter mapcgsetup.Menu
COGO Options
Icon
MAPCGSETUPCommand Line
Overview of Setting Options | 219
Setting Coordinate Geometry OptionsDialog Box
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Task Pane Options
You can specify what to display in the Task Pane and what displays when you
start the program.
■Map Explorer Categories To Display — Lets you select which categories
(nodes) you want to display on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
The visibility of some nodes is dependent on the visibility of others. For
example, the Tables node is visible in the Map Explorer tab of Task Pane
only when you select both Data Sources and Tables.
NOTE When you attach drawings with the Topologies node visible, AutoCAD
Map 3D creates a list of all the topologies to display under Topologies in Map
Explorer. If you attach a large number of drawings containing topologies at
the same time, the creation of the topology list increases the processing time.
To reduce processing time, hide the Topologies node before attaching the
drawings.
■Show Task Pane On Startup — Specifies whether to display the Task Pane
when you start AutoCAD Map 3D.
■Show Properties Palette On Startup — Specifies whether to display the
Properties palette when you start AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■The Task Pane
■Getting Information About Drawing Objects (page 1143)
■To set Task Pane options (page 221)
220 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To hide or display the Task Pane at startup (page 221)
■To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session (page 221)
■To refresh Map Explorer (page 221)
■To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane (page 222)
To set Task Pane options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Task Pane
tab.
3Modify the options you want:
■Under Map Explorer Categories To Display, select the categories to
display on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
■Select which palettes you want to show at startup.
4Click OK.
To hide or display the Task Pane at startup
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), click the Task Pane
(page 1909) tab.
3Select Show Task Pane On Startup.
To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session
■In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Map
Task Pane
To refresh Map Explorer
■Right-click a clear area in Map Explorer, and click Refresh; or enter
mapwsrefresh at the Command prompt.
Setting Task Pane Options | 221
To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane
1Right-click the title bar of the Task Pane and choose Transparency.
2In the Transparency dialog box, adjust the transparency level.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDOCKWSPACE
Docks and undocks the Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACECommand Line
Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar
at the top of the pane (docked)
Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command)Dialog Box
MAPWSPACE
Shows or hides the Task Pane
View menu ➤ Task Pane
Menu
MAPWSPACECommand Line
Right-click a blank area ➤ Close
Task Pane
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command)Dialog Box
MAPWSREFRESH
222 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Redisplays the Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESHCommand Line
Right-click a blank area ➤ Refresh
Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESHDialog Box
Setting Drawing Options
You can specify general settings and coordinate transformation options for
the current drawing. If you are working with drawings that use different global
coordinate systems, AutoCAD Map 3D standardizes the drawings based on
the global coordinate system of the the current drawing.
NOTE Once you bring objects into the current drawing, do not change the
coordinate transformation options if you plan to save changes back to source
drawings. The save-back process determines whether adjustments are necessary
to restore objects to the correct coordinate system when you save them back to
source drawings.
NOTE These options affect drawing files that you attach to the current map
drawing. They do not affect geospatial feature sources.
Activate Attached Source Drawings
Set any of the following options:
■From Last Session At Startup — Activates the drawings that were active the
last time you quit AutoCAD Map 3D. If you do not select this option, all
drawings are inactive on startup.
■After Attaching — Sets the status of a drawing to Active when you attach
it. If you do not select this option, all drawings are inactive when you
attach them.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments: Adjust Sizes And Scales area
Set any of the following options:
■For Changes In Units — Use this option when you are working with text
and block objects from a source drawing that uses different coordinate
system units than the current drawing. For example, if your source drawing
uses meters and the current drawing uses U.S. Survey Feet, you can scale
Setting Drawing Options | 223
text and blocks so that their size or scale measures in feet rather than
meters.
If you do not select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D does not adjust the size
or scale of text and block objects. For example, if you have a block that is
5 meters long in the source drawing, it will be 5 feet long when you bring
it into the current drawing.
Do not change this setting after you bring objects into the current drawing,
or you might introduce unintended changes to text and blocks when you
save them back to their source drawings.
■For Map Distortion — Use this option to adjust the size and scale of text
and blocks to correct for map distortion introduced when you represent
a spherical object (earth) in a Cartesian coordinate system.
For example, two objects, located at the northern and southern extremes
of a map, of equal length in coordinate system X remain the same length
when transformed to coordinate system Y.
If you do not select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D scales the two objects
to different lengths in coordinate system Y according to the relative map
distortion (or grid scale factor).
For Map Distortion in the Adjust Sizes And Scales area is available only if
you selected the previous option, For Changes In Units.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments: Adjust Rotations area
Set any of the following options:
■For Map Distortion — Adjusts the angle of text and blocks to correct for
map distortion due to the convergence angle (the deviation of the Y axis
of a Cartesian coordinate system from true north).
■For Zero-Rotation Objects — Specifies that text and blocks that have a
rotation value of zero in the source drawing are adjusted to correct
distortion due to the convergence angle.
If you select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the convergence
angle for text and blocks with a zero rotation value. If you do not select
this option, AutoCAD Map 3D does not rotate text and blocks with a zero
rotation value, even if there is a convergence angle.
For Zero-Rotation Objects is available only if you selected the previous
option, For Map Distortion, in the Adjust Rotations area.
224 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Select Adjust Elevations to adjust the elevation (Z axis) of objects when you
select For Changes In Units and For Map Distortion under Adjust Sizes And
Scales.
Data Source Options
Set any of the following options:
■Select Reconnect Data Source When Drawing Opens to reconnect the
databases that were connected the last time you quit AutoCAD Map 3D.
■In the Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List box, enter the
number of SQL conditions to store in the SQL condition history list.
Reducing the size of this list saves memory and reduces the number of
conditions you must scroll through when you search for a particular
condition. The first condition added to the list is the first one dropped
when AutoCAD Map 3D reaches the maximum number you specify.
See also:
■Activating a Drawing (page 159)
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
To set drawing options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Current
Drawing (page 1909) tab.
3Modify the options you want. For information on each option, see the
Concept tab of this topic.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setting Drawing Options | 225
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Multi-user Options
You can specify options that affect how AutoCAD Map 3D operates for all
users, across all drawings. For example, you can set login or object locking
options. The system administrator controls these settings.
These options apply to all AutoCAD Map 3D users in a single installation and
are set by the system administrator. The settings affect all drawings and, in
network installations, are common to all users.
Force User Login
You must have Superuser privilege to set this option.
If Force User Login is enabled, users are required to log in at AutoCAD Map
3D startup. If a user attempts to halt log in by pressing the Escape key,
AutoCAD Map 3D assigns view-only privileges, and the user cannot alter the
drawing set, edit drawings, or perform queries. Once logged in, a user may
log in under a different login name, even while working in a drawing with
active source drawings.
If Force User Login is not enabled and the user does not log in, AutoCAD Map
3D uses the user's operating system login name to identify the user when
locking objects, creating the .DWK file, and restoring options. A user may log
in using his or her login name while working in drawings, including drawings
with attached source drawings.
Enable Object Locking
Protects objects that are being edited from modification by other AutoCAD
Map 3D users.
NOTE Object locking affects drawing files only. For information on using geospatial
feature data in a multi-user environment, see Overview of Working with Features
(page 684).
226 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
You cannot change the Enable Object Locking option while drawings are
attached. If this option is not selected, only one user at a time can attach a
drawing.
Object locking is recommended on networked systems to avoid conflicts when
querying and editing. If you are working on a stand-alone system, you do not
need object locking.
See also:
■Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D (page 141)
■Sharing Attached Drawings (page 731)
NOTE Object locking affects drawing files only. For information on using geospatial
feature data in a multi-user environment, see Overview of Working with Features
(page 684).
To set multi-user options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Multi-User
(page 1915) tab.
3Modify the options you want. For information on each option, see the
Concept tab of this topic.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
Setting Multi-user Options | 227
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting System Options
You can specify options that affect the operation of a single installation of
AutoCAD Map 3D.
NOTE If you have enabled Force User Login (page 226) on the Multi-User Options
tab, you must log in as a Superuser to set System Options. The default superuser
login name is SuperUser (not case sensitive) and the password is SUPERUSER (case
sensitive).
Log File Options
■Select Log File Active to create a log file for AutoCAD Map 3D messages.
■In the File Name box, provide the path and name for a log file in which
to record error, warning, and diagnostic messages. The default name is
acadmap.log. Optionally, you can click Browse to search your file system
for an existing file. AutoCAD Map 3D appends messages to the file you
select.
■Specify one of the following under Message Level:
Level 0: Error Messages — The log file contains error messages that describe
potential problems you may encounter. For example, if you attempt to
attach a drawing that is already attached, AutoCAD Map 3D produces an
error message that is stored in the log file.
Level 1: Error And Warning Messages — The log file contains warning
messages in addition to error messages. Warning messages alert you to
potential problems. For example, if you use duplicate link template names,
AutoCAD Map 3D produces a warning message that is stored in the log
file.
Level 2: Error, Warning And Diagnostic Messages — The log file contains
status messages as well as error and warning messages.
Number of Drawings Loaded Into Memory At Once
When you attach and activate drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D opens them in
memory. You do not see the open drawings, but AutoCAD Map 3D must open
them to perform operations.
228 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
The number of drawings that AutoCAD Map 3D can open in memory at the
same time depends on several factors. These include the size of the drawings,
amount of memory, and your system setup.
The number you specify here does not limit the number of active drawings.
AutoCAD Map 3D opens and closes files in memory as it needs them. If your
system has a lot of memory, you can enter a larger number (up to 200) to
make queries go faster.
Default Directories
To specify a default directory for externally saved queries or cache files, enter
the path in the appropriate box. Or click Browse to locate an existing directory.
NOTE These options affect drawing files only. They do not affect geospatial feature
sources.
See also:
■Editing Data in Attached Drawings (page 729)
■Overview of Using the Query Library (page 174)
To set system options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the System
(page 1916) tab.
3Modify the options you want. For information on each option, see the
Concept tab of this topic.
4To enhance the performance of AutoCAD Map 3D, click Clear Cache.
5Click OK.
NOTE If you have enabled Force User Login (page 226) on the Multi-User
Options tab, you must log in as a Superuser to set System Options. The default
superuser login name is SuperUser (not case sensitive) and the password is
SUPERUSER (case sensitive).
Setting System Options | 229
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Coordinate System Options
You can set several options to determine how AutoCAD Map 3D performs
coordinate system transformations and responds when you open drawings
with embedded coordinate system definitions.
These options apply only to the current drawing. Each time you open a
drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect other drawings.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments
Coordinate transformation allows the manipulation of the coordinate
geometry. Use the Coordinate Transformation Adjustment options to specify
how AutoCAD Map 3D performs coordinate transformations through
adjustments for size, scale, rotation, and elevation.
After you query objects into a drawing from source drawings, do not change
the coordinate transformation options if you plan to save changes back to the
source drawings.
NOTE The AutoCAD Map 3D simple transformation options, available in the
Drawing Settings dialog box, cannot be used with coordinate transformations.
Storing Coordinate Systems in the Drawing
When you open a drawing that has a coordinate system that is not in your
dictionary, AutoCAD Map 3D can add that coordinate system definition to
230 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
your dictionary. You can choose to always add the definitions, never add the
definitions, or have AutoCAD Map 3D prompt you each time.
Units
Specify the units to use when displaying geodetic distance.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
■Defining Coordinate Systems (page 89)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
■Setting Drawing Options (page 223)
To specify coordinate system options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), click the Current
Drawing (page 1909) tab.
3Under Coordinate Transformation Adjustments, specify how you want
AutoCAD Map 3D to perform coordinate transformations.
4Click the Coordinate Systems tab (page 1916).
■Under Coordinate System Definitions Stored In Drawing, specify how
you want AutoCAD Map 3D to respond when you open drawings
with embedded coordinate system definitions.
■Under Geodetic Distance, select the units to use when displaying
geodetic distance.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Setting Coordinate System Options | 231
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Coordinate Tracker Options
You can track multiple coordinate systesm in your map using the Track
Coordinates Dialog Box (page 1601). The Track Coordinates dialog box contains
one or more Coordinate Trackers that display the coordinates of the cursor as
you move around your map. You can specify how much information the
tracker coordinates displays, and the precision of the coordinates.
See also:
■Tracking Coordinates (page 1149)
To specify coordinate tracker options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Analyze tab ➤ Geo Tools
panel ➤ Coordinate Track.
2In the Track Coordinates dialog box, click . The Coordinate Tracker
Options Dialog Box (page 1600) appears.
3In the Coordinate Tracker Options dialog box, set any of the following
options:
■Display coordinate system descriptions: view a description of the
coordinate system in the Track Coordinates dialog box.
■Format Lat/Long as D,M,S: display lat/long coordinates in
degrees/minutes/seconds format.
■Include Square ID: view the MGRS square ID when tracking MGRS
coordinates.
■Precision Level: specify the precision level of MGRS coordinates.
232 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Lettering Scheme: specify the lettering scheme for MGRS coordinates.
Use AA (MGRS-New) for the WSG84 datum. Use AL (MGRS-Old) for
older datums.
■Digitization Location: For the digitization location within a given
MGRS square, specify left top, center top, right top, left center, center,
right center, left bottom, center bottom, or right bottom.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPTRACKCS
Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any coordinate system
Analyze menu ➤ Track Coordinate Sytem.
Menu
Track Coordinates
Icon
MAPTRACKCSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Track
Coordinates
Task Pane
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options
You can set the following coordinate geometry options:
■If North on your map is not aligned with the Y axis, specify the angle for
North.
■If your COGO information sometimes includes elevation information, set
the COGO commands to prompt for 3D data. If you never include 3D data,
you can turn off this prompt.
■Specify units of measure for your coordinate geometry input. For Linear
Units, select US Feet, International Feet, Meters, or Chains. For Angle
Format, select Decimal Degrees, Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, Grads, Radians,
or Surveyor’s Units.
■If azimuth bearings on your map are measured relative to South, set the
azimuth base to South. Otherwise, leave it set to North.
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options | 233
■Create a text log for coordinate geometry entered through the COGO Input
dialog box (page 1668).
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands (page 1027)
To set coordinate geometry options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Draw
panel ➤ COGO drop-down ➤ COGO Options.
2In the Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box (page 1917), set any of the
following options.
■To change the setting for North, under Set North Direction, specify
the direction from the Y axis to North on your map. Enter a number
that represents the angular distance measured clockwise from the Y
axis.
■To have AutoCAD Map 3D always prompt for elevation, grade, or
slope, select Prompt For 3D Data Input.
■Specify units of measure for Linear Units and Angle Format.
■Specify whether bearings in your map are relative to North or South.
■To have AutoCAD Map 3D write a text log for coordinate geometry
entered through the COGO Input dialog box (page 1668) to the AutoCAD
Text Window, check Create Text Log.
3Click OK to save your settings.
To change the azimuth bearing quickly
1At the command prompt, enter mapcgazbase.
2Enter n for North or s for South and press Enter.
Quick Reference
MAPCGAZBASE
Sets the azimuth base
234 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
MAPCGAZBASECommand Line
MAPCGSETUP
Specifies coordinate geometry settings
At the Command prompt, enter mapcgsetup.Menu
COGO Options
Icon
MAPCGSETUPCommand Line
Setting Coordinate Geometry OptionsDialog Box
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings
You can specify several options for attaching data sources for drawing objects.
NOTE These options affect drawing data only. They do not affect geospatial feature
data sources.
■Specify whether data sources, tables, database queries, and link templates
appear on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
■Specify whether AutoCAD Map 3D automatically reconnects the data
sources that were connected the last time you closed this drawing.
■Specify the default driver to use when you drop an MDB file onto the Map
Explorer tab.
■Specify the default database version for files with a .db, .dbf, or .xls file
extension that you drop on the Map Explorer tab.
■Change the Expert setting to display or hide the data source configuration
dialog boxes. An Expert setting of 3 or above displays the configuration
dialog boxes. An Expert setting of 2 or less hides the dialog boxes.
■Change the default location for UDL (Universal Data Link) (page 2078) files.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings (page 205)
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
■To set Data View options (page 238)
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings | 235
NOTE These options affect drawing data only. They do not affect geospatial feature
data sources.
■To set data source options (page 236)
■To change the expert setting (page 236)
■To change the default data link file directory (page 236)
To set data source options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908):
■On the Task Pane (page 1909) tab, select the items to display on the
Map Explorer tab.
■On the Current Drawing (page 1909) tab, specify whether to
automatically connect to attached data sources when you open a
drawing and how many filters or conditions should be stored in the
History List.
■On the Data Source (page 1914) tab, specify the default driver to use
when you drop an MDB file on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
Click Associate to specify the default database version
To change the expert setting
1At the command prompt, enter expert.
2Enter an expert setting.
For information on the Expert system variable, look up "system variables" in
the help index.
To change the default data link file directory
1Click ➤ Options.
2On the Files tab of the Options dialog box, specify the Data Sources
Location.
236 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Data View Options
Data View options apply to a single user's AutoCAD Map 3D environment.
All drawings opened by a particular user display these settings, but they do
not affect others who open the same drawings.
NOTE Data View is for drawing data only. For options related to the Data Table,
which displays the properties of geospatial feature data, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1127).
Display Of Multiple Tables
You can specify the number of Data Views to use when displaying tables.
■Show Each Table In A Separate Data View: Opens a new Data View window
for each open table. Move between tables by clicking the window you
want.
Setting Data View Options | 237
■Show All Tables In One Data View: Opens only one Data View window.
When you open a new table, the previous table is automatically closed.
Data Views
You can specify the behavior of the Data View.
■Open In Read-Only Mode: Opens the Data View in read-only mode. When
this option is selected, you cannot edit data in the Data View.
■Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing: Saves all formatting
changes, such as column width, font, color, or borders, that you make in
the Data View.
■Keep On Top: Specifies whether the Data View window remains on top of
all other windows, even when it is not the active window.
See also:
■Overview of Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Objects (page 1048)
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
NOTE Data View is for drawing data only. For options related to the Data Table,
which displays the properties of geospatial feature data, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1127).
To set Data View options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Data Source
(page 1914) tab.
3Modify the options you want.
4To change the number of filters that AutoCAD Map 3D displays in the
Table Filter History dialog box, select the Current Drawing (page 1909) tab.
Enter a new number.
5Click OK.
238 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Geospatial Feature Editing Options
You can specify options for editing geospatial features.
NOTE These options affect geospatial feature data only. For options related to
editing drawing objects, see Setting Multi-user Options (page 226).
■Automatic Checkout: You must check out geospatial features before editing
them. This option allows you check out features automatically when you
edit them.
■Automatic Edit Update: When you edit geospatial features in AutoCAD
Map 3D you can also update the original data resources. This option allows
you to automate updating your feature source.
Setting Geospatial Feature Editing Options | 239
■Feature Checkout Options: You can check out geospatial features with as
drawing objects or geospatial features.
Features checked out as geospatial
features
Features checked out as AutoCAD
drawing objects
Allows you to use some common ACAD
editing commands in addition to geospa-
Allows you to use many common ACAD
editing commands
tial feature-specific editing commands (for
example, MAPFEATURESPLIT (page 1652)
and MAPFEATUREMERGE (page 1651))
Edited features are represented as geospa-
tial geometries (for example, MAPPOLY-
GONS).
Edited features represented as AutoCAD
geometries (for example, closed polylines
are used to represent polygonal features)
Supports multipart (multipolygons, mul-
tilines, and multipoints) geospatial features
and editing, such as the Hawaiian islands.
Most existing custom or third-party editing
applications (LISP, VB, or ObjectARX)
should continue to work. Some may re-
quire minor updates.
Preserves and allows you to edit M and Z
values.
Some existing AutoCAD Map 3D editing
commands will continue to work on fea-
tures (for example, rubber sheeting [ADER-
SHEET (page 1648)]).
Allows you to use feature styling.Allows you to use feature styling.
■Split Prompt Options: Specify defaults for the prompts displayed when
you split a polygonal feature. Specify whether to display the prompts during
a split operation.
■Checkin Prompt Timer: This option allows you to set a recurring check-in
prompt.
See also:
■Editing Features (page 701)
■Splitting Features (page 705)
NOTE These options affect geospatial feature data only. For options related to
editing drawing objects, see Setting Multi-user Options (page 226).
To specify Feature Edit Options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Feature
Data panel ➤ angle-arrow.
240 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2In the Feature Editing Options dialog box (page 1929), select the options
you want. If you select the checkin prompt, specify the prompt interval
in minutes.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS
Specifies options for editing features
Feature Edit Options
Icon
MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONSCommand Line
Feature Editing Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Metadata Options
AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 supports FGDC metadata down to the feature source
and object class levels. You can set options for your metadata on the Metadata
Options dialog box. Options for metadata include metadata template import
and export, latitude/longitude precision, and automatic updating.
See also:
■Setting Metadata Options (page 1484)
To set metadata options
1Launch the Metadata Viewer (page 1487).
2On the Metadata Viewer toolbar, click Options.
3In the Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756), do any of the following:
■To use a metadata template, click the Template tab and select Use
Template and select the template you want from the list. If no
templates appear, click Import and import an FGDC-compliant
template.
Setting Metadata Options | 241
■To set Latitude/longitude precision, click the Preference tab and set
the number of digits that display after the decimal point for your
reported latitude and longitude values from 0 to 10. Both values are
6 by default.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONSCommand Line
Metadata OptionsDialog Box
Setting InfoCenter Options
The InfoCenter, located at the top of the application window, helps you find
information about AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 quickly. When you type a question
into its text-entry box, the InfoCenter searches the AutoCAD Map 3D
documentation as well as any documents you add to the search settings.
Using the InfoCenter, you can:
■Search a custom set of the documents, such as all the User Guides and
Tutorials. If you are a developer, you can set InfoCenter to search your
favorite developer Help.
■Search a specific document.
■Add your own documents to the search.
■Keep up-to-date on your favorite RSS feeds, such as the Knowledge Base
and the Discussion Boards.
For details about the InfoCenter, see the AutoCAD help.
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions
This information applies only to drawing objects.
242 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
When you drag and drop a database onto the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane, you can select the version of the database used to create the database.
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you each time to specify the version
that was used. If you created all your databases with a specific version of the
software, you can set an option to select that version automatically.
See also:
■Attaching a Data Source (page 208)
■Configuring a Data Source (page 210)
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
To associate database versions with files extensions
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Data Source
(page 1914) tab.
3Under Associate Database Versions With File Extensions, select Associate.
4In the Associate Database Versions dialog box (page 1675), under each
database name, do one of the following:
■To be prompted each time you drag and drop a database file onto the
Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, select Always Prompt.
■To associate a database file extension with a specific version of the
database software, select Always Use. Select the correct version.
When you drop a database file onto the Map Explorer tab, AutoCAD
Map 3D checks the file extension and uses the specified version of
the database software.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions | 243
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Query Options (DWG)
You can set several options that determine how queries run, how they appear
onscreen, and how they are saved.
NOTE These options affect drawing queries only. For information about filtering
geospatial feature data when you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When
You Add Them to a Map (page 309).
On the Task Pane Tab
You can hide or display the query node on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
NOTE The Queries option that appears under the Data Sources category is for
database queries.
Options you set on the Task Pane tab apply to a single user's AutoCAD Map
3D environment. All drawings opened by a particular user display these
settings, but they do not affect others who open the same drawings.
On the Query Tab
You can set specific query options, including the default joining operator,
display parameters for preview queries, and options for location conditions.
Options you set on the Query tab apply only to the current drawing. Each
time you open this drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect
other drawings.
On the Save Back Tab
You can set options that determine if queried objects are added to the save
set.
244 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Options you set on the Save Back tab apply only to the current drawing. Each
time you open this drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect
other drawings.
On the System Tab
You can specify a default directory for externally saved queries.
See also:
■The Task Pane
■Overview of Queries (page 1235)
NOTE These options affect drawing queries only. For information about filtering
geospatial feature data when you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When
You Add Them to a Map (page 309).
To set query options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2Click the Task Pane (page 1909) tab to hide or display the query node on
the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
3Click the Query (page 1911) tab to set specific query options.
4Click the Save Back (page 1913) tab set options that determine if queried
objects are added to the save set.
5Click the System (page 1916) tab to specify a default directory for externally
saved queries.
6Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
Setting Query Options (DWG) | 245
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Using Associative Hatch
You can set an option to specify whether hatch objects created by property
alteration queries and thematic mapping are associative.
NOTE This option affects drawing objects only.
Hatch patterns used in thematic maps.
Associative hatch maintains a link between a hatch object and its boundary:
if the boundary is modified, the hatch updates automatically. However, if the
boundary if modified so that it no longer encloses the hatch or if any of the
boundary objects are deleted, the association between the hatch and the
boundary is lost.
When querying multiple files, it is easy to lose the association between a hatch
object and its boundary. If you want associative hatch, the easiest solution
may be to delete the old hatch object and recreate the associative hatch after
you finish modifying the attached drawings.
To maintain an existing association, keep in mind these points:
■If you modify an object that is part of a hatch boundary, be sure that your
changes do not break the boundary. That is, you can enlarge a circle, but
do not trim it. You can extend the corner of a square, but do not open it
up.
■To save a new associative hatch object to an attached drawing, all the
boundary objects must be in the same attached drawing. In addition, all
objects must be saved to the attached drawing at the same time. If any of
the boundary objects are saved to a different file or are saved at a different
time, the association is lost.
246 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■When you add an associative hatch object to the save set, all its boundary
objects are added automatically. If any of the boundary objects are locked,
the hatch is not added to the save set.
■When you remove an associative hatch object from the save set, boundary
objects are removed from the save set automatically.
■When you add a boundary object to the save set, hatch objects associated
with that boundary are not added to the save set automatically. To maintain
the association, add the hatch object to the save set.
■When combining solid hatch with text, use the DRAWORDER command
to make the text visible on top of the hatch.
See also:
■Overview of Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects (page 1259)
■Setting Polygon Options (page 977)
NOTE This option affects drawing objects only.
To have hatch created by property alteration be associative
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2Select the Query (page 1911) tab.
3Under Query Options, select Create Associative Hatch Objects.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
Using Associative Hatch | 247
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Saving Option Settings
AutoCAD Map 3D saves your options in one of three places, depending on
the option type.
■Drawing options are saved in the drawing.
■User and installation options are saved in the acadmap.ini file. On startup,
AutoCAD Map 3D searches for the acadmap.ini file first in the current
directory, then in all the directories listed in the AutoCAD Map 3D path,
and finally in the AutoCAD Map 3D executable directory. If it does not
find the acadmap.ini file, the program creates the file in the current working
directory.
■Multi-user options are saved in the binary acadmap.sys file. The acadmap.sys
file is located in the AutoCAD Map 3D executable directory. After setting
the multi-user options, the system administrator should make the file read
only to prevent users from modifying or deleting it.
NOTE When you uninstall AutoCAD Map 3D, acadmap.ini is also uninstalled. If
you have modified the settings in this file, you should save acadmap.ini prior to
uninstalling. If you uninstall and then reinstall AutoCAD Map 3D, you can simply
replace the newly installed acadmap.ini with the saved one. Note that Map release
4 and earlier saved option settings in the ade.ini file. If you uninstall release 4 or
earlier and then install a newer release of AutoCAD Map 3D, you cannot replace
the newly installed acadmap.ini with the saved ade.ini. Instead, you will need to
reset your options in the AutoCAD Map 3D Options dialog box.
See also:
■Setting Drawing Options (page 223)
■Setting Task Pane Options (page 220)
■Setting System Options (page 228)
■Setting Multi-user Options (page 226)
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
■Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights (page 82)
248 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To set AutoCAD Map 3D options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), modify the options
you want.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Raster Image Options
or raster images inserted with Raster Extension, set options in the Raster
Extension Options dialog box.
■To change options for images inserted with Raster Extension (page 250)
■To set the resource file directory (page 251)
■To change how image frames are displayed (page 253)
Setting Raster Image Options | 249
■To change the image display quality (page 254)
■To choose an image detach method (page 255)
■To turn on Shift + left-click (page 256)
■To set the correlation defaults (page 257)
■To configure memory for images (page 259)
Overview of Setting Raster Image Options
Raster image options are available for images you insert using the Raster
Extension. You can connect to many raster image files using Data Connect,
but you may still use the Raster Extension to insert and correlate raster images
with formats that Data Connect does not support, or to specify correlation
information for images that do not contain this information within their files.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
To change options for images inserted with Raster Extension
■Set the resource file directory. (page 251)
■Change how frames are displayed. (page 253)
■Change image display quality. (page 254)
■Choose a method for detaching images. (page 255)
■Use Shift + Left-click to select raster images. (page 256)
■Set correlation defaults. (page 257)
■Configure image-related memory options. (page 259)
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
250 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting the Resource Files Directory
Resource files store information about the insertion point, scale, rotation, and
density of an image. The Resource File Directory indicates where AutoCAD
Map 3D searches for resource files for images you insert with Raster Extension
(not those you add with Data Connect). Resource files have the same base
name as the raster image with a .res extension.
When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D looks for associated correlation
sources, such as world files, resource files, and tab files. By default, AutoCAD
Map 3D looks in the directory containing the image. However, for resource
files, you can specify an additional location. The additional location applies
only to resource files (.res). It does not apply to other correlation sources.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
■Viewing Image Information (page 474)
■Creating a Search Path for Raster Images (page 479)
To set the resource file directory
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the Paths
tab.
3Under Resource File Directory, type the directory path for the resource
files or click Browse to select a directory.
4If you want AutoCAD Map 3D to search the Resource File Directory before
searching the image directory, select Use Resource File Directory Before
Using Image Directory.
Setting Raster Image Options | 251
5Click OK to save your changes.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Changing How Image Frames Are Displayed
For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can choose to display the
image frame in front of an image, behind an image, or you can hide the frame.
When the frame is behind the image, you can still select the image by selecting
the frame. However, if you hide the frame, you cannot select the image by
selecting the frame.
These options do not apply to images you add with Data Connect.
NOTE If you use the Toggle Frames command to hide frames, and then redisplay
them, the frames appear in front of the images.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Manually Adjusting the Image Frame During Insertion (page 465)
■Selecting an Image (page 493)
■Displaying Image Frames (page 494)
■Using Shift + Left-click to Select Images (page 256)
252 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To change how image frames are displayed
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the General
tab.
3Under Display Preferences, select an option from the Image Frame list.
■Frame Drawn Above Image displays the frame above the image.
■Frame Drawn Below Image hides the frame behind the image. You
can still select the image by selecting the frame.
■Frames Off hides the frame. If frames are hidden, you select images
by pressing Shift + left-click select method (page 493).
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Changing Image Display Quality
For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can choose high quality or
draft quality display. High quality dithers the pixels so that the areas between
shading appear more gradual. Draft quality can speed up the performance of
your system, but may reduce the quality of how some color and grayscale
images appear onscreen. These options do not affect images you add with
Data Connect.
NOTE The display quality setting affects only how AutoCAD Map 3D displays the
image onscreen. It does not alter the contents of the image file.
Setting Raster Image Options | 253
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
■Changing Image Display Quality and Speed (page 498)
■Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade (page 496)
To change the image display quality
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the General
tab.
3Under Display Preferences, select a Display Quality option:
■High dithers the pixels, making differences in shading more gradual.
If you are using a 256 color palette to display images, dithering helps
make an image that has more than 256 shades appear more realistic.
■Draft does not dither the pixels. This setting is recommended for
bitonal images.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
254 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Choosing an Image Detach Method
When you delete images you added with Raster Extension, from a map,
information about that image is still stored in the map file. To delete this
information, detach the image. You can choose whether images are detached
automatically when you remove the last instance of the image from the map.
This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
■Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images (page 482)
To choose an image detach method
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the General
tab.
3Under Image Detach Preferences, select one of the following methods:
■Ask Before Detach prompts you to detach an image when you erase
all image frames that reference that image.
■Always Detach automatically detaches an image when you erase all
image frames that reference that image.
■Never Detach does not detach an image when you erase all image
frames that reference that image.
4Click OK.
NOTE You can manually detach an image by using the IMAGE command.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Setting Raster Image Options | 255
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Using Shift + Left-click to Select Images
For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can change your selection
method. This is useful when you are zoomed in on the image and you cannot
see the image frame. This option does not affect images you add with Data
Connect.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Selecting an Image (page 493)
■Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
To turn on Shift + left-click
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the General
tab.
3Select Shift + Left-click Image Select to be able to select images (page 493)
by pressing Shift and clicking the left mouse button.
Clear if you do not want to use this feature.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
256 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Correlation Defaults
Most images have correlation data that is stored in the image file header or
in a correlation source file. However, some images may not have any
correlation data. For those cases, you can specify default correlation data. In
addition, if the correlation source does not contain information on scale or
density, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the default settings for those items.
NOTE If you have multiple images that require the same insertion point, scale,
rotation, and density, setting default correlation data can save you time .
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Correlating a Raster Image During Insertion (page 462)
■Setting Image Density (page 467)
■Viewing Image Information (page 474)
■Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image (page 501)
To set the correlation defaults
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the Image
Defaults tab.
3Under Insertion Point, type default insertion point coordinates in the X
and Y boxes. The precision of these points depends on the precision value
in the Drawing Units dialog box. For more information about the
AutoCAD UNITS command, see the AutoCAD help.
Setting Raster Image Options | 257
4To set an elevation for image frames, type the elevation in the Z insertion
point box.
This value is useful to establish the elevation of a floor plan image, for
example.
5In the Rotation box, type a default rotation angle for images. The unit
of measurement depends on the selected value in the Drawing Units
dialog box.
6In the Scale box, type a default scale for images. Image scale does not
change the scale of the vector drawing.
7In the Density box, type a default density for images. Usually this is the
scanned resolution. For example, if the majority of your images were
scanned at 300 dots per inch, then type 300 in this box.
8In the Units box, select the default unit for the insertion point and density
of images. For example, if the majority of your images were scanned at
300 dots per inch, then select Inch as the default.
9Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Configuring Memory Use
AutoCAD Map 3D reserves 25% of the total physical memory (RAM) on your
system for inserting images with the Raster Extension. If you increase the
default amount, more of the physical memory is used for images and less is
available for other operations in AutoCAD Map 3D and for other applications
you might be running.
258 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
If you require additional memory for your images, the Raster Extension uses
a temporary swap file. For example, if you insert a 100 MB file, and the Memory
Limit is 8 MB, AutoCAD Map 3D stores the remaining 92 MB in a temporary
file. You can specify where the swap file is created.
You can change the following Raster Extension memory settings:
■Temporary File Location — The default directory for the temporary swap
files is the Windows temp directory.
TIP For best performance, use a local drive for your temporary swap file. It is
recommended that you do not use the drive where the operating system is
installed as the drive for the swap file unless this is your only local drive.
■Memory Limit — Specify the maximum amount of computer memory that
AutoCAD Map 3D can use to store image files.
NOTE The more physical RAM you have, the higher you can make your Memory
Limit. The higher the Memory Limit, the less swapping to hard disk occurs and
the faster your images load and display. However, do not allocate all available
physical RAM because doing so slows overall performance.
NOTE Close and restart AutoCAD Map 3D after adjusting these settings.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Unloading an Image (page 486)
To configure memory for images
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the Memory
tab.
3To locate a drive for your temporary swap file location, click Browse under
Temporary File Location, and locate a drive.
Setting Raster Image Options | 259
4To change the amount of memory reserved for inserting images, type a
new value in the Memory Limit box. Be careful that you do not use all
of your system resources.
NOTE You can click Default to return this setting to the recommended value.
5Click OK to accept the changes.
You must quit and restart AutoCAD Map 3D for these settings to take effect.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Customizing and Automating Import and Export
Use profiles and .ini files to customize and automate import and export.
■To create a profile (page 263)
■To use a profile (page 263)
■To export to SHP as folder-based rather than file-based (page 269)
■To export to SHP as file-based rather than folder-based (page 269)
■To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs,
and ellipses (page 270)
■To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files (page 270)
■To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric (page 270)
■To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select,
or file-based (page 271)
■To specify DGN cell import options (page 272)
■To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors (page 272)
■To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages (page
273)
■To specify object properties (page 274)
260 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Overview of Customizing Import and Export
Use profiles and .ini files to customize and automate import and export.
Use this method...To customize or automate this...
Save a profile in the Export dialog box.
See Using Profiles (page 262)
Export settings
Save a profile in the Import dialog box.
See Using Profiles (page 262)
Import settings
Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See Customizing the Import and Export
.ini Files (page 264)
Export defaults
Edit the mapimport.ini file.
See Customizing the Import and Export
.ini Files (page 264)
Import defaults
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 261
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Using Profiles
To reuse or share your settings, save them as a profile.
Export Profiles
When you save an export profile, it does not store the current file name or
the current selection set.
When you load an export profile, if the specified data source doesn't exist,
Include Table Data is set to No.
Import Profiles
When you save an import profile, it does not store the current file name.
When you load an import profile, the table settings are reset for any input
layers that match an input layer name in the saved profile. Layers that do not
match an input layer in the saved profile are not reset.
■If the specified coordinate system code is not in the dictionary, the
coordinate system is set to <None>.
■If the data field name for a layer does not exist, the drawing layer is set to
Layer 0. If the specified drawing layer does not exist, it will be created.
■If the data field name to use for the block name does not exist, or if the
specified block does not exist, the block is set to ACAD_POINT.
When you load an import profile containing object class settings, AutoCAD
Map 3D checks for potential problems and handles them as follows:
■If the appropriate object classification file is not attached to the drawing,
the object class settings are ignored.
■If the object class settings for a layer contradict the import file, the object
class settings are not applied.
■If the specified object class does not exist, the object class assignment is
set to <None>.
■If the object class attribute settings conflict with the import file, AutoCAD
Map 3D displays the Conflict Resolution dialog box (page 1701).
262 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Compatibility with Previous Releases
■Profiles saved with AutoCAD Map 3D 2004-2007 and versions 4.5, 5, and
6 are compatible with this release.
■Profiles saved with Autodesk Map 2000 Release 4 or earlier cannot be used
with this release.
■Profiles created in this release may contain additional information that
cannot be used with previous releases. Such incompatible profile
information is ignored when a profile is used in a previous release.
See also:
■Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects (page 378)
■Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
To create a profile
1In the Import dialog box (page 1711) or Map Export dialog box (page 1723),
specify the settings to save.
2Click Save.
3Enter a name for the profile.
To use a profile
1In the Import dialog box (page 1711) or Map Export dialog box (page 1723),
click Load.
2Select the profile.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 263
Export dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files
Some of the defaults for import and export settings are stored in .ini
(initialization) files. When you use a new format with AutoCAD Map 3D, the
information about that format is added automatically to the .ini files. However,
in some instances, you may want to modify these files yourself. In addition,
you can set some formatting options in these files.
You can modify the following .ini files:
■mapexport.ini — Set options to export a file-based format as a folder based
format (which is especially useful for Shapefiles); to specify how to segment
arcs and circles; to define the default seed file for exporting DGN files
(which determines defaults such as units of measure and 2D vs. 3D); and
to specify language encoding settings for exporting GML data in Asian
languages.
■mapimport.ini — Set options to use for file or folder selection; to set default
import options for DGN; to import object colors to their RGB (True Color)
equivalent; and to specify language encoding settings for importing GML
data in Asian languages.
■mapforeignfileproperties.ini — Set options to specify linetype, line weight,
font, and justification.
264 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Exporting to ArcView Shape Files
If you are exporting to ArcView Shape files, you can treat it as a folder-based
format. To do this, you must modify the following items in the MapExport.ini
file:
■Specify that it requires a folder rather than a file.
■Specify that it requires a prefix name.
■Specify that it no longer requires a type (point/line/polyline/text).
If you modify these items, be sure to modify them only for a driver that
supports this change.
Segmenting Certain Entity Types When Exporting
When you export Splines and polylines with bulges, they are broken into
polyline segments. The SegmentationDegrees option determines the number
of degrees used for segmentation. By default, SegmentationDegrees is 2 degrees.
In addition, when you exporting to a file format that does not support arcs
or ellipses, such as Shape or Coverage, or does not support ellipses that have
axes at an angle, such as MIF/MID, you can further modify the segmentation
by changing the value for FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE. By default,
FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE is 5 degrees.
You can change SegmentationDegrees and FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE
to be larger or smaller.
Exporting to MicroStation DGN Files
When exporting to DGN files, AutoCAD Map 3D reads a seed file to determine
default information, such as whether the destination DGN file is be in imperial
units or metric and whether the file is 2D or 3D. There are separate seed files
for DGn version 7 and version 8. For more information about seed files, see
MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 (page 405).
To change the default units of measure (or other defaults), you must change
the default seed files specified in the MapExport.ini file.
Specifying the File and Folder Selection Options to Use for Import
By default, when you import ArcView Shape files, MapInfo MIF/MID, MapInfo
TAB, or VPF files, you can select one or more files in a folder to import. This
is called multi-select.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 265
If you want, you can change the settings in the mapimport.ini file so that these
formats are considered folder-based formats (you select a folder and all the
files in the folder are imported) or single-select formats (only one file can be
selected for import). Note that VPF can be folder-based or multi-select only.
Importing DGN Cells
When you import data from a DGN file, you can specify many of the DGN
import options available in Driver Options.
Importing Object Colors as RGB (True Color) Colors
By default, objects are imported using the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color.
When you import from DGN or MIF/MID, you can specify that objects
maintain their RGB color values.
Even if you import using RGB colors, white objects are always imported to
the ACI White, which displays white on a black background and black on a
white background. Black objects are assigned the ByLayer color. If you want
to export objects to MIF/MID as black, change the layer color to black before
exporting.
Note that if your Model Tab Background color is something other than Black
or White and you import using RGB colors, you may not be able to see objects
whose color is close to the background color.
Language Encoding Settings for Importing and Exporting GML Data
When exporting GML data in Asian languages, you must verify that
mapexport.ini contains the language encoding settings needed to export valid
GML data for the language you want.
Using Fixed schema mode when exporting is recommended, as it can recognize
certain multi-byte characters that can be problematic in Create mode.
When importing GML data in Asian languages, you must verify that the
language encoding settings specified in AutoCAD Map 3D’s mapimport.ini
file match the settings in your incoming file. The settings must match for the
import to be successful.
Adding Custom Tags
If you are familiar with the options for a driver, you can add custom tags. Use
the format:
Driver:XXX
266 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Where XXX is the code you want to send to the driver. Add the line to the
appropriate section of the MapExport.ini file. Incorrect tags will have
unpredictable results.
Location of the .ini File
When exporting, AutoCAD Map 3D looks first for the .ini file in the current
directory. If no .ini file is there, it uses the .ini file in the C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1
folder. To always use the same settings, do not create additional .ini files.
Changing Font, Line Style, Line Weight, or Justification
You can set several formatting options in the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
Use the [DGN_V7_FieldMappping] or [DGN_V8_FieldMapping] section to
enable a particular formatting option:
■igds_font=MapFont
■igds_justification=MapJustification
■igds_weight=MapLineWeight
■igds_style=MapLineStyle
DGN Fonts
Use the [DGN_V7_Font] section or [DGN_V8_Font] section to map DGN font
numbers to textstyles that you've defined.
DGN Line Styles
Use the [DGN_V7_LineStyle] or [DGN_V8_LineStyle] section to map DGN line
styles to line styles loaded in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing.
DGN Line Weight
Use the [DGN_V7_LineWeight] or [DGN_V8_LineWeight] section to map
DGN lineweights to allowable AutoCAD Map 3D lineweight values.
The DGN line weight range is 0-31. AutoCAD Map 3D line weights are in
100ths of a millimeter and only the following values are supported: 0, 5, 9,
13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158,
200, 211, -1, -2 and -3. The AutoCAD Map 3D values -1, -2, and -3 indicate
ByLayer, ByBlock, and by line weight default respectively.
DGN Justification
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 267
Use the [DGN_V7_Justification] or [DGN_V8_Justification] section to map the
DGN justification to AutoCAD vertical and horizontal modes or AutoCAD
attachment.
DGN justification values range from 0-14:
0 is Left/Top, 8 is Center/Bottom, 1 is Left/Center, 9 is Right Margin/Top, 2
is Left/Bottom, 10 is Right Margin/Center, 3 is Left Margin/Top, 11 is Right
Margin/Bottom, 4 is Left Margin/Center, 12 is Right/Top, 5 is Center/Bottom,
13 is Right/Center, 6 is Center/Top, 14 is Right/Bottom, 7 is Center/Center,
Default is 5
The following values are supported for AutoCAD Map 3D justifications:
TopLeft, TopCenter, TopRight, MiddleLeft, MiddleCenter, MiddleRight,
BottomLeft, BottomCenter, BottomRight, BaseLeft, BaseCenter, BaseRight,
BaseAlign, BottomAlign, MiddleAlign, TopAlign, BaseFit, BottomFit, MiddleFit,
TopFit, BaseMid, BottomMid, MiddleMid, TopMid
MIF Justification
Use the [MIF_Justification] section to set justification for MIF. Allowed MIF
Justifications are left, center, and right.
When importing from MIF to AutoCAD Map 3D, the last mapping in the table
is used.
Arc/INFO and E00 Justification
Use the [ARCINFO_Justification] and [E00_Justification] sections to set
justification for Arc/INFO and E00.
When importing from Arc/INFO or E00 to AutoCAD Map 3D, the last mapping
in the table is used.
See also:
■Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects (page 378)
■Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
■Supported Formats (page 1412)
■To export to SHP as folder-based rather than file-based (page 269)
■To export to SHP as file-based rather than folder-based (page 269)
■To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs,
and ellipses (page 270)
268 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files (page 270)
■To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric (page 270)
■To specify DGN cell import options (page 272)
■To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select,
or file-based (page 271)
■To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors (page 272)
■To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages (page
273)
■To specify object properties (page 274)
To export to SHP as folder-based rather than file-based
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder
2Find the [SHP] section.
3Specify File=False.
4Specify Rootname=True.
5Specify EntTypes=All.
6Save and close the ..ini file.
To export to SHP as file-based rather than folder-based
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2Find the [SHP] section.
3Specify File=True.
4Specify Rootname=False.
5Specify EntTypes=Types.
6Save and close the .ini file.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 269
To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs, and
ellipses
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2Find the [Options] section.
3To change the segmentation of splines and polylines with bulges, edit
the SegmentionDegrees value to the number you want.
By default, the value is two degrees.
4To change the segmentation of arcs and ellipses, find the File section
pertaining to one of the following file formats: Arc/INFO, E00, MIF,
MapInfo, or Shape.
5Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the following line:
Driver:FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE=5
6Change the FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE value to the number you
want.
7Save and close the .ini file.
To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2Find the [DGCN_V7] or [DGN_V8]section . This is where the default seed
file is specified.
3Change the default seed file to the seed file you want.
NOTE Make sure to choose a seed file for the appropriate version of DGN.
If you export to DGN version 7 using a DGN version 8 seed file, the operation
will fail.
4Save and close the .ini file.
To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
270 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2Find the [DGN_V7] or [DGN_V8]section.
3Change the default seed file to the seed file you want.
For example, change the default seed file to one that specifies imperial
units rather than metric:
Driver:RUNTIME_MACROS=_SEED,"C:\Program Files\Common
Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\ImportExport\4.0\design\seed3d_ft.dgn"
NOTE Make sure to choose a seed file for the appropriate version of DGN.
If you export to DGN version 7 using a DGN version 8 seed file, the operation
will fail.
4Save and close the .ini file.
To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select, or
file-based
1Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder
2Find the File section pertaining to one of the following file formats:
ShapeFile, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF.
The File section is preceded by a comment such as, "This section
determines how you want to Import MIF/MID files" and has several lines
containing the word File.
3Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the line for the option you
want:
■File=MultiSelect
The format will be considered a multi-select, file-based format. This
means that you will be able to select one or more individual files in
the Import Location dialog box to include in the import process.
■File=SingleSelect
The format will be considered a single-select, file-based format. This
means that you will be able to select one file only in the Import
Location dialog box. Note that this is not a valid option for VPF.
■File=False
The format will be considered a folder-based format and all files in
the selected folder will be included in the import process.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 271
4Make sure there is a semicolon at the beginning of the line for the options
you do not want to use. The semicolon tells AutoCAD Map 3D to ignore
the line.
5Save and close the .ini file.
To specify DGN cell import options
1Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2Find the [DGN_V7_V8] section.
NOTE You can also use the Cell Expansion options in the Import dialog box
(page 405) to expand cells as blocks or points, or to explode them.
3Find Driver:DGN_XPAND_CELL.
4Change this to CELLS2BLOCKS, EXPLODECELLS, or CELLS2POINTS.
5Save and close the .ini file.
To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors
1Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2Find the Color section for either DGN_V7-V8 or MIF (MapInfo).
3Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the line for the option you
want:
■Color=Closest ACI only
The RGB values from the file will be converted to the closest ACI
value.
■Color=RGB only
The RGB values from the file will be preserved. Objects whose color
is black (0,0,0) will be assigned the color ByLayer. Objects whose color
is white (255,255,255) will be assigned the color ACI White.
■Color=Equivalent ACI and RGB
272 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
For any RGB value that exactly matches an ACI, the objects will be
imported using the ACI color value. All other objects will use their
RGB values.
4Make sure there is a semicolon at the beginning of the line for the options
you do not want to use. The semicolon tells AutoCAD Map 3D to ignore
the line.
5Save and close the .ini file.
To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages
1Open the mapimport.ini or mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as
WordPad.
2Find the [GML2] section.
3Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the lines for the language
encoding settings you want to use. For example, for mapimport.ini, here
are the settings you can use for Japanese.
Driver:GML2_FEATURE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_MAPPING_FILE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
For mapexport.ini you can use:
Driver:GML2_FEATURE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_OUTPUT_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_MAPPING_FILE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Below, is a summary of some of the specific settings you can use.
Possible SettingsLanguage
Big5Chinese
GB2312
GB18030
GBK
EUC-JPJapanese
Shift-JIS
EUC-KR
KSC5601
Korean
4Save and close the .ini file.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 273
To specify object properties
1Open the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file using a text editor such as
WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2For information on each of the settings, refer to the instructions in the
file.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up and Running Workflows
Use workflows to automate a set of activities.
■To use workflows (page 276)
■To run a workflow (page 278)
■To edit a workflow (page 284)
274 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To create a workflow (page 287)
■To change the display of the Workflow Designer window (page 289)
Overview of Workflows
Use workflows to automate a set of activities, such as the steps involved in an
overlay analysis (page 1309).
A workflow specifies the activities to perform and the parameters for those
activities. For example, in an overlay, the workflow specifies the feature classes
or layers to compare. You can specify that workflows prompt at run time for
the values of the parameters. If you prefer, you can specify the parameters in
the workflow itself and turn off the prompts. You can edit an existing workflow
or create one.
You can run built-in or custom workflows. The built-in workflows include:
■Overlay: Connect to (and create layers for) two data stores. Perform an
intersection overlay. Use the result of that overlay operation to erase the
portions of the layers that were within the intersection.
■Connect and Edit: Connect to SDF, SHP, and WMS data stores and add
the connected data to AutoCAD Map 3D. Execute the AutoCAD command
Pedit (pausing for user input), and then check in all features.
■Batch-save .Layer Files: Connect to each SDF file in a specified directory
and add it to AutoCAD Map 3D. Save each resulting Display Manager layer
as a .layer file.
■Connect, Analyze, and Print: Connect to a data store, add its data to
AutoCAD Map 3D as a Display Manager layer, and change the symbol for
that layer. Select a set of features for buffer analysis, create the buffer, and
change the symbol for the resulting buffer layer. Select the features on the
buffer layer and display their attributes. Plot the map.
■Select, Zoom, and Display Features: Load two .layer files. Prompt the person
running the workflow to select some features manually. Zoom to the
extents of the selected features and highlight them. Display the attributes
for the highlighted features. Select a different set of features by location.
Zoom to the extents of the selected features and highlight them. Display
the attributes for the highlighted features.
Overview of Workflows | 275
NOTE If you do not see the built-in workflows in the drop-down list of workflows,
click Open Workflow From File in that list and navigate to the Program
Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\Sample\Workflow folder. Select the .xoml
file for the workflow to open.
NOTE If you use Windows 7, you must have write access to run a workflow. If
you have limited access, AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save the workflow. The workflow
must be saved before it is run.
Use the Workflow Designer to create or edit the sequence and parameters for the
activities in the workflow.
To use workflows
■To run a workflow (page 278)
■To edit a workflow (page 284)
■To create a workflow (page 287)
■To change the display of the Workflow Designer window (page 289)
276 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
MAPWORKFLOWOPEN
Allows you to use a saved workflow
Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer.
Menu
Open Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWOPENCommand Line
MAPWORKFLOWRUN
Runs a workflow
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Workflow Designer.
Menu
Run Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWRUNCommand Line
MAPWORKFLOWCREATE
Creates a workflow
Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer.
Menu
MAPWORKFLOWCREATECommand Line
MAPWORKFLOWEDIT
Edits a workflow
Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer.
Menu
Edit Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWEDITCommand Line
Overview of Workflows | 277
Running Workflows
A workflow automates a set of activities. A workflow can include activities
such as the following:
■Connecting to data
■Creating a Display Manager layer for a geospatial data store
■Performing an overlay analysis (page 1309)
■Chaining to another workflow
You can run any workflow, even if you did not create it. Recently used
workflows are listed on the Workflow drop-down list, which also contains an
option for opening any saved workflow. If the workflow requires information
from you (for example, the location of a file or data store), it prompts you
during run-time. For a list of the sample workflows provided with AutoCAD
Map 3D, see Overview of Workflows (page 275).
NOTE If you use Windows 7, you must have write access to run a workflow. If
you have limited access, AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save the workflow. The workflow
must be saved before it is run.
To run a workflow
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, on the Tools tab ➤ Workflow
panel, select a workflow from the list.
If the workflow you want is not in the list, click Open Workflow From
File at the bottom of the list.
2Click .
NOTE If you use Windows 7, you must have write access to run a workflow.
If you have limited access, AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save the workflow. The
workflow must be saved before it is run.
278 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
3If prompted, specify the values for the parameters of the workflow.
For example, the Overlay workflow requires you to specify the data store
to connect to.
If the workflow requires parameters for any of its activities,
it displays a prompt.
■To connect to database, specify login credentials.
■To connect to a file, select the appropriate provider and click and
navigate to the file.
■To connect to a SHP folder instead of a file, select the SHP provider
and click the folder icon to specify the folder.
Running Workflows | 279
The workflow performs the activities in its definition and displays the
result.
For example, the built-in Overlay workflow connects to the specified data
stores, performs the overlay, and displays the resulting layers in your
map. The overlay itself is saved to the specified SDF file. AutoCAD Map
3D Connects to that SDF file and adds a Display Manager layer for it. The
connections appear in Map Explorer and in the Data Connect window.
NOTE If the workflow fails, an error message displays. Open the Workflow
Designer to find the error. The activity that failed displays a red X or an
exclamation mark.
4If you changed any parameters in response to a prompt, you can save or
discard the changes when the workflow is complete.
Quick Reference
MAPWORKFLOWOPEN
Allows you to use a saved workflow
Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer.
Menu
Open Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWOPENCommand Line
MAPWORKFLOWRUN
Runs a workflow
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Workflow Designer.
Menu
Run Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWRUNCommand Line
280 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Editing or Creating Workflows
A workflow automates a set of activities. You can change any existing workflow
or create one from scratch. For example, change the predefined Overlay
workflow to perform a Union, rather than an Intersect. Create a workflow to
connect to a set of data stores and add Display Manager layers for them.
Use the Workflow Designer to edit or create workflows.
Activities in the workflow appear as a diagram in the Workflow Designer.
Utility and AutoCAD Map 3D Activities
The Activity panel on the right side of the Workflow Designer contains two
categories of activities. AutoCAD Map 3D activities are specific to AutoCAD
Map 3D (including an activity that runs AutoCAD commands).
Utility activities are generic, and are based on C# syntax. They include the
following types of activities:
■Directory commands (such as listing the contents of a folder)
Editing or Creating Workflows | 281
■Logical commands (such as If/Else and For Each)
■Workflow structure commands (such as Parallel, Sequence, and Prompt
User).
For information about the available activities, see Workflow Activity Input
dialog boxes (page 2025).
Parallel and Sequence Activities
In a workflow, parallel activities are independent of one another. For example,
when connecting to two data stores, parallel connections ensure that the
second connection executes even if the first one fails.
A sequence activity depends on previous activities. For example, within the
parallel activity at the top of the overlay workflow are two sets of sequence
activities. Each one connects to a particular data store and then creates a layer
for that data store. If the connection fails, the layer cannot be created.
Setting Activity Parameters
Each workflow activity has a set of parameters. Optionally, you can set default
parameters and specify that the workflow display a prompt at run-time. The
person running the workflow can then substitute other values. For example,
you can set default data stores for an overlay, but allow others to substitute
different data stores when they run the workflow.
Some parameters are required. For example, a Connect To Data Store activity
requires the name of the provider and the location of the data store to connect
to. Some parameters are optional, for example, the Display Name for the
activity. All optional parameters have default values you can change.
NOTE Although Display Name is optional, it is a good idea to name all activities.
If activities are not named, you can confuse them when you bind a parameter of
one activity to the output of a previous one. See the following section.
Binding Parameters
Often, a sequence activity is bound to a preceding activity. When you bind an
activity, you set its parameter to be the result of a previous activity. For
example, you can use the output of an activity that creates a layer as the source
layer for a subsequent overlay operation.
282 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Bind the parameter for an activity to a property from a
previous activity.
Adding Activities to Workflows
If you can write simple code in a .NET-compliant language, you can add
activities to the Workflow Designer. Workflow activities perform predetermined
functions based on predetermined sets of inputs.
Use the sample activity set (Automation) as a model. Automation contains
activities for running AutoCAD Map 3D in an automated fashion, without
using the actual application. The files for this sample activity are installed
with the ObjectARX SDK.
Editing or Creating Workflows | 283
Build your activities in a .NET class library (a .dll file). Place this .dll file in the
\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\PlugIns\Workflow\Activities folder and
restart AutoCAD Map 3D. The activities then appear in the Workflow Designer.
For more information on creating custom workflow activities, see the
sdk.doc.main.chm.
■To edit a workflow (page 284)
■To create a workflow (page 287)
To edit a workflow
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel.
Select a workflow from the drop-down list.
If the workflow you want is not in the list, click Open Workflow From
File at the bottom of the list. After you open a workflow, select it from
the list.
NOTE If you use Windows 7, you must have write access to run a workflow.
If you have limited access, AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save the workflow. The
workflow must be saved before it is run.
2In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab ➤ Workflow
panel ➤ Edit.
3In the Workflow Designer (page 2022), pan or zoom (page 289) as needed.
4If necessary, expand the activity to edit.
For example, to change the settings for activities inside the Parallel
Activity at the top of the workflow, click its plus sign. The Parallel Activity
contains activities for the feature classes that are compared in the Overlay
workflow and creates the Display Manager layers for these feature classes.
NOTE To set parameters for some utility activities (For Each, If/Else, and
While), click in the Workflow Designer toolbar. In the Properties palette
that displays, click the cell for the parameter to set. Click the browse button
that appears to select parameters from a list, if available.
5To set the parameters for an activity (page 2025), do any of the following:
■Double-click the activity box.
■Click .
284 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Right-click the activity and click Set Up Parameters.
For information about the available activities and their parameters, see
Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes (page 2025). For a tutorial on
workflows, see Lesson 5: Edit a Predefined Workflow.
6To bind an activity to the output of a previous activity from the input
editor, do the following:
■In the activity input dialog box for the activity, click the down arrow
next to the parameter to bind.
■Under Results Of Previous Actions, click the property to bind to.
To use a layer created by a previous activity, select it from the
list under Results Of Previous Actions.
Editing or Creating Workflows | 285
NOTE There is a shortcut for adding an activity and automatically binding
it to the previous activity. Right-click an activity and click the activity to add.
For example, right-click an Overlay activity and click Add Feature Layer to
create a new Display Manager layer that stores the output of the Overlay
operation.
7Optionally, do any of the following:
■To add another activity, drag it from the Activities panel to the desired
position in the workflow diagram, or right-click the activity that
precedes the new one.
When you right-click, the list contains activities that would logically
follow the current one. When you add an activity in this way, you
can automatically bind it to the one you right-clicked. For example,
right-click an Overlay activity and click Add Feature Layer to create a
new Display Manager layer that stores the output of the Overlay
operation.
■To delete an activity, click on its box.
■To turn the run-time prompt for an activity on or off, click on its
box.
When the run-time prompt is on, anyone running this workflow must
provide the input for this activity. For example, the person running
the workflow must provide data store connection information for a
Connect To Data Store activity.
■To disable or enable the activity, click on its box.
Disable an activity temporarily to resolve problems with a workflow.
If you are not sure which activity is causing the problem, disable them
one at a time when you run the workflow. This can isolate the issue.
■Undo or redo any changes during this editing session using
8Save any changes to the workflow by clicking at the top of the
Workflow Designer window.
To save your changes as a new workflow, click instead.
Workflows saved in AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 format cannot be opened
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2010. To use your workflow with AutoCAD Map
3D 2010, make sure that the workflow contains only activities that were
286 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
supported in that version. Then use Save As and change Save As Type to
Map 3D 2010 Workflow File. To maintain the version formatting, you
must continue to use the 2010 Save As option each time you save the
workflow
9Click to run the workflow from within the Workflow Designer,
which validates the activities.
As each activity executes successfully, a green check mark appears at the
top right corner of the activity box. If an exclamation mark appears
instead of the check mark, the activity is missing parameter values. Click
the exclamation point to see what is missing and correct the problem. If
a red X appears instead of the check mark, the activity failed.
Click the status link in the Workflow Status area (at the bottom of the
Workflow Designer window) to see the log.
In the log window, find the row for the activity that failed. The description
column explains the error.
10 Optionally, click to print the workflow.
To create a workflow
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab ➤ Workflow
panel ➤ New.
2To create a workflow that uses multiple data connections, add a Parallel
activity.
■In the Workflow Designer (page 2022), click the System panel header
on the right side of the window.
■Drag the Parallel activity to the diagram area in the Workflow Designer
(where you see Drag And Drop Map Activities Here).
Use a separate Sequence activity for each connection. By default, the
Parallel activity has two Sequence activities. If you need more, drag
them into the Parallel activity.
■For each connection, drag a Connect To Data Store activity into a
Sequence activity.
■To create a layer for these connections, use an Add Feature Layer
activity. Drag this activity just below each Connect To Data Store
activity (within the Sequence activity for that connection).
Editing or Creating Workflows | 287
3To create a workflow that uses a single data store, do the following:
■Drag the Connect To Data Store activity to the diagram area in the
Workflow Designer (where you see Drag And Drop Map Activities
Here).
■Optionally, create a layer for the connection by dragging a Create
Feature Layer activity just below it.
4Add any other desired activities.
For information about the available activities and their parameters, see
Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes (page 2025). For a tutorial on
workflows, see Lesson 5: Edit a Predefined Workflow.
NOTE To set parameters for some utility activities (For Each, If/Else, and
While), click in the Workflow Designer toolbar. In the Properties palette
that displays, click the cell for the parameter to set. Click the browse button
that appears to select parameters from a list, if available.
5Save the workflow by clicking at the top of the Workflow Designer
window.
Workflows saved in AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 format cannot be opened
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2010. To use your workflow with AutoCAD Map
3D 2010, make sure that the workflow contains only activities that were
supported in that version. Then use Save As and change Save As Type to
Map 3D 2010 Workflow File. To maintain the version formatting, you
must continue to use the 2010 Save As option each time you save the
workflow
6Click to run the workflow from within the Workflow Designer,
which validates the activities.
As each activity executes successfully, a green check mark appears at the
top right corner of the activity box. If an exclamation mark appears
instead of the check mark, the activity is missing a parameter. If a red X
appears, the activity failed. Click the link in the Workflow Status area (at
the bottom of the Workflow Designer window) to see the log.
7Optionally, click to print the workflow.
288 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
MAPWORKFLOWCREATE
Creates a workflow
Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer.
Menu
MAPWORKFLOWCREATECommand Line
MAPWORKFLOWEDIT
Edits a workflow
Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer.
Menu
Edit Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWEDITCommand Line
Changing the Workflow Designer Display
As you work in the Workflow Designer, you can do the following:
■Adjust the magnification and focus of the design area
■Refresh the display
■Hide or show the Settings and Activities panels
The Settings panel displays the parameters for the selected activity in an
editable table. The Activities panel displays the list of activities you can add
to a workflow.
To change the display of the Workflow Designer window
■To pan or zoom, use these techniques:
■To move to a different part of the workflow, use the scroll bars or click
Pan.
■To zoom in or out, adjust the magnification slider.
■To zoom to the extents of the workflow, click Show The Entire
Workflow.
Changing the Workflow Designer Display | 289
Pan, zoom, or show
the entire workflow.
■To show or hide the activities panel, click
■To show or hide the Settings panel for the selected activity, click .
In the Settings panel, you can view and edit values for the parameters of
the current activity. Click the cell for the parameter to set. Click the browse
button that appears to select parameters from a list, if available.
NOTE To set parameters for some utility activities (For Each, If/Else, and While),
you must use the Properties palette (instead of the input editor).
■To refresh the display, click .
290 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Bringing In Data
Overview of Bringing In Data
A map file in AutoCAD Map 3D is a specialized drawing (DWG) file in which
you can combine data from many sources. A map file holds all the information
required to create, edit, view, and publish your map, including the following:
■AutoCAD drawing objects and information about attached drawing files
■Attribute or point data stored in a spreadsheet or database that can be linked
to drawing objects
■Information required to connect to databases like Oracle and ArcSDE
■Information required to connect to geospatial features stored in a relational
database, such as Microsoft® SQL Server, SQL Server Spatial, Oracle® Spatial,
PostgreSQL/PostGIS, and MySQL
■Information required to connect to geospatial features stored in a geospatial
data file format, such as an ESRI® SHP, Microsoft® SQLite, or Autodesk® SDF
file
■Information required to connect to geospatial features stored in middleware,
such as ESRI® ArcSDE®
■Information required to connect to web-based resources such as WFS (Web
Feature Service) sites and WMS (Web Map Service) sites
■Information needed to connect to raster images, including DEM (page 2059)
surfaces that show elevation
■Metadata
■Styling information
3
291
■Map layouts
■Data from third-party providers, leveraging the power of Open Source
AutoCAD Map 3D is your window onto all this data. You have two ways to
access data: you can connect to drawing files, geospatial files, or other data
sources and view and edit entities in their original sources, saving your changes
in the native format; or you can convert the data to DWG format, breaking
any connection to the original source.
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
All features in the selected feature
class appear in the map. Any edits
Edit features from the
following sources in
their native format:
1In Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Connect
To Data. you make are saved back to the
original source.
■ArcSDE (page 316) 2Select the data source
and feature classes.
■Autodesk SDF
(page 337)
■ESRI SHP (page
335)
■MySQL (page 332)
■ODBC (page 342)
■Oracle (page 312)
■PostgreSQL/Post-
GIS (page 340)
■SQL Server (page
323)
■SQL Server Spatial
(page 323)
■SQLite (page 323)
■WFS (page 346)
If you use a provider to connect
to the data, you can edit it dir-
Use formats that are
not listed in the Data
■To connect to the data,
use an open-source or
Connect window
(page 540)
ectly in its native format. If you
convert and import it, you edit a
copy of the data in DWG format.
third-party provider
(page 540).
■To use a copy of the data
(page 378), Click Insert
292 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
tab ➤ Import pan-
el ➤ Map Import .
Both the original data for the fea-
ture layer and the joined data ap-
pear in the Data Table.
Join attribute data to
features from Oracle,
SDF, etc. (page 507)
1Connect to the source
of attribute data (for
example, connect to an
ODBC source such as a
Microsoft Access table)
from the Task Pane.
Click Data ➤ Connect
To Data.
2Right-click a layer and
click Create A Join.
3Specify the connected
attribute data source.
Only the objects that match your
query are added to the map.
Add DWG objects
from the current
drawing (page 350)
1In Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add
Drawing Data ➤
Query Current Draw-
ing.
2Define a query to re-
trieve objects.
Only the objects that match your
query are added to the map.
Add drawing objects
from other drawings
1Attach the drawings to
the current drawing.
(page 154). When you edit the objects, you
can choose to update the original
drawings or not.
2In Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add
Drawing Data ➤
Query Source Drawing.
3Define a query to re-
trieve objects. See
Bringing In Drawing
Data From DWG Files
(page 350).
Overview of Bringing In Data | 293
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
A copy of the data is added to the
map in DWG format. The connec-
Convert geospatial
data to drawing data
(page 378)
■Click Insert tab ➤ Import
panel ➤ Map Import .
tion to the original source is
broken, and changes are not
saved back to that source.
A copy of the data is added to the
map in DWG format. The connec-
Convert SDF files to
drawing data (page
387)
■Click Insert tab ➤ Import
panel ➤ Map Import .
Use this method
tion to the original source is
broken, and changes are not
saved back to that source.
for the current version of
SDF. See Overview of
Converting Geospatial
Data to Drawing Objects
(page 378).
■In the Tool-based Ribbon
Workspace, click Insert
tab ➤ Import panel ➤
SDF2. Use this method
for the version supported
by MapGuide 6.5 and
earlier. See Importing
Autodesk SDF 2 (page
389).
You can view or edit the data by
double-clicking the table name in
Map Explorer.
Add attribute data to
use with drawing ob-
jects
1Add the data source to
the map. See Setting
Up Data Sources for
Drawings (page 204).
2Define a link template
for the data. See Creat-
ing a Link Template
(page 525).
3Link records to drawing
objects. See Manually
Linking Database Re-
cords to Objects (page
528).
294 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
The image appears in your map,
where you can style it or move it
behind other features.
Add raster images
(page 437) in the follow-
ing formats:
DEM, ESRI Grid, DTED,
JPEG and JPEG2K ,
1In Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Connect
To Data.
2Specify the folder that
contains the raster and
select the raster.
PNG, MrSID, TIFF,
ECW
The image appears in your map,
where you can clip it (page 504)
Add raster images in
other formats (page
454)
1Click Home tab ➤ Data
panel ➤ Insert An Im-
age.
or change its transparency (page
499), brightness and other settings
(page 489).
2Select the image and
specify the image
placement and settings.
For ECW and MrSID formats,
you must download the free
raster object enabler available
from autodesk.com
The data appears in your map like
any other SDF or DEM data.
Connect to data from
Civil 3D (page 543)
1From Civil 3D, export
feature data (such as
parcels and alignments)
in SDF format and save
surfaces in DEM format.
2Connect to the result-
ing files in AutoCAD
Map 3D.
The survey points appear in your
map and are stored in a new sur-
vey data store.
Add survey data (page
370)
■Add LandXML files (page
371).
■Add ASCII point data
(page 373).
See also:
■Creating a Map (page 296)
Overview of Bringing In Data | 295
Before You Bring In Data
Creating a Map
When you create a new map file, you do the following:
■Choose a template.
The map2d.dwt template contains the optimal display settings, tools, and
views for 2D maps, while the map3d.dwt template is optimized for 3D
maps. You can also create your own templates. For information on this,
see the AutoCAD Help topic called “Use a Template File to Start a Drawing.”
■Assign a coordinate system.
Data you add to your map file is transformed to use the coordinate system
assigned to your map. When you save it back to its source, it is transformed
back to its original coordinate system.
■Add data.
You can combine data from many sources.
■Geospatial data
For many geospatial formats, such as Oracle and ArcSDE, you can
connect to the source to add data using FDO (page 2062) Data Access
Technology. You access data live, in its native format. You can extend
your data access capabilities by adding an open source or third-party
FDO provider (page 2063).
You can also convert data from most of these formats to DWG format.
To do this, you import the data (rather than connect to it). However,
this method adds only a snapshot of the data and your changes do not
update the data at its source.
For other formats, such as MicroStation Design (DGN) and Arc/INFO,
you must import the data.
■Drawing (DWG) data
You can attach AutoCAD drawing files to your map and query in objects
from those drawings, or import data from non-drawing sources to add
it as drawing data.
NOTE When you import data, you make a copy of the data and bring that
copy into your map as drawing objects. When you edit the data, you are
editing the copy. The original data is unchanged.
■Raster data
296 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Connect to raster images and surfaces, or use the Raster Extension
feature.
■Attribute data
Join additional attributes to GIS features, or add attributes to drawing
objects using database linking or object data.
■Data from AutoCAD Civil 3D
Export Civil 3D feature data, such as parcels and alignments, in SDF
format. Connect to the resulting SDF file in AutoCAD Map 3D. You
can also save surfaces as DEMs in Civil 3D and connect to the resulting
DEM files in AutoCAD Map 3D. You can also bring in LandXML files
using the Survey feature.
■Survey Data
Create a new survey data store and then bring in LandXML or ASCII point
data.
■Create Display Manager layers.
Geospatial data that you add to your map is automatically organized into
display layers by feature class. You can also add drawing data to layers.
Layers give you control over draw order (Z-order), styling, and more.
See also:
■Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing (page 147)
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■Joining Data to GIS Features (page 507)
■Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects (page 521)
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Open Source FDO Providers (page 540)
■Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data (page 543)
■Bringing in Survey Data (page 370)
■Organizing Layers in Your Map (page 300)
■Overview of Visualization and Styling (page 631)
Creating a Map | 297
■Overview of Creating Themes (page 1163)
■Overview of Creating New Features (page 686)
■Getting Help with AutoCAD (page 58)
To create a map
1Start a new drawing, choosing either the map2d.dwt or map3d.dwt
template, or a custom map template you created.
2Assign a coordinate system to the map. (page 147)
NOTE If you do not assign a coordinate system to the map, data that you
bring into the map will appear using its native coordinate system. If you bring
in data from more than one coordinate system, entities may not align correctly
in the map.
3Add features (page 308) and drawing objects (page 354)to the map.
To add geospatial data to a map
■Drag and drop file-based sources into your map.
■Use Data Connect to connect to any non-DWG data source and add
the feature classes you want.
■Use data-based queries to add a subset of data from the data source
to your map.
To add AutoCAD drawing data to a map
■Use data-based queries to add objects from a drawing (find all objects
on a particular layer, all objects of a certain size, all objects with certain
properties).
■Define areas to add (draw a selection window).
■Add specific drawing layers.
4Optionally, add attribute data to features (page 507) and drawing objects
(page 521).
5Optionally, To add a raster-based surface to your map (page 442).
298 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
6Optionally, add open-source or third-party providers (page 540) to access
additional data formats, add data from AutoCAD Civil 3D (page 543), or
add survey data (page 370).
7Organize the layers (page 300) that comprise your map.
8Change the appearance of the map using styles (page 631) and themes
(page 1163).
NOTE You can create multiple display maps from the same data. See Creating
Multiple Display Maps (page 638).
9Optionally, create new features (page 688) or drawing objects. You can
use many AutoCAD commands (page 58).
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
ADEATTACHDATA
Attaches object data to objects
Create menu ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data
Menu
Attach/Detach Object Data
Icon
ADEATTACHDATACommand Line
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Map | 299
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Organizing Layers in Your Map
Display Manager organizes the data in your map into layers, which you can
display and style independently. Each layer contains one type of data. For
example, you might have a layer of drawing objects, a layer that represents a
feature class from Oracle, a DEM surface layer, and a raster image layer. When
you use FDO (page 2062) to connect to a data source (via Data Connect), each
feature class or image in that data source becomes a separate layer
automatically. You can create drawing layers for drawing objects, and these
objects can be members of multiple layers.
NOTE Display Manager layers are different from the classic “AutoCAD layers” you
see in the Layer Properties Manager. AutoCAD users cannot see Display Manager
layers unless they use AutoCAD Map 3D. You use different techniques to style the
two different layer types.
View the layers in Display Manager in two ways:
■Groups organizes the list of layers. For example, you can create a group
for as-built data and a separate group for proposed changes.
■Draw Order determines the draw order of the layers. Items at the top of
the draw order are drawn on top of items below them on the list.
If an object is a member of more than one layer, it inherits the style of each
layer of which it is a member. For example, if a line is in both the
Transportation layer and the Roads layer, it inherits the styles of both layers.
If the layers specify conflicting style or visibility settings, the object uses the
style and visibility settings of whichever layer is higher in the Display Manager
list.
300 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
You can specify a thumbnail icon for drawing layers, which is used in Display
Manager and in any legends you create for this map. This affects drawing
layers only, and is not available for feature layers.
See also:
■Overview of the Display Manager (page 634)
■Controlling Display Order (page 636)
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
■Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 350)
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■To add a feature layer using FDO (Oracle, ArcSDE, SDF, SHP, WFS) (page
301)
■To add a drawing layer (page 301)
■To add a raster-based surface to your map (page 442)
■To create a group (page 301)
■To change the draw order (page 302)
■To change the thumbnail style for a drawing layer (page 302)
To add a feature layer using FDO (Oracle, ArcSDE, SDF, SHP, WFS)
■Connect to the FDO source. (page 303)
To add a drawing layer
■Attach a drawing and query in objects (page 350)
To add a raster or surface layer
■Connect to the raster or surface file or folder. (page 437)
To create a group
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Groups.
Organizing Layers in Your Map | 301
2In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ New Group.
3To change the group name, select the group then click the existing name.
Type a new name and press Enter.
4Drag layers into the group.
NOTE Until you use the Draw Order view to specify a draw order, AutoCAD Map
3D uses the Groups order as a default draw order for the map. Once you use the
Draw Order view, changes in the Groups view do not affect the draw order.
To change the draw order
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Draw Order if needed.
2Drag layers up or down to change their display order.
Items at the top of the draw order are drawn on top of items below them on
the list.
To change the thumbnail style for a drawing layer
1Select the layer.
2In Display Manager (page 2060), click the Style button.
3On the Display tab of the Properties palette, next to Thumbnail Preview,
select the style of thumbnail to use.
For example, select the polyline icon to display an icon of a wavy line,
or choose the polygon icon to display hatch or fill.
302 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
This setting affects both the Display Manager layer and the legend for this
map.
Quick Reference
Change the display order of Display Manager layers
Control which layers appear on top (or behind) other layers
In Display Manager, drag an item up or down in the
list
Task Pane
New Display Manager Group
Creates a new Display Manager group
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ New Group
Task Pane
Sort Layers in Display Manager
Sorts the map layers alphabetically
In Display Manager, click the thin down arrow next
to the Map list and choose Sort Contents
Task Pane
Bringing in GIS Features
NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects,
see Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351).
When you access data through FDO (page 2062), you use an FDO provider (page
2063) to connect directly to a data source, such as SDF, SHP, Oracle, SQL Server,
or ArcSDE, and work in its native format.
For FDO data sources with geometry, you select the feature classes to include
in your map.
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity, such as a road, a
utility pole, or a river. Features are organized into collections, called feature
classes, and are stored in a spatial database or file. The spatial database or file
is sometimes referred to as a feature source (page 2063).
Bringing in GIS Features | 303
See also:
■Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Working with FDO Schemas (page 553)
■To access data through FDO (page 308)
■To filter feature data when you add it to a map (page 310)
■To change the coordinate system assigned to the data you are adding to a
map (page 311)
■To bring in features from Oracle (page 314)
■To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier (page 315)
■To set up your system for ArcSDE 9.2 (or if you use the 9.1 client and you
access the ArcSDE 9.2 server) (page 318)
■To set up your system for ArcSDE 9.1 (or if you use the 9.2 client and you
access the ArcSDE 9.1 server) (page 318)
■To bring in features from ESRI ArcSDE (page 319)
■To set up a direct connection to the underlying database (page 320)
■For an Oracle database: (page 320)
■For a SQL Server database: (page 321)
■For an Oracle database, copy the following DLL files: (page 321)
■For a SQL Server database, copy the following DLL files: (page 321)
■For an Oracle database, set the following parameters: (page 322)
■For a SQL Server database, set the following parameters: (page 322)
■To bring in features from SQL Server (page 324)
■To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier (page 325)
■To bring in features from SQL Server Spatial (page 328)
■To bring in features from SQLite (page 331)
■To bring in features from MySQL (page 333)
■To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier (page 334)
■To bring in features from SHP (page 336)
■To bring in features from SDF (page 338)
■To bring in features from PostgreSQL/PostGIS (page 341)
■To access ODBC data (page 344)
■To create a DSN in Windows XP (page 345)
■To define the table ranges required to access Excel data (page 346)
■To bring in features from WFS (page 348)
■To reconnect to feature data without losing styling information (page 350)
304 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
This map of a water distribution system is made up of features stored in a set of SDF
files.
NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects,
see Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351).
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road, a utility
pole, or a river. Features are stored in a spatial database or file. The spatial
database or file is referred to as a feature source (page 2063).
The feature source could be a database (such as Oracle, ArcSDE, SQL Server,
or MySQL), a file-based feature source (such as SDF or SHP), a web server (such
as WFS), or a table of feature geometry data (such as Microsoft Access).
Once you connect to a feature source, you select the types of features to include
in your map. Each type of feature is called a feature class (page 2063). AutoCAD
Map 3D displays all the features from the selected features classes in your map,
and each feature class becomes a layer in Display Manager. For example, a
feature class called Roads contains individual streets and appears on a layer
called Roads in Display Manager. You can apply a single style to this layer,
and all the streets in the layer will use that style.
A schema (page 2073) is the definition of multiple feature classes and the
relationships between them. It determines the criteria an individual feature
must meet in order to be a member of a particular feature class. For some
feature sources, you can add and edit a schema and its feature classes and
Overview of Bringing In GIS Features | 305
properties. For more information about editing schemas, see Working with
Schemas (page 593).
NOTE WMS and Raster are used to access images, not features. You cannot edit
or lock these images, and they do not use schemas.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to bring in data from a
web server using WMS.
■Show me how to bring in point data
from an ODBC database.
■Show me how to bring in a subset of
features using a query.
Procedure
■To access data through FDO (page 308)
■To filter feature data when you add it
to a map (page 310)
Tutorial
■Exercise 2: Use Data Connect to add
data to your map
Workflow
■Create a Feature Map
GIS Skills
■Access data published on a public web
server
■Bring in point data from a Microsoft Ac-
cess database
■Bring in a subset of features using a
query
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Working with FDO Schemas (page 553)
306 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
FDO Provider Capabilities
You use FDO (page 2062) to connect directly to a data source and work in its
native format. Each data source type uses its own FDO provider (page 2063), and
each provider has different capabilities.
For example, Oracle and ArcSDE support locking on the feature level. When
you check out a feature, other users cannot edit it, even though they can view
your edits and edit other features in the feature source. Oracle and ArcSDE
also support persistent locking, so the object stays locked until you check it
back in.
SHP feature sources, on the other hand, support locking on the file level.
When you check out a feature, its entire SHP file is locked. Other users cannot
edit features from that file until you close the map, which releases your lock
(even if you still have features checked out at the time). Be careful to check
in your changes before you close the map.
Versioning (page 2078) allows multiple copies of a spatial dataset to be stored
and tracked by date of creation, date of change, and so on. Not every FDO
provider supports versioning.
The following table lists the level of locking, versioning, and schema editing
supported by each feature source type.
Edit
Schema
Persistent
Locking
VersionsLock LevelFeature Source
Type
YesNoNoNoneArcSDE (page
316)
YesNoNoNoneMySQL (page
332)
NoNoNoFileODBC (page 342)
YesYesYesFeatureOracle (page 312)
YesYesYesFeaturePostgreSQL/Post-
GIS (page 340)
YesNoNoNoneSDF (page 337)
YesNoNoFileSHP (page 335)
Overview of Bringing In GIS Features | 307
Edit
Schema
Persistent
Locking
VersionsLock LevelFeature Source
Type
YesNoNoNoneSQL Server (page
323)
SQL Server Spa-
tial (page 326)
YesNoNoFileSQLite (page 330)
NoNoN/AN/AWFS (page 346)
N/AN/AN/AN/AWMS (page 445)
N/AN/AN/AN/ARaster (page 437)
To access data through FDO
NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects,
see the procedures for bringing in drawing objects. (page 354).
1Make sure that your feature source is set up correctly. If you have
questions, refer to the Readme file.
2Find out your user name and password, if required.
Your CAD Manager or Database Administrator can help you with this.
3Open or create (page 296) the map that will include the data from this
feature source.
4If you are working with data from various coordinate systems, assign a
coordinate system to the current map. See Assigning a Coordinate System
to the Current Drawing (page 147).
AutoCAD Map 3D converts all the data you bring into this map to the
assigned coordinate system. If you edit the data and save it back to its
source, AutoCAD Map 3D converts it back to the original coordinate
system.
5In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
6In the left pane of the Data Connect window, select the feature source.
7In the right pane, enter a name for this connection and specify the
information required to connect to the feature source. Click Connect.
308 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
8In the Add Data To Map section, under Schema, select the feature classes
to include in your map.
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
9If necessary, click Edit Coordinate Systems to specify the coordinate
system for the incoming data (page 311).
10 Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query. See Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map
(page 309). To filter data after you have added the data to your map, see
Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join (page 507).
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map
NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To filter drawing (DWG) objects, see
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351).
When you connect to a geospatial data store, you can choose Add To Map
With Query to filter the data you bring into your map.
Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map | 309
You can filter a single layer or multiple layers at one time. You can filter the
data by its location in the map or by property conditions that you define. For
example, you can add only streets that cross a circle you draw on the map, or
only parcels on a particular street.
See also:
■Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216)
■Creating Expressions - Reference
To filter feature data when you add it to a map
NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects,
see the procedures for bringing in drawing objects. (page 354).
1Connect to the data source (page 308) in the Data Connect window.
2Under Add Data To Map, check the layers to add.
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
3Click the Add To Map down arrow and select Add To Map With Query
to create your expression.
In the View/Create Query Statement dialog box (page 1610), the list of
layers at the top of the window shows any existing filters for the selected
layers. If the layers use a common query (specifying a property that all
the layers have in common), that query is listed separately. Any query
you create applies to all selected layers.
4Create the expression for your query.
For help with any expression element, see Creating Expressions -
Reference.
■To filter the layer based on one of its properties (for example, to add
only the parcels whose Address property specifies a particular street),
create a query that evaluates a property.
If multiple layers are selected, only the properties they have in
common are available.
■To filter the layer based on location (for example, to bring in only
roads within a circle you define by drawing it on the map), create a
location-based query.
310 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Changing Coordinate Systems
If necessary, you can change the coordinate system of data you add to your
map.
You must specify the original coordinate system for the data. Do not specify
the coordinate system for the current map—AutoCAD Map 3D transforms the
data to the target coordinate system when it adds it to your map. Hold your
cursor over the entry in the Data Connect window to see its coordinate system
and spatial context information.
To change the coordinate system assigned to the data you are adding to a
map
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select the appropriate data provider in the
Data Connections By Provider list.
3Navigate to the data store and select it.
4Click Connect.
5Hold your cursor over the name of the data store to see a pop-up window
that displays its coordinate system, for example, UTM27-10.
When you add data to your map, you must specify its original coordinate
system. AutoCAD Map 3D automatically converts the data from that
coordinate system to the one specified for your map.
6Click Edit Coordinate Systems and, in the Edit Spatial Contexts (page 1605)
dialog box, click the entry.
Changing Coordinate Systems | 311
Select the entry and click Edit to specify the coordinate system for the surface
NOTE To copy the spatial context information to the clipboard (for example,
to check against your records or for use with a Technical Support specialist),
right-click the entry and click Copy Coordinate System.
7Click Edit.
8In the Select Coordinate System dialog box (page 1609), select the coordinate
system you saw in the pop-up window.
Select the appropriate category from the pulldown list, and then scroll
through the entries until you find the one you want.
9Click OK twice to return to the Data Connect window.
Bringing In Features from Oracle
You can bring features from an Oracle data source into your map, creating a
feature layer (page 2063) in Display Manager. When you do this, you can:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■View and edit the features
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Lock individual features when you check then out for editing.
■Keep features checked out and locked even when you close your drawing.
Features are not checked back in and unlocked until you specify.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make. Your edits
are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
312 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Create versions of your data. Versioning (page 2078) creates a copy of the
data in the data source. Your changes are made to the new version of the
data. Versioning is useful for proposed changes or changes that need
approval. When the changes are final, you can make your version the
current one.
■Use a data source set up for AutoCAD Map 3D. If your data source schema
is not set up to work with AutoCAD Map 3D, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a
custom mapping so you can use the data in your map.
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Create an Oracle data source.
■Move SHP data into Oracle to take advantage of better data sharing.
■Bring in a static copy of Oracle data as drawing objects.
■Customize the Oracle FDO provider (page 2063).
NOTE Functionality for OSE (the Oracle Spatial OO40, which is similar to OLE DB)
is not available in a 64-bit environment. The Oracle library that OSE is built on
(Oracle Object for OLE) is 32-bit only. There is no 64-bit version.
In the 2008 release of AutoCAD Map 3D, a new column called geometrytype
was added to the table named F_AttributeDefinition. To use AutoCAD Map
3D 2011 to access FDO data stores that were created in AutoCAD Map 3D
2007 and earlier, you must first connect to the data store containing this table
and run a SQL script. Instructions for this are on the Procedure tab of this
topic. To do this, you must have the privileges required to execute the ALTER
TABLE request. In the command line, enter the following:
sqlplus <datastorename>/<yourpassword>@<tnsServiceName>
@<MapInstallDir>/Fdo/bin/com/AlterSchemaOracle.sql; exit;
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for Oracle API Reference. The API has custom commands for
gathering information about a provider, transmitting client services exceptions,
getting lists of accessible data stores, creating connection objects, and creating
and dropping spatial indexes.
See also:
■Working with Oracle Data (page 554)
Bringing In Features from Oracle | 313
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
■Importing From Oracle (page 409)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
To bring in features from Oracle
1Make sure that your feature source is set up correctly.
2In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
3In the Data Connect window, select Add Oracle Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
4In the Feature Source Connection dialog box (page 1607), under Connection
Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
5Under Service Name, enter the service name for the Oracle data store. If
you do not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
6Click Login.
7In the User Credentials dialog box (page 1610), enter your Oracle user name
and password. If your organization uses Windows authentication to log
in to Oracle, select Use Windows Authentication.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want AutoCAD Map 3D to
log you in whenever you open this drawing.
8Under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do not know this
name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow.
NOTE If the data store is not in the list, it may not use a AutoCAD Map 3D
schema. Select Show All Data Stores to add these to the list. AutoCAD Map
3D creates a mapping to use these data stores with AutoCAD Map 3D.
9Optionally, select a version of the data store.
314 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
10 Click Connect.
11 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
12 Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to
your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join (page 507).
To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier
1Verify that you have the privileges required to execute the ALTER TABLE
request.
2In the command line, enter the following:
sqlplus <datastorename>/<yourpassword>@<tnsServiceName>
@<MapInstallDir>/Fdo/bin/com/AlterSchemaOracle.sql;
exit;
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from Oracle | 315
Bringing In Features from ArcSDE
When you view and edit features from an ArcSDE data source, you can do the
following:
■If you use SQL Server or Oracle as the underlying relational database
management system for ArcSDE, you can use either Windows or ArcSDE
authentication.
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Lock individual features when you check them out for editing.
■Keep features checked out and locked even when you close your drawing.
Features are not checked back in and unlocked until you specify.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■Create versions of your data. Versioning (page 2078) creates a copy of the
data in the data source. Your changes are made to the new version of the
data. Versioning is useful for proposed changes or changes that need
approval. When the changes are final, you can make your version the
current one. To use this feature, you must have versioning support turned
on in your database. To use versioning, you must enable versions for the
ArcSDE table.
NOTE Long transactions must be set in the data store to be available in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
■View the schema definition.
■Bring in a static copy of ArcSDE data as drawing objects.
Supported Versions
AutoCAD Map 3D supports ArcSDE 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, and 9.3.1. The 9.3.1 version
is available as either a 32-bit or 64-bit provider on Windows. (For previous
versions, and on Linux, it is available in 32-bit only.) The 64 bit support is
available only with the 64-bit ESRI ArcSDE 9.3.1 client libraries.
316 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Setting Up ArcSDE for Use with AutoCAD Map 3D
To use ArcSDE, install the following DLL files on the computer on which you
run AutoCAD Map 3D:
For version 9.2 through 9.3.1For version 9.1
pe.dllpe91.dll
sde.dllsde91.dll
sg.dllsg91.dll
The provider for this data store checks for the latest versions of the DLL files
first, and uses them if they are found. If they are not found, it checks for (and
uses) the 9.1 versions. The client DLL version should match the server version
that is being used.
If the client and server versions of ArcSDE do not match (for example if you
use the 9.1 client and you access the ArcSDE 9.3.1 server), set up your system
for the server version you are using.
Set up the services and hosts files for the appropriate version, and then use
these names when you connect to the data in the Data Connect dialog box.
For example, specify arcsdehost\esri_sde_nv, and not the values. Setup
instructions are on the Procedure tab of this topic.
You can copy these DLL files into the FDO/bin directory of AutoCAD Map 3D.
Alternatively, you can set the PATH environment variable to reference the
local folder containing these DLL files. To accomplish this, you can install an
ArcGIS 9.1 Desktop application or the ArcSDE SDK. For more information
about ArcGIS 9.1 Desktop applications and the ArcSDE SDK, refer to the ESRI
documentation.
Connecting Directly to the Database
ArcSDE provides a direct connection option. This option connects the client
directly to the Oracle or SQL Server database engine, rather than through the
separate ArcSDE process used in a normal connection. See the Procedure tab
of this topic for instructions on setting up this option.
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for ArcSDE API Reference.
Bringing In Features from ArcSDE | 317
See also:
■Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data (page 579)
■Importing ESRI ArcSDE Data (page 391)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
To set up your system for ArcSDE 9.2 (or if you use the 9.1 client and you
access the ArcSDE 9.2 server)
1Install the following DLL files on the computer on which you run
AutoCAD Map 3D.
Copy the files to the directory in which the ArcSDE provider is installed.
Usually, the directory is C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\FDO\bin
pe.dll
sde.dll
sg.dll
2Add entries in your C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\services file.
The entries look like this:
esri_92ora 6161/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - Oracle
esri_92sql 6161/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - SQLServer 2005
esri_sde 5151/tcp #ArcSDE 9.1- Oracle
esri_sde_ss 5152/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - SQLServer
3If you have trouble connecting, add a new line in your
C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts file.
The line looks like this:
192.168.0.100 arcsdehost
To set up your system for ArcSDE 9.1 (or if you use the 9.2 client and you
access the ArcSDE 9.1 server)
1Install the following DLL files on the computer on which you run
AutoCAD Map 3D.
Copy the files to the directory in which the ArcSDE provider is installed.
Usually, the directory is C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\FDO\bin
318 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
pe91.dll
sde91.dll
sg91.dll
2Add entries in your C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\services file.
The entries look like this:
esri_92ora 6161/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - Oracle
esri_92sql 6161/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - SQLServer 2005
esri_sde 5151/tcp #ArcSDE 9.1- Oracle
esri_sde_ss 5152/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - SQLServer
3If you have trouble connecting, add a new line in your
C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts file.
The line looks like this:
192.168.0.100 arcsdehost
To bring in features from ESRI ArcSDE
1Make sure your feature source is set up correctly. For a list of issues, refer
to the Readme.
2In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
3In the Data Connect window, select Add ArcSDE Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
4Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
5Under Server Name and Instance Name, enter the information for the
ArcSDE database. If you do not know the name, check with your System
Administrator.
6Click Login.
7In the User Credentials dialog box (page 1610), specify the login credentials
to use to log into this data store.
■If you use SQLServer as your underlying relational database
management system and want to use your Windows Authentication
credentials, select Windows Authentication and click Login.
Bringing In Features from ArcSDE | 319
■To use your ArcSDE login credentials, enter your user name and
password and click Login. (If you use SQL Server, ArcSDE will pass
your credentials to SQL Server.)
8Click OK.
9In Data Connect, under Data Store, enter the database name. If you do
not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of databases, click the down arrow. AutoCAD Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the available
databases. If you set up your hosts and services files as described, use
these names. For example, specify arcsdehost\esri_sde_nv, and not the
values.
10 Optionally, select a version of the database.
11 Click Connect.
12 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
13 Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to
your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join (page 507).
To set up a direct connection to the underlying database
1Set up connections to the underlying databases.
For an Oracle database:
■Install the Oracle client software on the client machine where you
run AutoCAD Map 3D.
■Open the Oracle port (for example, 1521) on the database machine
firewall.
320 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Use the Oracle Net Manager tool to set up a tnsnames entry for the
target database (or update tnsnames.ora manually).
■Test your connection to the target database using SQL Plus.
For a SQL Server database:
■Install the SQL Native client software on the client machine where
you run AutoCAD Map 3D.
■Open the SQL Server port (for example, 1433) on the database machine
firewall.
■Set the target SQL Server database to support remote connect.
■Test your connection to the target database using SQL Server
Management Studio.
2Copy additional DLL files into the fdo\bin directory.
Because the connection does not use the separate ArcSDE server process,
the client needs additional ArcSDE libraries. These DLL files are available
in the ArcSDE SDK.
For an Oracle database, copy the following
DLL
files:
■gsrvrora11g93.dll or gsrvrora10g93.dll, depending on whether the
Oracle client is 10gr2 or 11g. (This depends on the Oracle client version
and not the Oracle server version.)
■sdeora11gsrvr93.dll or sdeora10gsrvr93.dll
■xerces-c_2_7.dll
■icuuc22.dll
■icudt22l.dll
For a SQL Server database, copy the following
DLL
files:
■gsrvrsql93.dll
■sdesqlsrvr93.dll
■xerces-c_2_7.dll
■icuuc22.dll
Bringing In Features from ArcSDE | 321
■icudt22l.dll
3Adjust the connection parameters.
For an Oracle database, set the following parameters:
■Server name: Specify the server name or the IP address.
■Instance name: Enter sde:oracle10g or sde:oracle11g, depending
on the version of Oracle on the client.
■User name: Specify the user name that is valid on the Oracle server.
■Password: Enter <password>@<OracleSID> where OracleSID is the SID
configured in the client in step 1.
■Datastore: Enter the datastore name manually, for example, sde.
■Version: Enter the version manually. It defaults to the root version if
you do not specify the version.
For a SQL Server database, set the following parameters:
■Server name: Specify the server name or the IP address.
■Instance name: If you use the default instance of MSSQLSERVER, enter
sde:sqlserver:<servername>. Otherwise, enter
sde:sqlserver:<servername>\<instance_name>.
■User name/password: Specify the user name that is valid for the SQL
Server database.
■Datastore: Enter the datastore name manually, for example, sde.
■Version: Enter the version manually. It defaults to the root version if
you do not specify the version.
For more information and other options, see the ESRI documentation for
ArcSDE connection syntax.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
322 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from SQL Server
AutoCAD Map 3D supports both SQL Server and SQL Server Spatial (page 326).
For SQL Server, both the 2008 version (using the native spatial support that
Microsoft added in that version) and the 2005 version (with custom spatial
support added by Autodesk) are supported. If you use SQL Server 2008 or later,
we recommend moving to the new SQL Server Spatial provider. While the
SQL Server Spatial provider does not read datastores created by the old SQL
Server provider, you can use Bulk Copy (page 617) to move the data into that
format.
When you view and edit features from a SQL Server data source, you can do
the following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Create a SQL Server data source.
■Move other geospatial data (for example, SHP data) into SQL Server, to
take advantage of better data sharing.
NOTE You can customize the SQL Server FDO provider (page 2063). The API has
custom commands to support schema read/write and geospatial and
non-geospatial data read/write. For more information, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for SQL Server API Reference.
Bringing In Features from SQL Server | 323
See also:
■Working with SQL Server Data (page 559)
■Bringing In Features from SQL Server Spatial (page 326)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
To bring in features from SQL Server
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add SQL Server Connection in the
Data Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Service Name, enter the information for the SQL Server data source.
If you do not know the name, check with your System Administrator.
5Click Login.
6In the User Credentials dialog box (page 1610), enter your user name and
password.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want AutoCAD Map 3D to
log you in whenever you open this drawing.
7Click OK.
8In Data Connect, under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do
not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow. AutoCAD Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the available
data stores.
9Click Connect.
10 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
324 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
11 Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to
your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join (page 507).
To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier
1Verify that you have the privileges required to execute the ALTER TABLE
request.
2In the command line, enter the following:
cd <MapInstallDir>/Fdo/bin/com
3Do one of the following:
■For SQL Server 2005, enter sqlcmd -UMyUserName -P MyPassword -S
SQLServerHostName -d MyDatastore -i AlterSchemaSQLServer.sql
■For SQL Server 2000, enter isql -UMyUserName -P MyPassword -S
SQLServerHostName -d MyDatastore -i AlterSchemaSQLServer.sql
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
Bringing In Features from SQL Server | 325
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from SQL Server Spatial
AutoCAD Map 3D supports both SQL Server (page 323) and SQL Server Spatial.
For SQL Server Spatial, AutoCAD Map 3D supports native SQL Server Spatial
data with SQL Server 2008 SP1. If you are using SQL Server 2008, we
recommend using the SQL Server Spatial provider. While the SQL Server Spatial
provider does not read datastores created by the older SQL Server provider,
you can use Bulk Copy (page 617) to move the data into that format.
When you view and edit features from a SQL Server Spatial data source, you
can do the following:
■Use either Windows or SQL Server authentication.
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Create a SQL Server Spatial data source.
A geographic type column is created for the geodetic coordinate system.
For other systems, a geometric type column is created. Spatial indexes are
created automatically for these geometry properties using default spatial
index parameters. You can override the defaults using the API.
You can include FDO metadata when you create a SQL Server data store.
■Move other geospatial data (for example, SHP data) into SQL Server Spatial,
to take advantage of better data sharing.
NOTE If you close a drawing that uses a SQLServerSpatial connection and then
reopen that drawing, you will need to first reconnect to the SQLServerSpatial
connection and provide your user name and password. This information is not
remembered once the drawing is closed.
326 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE You can customize the SQL Server Spatial FDO provider (page 2063). The
API has custom commands to support schema read/write and geospatial and
non-geospatial data read/write. For more information, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for SQL Server API Reference.
Dealing With Invalid Geometry
SQL Server Spatial validates geometry objects that are added to the database.
It validates the values of geometry columns after they are added. As a result,
some geometries are flagged as invalid, even though they are saved. This
usually affects polygons (for example, polygons that are not closed) and spikes
in geometry. Validation is based on OGC rules.
Querying invalid geometries using a spatial filter (for example, using an
expression) generates an error and the query fails. This affects SQL Server
geometry (but not SQL Server geography).
NOTE The FDO Provider for SQL Server Spatial uses the geography data type for
latitude/longitude coordinate systems and the geometry data type for all others.
The geography data type does not retain invalid geometry values and rejects them
right away. It does not support the STIsValid() or IsValid(geometry) functions
described below.
How Invalid Geometry is Handled
The FDO Provider for SQL Server Spatial recognizes that invalid geometries
may exist in a table that is being processed. The provider includes code to
avoid having queries fail, using the following strategies:
■A query with no spatial filter returns all data.
■A query with a spatial filter skips invalid geometries so that the query does
not fail altogether. Valid geometries matching the spatial filter are returned.
■A query using the FDO EnvelopeIntersects filter does not skip invalid
geometries if a spatial index is included on the geometry column. In this
special-case combination, SQL Server Spatial does not fail on the query
because it doesn’t process the details of the geometry. MapGuide uses this
type of filter as its default selection filter.
AutoCAD Map 3D and MapGuide can draw these invalid geometries without
a problem.
Bringing In Features from SQL Server Spatial | 327
Using Expressions to Find Invalid Geometry
SQL Server provides a function called STIsValid() that returns 1 for valid
geometries and 0 for invalid geometries. FDO exposes access to that function
using a function called IsValid(geometry) at the FDO level. You can use this
function in AutoCAD Map 3D and MapGuide when you create an expression
to filter or select data. If you select data using no filter or using just the
EnvelopeIntersects filter, you can create a calculated property in the Data
Table using the IsValid function to see which geometries are valid or invalid.
Correcting Invalid Geometry
SQL Server Spatial also provides a function you can use to correct invalid
geometries on the server. You cannot use this function from within AutoCAD
Map 3D and MapGuide, but you can use it directly against SQL Server, for
instance, using Management Studio. Here is an example of this method:
update dbo.road set geom = geom.MakeValid() where geom.STIsValid()
= 0;
This operation makes the geometry valid by modifying its invalid parts. You
may prefer to edit the geometry yourself, rather than use a default correction
with uncertain results.
For more information on the STIsValid() and MakeValid() functions, as well
as other aspects of SQL Server Spatial, consult the SQL Server Spatial online
documentation.
See also:
■Working with SQL Server Spatial Data (page 561)
■Bringing In Features from SQL Server (page 323)
■Creating FDO-Enabled SQL Server Spatial Data Stores (page 590)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
To bring in features from SQL Server Spatial
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
328 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
2In the Data Connect window, select Add SQL Server Spatial Connection
in the Data Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Enter the Service Name and click Login.
The service name is set when you install SQL Server Spatial itself.
5In the User Credentials dialog box (page 1610), specify the login credentials
to use to log into this data store.
■To use your Windows Authentication credentials, select Windows
Authentication and click Login.
■To use your SQL Server login credentials, enter your user name and
password and click Login.
6In Data Connect, under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do
not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow. AutoCAD Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the available
data stores.
7Click Connect.
8In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
9Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to
your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Bringing In Features from SQL Server Spatial | 329
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Bringing In Features From SQLite
When you view and edit features from a SQLite file, you can do the following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are visible as soon as another person views the saved data file.
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Move data from other geospatial sources (for example, SHP data) into
SQLite, to take advantage of better data sharing.
You can bring SQLite data into your map in two ways:
■Use Data Connect to view and edit the data directly in the SQLite file. Use
this method to edit geometry and attributes or to style and theme the data.
For information, click the Procedure tab at the top of this Help topic.
■Import the data into the current map, which converts the SQLite data to
drawing objects. Use this method to clean the data or to create a DWG
file. You can export the objects back to SQLite.
See also:
■Working with SQLite Data (page 565)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
330 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Converting and Exporting (page 1403)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
To bring in features from SQLite
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add SQLite Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Source File, specify the file.
5Click Connect.
6In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
7Verify that the coordinate systems are correct. You can change an incorrect
coordinate system if necessary (page 311).
8Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow. Select Add To Map
With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to your
map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can use a join (page
507).
Bringing In Features From SQLite | 331
Bringing In Features from MySQL
When you view and edit features from a MySQL data source, you can do the
following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■Use a data store set up for AutoCAD Map 3D or in other applications. If
your data source schema is not set up to work with AutoCAD Map 3D, for
example, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a custom mapping so you can use the
data in your map.
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Create a MySQL data source.
■Move data from other geospatial sources (for example, SHP data) into
MySQL, to take advantage of better data sharing.
For AutoCAD Map 3D 2011, the recommended version of MySQL is 5.0.27.
In the 2008 release of AutoCAD Map 3D, a new column called geometrytype
was added to the table named F_AttributeDefinition. To use AutoCAD Map
3D 2011 to access FDO data stores that were created in AutoCAD Map 3D
2007 and earlier, you must first connect to the data store containing this table
and run a SQL script. Instructions for this are on the Procedure tab of this
topic.
NOTE The MySQL architecture supports different storage engines, each with
varying characteristics and capabilities. The API has custom commands for gathering
information, transmitting exceptions, getting lists of accessible data stores, and
creating connection objects. There is support for spatial data types and spatial
query operations. For more information, refer to the FDO API Reference and the
FDO Provider for MYSQL API Reference.
See also:
■Working with MySQL Data (page 567)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
332 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Migrating Data (page 615)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
To bring in features from MySQL
1Before connecting to a MySQL database, install the library file libmysql.dll.
2In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
3In the Data Connect window, select Add MySQL Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
4Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
5Under Service Name, enter the information for the MySQL data source.
If you do not know the name, check with your System Administrator.
6Click Login.
7In the User Credentials dialog box (page 1610), enter your user name and
password.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want AutoCAD Map 3D to
log you in whenever you open this drawing.
8Click OK.
9In Data Connect, under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do
not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow. AutoCAD Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the available
data stores.
NOTE If the data store is not in the list, it may not use a AutoCAD Map 3D
schema. Select Show All Data Stores to add these to the list. AutoCAD Map
3D creates a mapping to use these data stores with AutoCAD Map 3D.
10 Click Connect.
11 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
Bringing In Features from MySQL | 333
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
12 Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to
your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join (page 507).
To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier
1Verify that you have the privileges required to execute the ALTER TABLE
request.
2In the command line, enter the following:
cd <MapInstallDir>/Fdo/bin/com
mysql --user=MyUserName --password=MyPasswordMyDatabase
<AlterSchemaMySQL.sql> MyLogFile
quit
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
334 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Bringing In Features from SHP
You can access existing spatial and attribute data in ESRI SHP files, which store
both geometry and attributes (data) for features. A single shape can have
several separate files: SHP (shape geometry), SHX (shape index), PRJ (projection
information), CPG (code page files), IDX (spatial index), and DBF (shape
attributes in dBASE format). AutoCAD Map 3D treats each SHP and associated
DBF file as a feature class with a single geometry property.
When you connect to or import SHP polygon data, AutoCAD Map 3D checks
the geometry to see if there are multiple closed outer loops. If so, it treats the
geometry as multi-polygon (a polygon with multiple exterior rings). It does
not treat unclosed outer loops as multi-polygon.
When you create a multi-polygon in AutoCAD Map 3D and then save or
export it to SHP format, it will appear in its native SHP file as a multi-polygon.
If you brought in this type of geometry in a previous release and added styling,
you may need to update the style definitions.
When you view and edit features from a SHP data source, you can do the
following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Lock the file when you connect to it.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
■View and edit the schema definition.
You can bring SHP data into your map in two ways:
■Use Data Connect to view and edit the data directly in the SHP file. Use
this method to edit geometry and attributes or to style and theme the data.
For information, click the Procedure tab at the top of this Help topic.
■Import the data into this drawing, which converts it to drawing objects.
Use this method to clean the data or to create a DWG file. You can export
the objects back to SHP format.
NOTE For information on customizing the SHP FDO provider (page 2063), refer to
the FDO API Reference and the FDO Provider for SHP API Reference.
Bringing In Features from SHP | 335
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■Converting and Exporting (page 1403)
■Working with SHP Data (page 572)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
To bring in features from SHP
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add SHP Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Source File Or Folder, specify the location of the file. To include
multiple files in a group, specify a folder.
Click to browse to a file. Click the folder icon to browse to a folder.
5Click Connect.
6In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
7Verify that the coordinate systems are correct. You can change an incorrect
coordinate system if necessary (page 311).
8Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to
your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
336 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join (page 507).
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from SDF
You can access spatial and attribute data in an Autodesk Spatial Data File (SDF).
SDF supports spatial indexing and can store geometric and non-geometric
data with minimum overhead.
When you view and edit features from an SDF data source, you can do the
following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Move SDF data into other geospatial formats, to take advantage of better
data sharing
NOTE The procedures here apply to the current version of SDF (SDF3). For SDF
2 files (created for MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier), you cannot use these
procedures. Instead, import (page 389) the file.
Bringing In Features from SDF | 337
You can bring SDF data into your map in three ways:
■Use Data Connect to view and edit the data directly in the SDF file. Use
this method to edit geometry and attributes or to style and theme the data.
For information, click the Procedure tab at the top of this Help topic.
■Import the data into the current map, which converts the SDF data to
drawing objects. Use this method to clean the data or to create a DWG
file. You can export the objects back to SDF.
■For SDF 2 files (created for MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier), use the separate
SDF 2 Import (page 389) and SDF 2 Export (page 1417) commands.
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for SDF API Reference.
See also:
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
■Importing Autodesk SDF 2 (page 389)
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■Converting and Exporting (page 1403)
■Working with SDF Data (page 569)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
To bring in features from SDF
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add SDF Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Source File, specify the file.
338 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
5Click Connect.
6In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
7Verify that the coordinate systems are correct. You can change an incorrect
coordinate system if necessary (page 311).
8Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to
your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join (page 507).
NOTE For SDF files created for MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier, you cannot use
this procedure. Instead, import (page 389) the file.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from SDF | 339
Bringing in Features from PostgreSQL/PostGIS
The OSGeo FDO provider for PostgreSQL/PostGIS has 32-bit and 64-bit versions
on Windows and Linux. For AutoCAD Map 3D, it is certified for PostGIS 1.4.0
with PostgreSQL 8.4.
PostGIS adds support for geographic objects to the PostgreSQL object-relational
database so that the PostgreSQL server can be used as a back end spatial
database for GIS. When you view and edit features from a PostgreSQL data
source, you can do the following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Create a PostgreSQL data source.
■Move other geospatial data (for example, SHP data) into PostgreSQL, to
take advantage of better data sharing.
Setting Up PostgreSQL for Use with AutoCAD Map 3D
For a 32-bit environment
When you install AutoCAD Map 3D, the following DLL files are installed in
the AutoCAD Map 3D\FDO\BIN directory on the computer on which you run
AutoCAD Map 3D:
■comerr32.dll
■krb5_32.dll
■libeay32.dll
■libiconv-2.dll
■libintl-2.dll
■libpq.dll
■ssleay32.dll
340 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■gssapi32.dll
■iconv.dll
■k5sprt32.dll
If you need to replace these files, copy them from the server bin directory
(C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\8.4\bin) into the path or the AutoCAD Map
3D\FDO\BIN directory on the computer on which you run AutoCAD Map
3D.
For a 64-bit environment
For a 64-bit client, the following DLL files are installed in the AutoCAD Map
3D\FDO\BIN directory on the computer on which you run AutoCAD Map
3D:
■libeay32.dll
■libpq.dll
■ssleay32.dll
NOTE You must install the 64-bit client DLL on 64-bit machines. You cannot
install the 32-bit client.
See also:
■Working with PostgreSQL/PostGIS Data (page 574)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
To bring in features from PostgreSQL/PostGIS
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add PostgreSQL Connection in the
Data Connections By Provider list.
Bringing in Features from PostgreSQL/PostGIS | 341
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Enter the Service Name and click Login.
The service name is set when you install the PostgreSQL server.
5In the User Credentials dialog box (page 1610), specify the login credentials
to use to log into this data store.
6In Data Connect, under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do
not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow. AutoCAD Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the available
data stores.
7Click Connect.
8In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
9Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to
your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Accessing Data from ODBC
Use an ODBC connection to access attribute or point data in Microsoft Access,
Microsoft Excel, or dBASE.
Attribute data allows you to join information from a non-geometry source to
a geometric feature. For example, you can join assessor data to a parcel layer.
For information about joins, see Joining Data to GIS Features (page 507).
Point data can include survey points, LiDAR (page 2066) data, or GPS data, which
is typically specified either by Latitude and Longitude columns or by XY
coordinates.
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D maps each table in the database to a “feature
class” while each column becomes a “property.”
342 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
When you view and edit data from an ODBC database, you can do the
following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Lock the file when you connect to it.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■Define feature classes for any relational database table with X, Y (and,
optionally, Z) columns. Object locations are stored in separate properties
in the object definition of a feature, which is accessible through the
Geometry class property. You cannot create or delete feature schemas.
Microsoft Excel Data
To access Microsoft Excel data, you must define table ranges in Excel. These
named ranges in the worksheet can then be treated as separate ODBC tables,
with each one mapping to an FDO (page 2062) feature class. If you do not define
named ranges, no feature classes are available to add to your map. Instructions
for defining a table range are on the Procedure tab of this topic.
Microsoft Access Data
Some Microsoft Access databases have autogenerated primary keys. You can
load data from Microsoft Access databases without these primary keys and
use that data for joins, and so on, However, without a primary key you cannot
create and update data.
To perform a AutoCAD Map 3D location query in a Microsoft Access database
that contains long integer values (longs), use the tools in Access to remove
the indexes from location-based x/y columns.
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for ODBC API Reference.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to bring in point data
from an ODBC database.
Accessing Data from ODBC | 343
Procedure
■To create a DSN in Windows XP (page
345)
■To access ODBC data (page 344)
Tutorial
■Lesson 2: Analyze Data With External
Information Using Joins
Workflow
■Join Attribute Data to a Geospatial
Feature
GIS Skill
■Bring in point data from a Microsoft Ac-
cess database
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Working with ODBC Data (page 576)
■To access ODBC data (page 344)
■To create a DSN in Windows XP (page 345)
■To define the table ranges required to access Excel data (page 346)
To access ODBC data
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add ODBC Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Source Type, select one of the following:
■Data Source Name (DSN) — Use a DSN you have defined in your
Windows Control Panel. See the following.
344 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Connection String — The connection string specifies the driver and
path to use.
5Under source, specify the table.
■Data Source Name (DSN) — Click the browse button and select the
DSN.
■Connection String — Specify the driver and path. For a Microsoft
Access database, use the format:
Driver={Microsoft Access Driver
(*.mdb)};DBQ=pathname\filename.mdb
Where pathname\filename.mdb is the complete path and filename of
the Microsoft Access database. Note the curly braces and the space
before “(*.mdb)” For more information, see the ODBC documentation
on the Microsoft Web site.
6If required by the table, enter your user name and password.
7Click Connect.
8Under Add Data To Map, select the tables.
9For each table, specify the coordinate system.
10 Specify the columns to use for point geometry. This can be
latitude/longitude or X, Y, and Z Coordinates. To specify the column
name, click in the field, then click the down arrow to choose from a list
of column names.
11 Click Add To Map.
If Add To Map is grayed out, check that you have specified the coordinate
system and X and Y columns for the table.
To create a DSN in Windows XP
1From your Windows desktop, click Start menu ➤ Settings ➤ Control
Panel and open the Administrative Tools control panel.
2Double-click Data Sources (ODBC).
3In the ODBC Data Source Administrator, click User DSN or System DSN.
A User DSN is visible only to you. A System DSN is visible to all users on
the current machine.
4Click Add and select the driver to use.
Accessing Data from ODBC | 345
For example, to create a DSN for an Access database, select Microsoft
Access Driver.
5In the ODBC Microsoft Access dialog box enter information about the
data. When you finish, click OK. Click OK again to close the ODBC Data
Source Administrator dialog box.
The DSN you defined appears in the DSN list in the Data Connect window.
To define the table ranges required to access Excel data
1In Excel, open the Excel worksheet.
2Select all the data.
3Define a named range.
4Enter a name for the feature class, for example, Country_Literacy.
5Close Excel.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from WFS
You can bring in web-based features that have been published to a public web
server using the WFS (Web Feature Service) open standard developed by the
Open GIS Consortium (OGC).
NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects,
see Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351).
346 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Once you have located the WFS data you want, determine the URL of the page
that serves the published layers. Often, this is not a standard web page that
you can open in a browser, but a page that has been programmed using a
scripting language such as CGI, PHP, or ASP. See the following for some
examples. You paste the address into the Data Connect window in AutoCAD
Map 3D to access the data on that page.
When you bring in features from a WFS data source, you can do the following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Reproject the data to the coordinate system of your map. Attribute data
may also be available for the WFS layers.
■Style and theme features. You cannot edit features from a WFS data source.
Example WFS Data Sources
DescriptionWFS Data Source
Data layers such as boundaries, terrains,
physiography, utilities, and more.
http://demo.cubewerx.com/demo/cube-
serv/cubeserv.cgi?datastore=Foundation
Virginia, USA Census tracts, Congressional
districts, counties, interstates, POI, and
places.
http://regis.inter-
graph.com/wfs/dcmetro/request.asp?
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and The Essential FDO.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to bring in data from a
web server using WMS
Procedure
■To bring in features from WFS (page
348)
■To work with WFS data (page 582)
GIS Skill
■Access data published on a public web
server
Bringing In Features from WFS | 347
Related topics
■Working with WFS Data (page 581)
■Adding an Image from a WMS (Web
Map Service) (page 445)
■Styling Features (page 639)
To bring in features from WFS
NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects,
see Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351).
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add WGS Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under server name, specify the URL for the WFS server. Click the down
arrow to choose from a list of recently used URLs.
5If necessary, enter your user name and password.
6Click Connect.
7In the Add Data To Map area, select the feature classes to include.
If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class
is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can
right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None.
8For each feature class you select, verify the coordinate system. You can
change an incorrect coordinate system if necessary (page 311).
9Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to
your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. If you need
additional properties related to this data, you can connect additional data to
a feature source layer using a join (page 507).
348 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Repairing Broken Feature Connections
NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects,
see Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351).
If a data file moves from its original location, you may get an error when you
open the map that references that data. For example, someone else might
create a map using an SDF file. That person then sends the map and SDF file
to you. If you store the SDF file with a different path name than the one used
by the original map creator, AutoCAD Map 3D displays an error.
To resolve this problem, you must reconnect the data using the correct path.
By doing so, you maintain styling information.
TIP To avoid this problem, use eTransmit to package and transfer files for a map.
Although this method does not work for database data (such as Oracle or SQL
Server data stores), it preserves the connections of all file-based data, such as SDF
and SHP.
Repairing Broken Feature Connections | 349
See also:
■Using eTransmit (page 1376)
To reconnect to feature data without losing styling information
NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects,
see Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351).
1In Data Connect, select the data connection that is broken.
For example, select SDF_1, if the first SDF connection is broken.
2For Source File Or Folder, type or browse to the correct data store location.
3Click Connect, but do not click Add.
Clicking Add creates a new layer in your map, without the styling
information from the original layer.
Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
Your map can include drawing objects from the current drawing or from other
drawings. To include objects from other drawings, you must first attach those
drawings to your map.
NOTE To open a DWG file that was created with, or contains, feature source
provider data, do not double-click the icon that represents the file. Click ➤
Open ➤ Drawing.
Each set of objects you select is stored in a layer in Display Manager. A layer
that includes drawing objects is a drawing layer (page 2060).
Drawing layers in Display Manager are different from “classic” AutoCAD layers
that you see in the AutoCAD Layer Properties Manager. AutoCAD users who
do not have AutoCAD Map 3D do not have Display Manager and so cannot
see Display Manager layers.
You style AutoCAD layers using the Layer Properties Manager. When you
bring in data by object class, location, property, or query, and store that data
in a Display Manager drawing layer, you can style and theme the layer using
350 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Display Manager tools, and use the mapping and GIS tools available in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■Attaching a Drawing (page 157)
■Use these procedures to bring drawing objects into your map (page 354)
■To bring in drawing objects from AutoCAD layers in the current drawing
(page 356)
■To bring in drawing objects based on object classes in the current drawing
(page 357)
■To bring in drawing objects based on location (page 359)
■To bring in drawing objects based on object properties (page 362)
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data
(page 364)
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data (page 364)
■To bring in drawing objects based on external (SQL) data (page 365)
■To bring in drawing objects based on topology (page 367)
■To bring in drawing objects by combining query conditions (page 369)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files
This map of an electrical distribution system is based on several attached DWG files.
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files | 351
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
You can include drawing objects in your map so you can view, edit, style, and
theme them.
You can select objects from the current drawing and from attached drawings.
For information about attached drawings, see Attaching Drawings (page 154).
Each set of objects you select is stored in a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display
Manager.
From...It includes...When you create a
drawing layer based
on...
The current drawingAll the objects on the selected
AutoCAD layer
AutoCAD Layer (page
355)
The current drawingAll the objects in the selected object
class
Object class (page 356)
The current drawingAll the objects in the selected topo-
logy
Topology (page 367)
The current drawing, at-
tached source drawings,
or a selected topology
All the objects in the specified loca-
tion
Location (page 358)
The current drawing, at-
tached source drawings,
or a selected topology
All objects that have the selected
property, such as elevation, layer,
or area
Object property (page
361)
The current drawing, at-
tached source drawings,
or a selected topology
All objects with the specified data,
such as object data or linked records
from an external database
Attached data (page 363)
352 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
In this city map example, there are separate drawing layers for each set of
entities comprising the water system.
Use the Display Manager check boxes to turn off layers, which hides the objects
on that layer, or to turn off styles, which displays the drawing objects on that
layer without styles. For more information on styling drawing layers, see
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers (page 652).
Map Base
Objects in the current drawing that are not included in any layer are included
in the Map Base layer. You can hide all objects on this layer.
NOTE Objects from attached drawings that you have queried into the current
drawing using a standard query are added to the Map Base layer. To style these
objects separately in your map, create a query to bring them into the display.
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files | 353
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to run a query on a set of
attached DWG files.
■Show me how to include an AutoCAD
layer in Display Manager.
Procedure
■To bring drawing objects into your
map (page 354)
■To bring in drawing objects from
AutoCAD layers in the current drawing
(page 356)
Tutorial
■Exercise 2: Attach a drawing file
Workflow
■Create a CAD Map
GIS Skills
■Include AutoCAD layers in the Display
Manager
■Bring in a subset of features using a
query
Related topics
■Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Use these procedures to bring drawing objects into your map
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see procedures for bringing in geospatial data. (page 308).
■To bring in drawing objects from AutoCAD layers in the current drawing
(page 356)
■To bring in drawing objects based on object classes in the current drawing
(page 357)
■To bring in drawing objects based on location (page 359)
■To bring in drawing objects based on object properties (page 362)
354 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data
(page 364)
■To bring in drawing objects based on topology (page 367)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
In your map, you can create a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager that
includes all the objects from selected AutoCAD layers in the current drawing.
For example, you can create a layer that includes all the fire hydrants by
selecting the HYDRANT AutoCAD layer.
You can organize layers into groups. Grouping layers lets you quickly turn off
the display of all the objects in the group.
TIP To select just some of the objects on an AutoCAD layer, use a query to add
the objects to your map and combine several conditions. For example, select only
the fire hydrants within 1000 meters of a corporation yard.
Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers | 355
To bring in drawing objects from AutoCAD layers in the current drawing
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see procedures for bringing in geospatial data. (page 308).
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Drawing
Layer.
2In the Select Layers dialog box (page 1631), select the AutoCAD layers that
include the objects to display.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a layer in Display Manager for each AutoCAD
layer you select.
3To group the layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the layers in a group, you can turn the display of the
group on or off.
4Click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. All objects on the selected AutoCAD
layer are included in this layer. If you selected multiple AutoCAD layers,
multiple layers are created in your map. To see the objects, you may need to
zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom
Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - AutoCAD Layer
Creates a new layer from AutoCAD layers in Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Drawing Layer
Task Pane
Select Display Element dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
356 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
In your map, you can create a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager that
includes all the objects in an object class in the current drawing.
For example, to create a layer that includes all the primary roads, select the
PRIMARY_ROADS object class.
You can organize layers into groups. Grouping layers lets you quickly turn off
the display of all the objects in the group.
TIP To select just some of the objects in an object class, use a query to add the
objects to your map and combine conditions. For example, you can select only
the primary roads in the West quadrant of the county.
See also:
■Combining Conditions (page 368)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers (page 355)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology (page 367)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location (page 358)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property (page 361)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data (page 363)
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
To bring in drawing objects based on object classes in the current drawing
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see procedures for bringing in geospatial data. (page 308).
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Object
Class.
2In the Select Classes dialog box (page 1631), select the object classes that
include the objects to display.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a layer in Display Manager for each object class
you select.
3To group the object class layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the layers in a group, you can turn the display of the
group on or off.
4Click OK.
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class | 357
The new layer appears in Display Manager. All objects in the selected object
class are included in this layer. If you selected multiple object classes, multiple
layers are created. To see the objects, you may need to zoom to the drawing
extents. Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Object Class
Creates a new object class layer in the Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Object Class
Task Pane
Select Object Classes dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
In your map, you can create a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager that
includes the objects in a specified location. You can select from objects in the
current map, in attached drawings, or in a topology.
For example, you can select all utility poles within 100 feet of a specified road
or all parks within a specified quadrant of the city.
TIP You can use a query to combine a location condition with other conditions.
For example, you can find all parcels that are zoned residential and are within 500
meters of a contaminated well.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to run a query on a set of
attached DWG files.
Procedure
■To bring in drawing objects based on
location (page 359)
358 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■To bring in drawing objects by combin-
ing query conditions (page 369)
Tutorial
■Exercise 3: Query in data from the
drawing
Workflow
■Create a CAD Map
GIS Skill
■Bring in a subset of features using a
query
Related topics
■Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Combining Conditions (page 368)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object
Class (page 356)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from
AutoCAD Layers (page 355)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Prop-
erty (page 361)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on
Attached Data (page 363)
To bring in drawing objects based on location
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see procedures for bringing in geospatial data. (page 308).
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤
Query Current Drawing.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Source
Drawing. Be sure you have attached (page 154) the DWG files to query.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Topology.
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location | 359
2In the Define Query dialog box (page 1838), click Location.
3In the Location Condition dialog box (page 1849), select a boundary to
determine the type of area to query.
Select Fence to specify a new polyline; select Polyline to use an existing
polyline.
4Choose a selection type:
■Inside includes only objects that are completely inside the boundary.
■Crossing includes all objects that are inside the boundary or crossing
the boundary.
5If you select the Polyline boundary, specify a polyline mode.
6To define the coordinates of the boundary, click Define and use any
AutoCAD Map 3D selection method to define the boundary.
7Click OK.
8Optionally, define another condition. See Combining Conditions (page
369).
9In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. Objects that meet the conditions
of the query are included in this layer. To see the objects, you may need to
zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom
Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data
and then select a query type
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
360 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
In your map, you can create a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager that
includes objects that have a specific property. You can select from objects in
the current map, or from objects in attached drawings.
For example, you can select all roads with a dashed linetype.
TIP You can combine a property condition with other conditions to create specific
queries. For example, you could find all parcels that are zoned Residential and
have an elevation lower than 50.
Additional Information
■If an object has the property set to BYLAYER, it will be selected only if you
set the search value to BYLAYER.
For example, if you search for a DASHED linetype, you will get only objects
that have the linetype set to DASHED; you will not get objects that have
that linetype because they reside on a layer with a DASHED linetype. To
get these objects, you must set the search value to BYLAYER.
■Custom objects do not appear in the Object Type values list until you load
the DBX module for the object.
■Because topology information is stored in object data, use a data condition
to search for the following properties of topology objects: area, length,
perimeter, direction, direct resistance, and reverse resistance.
See also:
■Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Combining Conditions (page 368)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers (page 355)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class (page 356)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology (page 367)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location (page 358)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data (page 363)
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property | 361
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
To bring in drawing objects based on object properties
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see procedures for bringing in geospatial data. (page 308).
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Current Drawing.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Source
Drawing. Be sure you have attached (page 154) the DWG files to query.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Topology.
2In the Define Query dialog box (page 1838), click Property.
3In the Property Condition dialog box (page 1855), select a property.
4Select an operator.
For some properties, such as layer, the only available operator is = (equal).
5Enter a value for the property.
To select from a list of values, click Values. For example, if you select the
layer property, click Values to display a list of layers in the drawings.
You can use wild-card characters to enter values for the following
properties: Block Name, Color, Text Style, Object Type, Group, Layer,
Feature Class, Linetype, and Plotstyle.
6Click OK.
7Optionally, define another condition. See Combining Conditions (page
369).
8In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. Objects that meet the conditions
of the query are included in this layer. To see the objects, you may need to
zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom
Drawing Extents.
362 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data
and then select a query type
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
In your map, you can add a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager that
contains objects based on attribute data associated with the object, for example,
object data or data in a linked external database. Select from objects in the
current map, or from objects in attached drawings.
For example, if you have a linked database that lists pavement surfaces, you
can select all objects with a gravel pavement surface.
TIP Combine a data condition with other conditions to create specific queries.
For example, you could find all parcels that are zoned Residential and are within
500 yards of a contaminated well.
Notes
■You cannot retrieve objects based on constant block attributes.
■For Data queries, the Database Link option tests the link data stored on
the object, not the data in the database table. To retrieve objects based on
data in the linked database table, create a SQL condition.
■Because topology information is stored in object data, use a data condition
to search for the following properties of topology objects: area, length,
perimeter, direction, direct resistance, and reverse resistance.
See also:
■Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data | 363
■Combining Conditions (page 368)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers (page 355)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class (page 356)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology (page 367)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location (page 358)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property (page 361)
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data
(page 364)
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data (page 364)
■To bring in drawing objects based on external (SQL) data (page 365)
To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data
■To select objects based on object data (page 364)
■To select objects based on external (SQL) data (page 365)
To bring in drawing objects based on object data
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see procedures for bringing in geospatial data. (page 308).
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Current Drawing.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Source
Drawing. Be sure you have attached (page 154) the DWG files to query.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Topology.
2In the Define Query dialog box (page 1838), click Data.
3In the Data Condition dialog box (page 1836), select the type of data to
use.
364 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
4Specify the location of the data.
■To retrieve objects based on object class, in the Class list, select the
object class of the objects to retrieve. Under Properties, select the
specific properties to query.
■To retrieve objects based on object data, select the table and field to
query.
If two attached drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD
Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you
activate.
■To retrieve objects based on database link data, in the Link Template
list, select the link template associated with the objects to retrieve.
Under Key Columns, select the key column to query.
To search for objects in attached drawings, only link templates defined
in your attached drawing are displayed in the list.
■To retrieve objects based on block attribute information, in the Blocks
list, select the block that contains the attribute tag information to
query. Under Attribute Tags, select the attribute tag to query, or select
* in the Blocks list to see a list of all the attribute tags of all the blocks
in the active drawing.
5Select an operator.
When you query database link data, only the = operator is available.
6Enter the data value.
You can use wild-card characters for Value. For more information about
wild cards, see Wildcard Characters (page 1537).
7Click OK.
8In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
NOTE Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, verify that the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
To bring in drawing objects based on external (SQL) data
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Current Drawing.
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data | 365
■In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Source Drawing. Be sure you have attached (page 154) the DWG files
to query.
■In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Topology.
2In the Define Query dialog box (page 1838), click SQL.
3In the SQL Link Condition dialog box (page 1866), select the link template
for the table to search.
If you chose Attached Drawings in Step 1, the link template list includes
only link templates for active attached drawings. If the link template is
not listed, verify that it is defined in the attached drawing.
4Create a SQL condition by selecting a column, an operator, and a value.
To type the condition, click Type Condition.
5Click Add Condition to add the condition to the Current SQL Condition
list.
6To add more conditions, select And or Or. Create another condition.
7When you finish building the SQL condition, click OK.
8Optionally, define another condition. See Combining Conditions (page
369).
9In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. Objects that meet the conditions
of the query are included in this layer. To see the objects, you may need to
zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom
Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data
and then select a query type
Task Pane
366 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
You can create a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager that includes all
the objects in a topology.
For example, to create a layer that includes all the objects in the Streets
topology, select the STREETS topology.
You can organize layers into groups. Grouping layers lets you quickly turn off
the display of all the objects in the group.
TIP To select just some of the objects in a topology, combine conditions. For
example, you could find only the streets with four or more lanes.
See also:
■Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Combining Conditions (page 368)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers (page 355)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class (page 356)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location (page 358)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property (page 361)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data (page 363)
■Creating Topologies (page 821)
To bring in drawing objects based on topology
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see procedures for bringing in geospatial data. (page 308).
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Topology.
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology | 367
2In the Select Display Element dialog box (page 1631), select the topologies
that include the objects to display.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a layer in Display Manager for each topology
you select.
3To group topology layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the layers in a group, you can turn the display of the
group on or off.
4Click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. All objects in the selected topology
are included in this layer. If you selected multiple topologies, multiple layers
are created. To see the objects, you may need to zoom to the drawing extents.
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Topology
Creates a new topology layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Topology
Task Pane
Select Display Element dialog boxDialog Box
Combining Conditions
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
You can combine query conditions to select specific drawing objects for a new
drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager.
For example, you can combine a layer condition with a location condition to
find utility lines in the West quadrant of a city.
You can select from objects in the current map, in attached drawings, or in a
topology.
368 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
See also:
■Attaching Drawings (page 154)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers (page 355)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class (page 356)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology (page 367)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location (page 358)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property (page 361)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data (page 363)
To bring in drawing objects by combining query conditions
NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data,
see procedures for bringing in geospatial data. (page 308).
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Current Drawing.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Source
Drawing. Be sure you have attached (page 154) the DWG files to query.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Topology.
2In the Define Query dialog box (page 1838), create the first condition by
clicking Query Type.
■Location — Selects objects based on their location. Click Zoom Ext
to zoom to the extents of all active attached drawings.
■Property — Selects objects based on an object property, such as layer,
color, or area.
■Data — Selects objects based on object class, object properties, database
links, object data, or attributes.
■SQL — Selects objects based on linked external data.
When you finish defining the condition, you return to the Define Query
dialog box with the condition listed in the Current Query area.
Combining Conditions | 369
3Before you create the next condition, select a joining operator.
■And — Finds objects only if both conditions are true.
■Or — Finds objects if either condition is true.
■And Not — Finds objects only if the first condition is true and the
second condition is false.
■Or Not — Finds objects if either the first condition is true or the second
condition is false.
4Create the next condition by clicking Query Type.
5Continue to create conditions.
6To group conditions, select the first and last condition in the group. Click
Group. Conditions inside the parentheses are evaluated first.
7When you finish defining conditions, click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. Objects that meet the conditions
of the query are included in this layer. To see the objects, you may need to
zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom
Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data
and then select a query type
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing in Survey Data
AutoCAD Map 3D allows you to manage survey point data. You can import
survey points in LandXML or ASCII format, view point data in the Point Table
(a survey-point specific version of the Data Table (page 1613)), edit survey points,
add points using coordinate geometry commands, and export points to
370 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
LandXML format. Using the bulk copy feature, you can also export points to
another data store to create geospatial features.
Before you import survey data, create (page 1000) or connect to (page 1000) a
Survey Data Store.
See also:
■Working with Survey Data (page 996)
■To bring LandXML data into a Survey Data Store (page 371)
■To bring ASCII point data into a Survey Data Store (page 373)
■To bring LiDAR data into your map (page 374)
■To add a point cloud to your map (page 376)
■To add a point cloud to your map using the Point Cloud Manager (page
376)
■To create a point cloud layer for point cloud objects already in your map
(page 376)
■To adjust the display density point clouds in your map (page 377)
Bringing in LandXML Data
You can bring in survey point data in LandXML format. AutoCAD Map 3D
supports LandXML versions 1.0, 1.1, and 1.2.
When you import a LandXML file into AutoCAD Map 3D, it appears in the
survey tree as a Project. Projects are the primary organizational group within
a survey data store.
See also:
■Overview of Working with Survey Data (page 997)
■Working with Survey Data Stores (page 999)
■Working with Projects (page 1001)
■Exporting Survey Points to a LandXML File (page 1471)
To bring LandXML data into a Survey Data Store
1Create (page 1000) or connect to (page 1000) a Survey Data Store.
2On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, click Data ➤ Import LandXML. The
Import LandXML dialog box appears.
Bringing in LandXML Data | 371
3Browse to and select the LandXML file you want to import.
4Click Open.
■If AutoCAD Map 3D cannot recognize the coordinate system of your
LandXML data,the LandXML Coordinate System dialog box (page 1717)
appears. Assign a coordinate system by entering the appropriate
coordinate system code or selecting one from a list, then click OK.
5The LandXML file is brought into your Survey Data Store.
Quick Reference
Import LandXML Data
Import LandXML data to a survey data store.
On the Survey tab, right-click a survey data store ➤
Import LandXML -or- On the Survey tab, click Data
➤ Import LandXML
Task Pane
Bringing in ASCII Point Data
You can bring in survey point data in a variety of ASCII formats. ASCII survey
point data can be brought in to any node in the survey tree.
Select the format of the source data using the Format drop-down list in the
Import ASCII Points dialog box (page 1716). Formats describe the layout of the
data in your source files using the following convention:
■P is point ID
■E is Easting, or longitudinal values
■N is Northing or latitudinal values
■Z is elevation values
■D is description
Make sure that you select the correct format plus delimiter type (comma or
space) for your data source.
372 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
The Autodesk Uploadable File format is as follows: PNEZD (Point Identification,
Y, X, Z, Description). It is a comma-separated format, and uses the # character
for comment text.
See also:
■Overview of Working with Survey Data (page 997)
■Working with Survey Data Stores (page 999)
To bring ASCII point data into a Survey Data Store
1Create (page 1000) or connect to (page 1000) a Survey Data Store.
2Right-click any node in the Survey Tree on the Survey tab of the Task
Pane.
3Select Import ASCII Points. The Import ASCII Points dialog box (page 1716)
appears.
4In the File Location section, click . The Import ASCII File dialog box
appears.
5Browse to and select the ASCII file you want to import, then click Open.
6In the Formatting section, select the data format and Z-Unit (elevation
unit) for the file. Valid elevation units are meters, US feet, international
feet, and chains.
7The Preview section will show a sample of the data you are about to
import. Check the preview to verify that you have selected the correct
file and formatting.
8In the Coordinate System Assignment section, enter the coordinate system
of the file you are importing. Click to select the coordinate system
from a list.
9Click OK. The ASCII point data is brought into your Survey Data Store.
Quick Reference
Import ASCII Point Data
Bringing in ASCII Point Data | 373
Import ASCII point data to a survey data store.
On the Survey tab, right-click a survey data store ➤
Import ASCII Points.
Task Pane
Import ASCII Points dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing in LiDAR Data
You can bring LiDAR (page 2066) point cloud (page 2071) data into your map using
the Point Cloud Manager (page 1897). Point clouds are large data sets composed
of 3D point data.Geographic LiDAR data is most commonly available in LAS
(page 2066) (LiDAR Aerial Survey) or ASCII (.xyz) format. AutoCAD Map 3D
2011 accepts LiDAR data in either LAS version 1.2 or space-delimited ASCII
text (.xyz) format.
See also:
■Overview of Point Clouds (page 1012)
■Overview of LiDAR Data (page 1012)
■Using LiDAR Data to Create a Point Cloud Data Store (page 1019)
■Managing LiDAR Data (page 1015)
■Exporting Point Cloud Data (page 1451)
To bring LiDAR data into your map
1Click Create tab ➤ Point Cloud panel ➤ Index File.
2In the Point Cloud Manager (page 1897), click Add File. The Open dialog
box appears.
3Select the file or files to bring in.
4Click Open.
The files appear in the Point Cloud Manager.
Quick Reference
MAPPOINTCLOUDMANAGER
374 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Creates and manages indexed point cloud data stores.
MAPPOINTCLOUDMANAGERCommand Line
Point Cloud ManagerDialog Box
Bringing in Point Cloud Data
You can bring point cloud data into your map from an indexed point cloud
data store or from a point cloud drawing object. Point clouds appear as layers
in the Display Manager and as AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. For
more information on working with AutoCAD drawing objects, see Working
with Drawing Objects (page 727).
You can add point clouds from indexed point cloud data stores created in
AutoCAD Map 3D or in AutoCAD. Index files created in AutoCAD Map 3D
have the .ISD file extension. Index files created in AutoCAD have the .PCG
file extension.
If you are using a point cloud drawing object in your map that was created
using AutoCAD Civil 3D, you will not be able to view the point cloud styling
applied by AutoCAD Civil 3D unless you download and install the AutoCAD
Civil 2010 object enabler. You can get the AutoCAD Civil 2010 object enabler
from the Autodesk website:
http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/ps/dl/item?siteID=123112&id=13084151&linkID=9240858.
You can add, merge, and filter indexed point cloud data store files using the
Point Cloud Manager (page 1897).
After you add point clouds to your map, you can adjust the density of the
points displayed in your map using the Points Display slider. The density
setting of the Points Display slider applies to all point clouds in your map.
You do not need to set the display density for each point cloud individually.
See also:
■Overview of Point Clouds (page 1012)
■Overview of LiDAR Data (page 1012)
■Overview of Point Cloud Files and Objects (page 1013)
■Bringing in LiDAR Data (page 374)
■Using LiDAR Data to Create a Point Cloud Data Store (page 1019)
■Creating Surfaces From Point Cloud Data (page 1021)
Bringing in Point Cloud Data | 375
■Filtering Point Cloud Data (page 1024)
■Exporting Point Cloud Data (page 1451)
To add a point cloud to your map
1In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Point Cloud Data ➤ From
Index File.
2In the Select Point Cloud Index dialog box, select the index file for the
point cloud data store to add to your map
3Click Open.
AutoCAD Map 3D adds a point cloud layer to the Display Manager, and
add the point cloud drawing object to your map.
To add a point cloud to your map using the Point Cloud Manager
NOTE You cannot add point cloud index files created in AutoCAD (.PCG files)
using the Point Cloud Manager.
1In the Point Cloud ribbon tab, click Index File to display the Point Cloud
Manager (page 1897), or enter mappointcloudmanager at the command
prompt.
2Click Add File. The Open dialog box appears.
3Select the .ISD files you want to bring in.
4Click Open.
The files are added to the Point Cloud Manager. You can now create
merge files and filter your point cloud data the same way you work with
LiDAR data. (page 1015)
To create a point cloud layer for point cloud objects already in your map
1Click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Point Cloud.
2In the Select Point Cloud dialog box, select the point cloud object or
objects.
3To add point cloud objects to a Display Manager group, select Group
Selection.
4Click OK.
376 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
AutoCAD Map 3D adds a point cloud layer to the Display Manager.
To adjust the display density point clouds in your map
1Click Create ribbon tab ➤ Point Cloud Panel ➤ Point Cloud drop-down
list.
2Adjust the Point Cloud Density slider to the right to increase the display
density of your point cloud objects. Adjust the slider to the left to decrease
the display density.
3Alternately, at the command prompt enter pointclouddensity, then enter
a value from 1 through 100.
Quick Reference
MAPPOINTCLOUDMANAGER
Creates and manages indexed point cloud data stores.
MAPPOINTCLOUDMANAGERCommand Line
Point Cloud ManagerDialog Box
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing
Objects
You can import maps from other formats into AutoCAD Map 3D. The imported
data is brought into the current drawing and the geometry is converted to
drawing objects. The attribute data and display options associated with the
objects can also be imported.
In addition, you can specify an area of the map to import, assign incoming
objects to existing object classes, and automatically perform a coordinate
conversion on the objects as they are imported.
When you directly access data through FDO (using Data Connect), you make
all edits and changes directly to the source. When you import data, you bring
in a copy of the data and you cut the connection to the data source. Your
changes are made only to the copy in your map.
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects | 377
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
See also:
■Supported Import Formats (page 387)
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
■Converting and Exporting (page 1403)
■Digitizing Maps (page 1617)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
■To import data from other formats (page 381)
■To style drawing data on import (page 385)
■To specify an area to import (page 418)
■To specify an AutoCAD layer during import (page 419)
■To assign an object class to an input layer (page 421)
■To perform a coordinate conversion (page 424)
■To specify the data to import (page 426)
■To specify how to import points (page 428)
■To import polygons (page 430)
■To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 433)
■To import objects with links to an external database (page 434)
■To import a file with attribute data and display the data as text (page 435)
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects
During import, AutoCAD Map 3D copies data from the input file into the
active AutoCAD Map 3D drawing and converts the data to drawing objects.
Connecting to Data Directly vs. Importing
You can work with your data using Data Connect or by importing it.
378 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
When you use Data Connect (from Display Manager), you view and edit data
in its source. Edits are saved back to the source. The data stays in its original
location.
When you import data, you make a copy of the data and bring that copy into
your map. When you edit the data, you are editing the copy. The original data
is unchanged.
For some formats, such as MicroStation Design (DGN), Arc/INFO, and SDF 2
(Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 and earlier), you can only import and export the
data. For most other formats, you can either connect directly to the data or
use import and export.
For more information, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
Before You Import a File
Before you import a file, determine the following:
■Determine whether to limit the import to the current display area or to
an area that you define.
■Decide where to put objects: on an existing layer in the map, on a new
layer, or on a layer specified in the file you are importing.
■Determine which incoming data values to use to populate the object class
data fields, and decide how to handle data values that do not fall within
the acceptable object class range (keep them as-is or assign them default
object class values).
■Assign a coordinate system to the current AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. You
need to know which coordinate system is used with the input files.
■Determine whether to import the data as object data or as external data,
and whether to use an existing table or create a new one.
■Import point objects as points, text, or blocks. When you import as blocks,
be sure you have copied the block you want into the AutoCAD Map 3D
drawing.
Supported Formats
For information on importing specific formats, see the following:
■Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) (page 387) (version 3, MapGuide
Enterprise)
■Importing Autodesk SDF 2 (page 389)
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects | 379
■Importing DXF Files (page 391)
■Importing ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages (page 394)
■Importing From ESRI ArcSDE (page 391)
■Importing ESRI Shape Files (page 397)
■Importing Geographic Markup Language (GML) Files (page 412)
■Importing MapInfo MIF/MID Files (page 400)
■Importing MapInfo TAB Files (page 402)
■MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 (page 405)
■Oracle (page 409)
■Importing SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) Files (page 413)
■Importing VPF (Vector Product Format) Files (page 416)
Tell me more
Procedure
■To bring in drawing objects from
AutoCAD layers in the current drawing
(page 356)
■To bring in drawing objects based on
object classes in the current drawing
(page 357)
■To bring in drawing objects based on
location (page 359)
■To bring in drawing objects based on
object properties (page 362)
■To bring in drawing objects based on
object data or external (SQL) data
(page 364)
■To bring in drawing objects based on
topology (page 367)
Tutorial
■Lesson 4: Import SDF Files as DWG
Layers
380 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Workflow
■Send GIS Data to AutoCAD
Related topics
■Converting and Exporting (page 1403)
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
To import data from other formats
1Do one of the following:
■Import data from an Oracle or ArcSDE data source. Click Insert
tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import.
You cannot use the rest of this procedure. Instead, see Importing From
Oracle (page 409) or Importing From ESRI ArcSDE (page 391).
■Import an SDF file. Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import .
■If you are importing an Autodesk SDF 2 file, click Insert tab ➤ Import
panel ➤ SDF2.
Do not follow the rest of this procedure. Instead, see Importing
Autodesk SDF 2 (page 389).
■Import a DXF file. Click ➤ Open ➤ Drawing. Change Files
of Type to DXF.
Select the file you want and click Open. Do not follow the rest of this
procedure.
■Import any other file type. Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map
Import .
Continue with the following steps.
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects | 381
2In the Import Location dialog box, under Files Of Type, select the format
of the map to import.
3Select the file or folder to import. Click OK.
4For formats with additional options, in the Import dialog box, click Driver
Options.
For more information about the formats with additional options and
their associated driver options, see one of the following:
■Importing ESRI Shape Files (page 397)
■Importing ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages (page 394)
■Importing Geographic Markup Language (GML) Files (page 412)
■Importing MapInfo MIF/MID Files (page 400)
■Importing MapInfo MIF/MID Files (page 400)
■MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 (page 405)
■Importing SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) Files (page 413)
■Importing VPF (Vector Product Format) Files (page 416)
NOTE Change any driver options before you modify other settings in the
Import options dialog box. Changing driver options can invalidate other
changes you have made in this dialog box.
5In the Import dialog box (page 1711), under Spatial Filter, specify whether
to limit the area where data will be imported:
■None — Place no area limits on the incoming file.
■Current Display — Limit the import to the current drawing area.
■Define Window — Limit the import to an area you define. To use this
option, click Select. Respond to the prompts to define the area.
6Specify the import settings for each input layer (sometimes called a theme,
level, or file).
■Drawing Layer (page 419)— Select a target layer for each layer in the
incoming file.
■Object Class (page 421)— Assign incoming objects to an existing object
class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the object
class. The Object Class fields are available only if you have object
382 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
classes defined in your map. For more information about setting up
object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification (page ?).
■Input Coordinate System (page 424)— Specify the coordinate system
of the incoming file. If the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a coordinate
system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate
system of the drawing.
■Data (page 426)— For each layer, specify how to import data.
■Points (page 428)— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming point
objects.
NOTE If you import points that you assigned to an object class with a
creation method of Blocks, use the Points column to convert the points to
blocks so the objects can be classified. Object classification does not
automatically convert points to blocks.
7By default, polygons are imported as polygon objects. To import them
as closed polylines, select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines.
8If you assigned incoming objects to object classes and want to use the
object class defaults for any incoming data that is out of the defined
object class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out Of Range Values.
If you do not select this option, incoming data will be imported as is,
which may include some out of range values. If you later view the data
on the Object Class tab of the Properties palette, AutoCAD Map 3D
automatically modifies the data, using defaults as needed, so that the
data is in range and properly classified.
9To save your settings as a profile, click Save. Saved profiles can be loaded
when you import other files, and they can be used to automate
command-line scripts.
10 Click OK to begin the import process.
If you cancel the Import operation, all objects imported prior to canceling
will remain in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. You can delete these objects
and any associated data.
Notes and Warnings
■To copy the contents of a field, right-click in the field to copy and click
Copy. Right-click in the target field and click a Paste option. To copy the
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects | 383
contents of a field to all other layers, right-click in the field to copy and
click Paste To All Layers.
■When pasting into Object Class fields, the object class name and the data
mappings are pasted separately. The paste data mappings options are
available only if the same fields exist in the incoming data for all mapped
fields.
■You cannot copy a "By Data" or "ACAD_TEXT" setting.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORTFDO
Import FDO data.
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection.
Menu
MAPIMPORTFDOCommand Line
Styling Drawing Data Converted From a Geospatial Data Store
When you convert data from a geospatial format to DWG format, you can set
up appropriate DWG layers and styling information for the incoming data
automatically. This allows you to send out appropriately styled drawing files
to AutoCAD users.
You use AutoCAD layers to set up the styles. You can also create blocks,
linetypes, and other elements you need for styling. You save these items in a
drawing template, and then create a new map using that template to hold the
imported data.
384 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
To style drawing data on import
1Create a drawing file in AutoCAD Map 3D that defines all the coordinate
system, layers, blocks, linetypes, and other elements you need for styling.
■In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
and specify the coordinate system.
■Create layers. At the Command prompt, enter layer.
For information about creating block and other elements, see the
AutoCAD Help.
2Change the properties of the layer to reflect the styling you want.
For more information about styling layers, see Overview of Styling
Drawing Layers (page 652).
3Save the resulting drawing as a template (DWT) file.
■Click ➤ Save As ➤ AutoCAD Drawing Template.
■In the Files Of Type list, choose AutoCAD Drawing Template (*.dwt).
■Name and save the file.
■Set the template options (English or Metric and New Layer
Notification) and click OK. For more information about these options,
see the AutoCAD Help.
4When you are ready to import the data, create a new map using the
template you created.
■Click ➤ New ➤ Drawing.
■Select the template you created and click OK.
5Import the data into the new file.
■Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import .
Styling Drawing Data Converted From a Geospatial Data Store | 385
■Specify the file to import and click OK.
6In the Import dialog box (page 1711), under Import Properties For Each
Layer Imported, specify the import settings for each input layer
(sometimes called a theme, level, or file).
■Drawing Layer (page 419)— Select a target layer for each layer in the
incoming file.
■Object Class (page 421)— Assign incoming objects to an existing object
class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the object
class. The Object Class fields are available only if you have object
classes defined in your map. For more information about setting up
object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification (page ?).
■Input Coordinate System (page 424)— Specify the coordinate system
of the incoming file. If the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a coordinate
system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate
system of the drawing.
■Data (page 426)— For each layer, specify how to import data.
■Points (page 428)— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming point
objects.
NOTE If you import points that you assigned to an object class with a
creation method of Blocks, use the Points column to convert the points to
blocks so the objects can be classified. Object classification does not
automatically convert points to blocks.
7Click OK.
8Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
The imported objects use the styling information specified in your
template.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
386 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Supported Import Formats
Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files)
SDF is a native Autodesk file-based geospatial format that is optimized for
storing large, classified data sets. You can connect to SDF files (page 338) to
edit the original data in its source, or import it to convert the data into
AutoCAD drawing objects. Once you import data, the connection to the
original source is lost. If you update the source, your changes will not appear
in the imported copy.
SDF is similar to SHP format in that it contains both spatial data and attribute
data. However, unlike SHP, it stores both types of data in a single file rather
than a set of files.
When drawing data is stored as SDF, you can use Autodesk MapGuide
Enterprise 2007 to style and publish the data to the Internet. You can also
publish map data directly to MapGuide (page 1376), without exporting to SDF.
Versions
The current version, which works with AutoCAD Map 3D and Autodesk
MapGuide Enterprise, is SDF version 3. AutoCAD Map 3D refers to this version
as “SDF.”
SDF version 2 is still supported by MapGuide 6.5 (and earlier releases), and
AutoCAD Map 3D can import and export SDF 2 using a separate import/export
interface.
Advantages
SDF has the following advantages over DWG:
■It stores and manages an order of magnitude more data than DWG
Supported Import Formats | 387
■It is very fast, allowing Autodesk applications, such as AutoCAD Map 3D
and MapGuide, to read and display tens of thousands of features per second.
■It provides the power of a database without the overhead and cost of a full
relational database management system (RDBMS) such as SQL Server or
Oracle.
■An SDF file can store a single feature class, or it can store multiple feature
classes.
■It is easy to manage, providing access to the database schema.
Importing
When importing SDF, you can import each feature class in the SDF to a separate
layer. You can specify how you want to bring in attribute data and points.
You can also set an option to import polygons as closed polylines.
Driver Options
SDF has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
To import an SDF file
■Import from SDF (page 381) – Imports from SDF (version 3).
■Import from SDF 2 (page 389)– Imports from SDF (version 2).
To access and work with SDF
■Connect to SDF (page 338)– Allows you to view and edit the SDF data live
in its native format (SDF version 3).
388 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing Autodesk SDF 2
While importing SDF 2 files (Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 and earlier), you can
perform coordinate conversions, create object data tables from the key, name,
and URL fields, and create hyperlinks on imported objects. Import a selected
portion of the SDF by specifying four corner points of an area.
NOTE SDF 2 files can only be imported (and exported). They cannot be accessed
using Data Connect. However, SDF 3 files, using the new MapGuide technology,
use Data Connect. For information, see To bring in features from SDF (page 338).
See also:
■Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) (page 387)
■Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format (page 1417)
■Bringing In Features from SDF (page 337)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
To import SDF 2 files
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Import
panel ➤ SDF2.
Supported Import Formats | 389
2In the Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box, select a file. Click Open.
3In the Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box (page 1582), under Import
Layer, select the target AutoCAD layer for the SDF information.
To create a new AutoCAD layer, click Create New Layer. In the New Layer
dialog box (page 1579), specify a name for the new layer.
4Under Coordinate Conversion, select Convert From. Enter a coordinate
system code.
To select the code from a list, click Select Coordinate System.
5Under Data Elements, select Assign To Object Data Table. Specify the
object data table and fields.
To create a new table or field, click Create New Table or Create New Field.
In the Define New Object Data Table dialog box (page 1803) or Define New
Object Data Field dialog box (page 1578), specify the information for the
new table or field.
6Optionally, under Data Elements, select Create Hyperlinks From URL.
7Under Import By Location, select Define An Area To Import From The
SDF File and enter the coordinates for the area to import.
The coordinates must be in the coordinate system of the SDF file.
8To save your settings as a profile, click Save.
9Click OK.
The objects in the SDF file are imported into the drawing.
Quick Reference
MAPSDFIN
Imports an SDF 2 format file from Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 or earlier
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Autodesk SDF 2
(MapGuide 6.x).
Menu
MAPSDFINCommand Line
Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog boxDialog Box
390 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Importing DXF Files
You can use DXF files created by other applications to bring information into
AutoCAD Map 3D. When you import objects from DXF files, they do not have
links to other objects or to data. For example, a polygon that encloses a parcel
ID is not linked to the parcel ID except visually. Data imported from a DXF
file does not have any links to object data or external databases.
You cannot attach a source drawing to a DXF file or attach DXF files to another
drawing.
See also:
■Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File (page 1458)
To import a DXF file
1Click ➤ Open ➤ Drawing.
2In the Select File dialog box, under Files Of Type, select DXF (*.dxf).
3Select the file. Click Open.
Quick Reference
OPEN
Opens an existing drawing file
File menu ➤ Open
Menu
Open Drawing
Icon
OPENCommand Line
Importing From ESRI ArcSDE
You can import data from a connected ESRI ArcSDE database into your map
DWG. Using this option, your data will be imported as drawing objects. The
data will be a snapshot of your ArcSDE data. Once you import data, the
connection to the original source is lost. If you update the source, your changes
will not appear in the imported copy.
Supported Import Formats | 391
You can also connect to a live ArcSDE database (page 319) to edit the original
data in its source (edits will go into the database).
See also:
■Bringing In Features from ArcSDE (page 316)
To import data from an ESRI ArcSDE data source
NOTE You can also connect to a live ArcSDE database (page 319)to edit the original
data in its source (edits will go into the database).
1Before moving ArcSDE data into your map, assign a coordinate system
to the map. This lets you position your data accurately in a real-world
geographic location and align imported survey or GPS point data.
2In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
For more information, see Bringing In Features from ArcSDE (page 316)
NOTE Follow the steps up until clicking Connect; then stop. Do not add the
features to your map.
3At the Command prompt, enter mapimportfdo.
4In the Map Import From FDO dialog box, select the ArcSDE data source
connection from which to import data.
5Click OK.
6In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the Current Drawing
Coordinate System to make sure it is correct.
7Under Spatial Filter, specify whether to limit the area where data will be
imported:
■None — Place no area limits on the incoming file.
■Current Display — Limit the import to the current drawing area.
■Define Window — Limit the import to an area you define. To use this
option, click Select. Respond to the prompts to define the area.
8Specify the import settings for each input layer:
■Drawing Layer (page 419)— Select a target layer for each layer in the
incoming file.
392 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Object Class (page 421)— Assign incoming objects to an existing object
class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the object
class. The Object Class fields are available only if you have object
classes defined in your map. For more information about setting up
object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification (page ?).
■Input Coordinate System (page 424)— Specify the coordinate system
of the incoming file. If the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a coordinate
system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate
system of the drawing.
■Data (page 426)— For each layer, specify how to import data.
■Points (page 428)— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming point
objects.
NOTE If you are importing points and have assigned them to an object class
with a creation method of Blocks, you must use the Points column to convert
the points to blocks so that the objects can be classified. Object classification
does not convert points to blocks for you.
9By default, polygons are imported as polygon objects. To import them
as closed polylines, select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines.
10 If you assigned incoming objects to object classes and want to use the
object class defaults for any incoming data that's out of the defined object
class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out Of Range Values.
If you do not select this option, incoming data will be imported as is,
which may include some out of range values. If you later view the data
on the Object Class tab of the Properties palette, AutoCAD Map 3D
automatically modifies the data, using defaults as needed, so that the
data is in range and properly classified.
11 To save your settings as a profile, click Save. These saved profiles can be
loaded when you import other files, and they can be used to automate
command-line scripts.
12 Click OK to begin the import process.
If you cancel the import operation, all objects imported prior to canceling
will remain in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. You can delete these objects
and any associated data.
Supported Import Formats | 393
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORTFDO
Import FDO data.
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection.
Menu
MAPIMPORTFDOCommand Line
Importing ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages
ESRI Arc/INFO coverages can only be imported (and exported). They cannot
be accessed using Data Connect. AutoCAD Map 3D supports Arc/INFO version
7.2, 7.3, and 8.x, and E00.
Importing
Arc/INFO stores coverages on your hard disk as a directory of files.
In the coverage directory, each file contains specific data pertaining to the
coverage. For example, ARC files contain coordinates for arcs and LAB files
contain the coordinates for label points.
NOTE ARC files also contain TIC and Bounds settings. For import, these are driver
options, and are not imported or displayed by default. Tics are points with known
real-world coordinates. Coverages use tics to ensure that stacked coverages and
adjoining tiled coverages align accurately.
The following table shows how coverage features are translated to drawing
objects on import:
Drawing ObjectCoverage Feature
Point on _point layer, PAT attributes in object data
or in an external database.
Point
Sketch on _arc layer, AAT attributes in object data
or in an external database.
Arc
Closed polyline on _poly layer, PAT in object data
attached to polyline. In addition, all segments are
duplicated as sketches on the _arc layer.
Polygon
394 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Drawing ObjectCoverage Feature
Geometry converted as above, attribute in object
data.
Point, Arc, and Polygon with FAT
(feature allocation table) in dBASE
Text on _text layer. Text arrows on _textarrow layer.Annotation
Points on _tic layer, attributes in object data.Tics
Importing Restrictions
The following features are not supported when importing an ARC/INFO
coverage into a drawing:
■feature attribute tables
■text attributes
■route systems
■address files
■turntables
■LOG files
■fonts
■symbols
■linetypes
■shades
If a coverage has a field that describes Z values, commonly SPOT or
ELEVATION, the field is treated only as an attribute. It is not translated into
a Z value. You may be able to use a property alteration query to change the
elevation of the resulting drawing objects. (This will depend on the object
type. Elevation is not supported for all object types.)
When importing polygon coverages, polygon areas may be imported as closed
polylines. If you plan to recreate the topology in AutoCAD Map 3D, use the
MAPCREATECENTROIDS command to create centroids and move any attribute
data from the polyline or polygon to the centroids. Use the _arc layer to create
the topology using the topology commands.
In addition, AutoCAD Map 3D supports the coverage exchange format E00.
Supported Import Formats | 395
Driver Options
You can set the following options when importing ARC/INFO coverages or
E00 files:
DescriptionOption
Select Follow, Fit, or Ignore.Text Curves
Select Extract Bounds, or Extract Tics.Optional Feature Types
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
■Exporting To ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages (page 1419)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
■To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
■To recreate an Arc/INFO topology in AutoCAD Map 3D (page 396)
To import from Arc/INFO
■Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
To recreate an Arc/INFO topology in AutoCAD Map 3D
1Use the MAPCREATECENTROIDS command to create centroids. (page
885)
2Move any attribute data from the polyline or polygon to the centroids
(page 885)
3Use the _arc layer to create the topology using the topology commands.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
396 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing ESRI Shape Files
AutoCAD Map 3D supports up to ArcView version 3.2 and 8.x.
About SHP Files
ESRI SHP files store both geometry and attributes (data) for features. A single
shape can have as many as five physical files with the same filename, but
different file extensions:
■.shp— Geometric data. Data for multiple points, polylines, and polygons
can be stored in one SHP file, but each SHP file can store only one type of
geometry. For example, a line SHP file can contain data for rivers, roads,
and pipes.
■.shx — A geometric index to the map features, which can be used by some
applications to find features in disparate sections of a large map.
■.dbf— Attribute data associated with the map features.
■.prj—Projection and coordinate system data. This file is created only if your
map has an assigned coordinate system.
■.idx—Identifies the index field for the related SHP file, which is the unique
identifier for each entity in the SHP file.
Importing
You can connect to SHP files (page 336)to edit the original data in its source,
or import it to convert the data into AutoCAD drawing objects. Once you
import data, the connection to the original source is lost. If you update the
source, your changes will not appear in the imported copy.
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D considers SHP files a multi-select, file-based
format, that is, you select one or more individual .shp files during a single
import process. You can change the default in the mapimport.ini file so that
AutoCAD Map 3D considers SHP files a folder-based format (all files in the
Supported Import Formats | 397
folder are included in the import) or a single-select format (only one file can
be selected for import).
When you connect to or import SHP data, AutoCAD Map 3D checks the
geometry to see if there are multiple closed outer loops. If so, it treats the
geometry as multi-polygon (a polygon with multiple exterior rings). It does
not treat unclosed outer loops as multi-polygon.
When you create a multi-polygon in AutoCAD Map 3D and then save or
export it to SHP format, it will appear in its native SHP file as a multi-polygon.
When importing SHP files, it is important that you have the complete set of
.shp, .shx, and .dbf in the same folder. The import operation will work if you
have only the .shp file, but only the geometries will be imported. To import
data with its geometry, you need the full set of files.
The link to the data stored in the .dbf file can be maintained during the import
operation, or the data can be imported into object data in the AutoCAD Map
3D drawing.
You can import TEXTSTRING information from SHP classes you bring back
into AutoCAD Map 3D by importing points as text.
Import Restrictions
SHP files do not include color information. Imported objects have the same
color as the AutoCAD Map 3D layer.
Point symbols, line styles, and fill styles are not maintained when importing
from SHP files. Before the translation, put these items into one or more fields
in the associated database so you can reassign the display properties of the
graphical objects using these values in the drawing file.
Driver Options
SHP does not have import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
■Specifying How to Import Points (page 427)
■Exporting to ESRI SHP (page 1424)
398 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
■To import SHP data (page 399)
■To change the single file/folder default setting for SHP files (page 399)
■To access and work with SHP files (page 399)
To import SHP data
■Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
To change the single file/folder default setting for SHP files
■Modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To export to SHP as folder-based rather than
file-based (page 269)
To access and work with SHP files
■Connect to SHP (page 335) – Allows you to view and edit the SHP live in
its native format
■Bulk Copy (page 615) – Move data to and from SHP to other geospatial data
stores.
To import TEXTSTRING information from SHP classes you bring back into
AutoCAD Map 3D
■Select the import option to import points as text. See Specifying How to
Import Points (page 427).
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Supported Import Formats | 399
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing MapInfo MIF/MID Files
MIF/MID is a file standard used by MapInfo, a desktop mapping system.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports MapInfo up to version 7 MIF/MID files.
About MapInfo MIF/MID Files
MapInfo MIF/MID format stores both geometry and attributes (data) for
features, and is a set of two physical files that work together:
■.mif— Vector geometric data. A single .mif file can contain many different
types of geometry.
■.mid— Attributes for the geometric data.
Importing
MapInfo MIF/MID files can only be imported (and exported). They cannot be
accessed using Data Connect. By default, AutoCAD Map 3D considers MapInfo
MIF/MID a multi-select, file-based format, that is, you select one or more
individual .mif files during a single import process. To change the default so
that AutoCAD Map 3D considers MIF/MID a folder-based format (all files in
the folder are included in the import) or a single-select format (only one file
can be selected for import), modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file.
When you import MapInfo MIF/MID files, it is important that you have both
the .mif and .mid files in the same folder.
Symbol types are similar to AutoCAD Map 3D point objects. You cannot
import MIF/MID symbol types directly. However, if you store the symbol type
information in a column in a MID file, you can map each symbol type to a
block in the current AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. To do this, prepare the MIF
file by putting the name of the symbol type into a field in the database. Prepare
the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing by creating similar symbols as blocks in the
AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. Then, during import, perform a point-block
mapping and select the check box to get the block name from data and select
the symbol type field you created.
400 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
In MapInfo, polygons are represented as closed areas. When you import
polygons into AutoCAD Map 3D, they appear as polygons unless you select
Import Polygons As Closed Polylines in the Import dialog box.
By default, object colors are imported to their closest ACI (AutoCAD Color
Index) color. To import object colors using RGB (True Color), edit the
mapimport.ini file.
To change the default text justification setting for MIF/MID, edit the
mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
Driver Options
MapInfo MIF/MID has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
■Exporting To MapInfo MIF/MID (page 1431)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
■To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
■To change import settings for MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
■To import object colors using RGB (True Color) (page 401)
■To change the default text justification setting for MIF/MID (page 402)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID
■Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
To change import settings for MapInfo MIF/MID
■Edit the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To edit the .ini file (page 271).
To import object colors using RGB (True Color)
■Edit the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To edit the .ini file (page 272).
Supported Import Formats | 401
To change the default text justification setting for MIF/MID
■Edit the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
Use the [MIF_Justification] section to set justification for MIF. Allowed MIF
Justifications are left, center, and right. For more information, see To edit
the .ini file (page 274).
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing MapInfo TAB Files
MapInfo TAB, also referred to as the MapInfo native format, is a
two-dimensional format that stores both feature geometry and attributes (data)
in a set of physical files that have the following file extensions:
About MapInfo TAB Files
■.tab— The main file for a MapInfo table. It is associated with the appropriate
.dat, .id, .map, and .ind files.
■.dat— Tabular data for a table in MapInfo's native format.
■.id— An index to a MapInfo graphical objects .map() file.
■.map— Contains geographic information describing map objects.
■.ind— An index to a MapInfo tabular (.dat) file.
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can import and export MapInfo TAB up to version
7.
402 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Importing
MapInfo TAB files can only be imported (and exported). They cannot be
accessed using Data Connect. By default, AutoCAD Map 3D considers MapInfo
TAB a multi-select, file-based format, that is, you select one or more individual
.tab files during a single import process. To change the default so that AutoCAD
Map 3D considers MapInfo TAB a folder-based format (all files in the folder
are included in the import) or a single-select format (only one file can be
selected for import), modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file.
When you import MapInfo TAB files, it is important that you have the
complete set of physical files (.tab, .dat, .id, .map, and .ind) in the same folder.
Symbol types are similar to AutoCAD Map 3D point objects. You cannot
import TAB symbol types directly. However, if you store the symbol type
information in a column in a DAT file, you can map each symbol type to a
block in the current AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. To do this, prepare the TAB
file by putting the name of the symbol type into a field in the database. Prepare
the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing by creating similar symbols as blocks in the
AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. Then, during import, perform a point-block
mapping and select the check box to get the block name from data and select
the symbol type field you created.
In MapInfo, polygons are represented as closed areas. When you import
polygons, the polygons appear as polygons in AutoCAD Map 3D unless you
select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines in the Import dialog box.
By default, object colors are imported to their closest ACI (AutoCAD Color
Index) color. To import object colors using RGB (True Color), you must edit
the mapimport.ini file.
To change the default text justification setting for TAB, edit the
mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
Driver Options
MapInfo TAB has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
■Exporting To MapInfo TAB (page 1433)
Supported Import Formats | 403
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
■To import from MapInfo TAB (page 404)
■To import object colors using RGB (True Color) (page 404)
■To change the default text justification setting for MapInfo TAB (page 404)
To import from MapInfo TAB
■Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
To import object colors using RGB (True Color)
■Edit the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To edit the .ini file (page 272).
To change the default text justification setting for MapInfo TAB
■Edit the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
Use the [MAPINFO_Justification] section to set justification for TAB.
Allowed TAB Justifications are left, center, and right. For more information,
see Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264).
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
404 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8
You can import and export Microstation DGN version 7 and 8. Bentley Systems,
Inc., and MicroStation programs use the DGN format. Like DWG, a single
DGN file can contain points, lines, areas, text, and other object types.
Importing
Microstation DGN files can only be imported (and exported). They cannot be
accessed using Data Connect. Data-element information is stored in an external
database file and linked to graphic objects. AutoCAD Map 3D imports database
link information so you can maintain the linkage during import (page 433).
By default, object colors are imported to their closest ACI (AutoCAD Color
Index) color. To import object colors using RGB (True Color), edit the
mapimport.ini file.
For DGN8, the Input Layer column lists the model name. To see the layers
for a specific model, you may need to scroll the list.
Driver Options for DGN 7
You can set the following options when importing DGN 7 files:
DescriptionOption
Choose Geometry to group incoming objects by entity type.
Choose Level to group them by their DGN level or level name.
Only levels that contain elements will be imported.
Group Elements By
Allows you to extract MSLinks and FRAMME attribute linkage
values from the DGN 7 file. If you select MSLinks, AutoCAD
Linkage Extraction
Map 3D imports up to three links per object for DGN 7. For
each link, two fields are added to the object data table:
mslinks_n, which specifies the key value, and entity_num_n,
which specifies the table. If you select FRAMME, the following
fields are added to the object data table: comp_count,
comp_num, dgnfile, feat_num, state_num, and ufid.
Each DGN 7 file defines a UOR (unit of resolution); in addition,
it can define Sub units and Master units. Select Master or Sub
Coordinate Units
to specify which of these units in the DGN 7 file matches the
default unit in the AutoCAD Map 3D map. For example, if
the default unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D map is meters, and
meters are the Sub unit in the imported file, select Sub. If you
Supported Import Formats | 405
DescriptionOption
select Sub or Master, the UORs in the DGN 7 file are conver-
ted to Sub or Master units according to the conversion factor
in the DGN file header.
When you import the file, one Master or Sub unit (whichever
you choose) will become one drawing unit in your AutoCAD
Map 3D map. The Unit Ratio value indicates the ratio between
the Master and Sub units. For example, if the ratio is 1:12 (as
it would be for Feet/Inches), imported object coordinates will
be scaled 12 times bigger if you select Sub.
NOTE When you import or export a DGN file with a master
unit of Imperial feet, AutoCAD Map 3D converts the master
unit from feet to meters. In addition, it does not recognize
any subunit selection during the import or export process.
Select the options to use during import. For example, select
Explode Complex Strings to return each component of a
Element Expansion
complex chain as its own feature (no feature will be returned
for the complex chain as a whole). Otherwise, all elements
of the complex chain merge into a single linear feature, any
arcs in the complex chain become linestrings, and any link-
ages on the component elements themselves are lost. Select
Propagate Member Linkages to return the linkages attached
to the first component of the complex chain to supplement
any existing linkages. Otherwise, any linkages on the compon-
ent elements themselves are lost and only linkages attached
to the complex chain itself are returned.
By default, cells are converted into blocks, maintaining the
cell grouping. You can choose to convert the cells to points
Cell Expansion
instead. You can also explode the contents of the cells into
their component parts, but the explosion is one level deep
only.
Select Create DWG to read all external reference files (xrefs)
attached to the source data set. If the reference file has nested
Reference Files
references, they are also imported, but circular references are
not. If you select this option, you specify a location for the
folder for these files. If the folder already exists, you can
choose to replace it (overwrite its contents) or cancel and
specify a different location. The default folder location is the
same as the selected DGN file location.
406 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
DescriptionOption
If you select Ignore, reference files are not imported and you
cannot change the location of the folder.
Driver Options for DGN 8
You can set the following options when importing DGN 8 files:
DescriptionOption
Choose Geometry to group incoming objects by entity type.
Choose Level or Level Names to group them by their DGN
Group Elements By
level or level name. Only levels that contain elements will be
imported.
By default, cells are converted into blocks, maintaining the
cell grouping. You can choose to convert the cells to points
Cell Expansion
instead. You can also explode the contents of the cells into
their component parts, but the explosion is one level deep
only.
Each DGN 8 file can define Sub units and Master units. Specify
which of these units in the DGN 8 file matches the default
Coordinate Units
unit in the AutoCAD Map 3D map. For example, if the default
unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D map is meters, and meters are
the Sub unit in the imported file, select Sub.
When you import the file, one Master or Sub unit (whichever
you choose) will become one drawing unit in your AutoCAD
Map 3D map. The Unit Ratio value indicates the ratio between
the Master and Sub units. For example, if the ratio is 1:12 (as
it would be for Feet/Inches), imported object coordinates will
be scaled 12 times bigger if you select Sub.
NOTE When you import or export a DGN file with a master
unit of Imperial feet, AutoCAD Map 3D converts the master
unit from feet to meters. In addition, it does not recognize
any sub-unit selection during the import or export process.
Select the options to use during import. For example, select
Explode Complex Strings to return each component of a
Element Expansion
complex chain as its own feature (no feature will be returned
for the complex chain as a whole). Otherwise, all elements
of the complex chain merge into a single linear feature, any
Supported Import Formats | 407
DescriptionOption
arcs in the complex chain become linestrings, and any link-
ages on the component elements themselves are lost.
Allows you to extract MSLinks and FRAMME attribute linkage
values from the DGN 8 file. For each link, two fields are added
Linkage Extraction
to the object data table: mslinks_n, which specifies the key
value, and entity_num_n, which specifies the table. If you
select FRAMME, the following fields are added to the object
data table: comp_count, comp_num, dgnfile, feat_num,
state_num, and ufid.
Select Create DWG to read all external reference files (xrefs)
attached to the source data set. If the reference file has nested
Read Reference Files
references, they are also imported, but circular references are
not. If you select this option, you specify a location for the
folder for these files. If the folder already exists, you can
choose to replace it (overwrite its contents) or cancel and
specify a different location. The default folder location is the
same as the selected DGN file location.
If you select Ignore, reference files are not imported and you
cannot change the location of the folder.
Other Import Options
You can set several options in the MapForeignFileProperties.ini file. See
Customizing and Automating Import and Export (page 260).
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
■Importing Objects with Links to an External Database (page 433)
■Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 (page 1435)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
■To import object colors using RGB (True Color) (page 409)
■To maintain a link to external data when you import DGN files (page 409)
408 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■To import DGN files (page 409)
To import object colors using RGB (True Color)
■Edit the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To edit the .ini file (page 272).
To maintain a link to external data when you import DGN files
■Use a link template to maintain the linkage during import (page 433).
To import DGN files
■Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
For driver options, see Design File Input Settings (page 1734).
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing From Oracle
You can import data from a connected Oracle database into your map. Using
this option, your data will be imported as drawing objects. The data will be a
snapshot of your Oracle data. You can also make a live connection with Oracle
(one where edits will go into the database).
See also:
■Bringing In Features from Oracle (page 312)
■Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store (page 1461)
Supported Import Formats | 409
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
To import data from an Oracle data source
1Before moving Oracle data into your map, assign a coordinate system to
the map. This lets you position your data accurately in a real-world
geographic location and align imported survey or GPS point data.
2In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
For more information, see Bringing In Features from Oracle (page 312)
NOTE Follow the steps through clicking Connect, then stop. Do not add the
features to your map.
3At the Command prompt, enter mapimportfdo.
4In the Map Import From FDO dialog box, select the Oracle data source
connection from which to import data.
5Click OK.
6In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the Current Drawing
Coordinate System to make sure it is correct.
7Under Spatial Filter, specify whether to limit the area where data will be
imported:
■None — Place no area limits on the incoming file.
■Current Display — Limit the import to the current drawing area.
■Define Window — Limit the import to an area you define. To use this
option, click Select. Respond to the prompts to define the area.
8Specify the import settings for each input layer:
■Drawing Layer (page 419)— Select a target layer for each layer in the
incoming file.
■Object Class (page 421)— Assign incoming objects to an existing object
class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the object
class. The Object Class fields are available only if you have object
classes defined in your Map drawing. For more information about
410 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
setting up object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification (page
?).
■Input Coordinate System (page 424)— Specify the coordinate system
of the incoming file. If the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a coordinate
system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate
system of the drawing.
■Data (page 426)— For each layer, specify how to import data.
■Points (page 428)— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming point
objects.
NOTE If you are importing points and have assigned them to an object class
with a creation method of Blocks, you must use the Points column to convert
the points to blocks so that the objects can be classified. Object classification
does not convert points to blocks for you.
9By default, polygons are imported as polygon objects. To import them
as closed polylines, select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines.
10 If you assigned incoming objects to object classes and want to use the
object class defaults for any incoming data that is out of the defined
object class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out Of Range Values.
If you do not select this option, incoming data will be imported as is,
which may include some out of range values. If you later view the data
on the Object Class tab of the Properties palette, AutoCAD Map 3D
automatically modifies the data, using defaults as needed, so that the
data is in range and properly classified.
11 To save your settings as a profile, click Save. These saved profiles can be
loaded when you import other files, and they can be used to automate
command-line scripts.
12 Click OK to begin the import process.
If you cancel the import operation, all objects imported prior to canceling
will remain in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. You can delete these objects
and any associated data.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORTFDO
Supported Import Formats | 411
Import FDO data.
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection.
Menu
MAPIMPORTFDOCommand Line
Importing Geographic Markup Language (GML) Files
GML (Geography Markup Language) is an OpenGIS® Implementation
specification that defines an XML encoding for the transport and storage of
geographic information. The specification can be found on the OpenGIS
Consortium web site.
You can import GML into and export it out of AutoCAD Map 3D.
Importing
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can import GML version 2 or version 3. There
is a separate drop-down option that also allows you to import Ordnance Survey
of Great Britain MasterMap GML version 2 files.
Because the GML format is flexible and allows you to specify your own
schemas, semantics, and options, there are many variations of the format.
AutoCAD Map 3D reads many of these, but some may not be compatible with
the AutoCAD Map 3D GML driver.
In addition, before importing GML data in Asian languages, you must verify
that the language encoding settings specified in the AutoCAD Map 3D
mapimport.ini file match the settings in your incoming file. The settings must
match for the import to be successful. For more information, see Customizing
the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264).
Driver Options
GML has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
■Exporting To Geographic Markup Language (GML) (page 1429)
412 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
■To verify language encoding settings for import from GML (page 413)
■To import GML files (page 413)
To verify language encoding settings for import from GML
■Make sure the language encoding settings in the mapimport.ini file match
the settings in your incoming file.
For more information, see Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files
(page 264).
To import GML files
■Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) Files
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard). SDTS is an
import-only format. You cannot export to this format.
Supported Import Formats | 413
Importing
When you select an SDTS catalogue file, AutoCAD Map 3D imports objects
and attributes from the dataset specified in the catalogue file. Typically, a
dataset is a group of .ddf files with the same filename prefix.
AutoCAD Map 3D imports only one record per object. If an object has multiple
records attached, only one of the records will be imported.
Driver Options
SDTS has no import driver options.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
To import SDTS files
■Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing SQLite Files
SQLite is a file-based geospatial format. You can connect to SQLite files (page
331) to edit the original data in its source, or import it to convert the data into
AutoCAD drawing objects. Once you import data, the connection to the
original source is lost. If you update the source, your changes do not appear
in the imported copy.
414 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
SQLite is like SHP format in that it contains both spatial data and attribute
data. However, unlike SHP, it stores both types of data in a single file rather
than a set of files.
Advantages
SQLite has the following advantages over DWG:
■It stores and manages an order of magnitude more data than DWG
■It provides the power of a database without the overhead and cost of a full
relational database management system (RDBMS) such as SQL Server or
Oracle.
■A SQLite file can store a single feature class, or it can store multiple feature
classes.
■It is easy to manage, providing access to the database schema.
Importing
When importing SQLite, you can import each feature class in the file to a
separate layer. You can specify how you want to bring in attribute data and
points. You can also set an option to import polygons as closed polylines.
Driver Options
SQLite has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
To import a SQLite file
■Import a SQLite file (page 381)– Converts the current contents of the file
to drawing objects and inserts them in your map.
Supported Import Formats | 415
To access and work with SQLite
■Connect to SQLite (page 331)– Allows you to view and edit the SQLite data
live in its native format.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing VPF (Vector Product Format) Files
You can import Vector Product Format (VPF) files into AutoCAD Map 3D. You
cannot export to this format.
VPF is a standard format, structure, and organization for large geographic
databases that are based on a georelational data model. It is commonly used
by military departments and defense agencies.
The VPF specification is available on the National Imaging and Mapping Agency
(NIMA) web site
Importing
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D considers Vector Product Format (VPF) a
multi-select, file-based format, that is, you select one or more individual files
during a single import process. You can edit the mapimport.ini file to specify
that all files in the folder are included in the import or that only one file can
be selected for import.
NOTE VPF data sets can be very large. You can use a spatial filter to limit the size
of the DWG you create from VPF data. See Specifying an Area to Import (page
417).
416 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Driver Options
VPF has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
To change the default so that AutoCAD Map 3D considers VPF a folder-based
format
■Modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as
folder-based, multi-select, or file-based (page 271).
To import from VPF
■Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Specifying an Area to Import
When importing data from another file format, you can specify (or limit) the
area into which incoming objects will be imported.
Specifying an Area to Import | 417
You can import objects into the current drawing area, into an area you define
in the map, or import the entire file.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To filter the data to specify the area to add to your map, see Filtering
Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309).
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
To specify an area to import
1Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import .
2In the Import dialog box (page 1711), under Spatial Filter, specify whether
to limit the area into which data will be imported:
■None — Place no area limits on the incoming file.
■Current Display — Limit the import to the current drawing area.
■Define Window — Limit the import to a rectangular area you define.
To use this option, click Select. Drag your cursor from right to left to
define the area. Objects within the rectangular window are imported.
■AutoCAD Map 3D does not display a preview of the incoming data.
■If the coordinate system assigned to the Map drawing differs from the
coordinate system specified in the Coordinate System column, AutoCAD
Map 3D will perform a reverse transformation to determine the correct
coordinate space (area) for the incoming data.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
418 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. By default,
AutoCAD Map 3D imports data to an AutoCAD layer with the same name as
the layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the input file. If an
AutoCAD layer with this name already exists, objects are copied to that layer.
Otherwise, a new AutoCAD layer is created and objects are copied to the new
layer.
If you assign the input layer to an object class with a layer property, the default
will instead be the default AutoCAD layer defined by the object class, and the
Drawing Layer field displays <By Class>.
You can specify one of the following layer options:
■Put objects on an existing AutoCAD layer.
■Put objects on a new AutoCAD layer.
■Put objects on an AutoCAD layer based on data attached to the objects.
■Put objects on the AutoCAD layer specified by the assigned object class
(available only if you assigned the input layer to an object class with a
layer property).
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers (page 355)
To specify an AutoCAD layer during import
1Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import .
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import | 419
2In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the target drawing layer for
each input layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the incoming
file.
3To change the AutoCAD layer, click in the Drawing Layer field for the
input layer to change. In the Layer Mapping dialog box (Import) (page
1719), do one of the following:
■To import objects to an existing AutoCAD layer, click Create on
Existing Layer. Click the down arrow and select the layer.
■To import objects to a new AutoCAD layer, click Create On New Layer.
Click in the cell and enter a layer name.
■To import objects to an AutoCAD layer whose name is specified in
data stored on the imported object, click Use Data Field For Layer
Name. Select the data field to use. Click OK to close the Layer Mapping
dialog box.
During import, AutoCAD Map 3D reads the specified data value for
each object. If the data value specifies a layer that already exists, the
object is imported to that layer. If the data value specifies a layer that
does not exist, the layer is created. If an object does not have a data
value attached, the object is imported to Layer 0.
■To import objects to a layer with the same name as the input layer,
right-click the Drawing Layer column heading in the table. Click Use
Input Layer Names.
■To import objects to the layer specified by the assigned object class,
verify that <By Class>; is displayed in the Drawing Layer field. If it is
not, type <By Class>; into the field.
NOTE If the layer specified in the Drawing Layer column is different from the one
specified in Object Class, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the Drawing Layer setting unless
it violates the range specified by the Object Class.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
420 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Assigning an Object Class During Import
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. As you import
objects, you can assign them to an existing object class in the AutoCAD Map
3D drawing and map the incoming attribute data to the object class definition.
For example, objects being imported from a SHP input layer can be classified
and included in the "LAND USE" object class, and data values from the SHP
file can be mapped to the "LAND USE" object class definition.
Because some of the incoming data values may conflict with data ranges
defined in the object class, AutoCAD Map 3D gives you the option of using
the object class default values instead of the incoming data values for values
that are not within the acceptable range. This ensures that incoming data is
accurately classified but may require changing incoming data values.
To assign an object class, you must first define object classes in your AutoCAD
Map 3D drawing. For more information, see Setting Up Object Classification
(page 116).
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
To assign an object class to an input layer
1Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import .
2In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the settings in the Object Class
column.
Assigning an Object Class During Import | 421
NOTE To make selections in the Object Class column, first define object
classes in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. If there are no object classes defined,
the fields in the Object Class column are grayed-out. For more information,
see Setting Up Object Classification (page 116).
3For each layer in the incoming file, click in the Object Class field.
4Select an object class.
5Click to map incoming attribute data to the AutoCAD Map 3D object
class definition.
6In the Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box (page 1710), verify that
the object class you just selected is highlighted in the Select An Object
Class list.
7On the right, review the Input Fields list, which displays the incoming
attribute data fields that are available to be mapped to Target Fields in
the object class definition.
8For each Input Field to map, click the down-arrow under Target Fields,
and select a target field in the object class definition. The syntax used for
the target field is:
CATEGORY:TABLE:FIELD
■CATEGORY — Type of data, for example "OD" for object data, or "LT"
for link template (linked external database).
■TABLE — Object data table name or database table name.
■FIELD — Data field name.
After you map a target field, it no longer appears in the Target Fields list.
This ensures that each target field is mapped to only one incoming data
field.
9Map as many of the Target Fields as needed. If there are no more target
fields in the Target Fields list, you've mapped them all. If you do not map
a target field, the default object class value is used.
10 Click OK to close the Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box.
11 To use object class default values for incoming data values that are not
within the specified object class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out
Of Range Values. Properties such as Layer and Color are also enforced.
422 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
This ensures that incoming data will be accurately classified but may
require AutoCAD Map 3D to change some of the incoming data values.
■If you are importing points and have assigned them to an object class with
a creation method of Blocks, use the Points column to convert the points
to blocks so that the objects can be classified. Object classification does
not convert points to blocks for you. For more information, see To specify
how to import points (page 428).
■To copy the object class names and attribute mapping settings from one
layer to another, right-click in the Object Class field to copy. Click Copy.
Then right-click in the field in the target layer and choose whether to paste
the object class name or attribute mapping. To copy to all other layers,
right-click and choose whether to paste the name or the attribute mapping
to all layers. If attribute mapping conflicts are detected, the paste attribute
mappings options is not available.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import
As you import objects, you can convert them from the coordinate system of
the input file to the coordinate system of the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing.
To perform this conversion, you must first assign a coordinate system to the
current drawing (page 147). Then, for each layer that you import, you must
specify the appropriate coordinate system.
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import | 423
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To change the coordinate system when you connect to the data, see
Changing Coordinate Systems (page 311).
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
To perform a coordinate conversion
1Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import .
2In the Import dialog box (page 1711), note the coordinate system assigned
to the current drawing.
NOTE If the current drawing does not have a coordinate system assigned,
click Assign Global Coordinate System and select the coordinate system for
the current drawing.
3For each layer in the incoming file, click in the Input Coordinate System
field.
4Enter a new global coordinate system code, or click to select from a
list of global coordinate systems.
5In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, select the category
and coordinate system for the incoming layer.
6Click OK to close the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box.
You can copy the settings from one layer to another. Right-click in the field
to copy. Click Copy. Then right-click in the field in the target layer. Click
Paste. To copy the setting to all other layers, click Paste To All Layers.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
424 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing Attribute Data
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. As you import
objects, you can import the attribute data attached to the objects.
You can import the data to one of the following:
■Existing object data table — By default, incoming fields are imported into
object data fields with the same name. If no object data field exists with
the same name, the incoming field is not imported. If you don't want to
do this, use Object Data Mapping to map incoming fields manually to
object data fields with other names or to create new fields.
Incoming data is converted to the data type of the existing object data
field. If this conversion fails (for example, if you import characters to an
integer field), AutoCAD Map 3D uses 0 for integers, 0.0 for real numbers,
and "" for text.
■New object data table — By default, the fields in the new object data table
match the fields you've chosen to import. If you do not want to do this,
use Object Data Mapping to select the fields to import or to change the
names of the object data fields.
When the data is imported, it will be converted to the following object
data types:
■Integer32, Integer16, and Boolean data types are converted to the
Integer data type. For Boolean data, False is converted to 0 and True is
converted to 1.
■Float, Double, and Decimal data types are converted to the Real data
type.
■Char and Date data types are converted to the Character data type.
Data is imported only if it is attached to an incoming object. If no objects
are found for an input layer, then the object data table will not be created.
Importing Attribute Data | 425
■External database — Imported data is added to the external database table
as new records.
■External database, link only — If you do not need to add the data to the
external database, you can import just the links to the data. When you
import links only, the link from the object to the external data are
maintained, but the external database is not modified. This is much faster
than importing the entire record. This is a good option when importing
SHP data.
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■To import objects with links to an external database (page 434)
■Setting Up Object Data (page 198)
To specify the data to import
1Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import .
2In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the settings in the Data
column.
3To change the setting for a layer, click in the Data field for the layer to
change. Click .
4In the Attribute Data dialog box (page 1699), select an option:
■If you do not want to import data, click Do Not Import Attribute Data
and close the dialog box.
■To import data as object data, click Create Object Data and enter a
name for the object data table or select an existing object data table.
Select Add Unique Key Field to create a unique key for each incoming
record automatically.
Click Select Fields. In the Object Data/External Database Mapping
dialog box (page 1732), map incoming fields to object data fields.
■To import data to an external database, click Add To Database Table
and select a link template.
To import only the link data, select Create Link Only.
426 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click Select Fields to map incoming fields to fields in the external
database table.
5Click OK to close the Attribute Data dialog box.
■To import data to object data tables with the same name as the input layer
names, right-click the Data column header in the table. Click Use Input
Layer Name For Table Name.
■To import data to an external database, attach the data source and define
the link template before you start the import process.
■If conflicts are found between the settings made in the Data column and
an assigned object class definition, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the Conflict
Resolution dialog box (page 1701), where you can resolve the conflicts before
proceeding with the import.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Specifying How to Import Points
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. As you import
point data, you can choose how the points are treated.
NOTE If you are importing survey points, see Bringing in Survey Data (page 370).
■Import points as points, using ACAD_POINT.
■Import points as text, using text specified in data attached to the objects.
Specifying How to Import Points | 427
■Import points as blocks, using a specified block definition.
■Import points as blocks, using a block name specified in data attached to
the objects.
If you import points as blocks, you can choose to import the attribute data
with the objects. If an attribute name on the block that is being created
matches a field name on the incoming point, the data for that attribute will
be imported with the point.
NOTE If the attribute data includes the values used to link the object to an external
database, you can recreate these links (page 530) in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing
using the ADEGENLINK command.
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■Accessing Data from ODBC (page 342)
To specify how to import points
NOTE If you are importing survey points, see Bringing in Survey Data (page 370).
1Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import .
2In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the settings in the Points
column.
3To change the setting for a layer, click in the Points field for that layer.
Do one of the following:
■To import points as points, click the down arrow and select
ACAD_POINT.
■To import points as mtext, click in the Import dialog box (page
1711), click Create As Text From Data, and select the data field to use.
If an object does not have a value in the selected data field, the point
is imported using ACAD_POINT.
Text uses the text style for the current drawing. To change the text
style for the current drawing, click Text Style and select a style.
■To import points to a specific block, click the down arrow and select
the block name.
428 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■To import points to a block whose name is specified in data stored
on the imported objects, click in the Point Mapping dialog box,
click Get Block Name From Data, and select the data field to use.
During import, AutoCAD Map 3D reads the specified data value for
each object. If the data value stored on the object specifies a valid
block name, the object is imported to that block. If the data value
stored on the object specifies a block name that does not exist or if
the object does not have a data value attached, the point is imported
using ACAD_POINT.
4To fill attributes with values from fields in the input file, select Get
Attribute Values From Fields. This works with either the Create As Blocks
or the Get Block Name From Data option.
NOTE This option works only if incoming field names match the block
attribute tags. If they do not match, you can map specific incoming fields to
specific block attributes using the Object class column.
5Click OK to close the Point Mapping dialog box.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing Polygons
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. By default,
polygons are imported as polygon objects. However, to use the polygons in a
topology, you must import them as polylines and create centroids for them.
Importing Polygons | 429
If a polygon has attribute data attached, the data is initially attached to the
polyline. You must move the attribute data from the polyline to the centroid.
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■Creating Centroids for Polygons (page 431)
To import polygons
1Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import . Then import the
attribute data as object data (page 426).
2If you plan to use the polygons in a polygon topology, in the Import
dialog box (page 1711), select the option to Import Polygons As Closed
Polylines.
NOTE To set the default state of this option, use the MAPUSEMPOLYGON
command.
3Run To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 887) to
create centroids in the polygons and move the data from each closed
polyline or polygon to its centroid.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu ➤ Centroids
Menu
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDSCommand Line
Create Centroids dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
430 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Creating Centroids for Polygons
If you have polygon objects or closed polylines with data attached to them,
you can create centroids and move the data to the centroid. This is useful:
■After you import or digitize objects.
■Before using editing commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Boundary Break,
or Boundary Trim.
■When working with topology.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to
features from a feature source.
Creating Centroids for Polygons | 431
Object data attached to closed polylines (top) and object data moved to
centroids (bottom).
AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that
the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon
or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid.
For an object shaped like a figure eight, AutoCAD Map 3D creates one centroid.
Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
See also:
■Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects (page 378)
■Importing Polygons (page 429)
432 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to features
from a feature source.
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines
1Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Create Centroids.
2In the Create Centroids dialog box (page 1801), specify whether to create
centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only
for selected closed objects, select the polygons and closed polylines.
TIP Click the Quick Select tool to view and filter the object type as you select
objects.
3Specify the layer on which the centroids should be created.
4Specify the block to use for centroids, or use ACAD_POINT.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu ➤ Centroids
Menu
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDSCommand Line
Create Centroids dialog boxDialog Box
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. If objects in a
file you are importing have links to attribute data in a separate database, you
can maintain those links.
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database | 433
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■Importing Attribute Data (page 425)
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
To import objects with links to an external database
1Make sure you have created a link template (page 526) for the external
database, and that the database is attached (page 209) and connected.
2Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import .
3In the Import dialog box (page 1711), click in a field in the Data column.
Click .
4In the Attribute Data dialog box (page 1699), select Add To Database Table.
5Select the link template to use.
6Select Create Link Only.
7Click OK to close the Attribute Data dialog box.
When you import objects, the attribute data on the objects will be converted
to link data for the selected link template.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
MAPOD2ASE
434 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Menu
MAPOD2ASECommand Line
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog boxDialog Box
Displaying Attribute Data as Text
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. If you have
attribute data attached to the objects you import, you can display that data
as text next to the object. This works whether you import the data as object
data, external data linked to the object, or block attributes.
TIP If you are importing points, you can import the points directly as attribute
data. See Specifying How to Import Points (page 427).
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
■Adding Annotation (page 1103)
To import a file with attribute data and display the data as text
1Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import . Then import the
attribute data as object data (page 426). Save and close the file.
2Open a drawing and attach the drawing file (page 154) containing the
imported objects.
3Define a query that includes the objects you want. If you have only one
file attached, define a Location condition (page 1241) to find all objects in
the source drawing.
4As part of the query, define a property alteration that displays the object
data as text (page 1278). When specifying the text, click Expression and
choose the object data table that contains the imported attribute data.
5Optionally, save the changes (page 754) back to the attached (source) file.
Displaying Attribute Data as Text | 435
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save
Source Drawing Save Set
Menu
Save to Source Drawings
Icon
ADESAVEOBJSCommand Line
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
436 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Adding Rasters and Surfaces
■To add a raster image to the map (page 440)
■To add a raster-based surface to your map (page 442)
■To add 2D rasters to your map (page 444)
■To add a WMS-based image to your map (page 447)
■To make a raster image transparent (page 450)
■To specify an image insertion point (page 451)
■To insert the image manually (page 452)
■To enter the coordinates for the image insertion point (page 452)
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces
When creating a map, you can add raster images and surfaces to the display.
Adding Rasters and Surfaces | 437
Adding one or more images in the background of your map adds context and gives
the map visual appeal.
Use the following raster image and surface types in your map.
FormatsRaster Type
DEM (Digital Elevation Model), ESRI Grid, or Digital Terrain El-
evation Data (DTED)
Raster-based surfaces
(page 441)
JPEG and JPEG2K (Joint Photographic Experts Group), PNG
(Portable Network Graphic), MrSID (Multi-Resolution Seamless
2D raster (page 443)
Image Database), TIFF (Tagged Image File Format), ECW (En-
hanced Compressed Wavelet)
Maps on a serverWMS raster (page
445)
BMP, CALS-I, ECW, FLIC, GeoSPOT, IG4, IGS, IKONOS, JFIF,
LANDSAT FAST, L7A, NITF, PCX, PICT, Quickbird TIFF, RLC 1
and 2 , TARGA
Other raster formats
(page 453)
NOTE Layers in the map are rendered based on the draw order of the layers in
Display Manager. To display drawing objects in front of the raster image, put the
raster image layer at the bottom of the list.
438 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to bring multiple images
onto a single layer.
■Show me how to insert an image using
a guide.
■Show me how to bring in data from a
web server using WMS.
Procedure
■To add raster images using Data Con-
nect (page 442)
■To add raster images that use formats
unsupported by Data Connect (page
459)
Tutorial
■Exercise 5: Add a raster image
Workflow
■Style Surfaces
GIS Skills
■Bring in data from multiple image files
to a single layer
■Transform an image so that it is correctly
aligned
■Access data published on a public web
server
Related topics
■Organizing Layers in Your Map (page
300)
■Specifying Image Insertion Point (page
451)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats
(page 453)
■Adding an Image from a WMS (Web
Map Service) (page 445)
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces | 439
To add a raster image to the map
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
If you are adding a WMS image, see Adding an Image from a WMS (Web
Map Service) (page 445). If you are adding an image whose format does
not appear in the Data Connect window, see Using Other Raster Image
Formats (page 453).
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Click the folder icon to browse to the folder containing multiple images,
or click the image icon to specify a single image.
5Click Connect.
6In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
If this source contains only a single image, that image is selected
automatically. If it contains multiple images, you can right-click any of
them and select Select All or Select None.
7For each image you select, make sure the Coordinate System and Vertical
Units entries are correct.
■Hold your cursor over an image name to see its native coordinate
system. The Coordinate System entry should match this.
■Scroll the table if necessary to see all the columns.
■To change the coordinate system, click Edit Coordinate Systems and
choose the appropriate coordinate system.
■To change the vertical units, click the current entry to display a down
arrow that lets you choose a different one.
8To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
layer; for example, you can combine GeoTIFs of each county to create a
state map.
9Click Add To Map.
10 If prompted, specify the location, scale, and rotation (page 451) for each
image.
440 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Some image files contain placement information and are placed
automatically in your map. For images that do not contain placement
information, you are prompted for the location, scale, and insertion
point.
11 In Display Manager, make sure that the image layer is in the correct
display order.
You can move the raster layer below objects and features.
■In Display Manager, click Groups ➤ Draw Order. (If this button is
already labeled Draw Order, you can omit this step.)
■Drag the raster layer down in the list. Layers at the bottom of the list
appear behind the ones above them.
NOTE You must use a different process (page 453) to insert an image whose format
is not available in Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for an image
whose file does not specify it.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map
You can add 3D raster-based surfaces to your map. For example, add DEM
(Digital Elevation Model), ESRI Grid, or Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED)
surfaces.
After you add raster-based surfaces to your map, you can create contour maps
to help you analyze 3D terrain. You can use raster-based theming to analyze
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map | 441
elevation, slope, and aspect, and drape map data over surfaces. You can view
the data in 3D with walkthrough and flythrough options.
See also:
■Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 1186)
■Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445)
To add a raster-based surface to your map
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Specify the folder that contains your surface. Click the folder icon to
browse to the folder.
5Click Connect.
6Hold your cursor over the name of the surface file to see a pop-up window
that displays its coordinate system, for example, UTM27-10.
When you add data to your map, you must specify its original coordinate
system. AutoCAD Map 3D automatically converts the data from that
coordinate system to the one specified for your map.
7Click Edit Coordinate Systems and, in the Edit Spatial Contexts (page 1605)
dialog box, click the entry and click Edit.
Select the entry and click Edit to specify the coordinate system for the surface
442 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
8Select the coordinate system you saw in the pop-up window. Click OK
twice to return to the Data Connect window.
9In the Add Data To Map area, select the surfaces to include.
If this source contains only a single surface, that surface is selected
automatically. If it contains multiple surfaces, you can right-click any of
them and select Select All or Select None.
10 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
layer.
11 Click Add To Map.
The surface is added to your map.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Adding 2D Rasters
You can add a two-dimensional image to your map. For example, add an aerial
photograph, an artist’s sketch, or your company logo.
Use the steps on the Procedure tab to add images in these formats:
■JPEG and JPEG2K (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
■PNG (Portable Network Graphic)
■MrSID (Multi-Resolution Seamless Image Database)
■TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)
Adding 2D Rasters | 443
■ECW (Enhanced Compressed Wavelet)
You can also add surface-based rasters (page 441)such as DEM and ESRI Grid
files.
NOTE You must use a different process (page 453) to insert an image whose format
is not available in Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for an image
whose file does not specify it.
See also:
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map (page 441)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445)
To add 2D rasters to your map
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Click the folder icon to browse to the folder containing multiple images,
or click the image icon to specify a single image.
5Click Connect.
6In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
If this source contains only a single image, that image is selected
automatically. If it contains multiple images, you can right-click any of
them and select Select All or Select None.
7For each image you select, make sure the Coordinate System and Vertical
Units entries are correct.
■Hold your cursor over an image name to see its native coordinate
system. The Coordinate System entry should match this.
■Scroll the table if necessary to see all the columns.
444 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■To change the coordinate system, click Edit Coordinate Systems and
choose the appropriate coordinate system.
■To change the vertical units, click the current entry to display a down
arrow that lets you choose a different one.
8To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
layer.
9Click Add To Map.
10 If prompted, specify the location, scale, and rotation (page 451) for each
image.
Some image files contain placement information and are placed
automatically in your map. For images that do not contain placement
information, you are prompted for the location, scale, and insertion
point.
The image is added to your map.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service)
You can incorporate web-based raster image data (such as satellite photographs)
that have been published to a public web server using the WMS (Web Map
Service) open standard developed by the Open GIS Consortium (OGC).
AutoCAD Map 3D supports WMS versions 1.1.0, 1.1.1, and 1.3.
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) | 445
Data from WMS web services can be used to provide background layers for
your map. With WMS data, you take the data as it is; you cannot reproject it.
The number of Web Map Services (WMS) that implement OpenGIS interfaces
on the Internet is increasing all the time, as more organizations adopt the
open standards.
Once you have located some WMS data, determine the URL of the page that
serves the published layers. Often, this is not a standard web page that you
can open in a browser, but a page that has been programmed using a scripting
language such as CGI, PHP, or ASP. A typical web server address looks like
this:
http://wms.jpl.nasa.gov/wms.cgi
Paste the address into the Data Connect window in AutoCAD Map 3D.
NOTE Websites that host web services appear and disappear or are under
construction. Not all sites that you find will work perfectly (or at all).
You can also bring in web-based feature data (page 346).
Example WMS Image Sources
DescriptionWMS Image Source
Weather datahttp://maps.customweather.com/image
Global SRTM and DTED datahttp://wms.jpl.nasa.gov/wms.cgi?
All types of data for the globe - soils, tem-
perature, land cover, boundaries, etc.
http://globe.digitalearth.gov/viz-
bin/wmt.cgi
USGS orthographic and topographic mapshttp://terraservice.net/ogccapabilities.ashx
Source of different types of data layers,
such as boundaries, terrains, physiography,
utilities, SRTM, etc.
http://demo.cubewerx.com/demo/cube-
serv/cubeserv.cgi?
Various orthographic images for USA cities,
for example, San Francisco, Reno, and
Chattanooga.
http://edcw2ks51.cr.usgs.gov/ser-
vlet/com.esri.wms.Es-
rimap?WMTVER=1.1.0&Service-
Name=133urban&
Various Canadian features - provincial
boundaries, lakes, railroads, and more.
http://www2.dmsolutions.ca/cgi-
bin/mswms_gmap
446 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
DescriptionWMS Image Source
Geospatial data from NGA (U.S.), Inteva-
tion (Germany) and OGC (U.S.)
http://demo.deegree.org:8080/dee-
gree/wms?
Geoscience Australia national geoscience
datasets
http://www.ga.gov.au/bin/getmap.pl?data-
set=national&amp;
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to bring in data from a
web server using WMS
Procedure
■To add a WMS-based image to your
map (page 447)
GIS Skill
■Access data published on a public web
server
Related topics
■Creating and Viewing Metadata (page
1486)
■Bringing In Features from WFS (page
346)
■Styling Features (page 639)
To add a WMS-based image to your map
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add WMS Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Specify the URL for the WMS server. Click the down arrow to choose
from a list of recently-used URLs.
5Specify the WMS version of the data you want.
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) | 447
The Open GIS Consortium updates the WMS format periodically, so there
are multiple versions. AutoCAD Map 3D requests the highest version
(currently 1.3.0) by default. If you do not change this setting, the server
will provide the highest version it supports. Some servers support multiple
WMS versions, each corresponding to a different set of capabilities and
resulting layers. If you must use a specific version of the image, select it
from the list. The server may or may not support the version you request.
6Click Connect.
7If necessary, enter your user name and password.
8In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
If this source contains only a single image, that image is selected
automatically. If it contains multiple images, you can right-click any of
them and select Select All or Select None.
9For each image you select, do the following:
■Click the Image Format entry to the right of the image name to choose
the format for the image you add to your map.
The available format types include PNG, TIF, JPG, and BMP.
■Click the Server CS Code entry for the image and choose from the
available coordinate systems for the server (the EPSG codes).
A WMS layer can support multiple coordinate systems. AutoCAD Map
3D may not recognize all the EPSG codes the WMS server provides.
If this occurs, you can choose the EPSG code that best serves your
purposes.
WMS layers inherit supported EPSG values from their parent objects,
so a child layer (one indented below a parent layer in the list) may
have both its own EPSG setting and the setting of its parent.
■Click the Layer CS Code entry to choose the coordinate system for
the layer.
Unless you know the coordinate system of the source image, do not
change the default. AutoCAD Map 3D will automatically convert the
image to the coordinate system for your map when it adds the image.
■Click the Style entry to choose one of the available styles.
■Click the Background entry to specify a transparent background for
the layer or choose a background color from the list.
10 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
448 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
layer; for example, you can combine images of each county to create a
state map.
If you combine the images, you must specify a single Image Format, Server
CS Code, and Background for the resulting layer.
When you select Combine Into One Layer, an Order entry appears next
to each selected layer. Click the entry to change the order of the selected
images within the combined layer.
11 Click Add To Map.
The image is added to your map.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Making an Image Transparent
When you add a raster image to a map using Data Connect, it appears in a
Display Manager layer. You can edit the properties of this layer to add an
“opacity” property, and then set that opacity property to a value below 1 to
change the transparency of the layer.
To do this, you must save the layer to a file and edit the file in a text editor,
such as Notepad.
NOTE The transparency will not appear in printed versions of the map.
See also:
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map (page 441)
Making an Image Transparent | 449
■Adding 2D Rasters (page 443)
■Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445)
To make a raster image transparent
1Add the raster (page 437) to AutoCAD Map 3D.
You can use any type of raster, including a WMS image. The image does
not need to be transparent or have an opacity setting already.
2Right-click the layer containing the image and choose Save Layer.
Save the layer to a .layer file.
3Open the resulting .layer file in a text editor, such as Notepad, and find
the <FeatureName> entry.
4Just under the <FeatureName> entry, add the opacity setting, using the
following syntax:
<Opacity>0.6</Opacity>
An opacity setting of 1 makes the layer completely opaque. A setting of
.1 makes it virtually transparent.
5Save the .layer file.
6In AutoCAD Map 3D, switch the Task Pane to Display Manager (page 2060)
and remove the original raster layer.
7Add any other entities to your map that will appear on layers beneath
the translucent image, and theme or style those layers.
8Click Data ➤ Load Layer and select the .layer file you edited.
The translucent raster image overlays the opaque layers, and they appear
beneath it.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
450 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
Specifying Image Insertion Point
If an image does not contain location information, you can specify its insertion
point and rotation so the image is inserted correctly in relation to other data.
You can also adjust the scale so it matches the scale of the other data.
AutoCAD Map 3D saves the insertion-point setting with the drawing. The
changes are not saved back to the image file or to the correlation source file.
To modify the settings stored in the image file, use an image-editing application
such as Autodesk Raster Design. If you modify the original settings in the
image, reinsert the image to see the changes in your map.
See also:
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■To specify an image insertion point (page 451)
■To insert the image manually (page 452)
■To enter the coordinates for the image insertion point (page 452)
To specify an image insertion point
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Source File Or Folder, click the folder icon and browse to the folder
than contains your image. Click Connect.
5Select the image to insert and click Add To Map.
Specifying Image Insertion Point | 451
6In the Image Insertion dialog box specify where to insert the image. You
can enter X,Y coordinates for the image, or manually specify the insertion
point in the drawing. Each option is described below.
To insert the image manually
1In the Image Insertion dialog box, on the Insertion tab, click Pick.
2Pick the base point for the frame.
You can also type coordinates at the command prompt.
3Type a rotation angle or pick a point to define the rotation angle.
Rotation is in degrees or in the units set by the AUNITS variable. The
image is rotated around the insertion point.
4Pick the second corner point to define the size of the frame.
The Image Insertion dialog box displays the new coordinates, rotation,
and scale.
5Click OK to insert the image into the specified frame.
To enter the coordinates for the image insertion point
1Specify the insertion point for the lower-left corner of the image frame.
The insertion point values on the Source tab use the unit specified at the
bottom of the Source tab. The insertion point values on the Insertion tab
are translated to the current AutoCAD Map 3D drawing unit.
2Specify the rotation.
Use current drawing angle units. This value uses the lower-left corner as
the base point.
3Specify the scale.
If the image you insert contains correlation information, the image is
inserted at the scale specified by that information. Otherwise, the image
is inserted at a scale factor of 1 image unit of measurement to 1 AutoCAD
Map 3D unit of measurement.
A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the image, while a scale factor less
than 1 makes the image smaller. For example, to make the image twice
as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
You can change the scale to align the image with the vector geometry in
the drawing. For example, if your raster image has a scale of 1 inch equals
452 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
50 feet or 1:600, and your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a scale of 1
unit equals 1 inch, enter 600 as the scale.
4Specify the units for insertion point and density.
For bitmaps, the density unit used in the image may be in dots per inch.
For satellite photos, the density may be in miles. This unit is also used
for the insertion point.
For example, if your image was scanned at 300 dpi, then select Inches as
the unit.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Using Other Raster Image Formats
Use this feature to connect to raster image formats that are not supported by
Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for images that do not
contain this information within their files. Images attached using the following
methods support a limited set of styles.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 453
NOTE To use this technique to insert some raster image formats, such as ECW
and SID, you must first download the free Raster Object Enabler from autodesk.com.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect (page 437). This gives you more control over styling and
other options.
■To insert raster images (page 455)
■To manage raster images (page 473)
■To manage the appearance of raster images (page 482)
■To modify raster images (page 490)
Inserting Raster Images
Use the Raster Extension features to insert and correlate raster images with
formats that are not supported by Data Connect, or to specify correlation
information for images that do not contain this information within their files.
To use this technique to insert some raster image formats, such as ECW and
SID, you must first download the free Raster Object Enabler from autodesk.com.
■Overview of Inserting Raster Images Outside Data Connect (page 455)
■Inserting a Raster Image (page 459)
■Correlating a Raster Image During Insertion (page 462)
■Manually Adjusting the Image Frame During Insertion (page 465)
■Setting Image Density (page 467)
■Adding an Image in a Drawing to a Display Manager Layer (page 470)
■Inserting an Image from the Command Line (page 470)
NOTE If you are inserting large images or multiple images at once, you can set
Raster Extension memory options.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect (page 437). This gives you more control over styling and
other options.
See also:
■Configuring Memory Use (page 258)
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
454 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To insert raster images
■To insert a raster image (overview) (page 459)
■To insert a raster image (page 460)
■To correlate an image during insertion (page 464)
■To adjust the image frame manually during insertion (page 465)
■To change the density unit when inserting an image (page 469)
■To set the default density value and density unit (page 469)
■To add an image to a new Display Manager layer (page 470)
■To insert an image from the Command prompt (page 471)
Overview of Inserting Raster Images Outside Data Connect
You can connect to many raster image files using Data Connect. Use the Raster
Extension features to insert and correlate raster images with formats that are
not supported by Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for
images that do not contain this information within their files.
Some image-editing applications, such as Autodesk® Raster Design, store
information about image location in an associated correlation source file.
When you insert a raster image using the Insert An Image command (Click
Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Insert An Image. ), AutoCAD Map 3D reads
coordinate correlation information and places the image in the precise
coordinate location in the drawing.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 455
Inserting a raster image into a city map. Move your
cursor over the image to see the results.
After you insert the image, you can change the image display order (page 475)
to have the features and drawing objects display on top of the image.
When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D links the image to the drawing
file through a path name or a data-management document ID. When you
update a linked image, the updates appear in the drawing. Because the image
itself is not included in the drawing, the image does not increase drawing size.
Once you have inserted an image, you can reinsert it multiple times treating
it as if it were a block. Each insertion has its own clip boundary and its own
settings for brightness, contrast, fade, and transparency. A single image can
be cut into multiple pieces that can be rearranged in your drawing.
NOTE If you are inserting large images or multiple images at once, you can set
Raster Extension memory options. See Configuring Memory Use (page 258).
456 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Supported Image Formats
AutoCAD Map 3D supports the most common image file formats used in
computer graphics, document management, mapping, and geographic
information systems (GIS). Images can be bitonal, 8-bit gray (grayscale), 8-bit
color (indexed color), or 24-bit color (true color).
Several image file formats support images with transparent pixels. When image
transparency is on, AutoCAD Map 3D recognizes those transparent pixels and
allows graphics on the AutoCAD Map 3D screen to show through those pixels.
(In bitonal images, background pixels can be treated as transparent.)
Transparent images can be grayscale or color.
In addition, you can select the transparent color for grayscale or color images,
and you can set the opacity for raster images.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports the following raster file formats. Some formats,
such as SID and ECW, are supported as OLE objects and not as image files.
AutoCAD Map 3D determines the file format from the file contents, not from
the file extension.
File extensionDescription and versionType
.bmp, .rle, .dibWindows and OS/2 bitmap formatBMP
.rst, .gp4, .mil, .cal, .cg4Computer Aided Acquisition and Logist-
ics Support
CALS-I
.doqDigital orthophoto quadrangle raster
image format (used for aerial photos
that are processed to remove distortion)
DOQ
.ecwEnhanced Compressed Wavelet (a
highly compressed multiresolution im-
age format from ER Mapper
ECW
.flc, .fliAutodesk digital animation formatFLIC
.bilSPOT Image Corporation format with
georeferencing information
GeoSPOT
.tifTIFF with georeferencing informationGeoTIFF
Graphics Interchange Format (a raster
image format from CompuServe)
GIF
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 457
File extensionDescription and versionType
.ig4Image Systems Group 4IG4
.igsImage Systems Gray ScaleIGS
8- or 16-bit satellite imageryIKONOS
.jpgJPEG File Interchange FormatJFIF
.jpgJoint Photographics Expert GroupJPEG and JPEG
2000
Multispectral image format used by the
Landsat 7 satellite
LANDSAT FAST
L7A
National Imaging Transmission Format
(a multiframe image format commonly
used by US federal agencies and NATO)
NITF
.pcxPC Paintbrush ExchangePCX
.pctMacintosh PICT1, PICT2PICT
.pngPortable Network GraphicsPNG
Multispectral image format from Digit-
alGlobe’s Quickbird Satellite
Quickbird TIFF
.rlcRun Length Encoding format (version
1 has no header; version 2 has IST
headers)
RLC 1 and 2
.sidMulti-Resolution Seamless Image Data-
base (a highly compressed LizardTech
format)
SID (MrSID)
.tgaTrueVision image file formatTARGA
.tifTagged Image File FormatTIFF
NOTE You can also use Data Connect (page 437)to add JPEG, PNG, MrSID, and
TIFF images.
458 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
To insert a raster image (overview)
1To insert an ECW or SID file, you must first download the free Raster
Object Enabler from autodesk.com.
2Locate the image (page 460) to insert.
3Specify correlation settings (page 464) for the image.
4Specify image density (page 469).
5Add the image to a Display Manager layer (page 470).
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Inserting a Raster Image
When you insert an image into a drawing using the Insert An Image command,
you can preview the image, modify the image frame (also referred to as a
boundary, a frame is a vector object that encloses the image) and image density,
and correlate the image (page 462) with existing vector information or with a
previously correlated image. You can use correlation settings from an external
file, or you can enter the settings manually. You can also modify the correlation
settings after you insert the image (page 501).
After you insert several images, use REGEN to display the correct draw order
of the images. See Changing Image Draw Order (page 475).
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect (page 437). This gives you more control over styling and
other options.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 459
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to insert an image using
a guide.
■Show me how to transform an image.
Procedure
■To add raster images that use formats
unsupported by Data Connect (page
459)
GIS Skill
■Transform an image so that it is correctly
aligned
Related topics
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Sur-
faces (page 437)
■Specifying Image Insertion Point (page
451)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats
(page 453)
To insert a raster image
1To insert an ECW or SID file, you must first download the free Raster
Object Enabler from autodesk.com.
2Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Insert An Image.
3In the Insert Image dialog box (page 1878), select the drive and folder that
contains the image(s).
4In the Files Of Type box, select the file format of the image(s) to insert.
NOTE To insert more than one image type at a time, select All Images.
5In the list of images, select the images to insert.
TIP For information about an image, click Information to display the file
size, creation date, and other information, as well as a preview of the image.
460 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
6To view or modify the image correlation data, select Modify Correlation.
7Click Open.
If Modify Correlation is not selected or if you are inserting more than
one image, the Image Correlation dialog box does not appear and the
images are inserted using their default correlation information. AutoCAD
Map 3D searches in this order for correlation information:
■World file
■Resource file (.res extension)
■Tab file (.tab file)
■Image file
■Settings from the Raster Extension Options dialog box
If you selected Modify Correlation, the Image Correlation dialog box
displays. The image frame, which indicates where the image will be
inserted, is displayed in your drawing.
TIP If you cannot see the image frame, use the ZOOM or PAN commands
to bring it into view while leaving the Image Correlation dialog box open.
8Do one of the following:
■To insert the image using the current settings, click OK.
■To use a different correlation source (page 464), select the correlation
source from the Correlation Source list.
■To change the insertion point, rotation, or scale, type the appropriate
values. For more information, see To correlate an image during
insertion (page 464).
■To resize or orient the image to existing vectors or images, click the
image frame while the Image Correlation dialog box is open.
■To define the insertion point, rotation, and scale onscreen, select the
Insertion tab. Click Pick. For more information, see To adjust the
image frame manually during insertion (page 465).
■To specify the density units for the image, select the Source tab. Select
Units (page 469).
9Click OK.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 461
The image is inserted on the current AutoCAD layer and its correlation data
is saved in the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing, the image
is displayed automatically using these settings.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Correlating a Raster Image During Insertion
When you insert an image using the Insert An Image command, you can
correlate the image with your existing vectors or a previously correlated image.
You can change the insertion point and rotation of the image so that it is
inserted correctly in relation to other data. You can also adjust the scale so
that it matches the scale of the other data.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect (page 440). This gives you more control over styling and
other options.
You can set the following options when inserting an image:
■Correlation source
■Insertion point (georeferencing correlation information)
■Rotation
■Scale
■Density
■Units for insertion point and density
■Color
462 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
If you modify the correlation settings, AutoCAD Map 3D saves the changes
with the drawing. The changes are not saved back to the image file or to the
correlation source file.
NOTE To modify the settings stored in the image file, use an image-editing
application such as . If you modify the original settings in the image, you must
reinsert the image to see the changes.
Correlation Settings
■Correlation Source — Displays available correlation sources. (See the
Correlation Sources section, following.) If a source is not listed, it may not
be in the same directory as the image file or, if it is a resource (.res) file, it
may not be on the specified resource file path.
NOTE To specify the path for resource (.res) files, at the Command prompt,
enter mapioptions. Select the Paths tab.
■Insertion Point — The insertion point is the lower left corner of the image
before any rotation is applied.
The insertion point values on the Source tab of the Image Insertion dialog
box use the unit specified at the bottom of the Source tab. The insertion
point values on the Insertion tab are translated to the current AutoCAD
Map 3D drawing unit.
You can edit the settings or select an insertion point in the drawing by
clicking Pick on the Insertion tab and then picking a location in the
drawing.
■Rotation — Rotation is in degrees or in the units set by the AUNITS variable.
The image is rotated around the insertion point.
■Scale — If the image you insert contains correlation information, the image
is inserted at the scale specified by that information. Otherwise, the image
is inserted at a scale factor of 1 image unit of measurement to 1 AutoCAD
Map 3D unit of measurement. You can change the scale to align the image
with the vector geometry in the drawing. For example, if your raster image
has a scale of 1 inch equals 50 feet or 1:600, and your AutoCAD Map 3D
drawing has a scale of 1 unit equals 1 inch, enter 600 as the scale on the
Insertion tab.
■Density — For bitmaps, the density unit used in the image may be in dots
per inch. For satellite photos, the density may be in miles. This unit is also
used for the insertion point.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 463
To see how your correlation settings translate to AutoCAD Map 3D units,
select the Insertion tab. To preview the settings in the drawing, click Apply.
NOTE To modify correlation settings after you insert an image use the Properties
palette.
Correlation Sources
When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D searches for correlation files
for the image and displays them in the Correlation Source list of the Image
Correlation dialog box. You may see the following sources listed.
■World File (Various file extensions)
■Resource File (.res) — You can specify an alternate location for resource
files. See Setting the Resource Files Directory (page 251).
■Tab File (.tab)
■Image File — For certain types of images, correlation data can be saved as
part of the image file. These file types include RLC, IG4, IGS, GeoTags in
GeoTIFF, or HDR File in GeoSPOT.
■Default — The values that you set on the Image Defaults tab of the Raster
Extension Options dialog box.
See also:
■Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image (page 501)
To correlate an image during insertion
1Insert an image (page 460)
2In the Image Correlation dialog box (page 1873), do one or more of the
following:
■Select a correlation source.
■Type new coordinates for the image frame. The insertion point
represents the lower-left corner of the frame.
■Scale the image.
For example, to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
■Rotate the image. The units of the rotation value depend on the setting
of the AUNITS system variable.
464 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE You can click the frame while the Insert An Image dialog box is
open and use the grips to move, scale, or rotate the frame.
3Click Apply to see your changes.
4Click OK to insert the image.
AutoCAD Map 3D inserts the image on the current layer and saves its
correlation data in the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing, the
image displays using these settings.
TIP If your image is not visible, zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map Setup
tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Manually Adjusting the Image Frame During Insertion
If you do not know the exact coordinates for the image, you can specify the
insertion point, rotation angle, and scale of the image by adjusting the frame
at the time of insertion. As you draw the frame onscreen, the program
maintains the aspect ratio of the image that you are inserting.
See also:
■Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image (page 501)
To adjust the image frame manually during insertion
1Insert an image (page 460).
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 465
2In the Image Correlation dialog box (page 1873), on the Insertion tab, click
Pick.
An outline of the frame appears onscreen. This outline reflects the aspect
ratio of the image that you are inserting.
3Pick the base point for the frame.
You can also type coordinates at the Command prompt, or, if there is
already correlation data for the image, press Enter to accept the existing
coordinates.
4Type a rotation angle or pick a point to define the rotation angle.
5Pick the second corner point to define the size of the frame.
TIP You can use UNDO to undo a point.
The Image Correlation dialog box is redisplayed with the new coordinates,
rotation, and scale.
6Click OK to insert the image into the specified frame.
AutoCAD Map 3D inserts the image on the current layer and saves its
correlation data in the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing,
the image displays using these settings.
TIP You can select the frame and use the grips or standard AutoCAD Map 3D
commands to size, move, or rotate the image while the Image Correlation dialog
box is open.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
466 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Setting Image Density
For some images, the density value and units are already stored in the image
file or correlation source. When you use the Insert An Image command to add
an image that does not have correlation information, AutoCAD Map 3D uses
the settings from the Image Defaults tab in the Raster Extension Options dialog
box.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect (page 440). This gives you more control over styling and
other options.
You can change the density unit when you insert an image but not the density
value. You must set the default density value from the Raster Extension Options
dialog box.
■Density — Shows the dots (or pixels) per unit for the image. If this
information was not stored with the image or the correlation source, then
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the default density from the Raster Extension
Options dialog box.
■Units — Select the units for the density from the Units list. For example,
if your image was scanned at 300 dots per inch, then select Inch as the
density unit.
Some image formats, such as GeoTIFF, GeoSPOT, and any image with a World
file for correlation source, have density units that are in real-world coordinates.
For example, a satellite photo can be based on dots-per-mile. In this case,
select Mile as the density unit.
The density unit that you specify can vary depending on what type of image
you are inserting. The following two examples explain the difference between
inserting an image that was scanned using dots per inch, and an aerial
photo/satellite photo that was saved in real-world units.
Setting Density Units for an Image That Is Not Georeferenced
The following example shows the relationship between paper scale, density
units, and insertion scale for an image that is not georeferenced (an image
that was not saved with real-world unit data). Any image that is drawn using
a scale (such as a floor plan) and captured with a scanner will likely fall into
this category.
The image in the following example was drawn at a paper scale of 1" = 48",
scanned at 300 dots per inch, then inserted into a drawing using 300 as the
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 467
density value and Inches as the density unit. Then it was scaled based on its
paper scale of 1" = 48".
The density units that you select when you insert an image that is not
georeferenced should match the units at which the image was scanned. In
this case, the units are inches because the image was scanned in dots per inch.
NOTE Remember that the scale must be based on the same units. For example,
if the scale in the original floor plan is 1" = 4', you must convert both sides to the
same unit. In this case, convert the 4 feet to inches, which is why you use 1" = 48"
as the scale factor.
Setting Density Units for an Image That Is Georeferenced
The following example shows the relationship between density units and a
georeferenced image. Because there is no paper scale to consider, you can
insert the image using the units that the image represents, such as feet or
miles, and you do not have to scale the image when you insert it.
Georeferenced images include GeoSPOT and GeoTIFF file types, and images
that use World files as their correlation source.
468 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To change the density unit when inserting an image
1Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Insert An Image.
2In the Insert Image dialog box (page 1878), select the image(s) to insert.
3Select Modify Correlation.
4Click Open.
5Select the Source tab. Select the units.
To set the default density value and density unit
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the Import dialog box (page 1711), select the Image Defaults tab.
3In the Density box, type a default density for images. This should be the
scanned resolution (page 2072). For example, if the majority of your images
were scanned at 300 dots per inch, type 300.
4In the Units box, select the default unit for the insertion point and density
of images. For example, if the majority of your images were scanned at
300 dots per inch, then select Inch.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 469
Adding an Image in a Drawing to a Display Manager Layer
You can move an image you inserted directly into the current drawing with
the Insert An Image command to a new Display Manager (page 2060) layer. This
allows you to position it relative to other Display Manager layers.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To add an image to a new Display Manager layer
1Insert the image using the Insert An Image command. Click Home
tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Insert An Image.
2In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Raster Image.
3In the Select Image dialog box, select the image.
4To group the image layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the image layers in a group, you can turn the display of
the group on or off.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Inserting an Image from the Command Line
You can insert an image at the Command prompt by setting the FILEDIA
variable to <0>. This feature is useful if you already have correlation data stored
470 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
with your images or to use an AutoLISP routine to insert images into your
drawing.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect (page 440). This gives you more control over styling and
other options.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses correlation data if available, searching for a correlation
source in the following order:
■world file
■resource file
■tab file
■image file
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the correlation information from the first source that
it locates. If it cannot find a correlation file, then the image is inserted using
the default insertion point information that you defined in the Raster
Extension Options dialog box. You can specify a default location for resource
files, and you can specify that AutoCAD Map 3D search for correlation
information in the resource directory before checking the image directory. If
the correlation source does not include information on scale or density,
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the scale and density specified on the Image Defaults
tab of the Raster Extension Options dialog box.
See also:
■Setting the Resource Files Directory (page 251)
■Setting Correlation Defaults (page 257)
To insert an image from the Command prompt
1Set the FILEDIA system variable to 0.
Consult the AutoCAD Command Reference if you need more information.
2At the Command prompt, enter mapiinsert.
3Do one of the following:
■Type the name of the image to insert including its file extension.
If you do not specify a path to the image, then AutoCAD Map 3D
searches for the image using the Project Files Search Path set in the
Files tab of the AutoCAD Options dialog box.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 471
■Type the path to the image, the image name, and the file extension,
for example: c:\Projects\Images\contour.rlc
AutoCAD Map 3D searches for the image on the path that you specify.
If it cannot locate the image on this path, then it searches for the
image using the Project Files Search Path.
NOTE When FILEDIA is set to <0>, you can display the Insert Image dialog box
by typing a tilde (~) in response to a command prompt.
When AutoCAD Map 3D locates the image, it inserts it into your drawing. If
there is correlation data stored with the image, then AutoCAD Map 3D inserts
the image using this data.
TIP If you cannot see the image after you insert it, zoom to the extents of the
drawing or use the Image Management dialog box to zoom to the image (page
481).
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
472 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Managing Raster Images
You can view and modify information about images you inserted using the
Insert An Image command.
To manage raster images
■To display the Image Management dialog box (page 474)
■To display the Image Information dialog box (page 475)
■To display the Properties palette (page 475)
■To change the draw order of images (page 477)
■To change the draw order of images and objects (page 477)
■To change an image name (page 479)
■To create a search path (page 480)
■To zoom to an image (page 481)
Overview of Managing Raster Images
When you insert an image into a drawing using the Insert An Image command,
only information about the image is stored in the drawing, along with a
pointer to the actual image.
You can view and modify this stored information.
Use this method...To do this...
Display the Image Management or Image
Information dialog box, or the Properties
palette.
See Viewing Image Information (page 474).
View information about images in maps.
Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image
Management.
See Changing Image Draw Order (page
475).
Change the draw order of raster images
and vector objects you inserted using the
Insert An Image command.
Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image
Management.
See Changing an Image Name (page 478).
Change the name of an image you inserted
using the Insert An Image command.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 473
Use this method...To do this...
Click ➤ Options. On the Files tab,
select Project Files Search Path. Click Add.
See Creating a Search Path for Raster Im-
ages (page 479).
Specify the location of an image you inser-
ted using the Insert An Image command,
if it has been moved or deleted.
Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image
Management.
See Zooming to an Image (page 481).
Zoom to images you inserted using the
Insert An Image command.
Viewing Image Information
You can view information about images in maps in the following ways:
■The Image Management dialog box displays information about the number
of instances of an image in the map, the draw order of images, and other
image information.
■The Image Information dialog box displays information about the file, the
image, properties, and correlation information.
■The Properties palette provides access to image properties.
NOTE These options work for all images, no matter how they were added to your
map.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To display the Image Management dialog box
■Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management.
You can click Layout to modify the columns in the Image Management dialog
box. You can hide or display topic columns, or change the order of topic
columns.
474 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To display the Image Information dialog box
1Click the frame of the image to select it.
NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frame, press Shift +
left-click (page 493) to select the image.
2Right-click the image ➤ Image ➤ Information.
To display the Properties palette
1In the drawing, select the image to modify.
2Right-click the image. Click Properties.
Quick Reference
MAPIINFO
Displays file, image, object property, and correlation information about
selected images
View menu ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Information
Menu
MAPIINFOCommand Line
Image Information dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMANAGE
Allows you to view a list of images in the current drawing, change drawing
order, erase or zoom to selected images
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
Menu
MAPIMANAGECommand Line
Image Management dialog boxDialog Box
Changing Image Draw Order
When you insert raster images, the images draw in the order in which you
insert them. You can change the draw order of:
■Raster images.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 475
■Raster images and vector objects.
You can change the draw order of images and vector objects. By sending an image to
the back, the vector objects display on top of the image. Move your cursor over the
image to see the results.
NOTE If you change the draw order and then undo the change, images may not
appear in the correct draw order. Use the REGEN command to display the correct
draw order of the images.
The following conditions affect the image draw order:
■Image insertion order
AutoCAD Map 3D uses image insertion order first. For example, if you
insert images A, B, C in that order, and then reorder them so that they are
arranged as B, C, A, use REGEN when you open that drawing again to
restore the order to B, C, A.
476 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
AutoCAD Map 3D always uses this optimization feature and applies it to
the draw order of all objects, not just to images.
■Image selection
You can set an option to draw hatch marks over a selected image. Click
➤ Options. Select the Display tab. Under Display Performance, set
Highlight Raster Image Frame Only to off.
If Highlight Raster Image Frame Only is off, when you select an image, it
rises to the top of the display order, obscuring any vectors that cross it.
Use the REGEN command to restore the proper display order.
NOTE For images you added with Data Connect (page 2059), use Display Manager
(page 2060) to change the draw order. See Organizing Layers in Your Map (page
300).
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
NOTE For images you added with Data Connect (page 2059), use Display Manager
(page 2060) to change the draw order. See Organizing Layers in Your Map (page
300).
To change the draw order of images
1Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management.
2In the Image Management dialog box (page 1875), select an image name
and drag it up or down in the Image column.
The current draw order is indicated in the Image column. The top image
in the list is drawn on top of all the other images and is the last drawn.
The last image in the list is drawn beneath any images that may overlap
it.
To change the draw order of images and objects
1Select the image.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 477
2Do one of the following:
■Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Bring To Front drop-down ➤ Bring
To Front
■Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Bring To Front drop-down ➤ Send
To Back
If necessary, use REGEN.
NOTE Changes made using Draw Order are reflected in the Image Management
dialog box.
Quick Reference
REGEN
Regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current viewport
View menu ➤ Regen
Menu
REGENCommand Line
MAPIMANAGE
Allows you to view a list of images in the current drawing, change drawing
order, erase or zoom to selected images
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
Menu
MAPIMANAGECommand Line
Image Management dialog boxDialog Box
Changing an Image Name
Image names are not necessarily the same as image file names. When you
attach an image to a drawing using the Insert An Image command, AutoCAD
Map 3D uses the file name without the file extension as the image name. You
can change the image name without affecting the name of the file.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
478 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To change an image name
1Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management.
2In the Image Manager dialog box, select the image name.
3Click the image name again to edit it.
4Enter the new name.
5Click OK.
TIP You can also change the image name by pressing F2 while in the Image
Manager dialog box and editing the name.
Quick Reference
IMAGE
Manages images
Setup menu ➤ Image Management
Menu
Manage Images
Icon
IMAGECommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
Task Pane
Creating a Search Path for Raster Images
When you insert an image with the Insert An Image command, AutoCAD
Map 3D stores the location of the image in the drawing file. When you open
a drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D searches this stored location for the file. If the
image has been moved or deleted, AutoCAD Map 3D searches the Project Files
Search Path.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 479
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To create a search path
1Click ➤ Options.
2On the Files tab, select Project Files Search Path. Click Add.
A folder named Projectx (where x indicates the next available number)
appears under Project Files Search Path.
3Enter a name for the project.
The project name cannot contain leading spaces or terminating spaces.
4Click Apply.
5With the project name selected, click Set Current.
6Click Add.
A path entry is created under the project name.
7Enter the search path or click Browse to select a directory.
8Click OK.
For more information about using project files and alternate search paths,
refer to PROJECTNAME in the online AutoCAD Command Reference.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
480 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
Zooming to an Image
You can zoom to images you inserted with the Insert An Image command.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To zoom to an image
1Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management.
2In the Image Management dialog box (page 1875), select an image.
3Right-click the image. Click Zoom To.
Quick Reference
MAPIMANAGE
Allows you to view a list of images in the current drawing, change drawing
order, erase or zoom to selected images
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
Menu
MAPIMANAGECommand Line
Image Management dialog boxDialog Box
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 481
Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images
You can increase redrawing speed by hiding or unloading images you inserted
using the Insert An Image command that you do not need in the current
drawing session.
■Overview of Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images (page 482)
■Hiding an Image (page 485)
■Unloading an Image (page 486)
■Erasing an Image (page 487)
■Detaching an Image (page 488)
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To manage the appearance of raster images
■To hide an image (page 485)
■To unload an image (page 486)
■To erase an image (page 487)
■To detach an image (page 489)
Overview of Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images
When you insert an image using the Insert An Image command, AutoCAD
Map 3D stores information about the image in the drawing, loads the image
into memory, displays it onscreen, and locks the image file on the disk.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
You can increase redrawing speed by hiding or unloading images you do not
need in the current drawing session. Hidden images are not displayed or
plotted; only their drawing boundaries are displayed. You can choose to hide
an image regardless of the current viewport coordinate system. If you no longer
need the image in the drawing, you can erase a single instance of the image
or you can detach the image to erase all instances of the image and the image
information.
Aside from locking the image file, none of these actions modify the original
image file itself.
482 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
Use this method...To do this...
Select and right-click the image frame ➤
Image ➤ Show Image.
See Hiding an Image (page 485).
Hide an image you added using the Insert
An Image command.
At the command prompt, enter extern-
alreferences. Right-click the image and click
Unload.
See Unloading an Image (page 486).
Remove an image you added using the
Insert An Image command from memory
(unload it).
Select the image. Click Home
tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Erase.
See Erasing an Image (page 487).
Erase an image you added using the Insert
An Image command from the map.
Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image
Management. Click the image and
click Detach.
See Detaching an Image (page 488).
Remove all instances of an image you ad-
ded using the Insert An Image command
from the map (detach it).
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
MAPISHOWIMAGE
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 483
Hides or displays a raster image
Right-click a selected image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show
Image
Menu
MAPISHOWIMAGECommand Line
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing
Modify menu ➤ Erase
Menu
Erase
Icon
ERASECommand Line
Select objects to erase. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Erase
Task Pane
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
IMAGE
Manages images
Setup menu ➤ Image Management
Menu
Manage Images
Icon
IMAGECommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
Task Pane
484 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Hiding an Image
When you hide an image, the image does not display onscreen, nor does it
plot. Only the image boundary displays onscreen. However, the image is still
loaded in memory, and the image file is still locked on the disk. It cannot be
deleted or modified. Hiding images is a convenient way to speed regeneration
time. You can redisplay the image when you are ready to plot.
This command is not available if you have selected more than one image. To
show or hide multiple images, use the Properties palette.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
NOTE You can also control the display of images by using the LAYER command.
When you insert an image, it is inserted on the current layer, but you can move
it to another layer. You can then use the LAYER command to control the layer
visibility.
The images are also affected by other layer attributes such as whether a layer
is locked or frozen. If you are working with several images and you do not
want to modify certain images, then move those images to a separate layer
and lock the layer.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To hide an image
1Select the image frame.
2Right-click the image ➤ Image ➤ Show Image.
To show a hidden image, follow the same steps.
NOTE You can also modify this setting on the Properties palette.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 485
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
MAPISHOWIMAGE
Hides or displays a raster image
Right-click a selected image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show
Image
Menu
MAPISHOWIMAGECommand Line
Unloading an Image
To conserve memory and enhance performance, unload images that you do
not need to view and/or plot.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
When you unload an image, you remove the image from memory. It does not
display onscreen, nor does it plot, and it is no longer locked on the disk. Only
the image boundary displays onscreen. Information about the image, such as
its path and scale, remains in the drawing. Before you can plot the image, you
must reload it into memory.
See also:
■Changing Image Display Quality and Speed (page 498)
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To unload an image
1At the command prompt, enter externalreferences.
486 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
2In the External References palette, right-click the image.
3Click Unload.
This status is saved with the drawing when you close the drawing.
Quick Reference
IMAGE
Manages images
Setup menu ➤ Image Management
Menu
Manage Images
Icon
IMAGECommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
Task Pane
Erasing an Image
When you erase an image, that instance of the image is erased from the
document. Erasing an image does not delete the image information. You can
set an option so that when the last instance of an image is erased from the
drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D detaches the image, deleting the image
information.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
See also:
■Choosing an Image Detach Method (page 255)
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To erase an image
1Select the image.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 487
2Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Erase.
If you erase all instances of an image within a drawing, you may be
prompted to detach the image (page 489) from the drawing.
Quick Reference
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing
Modify menu ➤ Erase
Menu
Erase
Icon
ERASECommand Line
Select objects to erase. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Erase
Task Pane
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Detaching an Image
When you detach an image, all instances of the image are removed from the
drawing, the image information is deleted, and the image file is unlocked.
Detach images that you no longer need in the drawing.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
See also:
■Choosing an Image Detach Method (page 255)
488 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To detach an image
1Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management.
2In the Image Manager dialog box, select the image name.
3Click Detach.
The image is no longer linked to the drawing file, and all instances of the
image are removed from the drawing.
Quick Reference
IMAGE
Manages images
Setup menu ➤ Image Management
Menu
Manage Images
Icon
IMAGECommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
Task Pane
Modifying Raster Images
You can modify an image with grip modes, adjust an image for contrast, clip
the image with a rectangle or polygon, or use an image as a cutting edge for
a trim.
■Overview of Modifying Raster Images (page 490)
■Selecting an Image (page 493)
■Displaying Image Frames (page 494)
■Changing Image Alignment (page 495)
■Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade (page 496)
■Changing Image Display Quality and Speed (page 498)
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 489
■Making an Image Transparent (page 499)
■Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image (page 501)
■Modifying Other Image Properties (page 503)
■Clipping an Image (page 504)
To modify raster images
■To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click (page 493)
■To turn on the Shift + left-click option (page 494)
■To display image frames (page 495)
■To change image alignment (page 496)
■To adjust brightness, contrast, and fade (page 497)
■To change image display quality (page 498)
■To hide a drawing or show clipped images (page 498)
■To make an image transparent (page 500)
■To change the color that is transparent (page 500)
■To modify the correlation settings for an image (page 502)
■To modify image properties (page 503)
■To clip an image (page 506)
Overview of Modifying Raster Images
You can copy, move, or clip raster images. You can modify an image with grip
modes, adjust an image for contrast, clip the image with a rectangle or polygon,
or use an image as a cutting edge for a trim.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
Image Frames
AutoCAD Map 3D inserts images into frames. A frame is a rectangular vector
object that encloses the image. When you select the frame, you create a
selection set that you can manipulate using any editing command. You can
copy, move, stretch, rotate, and scale images.
Use this method...To do this...
Press Shift while you click the image.
See Selecting an Image (page 493).
Select an image you added with the Insert
An Image command.
490 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Use this method...To do this...
Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Toggle
Frames.
See Displaying Image Frames (page 494).
Display frames for images you added with
the Insert An Image command.
At the Command prompt, enter align.
See Changing Image Alignment (page 495).
Change the alignment and scale of an im-
age you added with the Insert An Image
command.
At the Command prompt, enter imagead-
just.
See Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast,
and Fade (page 496).
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and fade
of an image you added with the Insert An
Image command.
At the Command prompt, enter imagequal-
ity.
See Changing Image Display Quality and
Speed (page 498).
Adjust the image display quality of an im-
age you added with the Insert An Image
command.
Right-click the image. Click Properties. In
the Properties palette, select Transparency.
See Making an Image Transparent (page
499).
For an image you added with the Insert An
Image command, make all pixels of a spe-
cific color in a grayscale or color image
transparent.
Right-click the image. Click Properties. In
the Properties palette, change the position
or rotation of the image.
See Modifying the Correlation Settings for
an Image (page 501).
Specify a precise location for an image you
added with the Insert An Image command
Right-click the image. Click Properties. In
the Properties palette, change the color,
layer, or linetype.
See Modifying Other Image Properties
(page 503).
For an image you added with the Insert An
Image command, modify frame properties.
At the Command prompt, enter imageclip.
See Clipping an Image (page 504).
Display only a portion of an image you
added with the Insert An Image command.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 491
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIFRAME
Makes frames enclosing raster images visible or invisible
View menu ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Toggle Frames
Menu
MAPIFRAMECommand Line
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command)Dialog Box
ALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D
ALIGNCommand Line
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
IMAGECLIP
Creates new clipping boundaries for an image object
Clip Image
Icon
492 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
IMAGECLIPCommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Clip
Task Pane
Selecting an Image
If an image frame is visible, you can select the image by clicking the frame or
by drawing a crossing window around a frame edge. When you select an image
by selecting its frame, grips are displayed.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
You can also select an image by placing your cursor over the image and pressing
Shift + left-click. This feature is useful when you are zoomed in to the image
and you cannot see the image frame or if the image frames are turned off.
After you select an image frame, you can:
■Right-click to display the Raster Extension shortcut menu.
■Select a grip. Right-click to display the AutoCAD Map 3D shortcut menu.
■Manipulate the image using AutoCAD Map 3D commands.
NOTE You can set an option to draw hatch marks over a selected image. Click
➤ Options. Select the Display tab. Under Display Performance, set Highlight
Raster Image Frame Only to off. If Highlight Raster Image Frame Only is off, when
you select an image, it rises to the top of the display order, obscuring any vectors
that cross it. Use the REGEN command to restore the proper display order.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click
1Position your pointer so that it is over the image or images to select.
2Press Shift and click the left mouse button.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 493
If you clicked more than one image, the Image Select dialog box (page
1877) appears. This dialog box displays the names of all the images that are
inserted into your drawing. The image or images that are already selected
are highlighted (not just the images that you selected by pressing Shift
+ left-click).
3Click the images in the list to select. Click OK. To select all the images
in your drawing, click Select All. To clear the selection set, click Select
None.
NOTE If Shift + left-click is not working, you may need to load the Raster Extension
by using an image command such as Insert An Image, or you may need to turn
on the option.
To turn on the Shift + left-click option
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image
panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box, select the General tab.
3Select Shift + Left Click Image Select.
4Click OK to exit the dialog box.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Displaying Image Frames
An image frame is a vector object that encloses each image you insert.
494 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
Hiding an image frame ensures that the image cannot be moved or modified
accidentally by a single- or double-click and prevents the frame from being
plotted or displayed. When image frames are hidden, clipped images are still
displayed to their specified frame limits; only the frame is affected. Showing
and hiding image frames affects all images attached to your drawing.
When you attach an image to a drawing, the image frame inherits the current
color, layer, linetype, and linetype scale.
See also:
■Changing How Image Frames Are Displayed (page 252)
■Modifying Other Image Properties (page 503)
To display image frames
■Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Toggle Frames.
NOTE If frames are invisible or an image is on a locked or frozen layer or a layer
that is turned off, then you cannot select the image by clicking the frame. However,
if frames are hidden but the image is on an editable layer, then you can select the
image using Shift + left-click (page 493).
Quick Reference
MAPIFRAME
Makes frames enclosing raster images visible or invisible
View menu ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Toggle Frames
Menu
MAPIFRAMECommand Line
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command)Dialog Box
Changing Image Alignment
You can change the alignment and scale of an image. You can reference two
points in vector space and two points on a raster image to move, scale, and
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 495
rotate the image to the vector coordinates. This process performs a simple
transformation but does not rubber sheet the image.
See also:
■Moving, Rotating, and Scaling an Object (page 931)
To change image alignment
1At the Command prompt, enter align.
2Select the image and press Enter.
3Specify a first source point on the image and a first destination point in
the drawing.
4Specify a second source point on the image and a second destination
point in the drawing.
5Press Enter.
6To scale the image, type y (Yes) and press Enter.
The image aligns with the drawing according to the reference points you
specified.
Quick Reference
ALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D
ALIGNCommand Line
Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade
When you adjust image brightness, contrast, and fade in AutoCAD Map 3D,
the changes you make affect the display of the image as well as the plotted
output, but do not affect the original raster image file. Adjust brightness to
darken or lighten an image. Adjust contrast to make poor-quality images easier
to read. Adjust fade to make vectors easier to see over images or to create a
watermark effect in your plotted output.
496 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
NOTE Bitonal images cannot be adjusted for brightness, contrast, or fade. Bitonal
images fade to the current screen background when displayed, and fade to white
(the color of most paper) when plotted.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To adjust brightness, contrast, and fade
1At the Command prompt, enter imageadjust.
2Select the image to modify. Press Enter.
3In the Image Adjust dialog box, specify settings:
■To adjust brightness or contrast, use the Brightness or Contrast slider
bar.
■To adjust image fade, use the Fade slider bar.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 497
Changing Image Display Quality and Speed
Changing Image Display Quality
You can change image display quality. Draft-quality images may be grainier,
but they display more quickly than high-quality images. Changing the image
display quality setting affects all images attached to your drawing with the
Insert An Image command.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
Hiding Images
You can hide an image. Hidden images are not displayed or plotted; only the
drawing frame is displayed. You can choose to hide an image regardless of the
current viewport coordinate system.
Clipping Images
You can clip the image so that only the parts of the image you want visible
are displayed. To display more than one piece of the image, create additional
insertions of the image, each with a different clip boundary.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
See also:
■Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images (page 482)
■Changing Image Display Quality (page 253)
To change image display quality
1At the Command prompt, enter imagequality.
2Type d (draft) or h (high). Press Enter.
To hide a drawing or show clipped images
1Click the frame of the image or images to change.
498 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frames, press Shift +
left-click to select the image or images.
2Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3In the Properties palette, select one of the display options.
■Select Show Image and set it to No if you do not want to display the
image.
■Select Show Clipped and set it to Yes to display any clip boundaries
you have made on an image using the imageclip command.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Making an Image Transparent
You can make all pixels of a specific color in a grayscale or color image
transparent. (The transparency color of a bitonal image is always the
background color of the image.) This is useful for overlaying two images or
placing an image in front of objects.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
This option is not available if the image is currently unloaded or if the Raster
Extension is not loaded. To load the Raster Extension, use an image command,
such as Insert An Image.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 499
NOTE The transparency color is stored in the drawing as an AutoCAD Map 3D
custom object. If you send the drawing to other users, they can see the
transparency color only by opening the drawing in AutoCAD Map 3D or Autodesk
Raster Design. If they open the drawing in AutoCAD, they see a message that
AutoCAD cannot reference the custom object and will not display the transparent
color.
You can also change the opacity of an entire raster image, so that the image
is translucent and items below it are visible.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To make an image transparent
1Select the image.
2Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3In the Properties palette, select Transparency.
4Click the down arrow at the right of the box and select Yes.
Specify which color will be transparent.
To change the color that is transparent
1Zoom in close to the image so that you can accurately select the color.
2Click the image frame.
NOTE If you are zoomed so you cannot see the image frame, press Shift +
left-click to select the image.
3Right-click the image. Click Properties.
4In the Properties palette, select Transparency Color.
If Transparency Color does not appear in the Properties palette, the image
may not be loaded or the Raster Extension may not be loaded. To load
the image, select the image. Right-click the image ➤ Image ➤ Show
Image. To load the Raster Extension, choose an image command such as
Insert An Image.
500 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE You can choose the transparency color for grayscale and color images.
In bitonal images, the transparency color is always the background color of
the image.
5Click to display the Transparency Color dialog box (page 1883).
6Click Select and pick the desired color on the image. Click OK.
7To turn on transparency, select Transparency in the Properties palette
and set it to Yes.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image
You can specify a precise location for an image.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
NOTE When you change the insertion point values, AutoCAD Map 3D repositions
the image in the drawing and saves the settings in the drawing. However, these
correlation changes are saved only in the drawing and are not saved back to the
original image file. To change the original correlation information in the image
file, use an image-editing application such as Autodesk Raster Design.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 501
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To modify the correlation settings for an image
1Select the image.
2Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3In the Properties palette, do one of the following:
■To move the image, type new coordinates in the Position X, Y, and
Z boxes. This insertion point represents the lower-left corner of the
image frame before any rotation is applied.
■To rotate the image, type a new value in the Rotation box. The units
of the rotation value depend on the units that the drawing is using.
AutoCAD Map 3D rotates the image around the insertion point.
■To scale the image, type a new value in the Scale box. For example,
to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
4Close the Properties palette.
TIP You can also click the Pick icon to adjust the frame (page 465) location and
size.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
502 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Modifying Other Image Properties
Use the Properties palette to modify image properties such as the following:
■Frame color, layer, linetype, and linetype scale
■Image brightness, contrast, and fade
■Location
■Rotation, width, height, and scale
■Image transparency and transparency color
The settings apply only to the selected images.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
Rotation is in degrees (or the units set by the AUNITS system variable); scale,
width, and height are based on the unit of measurement used in the drawing.
When you insert an image, it is inserted on the current AutoCAD layer. Since
AutoCAD Map 3D controls the visibility and behavior of the layers, you can
move an image to another AutoCAD layer to take advantage of the layer
properties. For example, to display images, but not edit them, move the images
to an AutoCAD layer and lock the layer.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To modify image properties
1Click the frame or frames of the image or images to change.
NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frames, press Shift +
left-click to select the image or images.
2Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3In the Properties palette, select the property to modify. For example:
■Color — Select a color or click Select Color to display the Select Color
dialog box.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 503
Select the desired color or select ByLayer to set the frame color of the
image to the color of the layer it is on. The frame color is also the
foreground color for bitonal images.
Click OK to apply the new color to the selected image or images.
■Layer — Select the target AutoCAD layer for the image or images.
■Linetype — Select a linetype for the image frame or frames. Select any
linetype that is loaded in your drawing or select ByLayer to use the
linetype defined for that layer.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Clipping an Image
By clipping an image, you can display and plot only a portion of the image.
The clipping boundary can be a rectangle or a two-dimensional polygon with
vertices constrained to lie within the boundaries of the image. Multiple
instances of the same image can have different clipping boundaries.
504 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Image Clip lets you show only the part of an image you require. Move your cursor over
the image to see the clipped portion of the image.
You can display a clipped image using the clipping boundary, or you can hide
the clipping boundary and display the original image boundaries.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 505
NOTE To clip an image, the image boundary must be visible. See Displaying
Image Frames (page 494).
A clip boundary is a display-only feature that you can use for viewing and
plotting purposes. It does not permanently change image data. When you
delete a clipping boundary, the original image boundary is restored. To clip
the image permanently, use an image-editing application such as Autodesk
Raster Design.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect
(page 440).
See also:
■Displaying Image Frames (page 494)
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
To clip an image
1At the Command prompt, enter imageclip.
2Select the image (page 493) to clip. You can clip one image at a time.
3Press Enter or type n to create a new clip boundary.
4Type r to create a rectangular boundary, or type p to create a polygonal
boundary.
5Pick the points to define the clip boundary. You must pick at least three
points to define a polygonal boundary.
To restore the image, use these steps: At the Command prompt, enter
imageclip. Type off.
You can modify the clip boundary by defining a new boundary for the image
or by using object grips.
You can also choose to show or hide clip boundaries by changing the image
display properties (page 498) in the Properties palette.
506 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
IMAGECLIP
Creates new clipping boundaries for an image object
Clip Image
Icon
IMAGECLIPCommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Clip
Task Pane
Joining Data to GIS Features
You can add properties from a different data source to GIS features in your
map using joins. For example, you can join employment rates stored in a
Microsoft Access database file to city features stored in an SDF file, or to
counties stored in an Oracle database. Once you join the two data sources,
you can use the joined information to style the feature, the same way you use
its native information. For example, you can theme the city features based on
the employment rates you joined.
NOTE These options are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing
objects. To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database
Records to Objects (page 522).
Overview of Joins
Use joins to add extra data to GIS features in your map. For example, join
income data to a parcel layer to add that information to those features. You
can join data from the Internet, other organizations you work with, or GIS
data repositories.
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
After you create the join, you can use the additional properties the same way
you use the native properties of the feature class: to label, theme, style, and
analyze the features of the layer.
Joining Data to GIS Features | 507
For example, after you join a table of voter turnout data to a map of regions
in your area, you can create a theme that varies in appearance, depending on
the number of participating voters in each region.
With joins, you can keep your data in separate tables, focused on specific
topics, instead of in one large database or file. This can ease administration
and reduce complexity.
Typically, a join connects a separate table of data (a secondary table) to a
feature class layer (the primary table). The most common type of join is a
one-to-one join, which connects one record in a table of data to one feature
in a feature class.
Typically, you join data tables from an application such as Microsoft Access
to FDO layers from SDF, SHP, Oracle, and ArcSDE data. However, you can also
join feature sources such as SHP to other feature sources.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to join attribute data to
features.
■Show me how to manage joins.
Procedure
■Create a join. (page 512)
Tutorial
■Lesson 2: Analyze Data With External
Information Using Joins
Workflow
■Join Attribute Data to a Geospatial
Feature
GIS Skill
■Join attribute data to features
Related topics
■Overview of the Data Table (page 1125)
■Create a join. (page 512)
■Modify joins. (page 515)
508 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Edit joined data. (page 517)
■Export data from the Data Table. (page 520)
Creating a Join
A join adds the properties from a data table (secondary table) to an existing
Feature Class layer (primary table). The original data remains unchanged in
its source—the join exists only within your map.
The secondary table can be an actual table, such as a named range in an Excel
spreadsheet, or the tabular data contained in a feature source, such as an Oracle
database or an SDF file.
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
One-to-One Joins
The most common type of join is a one-to-one join, in which one feature is
matched to one secondary record, and any additional secondary records are
ignored. For example, if you are joining a table of income data to a layer
representing parcels, you may have more than one income value for a particular
property (if there are multiple residences on that parcel, for instance, or
multiple earners in a residence). In a one-to-one join, the first income value
found for a parcel is matched to that parcel, and any other income information
is ignored.
One-to-Many Joins
You can also create a one-to-many join. In this case, when there are multiple
secondary records for a single feature, additional features are generated to
represent the extra values. Using the same example as above, a parcel that
matches multiple income values will result in multiple Data Table entries for
that parcel, each with a separate income value (even though there is still only
one actual feature). If you style the parcel layer based on income values, only
one is visible in your display map. You can still edit the feature in your map
(for example, to resize it). The real feature in your data will be updated.
NOTE Adding features to your map can have performance implications; some
operations take longer when there is more feature data.
Creating a Join | 509
Join Keys
To be joined, the primary and secondary tables must contain matching fields
with common values. These matching fields are the join keys.
For example, when joining a data table containing employment rates to a
layer representing counties, the join key might be County_Name, if that field
is common to both tables.
A join key does not need to have the same name in both data sources, but it
must have the same data type (numeric, string, Boolean, and so on). For
example, you can match the Parcel_ID field in one table to the Lot_Number
field in the second table, so long as Parcel_ID and Lot_Number use the same
data type.
NOTE Joins that use String fields are case-sensitive. The values in the fields must
match exactly. Jones will not match JONES.
Advanced Joining
You can join multiple secondary tables to a feature layer There are several
ways to do this.
You can join a new table to the joined secondary table to create a “chain” of
joins. For example, you can begin by joining income information to a layer
of parcel features, using the Parcel_ID as the common join key. Then you can
add a join to a table of employment data, using Job_Title as a common join
key between the income table and the employment table. Even though the
parcel feature does not contain a property for Job_Title, you can style the
parcels by job type after you complete both joins.
You can join multiple tables to a single feature using the same join key. For
example, you can join a table of traffic information to a roads layer, using the
Road_Name field as the join key. You can then join a second table of
maintenance schedules to the roads layer, using the same join key.
You can also join multiple tables to a single feature using different join keys.
For example, you can join population information to a layer representing
counties, using the County_Name field as the join key. Then you can join
flood-zone data to the same layer using Elevation as the join key.
In all cases, you can use all of the joined data when styling or theming the
feature layer.
510 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Using Joins for Calculated Fields
You can create a calculated field that uses native data and joined data. For
example, if you join assessor data to parcel data, you can create a field that
represents the cost per acre for each parcel. You create a calculated field using
an expression.
Non-matching Data
When you create a join, you can specify how to deal with features in the
primary table that do not find a match in the secondary table. For example,
if you are joining assessor data to a parcel layer, you can decide what to do
with parcels that have no assessment data. The choices are as follows:
■Keep All Records On The Left – Keeps all features, even if there is no match
in the secondary table (a left outer join).
■Keep Only Left-Side Records With A Match – Hides features if there is no
matching record in the secondary table (an inner join).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to join attribute data to
features.
Procedure
■Create a join. (page 512)
Tutorial
■Lesson 2: Analyze Data With External
Information Using Joins
Workflow
■Join Attribute Data to a Geospatial
Feature
GIS Skill
■Join attribute data to features
Related topics
■Modifying or Removing Joins (page
514)
■Editing Joined Data (page 515)
Creating a Join | 511
■Using Joins with Calculated Properties
(page 518)
■Accessing Data from ODBC (page 342)
■Overview of the Data Table (page 1125)
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
To create a join
1Prepare to create a join by doing the following:
■Ensure the primary and secondary sources share one or more common
fields, for example Parcel_ID or County_Name. These fields do not
have to have the same name in both sources, but they must use the
same data type.
■Simplify your secondary table data as much as possible. For example,
remove unnecessary records or tables.
■Connect to both the primary and secondary sources using one of the
FDO Providers in Data Connect. When you connect to a secondary
source that has no geometry data, you need not add anything to the
map—you can just establish the connection and close the Data
Connect window.
NOTE If your secondary source is a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel
table, connect to it using an ODBC connection. For information about
setting up ODBC sources, see Accessing Data from ODBC (page 342).
2In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Create A Join.
NOTE Once you create a join, this command changes to Joins ➤ Manage
Joins and displays the Manage Layer Data dialog box (page 1607). In that dialog
box, you can add, edit, or delete joins.
The layer you right-click is the primary source.
3In the Table (Or Feature Class) To Join To list in the Create a Join / Edit
a Join dialog box (page 1603), select the table or feature class whose data
you will to join to the layer.
512 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Your selection is the secondary source. If this source contains multiple
tables, choose the one to use for the join.
4In the This Column From The Left Table list, select the join key (the
common field or property) for the primary source, for example, Parcel_ID
or County_Name.
5In the Matches This Column From The Right Table list, select the
matching field or property in the secondary source.
Only fields with matching data types are displayed in the right-hand list.
The fields need not have the same name in both data sources, but they
must have the same data type (numeric, string, Boolean, and so on). For
example, you can match the Parcel_ID field in one table to the
Lot_Number field in the second table, so long as Parcel_ID and
Lot_Number use the same data type.
6Under Type Of Joins, select the type of join to create:
■Keep All Records On The Left (a left outer join)
■Keep Only Left-Side Records With A Match (an inner join)
7Under Relationship With Secondary Records (Cardinality), choose one
of the following:
■One-To-One matches one secondary source record to each primary
source item. Any extra secondary source records are ignored.
■One-To-Many creates a new feature for each extra record in the
secondary source.
8Click OK.
In the Data Table (page 1125) for the primary source (the feature layer to which
you joined the data), the newly joined properties are appended to the right
of the native feature data. The joined properties are gray, to indicate that they
are read-only. In the column title, the name of the table you joined precedes
the property name.
NOTE To edit joined data, you must edit the secondary source itself, and not the
layer to which it is joined. See Editing Joined Data (page 515).
Quick Reference
MAPDEFINEJOIN
Creating a Join | 513
Defines a join for feature data.
MAPDEFINEJOINCommand Line
In the Task Pane, right-click a layer ➤ Create Join.
Task Pane
Modifying or Removing Joins
After you create a join, you can change the settings you specified when you
created it. You can remove one (of multiple) joins from a feature layer, or
remove all joins from the feature layer at once, restoring the properties for
that layer to its native data only.
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to manage joins.
Procedure
■To modify a join (page 515)
Tutorial
■Lesson 2: Analyze Data With External
Information Using Joins
Workflow
■Join Attribute Data to a Geospatial
Feature
GIS Skill
■Join attribute data to features
Related topics
■Overview of Joins (page 507)
■Creating a Join (page 509)
■Editing Joined Data (page 515)
■Using Joins with Calculated Properties
(page 518)
514 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
To modify a join
1In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer with the join to modify,
and select Manage Joins.
2In the Manage Layer Data dialog box (page 1607), select the join to modify,
and click Edit.
3In the Edit A Join dialog box, change any settings.
The settings are the same ones you used when you created the join (page
512). For example, you can change this join from One-To-Many to
One-To-One to get rid of extra features created by the original join.
4To delete one (or multiple) joins for this feature layer, click the join to
delete (use Ctrl or Shift to select multiple joins). Click Delete.
5When you are finished, click OK.
Changes can affect the styles, themes, and labels you set up in your map, if
they were based on the joined data.
Quick Reference
MAPDEFINEJOIN
Defines a join for feature data.
MAPDEFINEJOINCommand Line
In the Task Pane, right-click a layer ➤ Create Join.
Task Pane
Editing Joined Data
You can edit the records in joined geospatial data.
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
Editing Joined Data | 515
To help you maintain the integrity of your original data, a few limitations
apply when editing joined data:
■When you edit a feature layer that has a one-to-one join (page 2070) in the
Data Table, you can change the native feature data (from the primary table)
but you cannot change the joined properties (from the secondary table).
To edit the joined data, display Map Explorer, expand the data source
containing the table to edit, select that table, and click Table.
NOTE You cannot add or delete records from an ODBC data source using the
Data Table. Use the source application, for example Microsoft Access, to do
this.
■For one-to-one joins, you can delete records from the primary source only.
You cannot edit one-to-one inner joins.
■You can insert records in the primary source for a left outer join (page 2066).
You cannot do so for an inner join (page 2065), because the lack of a matching
secondary record would make the feature disappear.
■You cannot edit inner joins or one-to-many joins. To make changes, you
must open the table itself from Map Explorer.
■In general, you cannot edit primary keys.
Each feature class has a property whose value uniquely identifies each
feature within that class. This is called the primary key. Many feature classes
use a single property for this purpose, for example, FeatureId. However, a
feature class could have a list of properties such as street number, street
name, and street type to uniquely identify a house address.
An FDO provider (page 2063) may also support the concept of autogenerated
ID values. When you add objects to your map using such a provider, the
identity property will not have a value, but it is still the primary key.
■When working offline (page 721), the above rules apply, and you cannot
insert records at all.
See also:
■Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or
Non-Spatial Data Table (page 1134)
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
516 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
To edit joined data
DeleteInsertEditFor this type of
join or data...
You can delete only re-
cords only in the
primary table.
You cannot insert
data for an inner
join (page 2065)
You can edit the
primary table (the
native feature data)
when you display the
One-to-One
because it might
Data Table for the cause the new
feature layer. To edit primary record to
the secondary table “disappear” when
(joined data) open there is no match-
the table in Map Ex- ing secondary re-
plorer. You cannot cord. For a left
edit the primary key outer join (page
(page 2071), but you
can edit the join key.
2066), you can insert
records only in the
primary table.
Not available.Not available.You cannot edit the
primary table (the
One-to-Many
native feature data)
or the secondary
table (joined data) in
the Data Table from
Display Manager. In-
stead, open the tables
in Map Explorer.
You can delete only re-
cords only in the
primary table.
Not available.You can edit (as
above) while you
work offline, but you
cannot insert records.
Offline
You can delete data
from read/write feature
sources.
You can insert data
for read/write fea-
ture sources.
You can edit
read/write feature
sources.
Feature data
Editing Joined Data | 517
DeleteInsertEditFor this type of
join or data...
Not available. Use the
source application, such
Not available. Use
the source applica-
You can edit records
in Data Table.
ODBC data table
as Microsoft Access, to
delete records.
tion, such as Mi-
crosoft Access, to
insert records.
Quick Reference
MAPDEFINEJOIN
Defines a join for feature data.
MAPDEFINEJOINCommand Line
In the Task Pane, right-click a layer ➤ Create Join.
Task Pane
Using Joins with Calculated Properties
Calculated properties combine information in existing properties using
expressions. The existing fields can be native to the current feature layer, or
they can be joined to that feature layer. For example, you can join an assessor
database to a parcel layer and create a calculated property to determine value
per acre based on the parcel value in the assessor data and the parcel area in
the parcel layer.
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
See also:
■Creating Calculated Properties (page 1132)
■Creating a Calculation
■Creating Expressions - Reference
518 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
To create a calculated property based on joined data
1Connect to both data sources and join them, based on a common
property. (page 509)
2In the Display Manager, select the primary source (the feature layer to
which you joined the data) and click Table.
3In the Data Table, click Options ➤ Create A Calculation.
NOTE If a calculation already exists, click Options ➤ Manage Calculations.
4Create the expression for the calculation.
The available properties and values reflect both the source layer and the
joined data.
For help with any expression element, see Creating Expressions -
Reference.
Quick Reference
MAPDEFINEJOIN
Defines a join for feature data.
MAPDEFINEJOINCommand Line
In the Task Pane, right-click a layer ➤ Create Join.
Task Pane
Sharing Joined Data with Others
Use these techniques to share joined data and join definitions with others:
■Export layer(s) to an SDF file (page 1469) – When you export feature layers
to an SDF version 3 file, joined properties are included. The SDF file can
be reused or shared with other AutoCAD Map 3D, Civil 3D, and MapGuide
customers or other programs that support SDF. The resulting file does not
contain styling data.
Sharing Joined Data with Others | 519
■Save a layer to a .LAYER file (page 1469) – When you save a layer to a .layer
file, it retains its styling information and pointers to the data source that
defines its geometry and attributes (including joined data). You can drag
and drop saved layers into any map to reuse them, or use them with
MapGuide Enterprise.
■Copy or export data from the Data Table (page 1473) – When you copy
selected features in the Data Table and past them into other programs like
Microsoft Access or Excel, joined properties are included. You can also
export selected data to a comma-separated file for use in other programs.
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records
to Objects (page 522).
To save layer and joined properties to an SDF file (page 1470)
To export layer connections and joins to a .LAYER file (page 1471)
To export data from the Data Table (page 1474)
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
MAP2SDF
Exports an SDF 2 format file for use with Autodesk MapGuide, versions 6.5
and earlier.
520 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Autodesk SDF2
(MapGuide6.x...).
Menu
MAP2SDFCommand Line
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog boxDialog Box
Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects
Link attribute data to objects in your drawing.
See also:
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 204)
To add attribute data to drawing objects
■To store attribute data in the drawing (page 522)
■To link records to objects (page 523)
■To create a link template (page 526)
■To open a linked database table (page 527)
■To link a record to an object manually (page 529)
■To link records to objects using object data automatically (page 531)
■To link records to objects using text or block attribute data automatically
(page 532)
■To convert object data to a linked database table (page 534)
■To edit or delete a database link (page 537)
■To delete links for a group of objects (page 537)
■To edit the database path in a link template (page 539)
■To delete a link template (page 539)
Storing Attribute Data in the Drawing (Object Data)
Object data is attribute data that is attached to individual objects and stored
in tables in the drawing. To use object data, first define the format for the
table, and then create each record as you attach it to an object.
NOTE Object data applies to drawing objects only. For information on viewing
and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125).
See also:
■Setting Up Object Data (page 198)
Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects | 521
■Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061)
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data (page 363)
NOTE Object data applies to drawing objects only. For information on viewing
and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125).
To store attribute data in the drawing
■To create an object data table (page 201)
■To attach data to an object (page 1064)
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data (page 364)
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects
You can create a link between a record in an external database and an object
in your drawing. Once the link exists, use the information in the database to
help you analyze, select, and display objects in your drawing.
For example, you can link property ownership data to a map of a housing
development. Select records based on property value and highlight all objects
linked to those records. Alternately, select all the houses in a specified area
and highlight records that are linked to the selected houses.
Linking records takes two steps:
■Create a link template for each database. The link template specifies which
column in the database table to use as a key column.
■Link specific objects to specific records in the table.
When you link a record from a database to an object in your drawing, AutoCAD
Map 3D stores link data on the object.
NOTE Link templates apply to drawing objects only. For information on viewing
and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For
information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins
(page 507).
522 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Tell me more
Procedure
■To link records to objects (page 523)
Workflow
■Attach Attribute Data to Drawing Ob-
jects
Related topics
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings
(page 204)
■Creating a Link Template (page 525)
NOTE Link templates apply to drawing objects only. For information on viewing
and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For
information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins
(page 507).
To link records to objects
1Before you can link a database record to an object, you must attach the
data source to the drawing (page 209) and create a link template for the
table (page 526).
2Create links using one of the following methods:
■Manually link a specific record to a specific object (page 529).
■Link objects automatically based on text or blocks in the drawing
(page 532).
■Convert existing object data to a linked database table (page 534).
3If necessary you can edit the link (page 537).
Quick Reference
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links
Menu
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects | 523
ADEGENLINKCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link
template ➤ Generate Links
Task Pane
Generate Data Links dialog boxDialog Box
(Data View) Link Records to Objects
Links the selected records to objects in your drawing
In the Data View: Links ➤ Link Records To Objects
Menu
Link Records to Objects
Icon
MAPDELETELINKS
Deletes database links from objects
Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤
Delete Links
Menu
MAPDELETELINKSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete
Links
Task Pane
Select Link Templates dialog boxDialog Box
MAPLINKMANAGER
Edits the link data attached to an object
Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Link
Manager
Menu
MAPLINKMANAGERCommand Line
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Menu
MAPOD2ASECommand Line
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog boxDialog Box
524 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Creating a Link Template
A link template specifies how to link objects in a drawing to records in a
specific database table.
NOTE Link templates apply to drawing objects only. For information on viewing
and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For
information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins
(page 507).
A link template specifies the name of the database table and the key columns
to use to uniquely identify each record.
The link template is stored in the current drawing.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
NOTE Link templates apply to drawing objects only. For information on viewing
and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For
information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins
(page 507).
Creating a Link Template | 525
NOTE Before you create a link template, make sure the data source for the table
is currently attached (page 209) and connected (page 215).
To create a link template
1In Map Explorer (page 2068), right-click the table and click Define Link
Template.
2In the Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) (page 1683), type
a name for the link template.
3Under Key Selection, select the column to use as the key by clicking the
check box in the Key column.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the value in the key column to uniquely identify
a record, so select a column or a combination of columns that contains
a unique value for each record in the database.
4Click OK.
NOTE If the link template does not immediately appear on the Map Explorer tab
of the Task Pane, right-click a blank space in Map Explorer. Click Refresh.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Define Link Template
Creates a new link template
In the Data View: Links ➤ Define Link Template
Menu
Define Link Template
Icon
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)Dialog Box
MAPDEFINELT
Defines a link template for a database table
Click Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Delete
Link Template.
Menu
Define Link Template
Icon
526 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
MAPDEFINELTCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source table or
query ➤ Define Link Template
Task Pane
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)Dialog Box
Opening a Linked Database Table
Once you have a defined a link template for a table, you can open the table
as a linked table. When a table is opened as a linked table, AutoCAD Map 3D
tracks the relationship between the records in the table and the objects in
your drawing.
NOTE Link templates apply to drawing objects only. For information on viewing
and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For
information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins
(page 507).
See also:
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
■Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1221)
NOTE Link templates apply to drawing objects only. For information on viewing
and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For
information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins
(page 507).
To open a linked database table
■In Map Explorer (page 2068), double-click a link template. Depending on the
data source option setting, the linked table opens in either Edit mode or
View mode. If the table is write-protected, it opens in View mode. Queries
always open in View mode.
■To open a table in View mode, right-click the link template. Click View
Linked Table.
In the Select Link Template Key dialog box (page 1797), select a link template
for the database table containing the data matching your object data table
and a validation option.
Opening a Linked Database Table | 527
Quick Reference
MAPVIEWLINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to view in the
Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ View Linked
Table.
Menu
MAPVIEWLINKCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ View
Linked Table
Task Pane
Select Link Template dialog boxDialog Box
Manually Linking Database Records to Objects
You can create a link between an object in the drawing and a record in a
database table.
You cannot create links for non-graphical objects, such as layers and linetypes.
528 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes,
see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a
geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
Link Data
When you create a link, link data is stored on the object. The link data has
two parts: the name of the link template to use, and the actual value to search
for in the key column. The record with the matching key value is linked to
the object.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 204)
■Creating a Link Template (page 525)
■Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects (page 530)
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes,
see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a
geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
NOTE To link records to objects, you must first define a link template for the table
(page 525), and you must open the table as a linked table (page 527).
To link a record to an object manually
1Open a linked database table in the Data View (page 1052).
2In the Data View window, select a record.
3In the Data View, click Links menu ➤ Link Records To Objects.
4Select the objects in your drawing. Press Enter.
NOTE If you are linking data to a polygon and plan to use the data with
topology functions, be sure to link the data to the centroid of the polygon.
Topology functions do not use data linked to the polygon border.
Manually Linking Database Records to Objects | 529
Quick Reference
(Data View) Link Records to Objects
Links the selected records to objects in your drawing
In the Data View: Links ➤ Link Records To Objects
Menu
Link Records to Objects
Icon
Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects
If information in your drawing, such as object data, text, or block attribute
data, matches information in a database table, you can automatically create
links from each selected object to a matching record in the database table.
For example, if each parcel in a parcel map has attached object data that
contains the parcel ID, you can automatically link each parcel to the correct
record in a database of parcel information.
Or if you have district code stored as block attribute data and also have a table
that has a column for district codes, you can automatically link each code in
the map to the corresponding record in the table.
If no matching record is found in the database table, you can set an option
to create the record.
If you are using block or text, you can set an option to use the insertion point
point of the block or text as the label point for the object.
530 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes,
see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a
geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
■Creating a Link Template (page 525)
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 204)
■Defining the Text Insertion Point (page 936)
■Converting Object Data to Database Links (page 533)
■Manually Linking Database Records to Objects (page 528)
Before you begin, be sure you have defined a link template (page 526) for the
database you will use, and the objects to link to are accessible. You cannot
create links to objects on layers that are locked, frozen, or turned off.
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes,
see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a
geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
To link records to objects using object data automatically
1At the Command prompt, enter mapod2ase.
2In the Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box (page 1680), under
Source Object Data Table, select an object data table.
3Select Remove Data From Objects Processed to delete the object data after
creating the link.
4Under Target Link Template, select Link Object Data To Database.
5Click Define to specify the link template.
6In the Select Existing Link Template dialog box (page 1689), under Link
Template, select an available link template.
7For each key field in the link template, select a field in the object data
table.
Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects | 531
8Select a Database Validation option:
■None — Creates links without checking to see if a matching record
exists in the table
■Link Must Exist — Creates a link only if the value in the drawing
matches the key field value of an existing record. If no record has a
matching value, a link is not created for that object.
■Create If New — Creates a new record in the table if no existing record
has a matching value.
9Click OK.
10 In the Convert Object Data To Database Links dialog box, specify how
to select objects with attached object data.
You can select objects automatically or manually, and you can use a filter
to restrict selection to specified layers.
11 Click Proceed.
To link records to objects using text or block attribute data automatically
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ ➤ Generate Links.
2In the Generate Data Links dialog box, select a linkage type.
3Under Data Links, select Create Database Links.
4Select a link template.
If you are creating links to enclosed text, select a link template that has
only one key field.
5If you are creating links to blocks or enclosed blocks, select the name of
the block.
For each key field in the link template, select a tag from the block
attribute. You can assign a tag to only one key field.
6Select a Database Validation option.
7Optionally, select Use Insertion Point As Label Point.
8Click OK.
532 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
9Enter a to use all blocks or text objects, or enter s to select block or text
objects.
Quick Reference
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Menu
MAPOD2ASECommand Line
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog boxDialog Box
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links
Menu
ADEGENLINKCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link
template ➤ Generate Links
Task Pane
Generate Data Links dialog boxDialog Box
Converting Object Data to Database Links
You can convert object data into linked records in an external database table.
You can do one of the following
■Create a new table in an existing data source. For the new link template,
you can use an existing field as the key field, or you can have AutoCAD
Map 3D create a new field and assign a unique value to each record.
■Add the data to an existing database table.
NOTE Object data is available for drawing objects only. For information on viewing
and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125).
Converting Object Data to Database Links | 533
Field Names in the New Table
By default, the fields in the new database table have the same names as the
fields in the object data table. AutoCAD Map 3D resolves any conflicts in the
following ways:
■Truncates fields that are too long and adds an incremental digit to the
resulting duplicate field names
■Replaces unsupported characters in a field name with an underscore (_)
■Converts unsupported field types to character
■Converts point fields to a character string and separates coordinates with
commas
In addition, if you have object data that matches information in a database
table, you can automatically create links from each selected object to a
matching record in the database table.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
■Creating a Link Template (page 525)
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 204)
■Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects (page 530)
NOTE Object data is available for drawing objects only. For information on viewing
and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125).
If you plan to create a new table in an existing data source, make sure the
appropriate data source is currently attached (page 209) and connected (page
215).
NOTE During the conversion, field names in the object data table become field
names in the database table. Make sure that the field names in your object data
table are not SQL reserved words such as DATE, SELECT, or CURRENT. If necessary,
rename the fields in your object data table before you convert it.
To convert object data to a linked database table
1At the Command prompt, enter mapod2ase.
534 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
2In the Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box (page 1680), under
Source Object Data Table, select an object data table.
3Select Remove Data From Objects Processed to delete the object data after
creating the link.
4Under Target Link Template, select Convert Object Data To Database.
5Click Define to specify the link template.
6In the Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE) (page 1682), select
an available data source. Click Connect.
7Enter a table name.
8In the Link Template Key Column Entry dialog box (page 1620), specify
the fields to use as key fields (columns). To enter more than one field
name, separate names with a comma.
To select from a list of field names in the object data table, or to rename
the fields, click Select to display the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog
box.
You can use an existing object data field as the key column or create a
new field. If you select Generate Key Field, specify a name for the field
in the Generate Key area. AutoCAD Map 3D sets the first record in the
database table to 1, and increments each subsequent record by 1. Click
OK to close the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog box.
9In the Define Link Template dialog box, enter a name for the link template
and click OK.
The link template stores the address of the database table and the name
of the key field. Accept the default or enter a new unique name.
10 In the Convert Object Data To Database Links dialog box, specify how
to select objects with attached object data.
You can select objects automatically or manually, and you can use a filter
to restrict selection to specified layers.
11 Click Proceed.
AutoCAD Map 3D converts the object data into linked database tables.
Quick Reference
MAPOD2ASE
Converting Object Data to Database Links | 535
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Menu
MAPOD2ASECommand Line
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog boxDialog Box
Editing Database Links
To link an object to a different record in a database table, you can either delete
the old link and create a new link, or you can edit the link data stored on the
object.
The link data specifies the following:
■the link template for the database table
■the link value for the record
The object is linked to the record in the database table where the value in the
key column matches the link value on the object. If you edit the link value,
you link the object to a different record in the table.
For example, a database has a record for each piece of equipment. The link
template for the database table specifies the serial number column as the key
column. If you replace a piece of equipment, you must edit the link value on
the object in the drawing to reflect the new serial number. This links the object
to the record with the new serial number.
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes,
see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a
geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
Editing Linked Objects
If you move, copy, or delete a linked object, the link data is moved, copied,
or deleted with it. Deleting the object and its link data does not affect the data
in the database table.
You can also delete the link from the object.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
536 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Creating a Link Template (page 525)
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 204)
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes,
see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a
geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
To edit or delete a database link
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ ➤ Link Manager.
2Select the object with the link to edit.
3In the Link Manager dialog box, review or edit the link data.
4To modify link data, click the value to edit. Type a new value, or click…
to select from a list of values in the database.
5To delete a link, click the link template and click Delete.
6When you finish, click OK.
To delete links for a group of objects
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ ➤ Delete Links.
2Select the object or objects with the links to delete.
3In the Select Link Templates dialog box, select the link templates whose
links you will delete from the objects.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPDELETELINKS
Deletes database links from objects
Editing Database Links | 537
Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤
Delete Links
Menu
MAPDELETELINKSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete
Links
Task Pane
Select Link Templates dialog boxDialog Box
MAPLINKMANAGER
Edits the link data attached to an object
Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Link
Manager
Menu
MAPLINKMANAGERCommand Line
Editing a Link Template
If you rename a database table or change the location of the database, you
must edit the link template associated with that database table.
When you edit a link template, all objects in the drawing that reference the
link template use the new information.
If you no longer use a link template in a drawing, you can delete the link
template from the current drawing. When you delete a link template, all links
that reference that link template are deleted from the drawing.
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes,
see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a
geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
■Creating a Link Template (page 525)
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 204)
538 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes,
see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a
geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
NOTE The following procedure edits the link template in the active drawing. It
does not update the asi.ini file (which stores data source mapping information),
source drawings, or other drawings that use this link template.
To edit the database path in a link template
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ ➤ Edit Link Template
Properties.
2Select the link template. Click OK.
3In the Link Template Properties dialog box (page 1686), select a new data
source, catalog, schema, or table.
4Click OK.
5Right-click the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane. Click Refresh.
To delete a link template
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ ➤ Delete Link
Template.
2In the Select Link Template dialog box, select the link template. Click
OK.
Quick Reference
MAPDELETELT
Deletes a link template
Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤
Delete Link Template
Menu
Editing a Link Template | 539
MAPDELETELTCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete
Link Template
Task Pane
Select Link Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPPROPSLT
Edits the database table name or location in a link template
Setup menu ➤ Edit Link Template Properties
Menu
MAPPROPSLTCommand Line
Using Open Source FDO Providers
To make it easier to extend the capabilities of FDO Data Access Technology
used within AutoCAD Map 3D, Autodesk has released FDO as an open source
project under the Open Source Geospatial Foundation™ (OSGeo™).
This has enabled developers from all over the world to tap into powerful web
mapping and geospatial data access technology and develop additional FDO
data providers that work with AutoCAD Map 3D.
Often, developers make the providers they develop available for free. They
can be integrated into AutoCAD Map 3D and then used to access additional
data formats not included in the box.
DescriptionExamples of Third Party and Open
Source Providers Available
Open source, available on http://fdo.os-
geo.org
OGR Provider (supports vector formats
such as ESRI Personal Database, GRASS,
and SDTS).
Open source, available on http://fdo.os-
geo.org
GDAL Provider (supports raster formats
such as NITF, Imagine, PCIDSK, and HDF).
Available on ht-
tp://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/ser-
vlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908
SL-King Oracle Provider.
Available on ht-
tp://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/ser-
vlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908
Safe Software FME Provider for FDO.
540 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Check http://fdo.osgeo.org and
http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908 periodically
for additional providers.
If you are a developer, you can also create your own data providers. The open
source version of FDO Data Access Technology and developer documentation
is available on http://fdo.osgeo.org .
NOTE FDO Providers from sources other than Autodesk are not supported or
warrantied by Autodesk.
■To download a third party or open source FDO Provider (page 541)
■To integrate a new FDO Provider into AutoCAD Map 3D (page 541)
■To develop a new FDO Provider (page 542)
To download a third party or open source FDO Provider
■Go to http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908
or http://fdo.osgeo.org to see the providers available for download.
To integrate a new FDO Provider into AutoCAD Map 3D
1Close AutoCAD Map 3D if it is running.
2In Windows Explorer, navigate to \AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\FDO\bin.
3Make a backup copy of providers.xml. Give the back up a new name such
as providers_backup.xml.
4In WordPad, open \AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\FDO\bin\providers.xml.
NOTE Do not use Notepad.
5Copy a section for an existing provider, for example the section OSGEO
WMS, and paste it to a new location in the XML file.
Be sure that you copy the entire section, from <Feature Provider> to
</FeatureProvider>.
6Modify the following elements in the new section as needed:
■Name – Name of your new provider.
■Display Name – Name that will be displayed in the Data Connect
window in AutoCAD Map 3D
Using Open Source FDO Providers | 541
■Description – Description that will be displayed in the Data Connect
window
■IsManaged – False if the provider was developed using unmanaged
code like C++; True if uses managed code.
■Version – The DLL version number. The version number must match
the version number of the DLLs.
■FeatureDataObjectsVersion – FDO version number
■LibraryPath - Path to the DLLs for the new provider
7Save and close providers.xml.
8Start AutoCAD Map 3D.
9In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
The provider you added should appear under Data Connections By
Provider.
10 In the Data Connect window, under Data Connections By Provider, select
the new provider. For example, select “Add OGR Connection”.
11 Enter the connection information.
NOTE For the OGR provider, you need to enter the complete path to the
geodatabase for Data Source.
12 The ReadOnly field indicates whether you can edit the data. TRUE means
the data is read-only. FALSE means it will be read / write.
13 Click Login.
14 Click Connect to bring the data into your map.
To develop a new FDO Provider
■Go to http://fdo.osgeo.org to download the API and access the
documentation needed to develop a provider.
542 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data
You can bring in the following types of data from AutoCAD Civil 3D projects:
■Features (Alignments, points, parcels, and pipe networks)
■Surfaces
To bring in Civil 3D data, you must first export it from Civil 3D to formats
that can be read by AutoCAD Map 3D.
The following table lists the AutoCAD Civil 3D features and attributes that
are exported to the SDF file.
Exported AttributesAutoCAD Civil 3D Feature
Alignment ■Alignment Name
■Length
■Design Speed
■Starting Station
■Ending Station
Point ■Point Number
■Point Name
■Elevation
■Description
■Raw Description
■Latitude
■Longitude
Parcel ■Parcel Name
■Parcel Number
■Area
■Perimeter
Pipe ■Network Name
■Length
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data | 543
■Slope
■Inside Diameter
■Outside Diameter
■Shape
■Elevation at Start
■Elevation at End
■Structure Start
■Structure End
Structure ■Network Name
■Rim Elevation
■Structure Name
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to bring in data from
AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Procedure
■To export features from AutoCAD Civil
3D to SDF (page 545)
■To export surfaces from AutoCAD Civil
3D to DEM (page 545)
■To access the DEM from a map (page
545)
GIS Skill
■Bring in parcel data from AutoCAD Civil
3D
Related topics
■Bringing In Features from SDF (page
337)
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your
Map (page 441)
544 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■To export features from AutoCAD Civil 3D to SDF (page 545)
■To access the SDF file from a map (page 545)
■To export surfaces from AutoCAD Civil 3D to DEM (page 545)
■To access the DEM from a map (page 545)
To export features from AutoCAD Civil 3D to SDF
1Open the project in AutoCAD Civil 3D. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, export the
project to SDF.
2In the Export To SDF dialog box, specify a name for the SDF file.
3Specify the coordinate system.
NOTE If the drawing already has a coordinate system specified, it is used
automatically and the Select Coordinate System controls in the Export To
SDF dialog box are grayed.
4Click OK to export the file.
To access the SDF file from a map
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, under Data Connections By Provider, select
Add SDF Connection.
3Specify information to connect to the SDF file. For more information,
see To bring in features from SDF (page 338).
To export surfaces from AutoCAD Civil 3D to DEM
1Open the project in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
2In AutoCAD Civil 3D, export the surface as a DEM file.
To access the DEM from a map
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, under Data Connections By Provider, select
Add Raster Image Or Surface Connection.
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data | 545
3Specify information to connect to the DEM file. For more information,
see To add a raster-based surface to your map (page 442).
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
Task Pane
546 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Managing Data
Overview of Managing Data
Different geospatial data formats have different capabilities. Use the following
table to determine the options available for your data stores.
NOTE WMS and raster data providers are not covered here. For information about
those providers, see Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445)
and Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437).
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
managing drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your Map
File (page 140).
WFSESRI
ArcSDE
SHPSDFODBCMySQLSQLiteSQL Serv-
er Spatial
SQL Serv-
er
Postgr-
eSQL
Oracle
Set up
users
(page 584)
Set up
users
(page 584)
Set up
users
(page 584)
Set up
users
(page 584)
Set up
users
(page 584)
Create
data
Create
data
Set up
data
Create
data stores
(page 586)
Create
data stores
(page 586)
Create
data stores
(page 590)
Create
data stores
(page 586)
Create
data stores
(page 586)
Create
data stores
(page 586) storesstoresstores
(page
586)
(page
586)
(page
576)
Add
data to
Add
data to
Add
data to
Add
data to
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
youryouryouryourmapmap
(page 332)
map
(page 330)
map
(page 326)
map (page
323)
map (page
340)
map (page
312) mapmapmapmap
4
547
WFSESRI
ArcSDE
SHPSDFODBCMySQLSQLiteSQL Serv-
er Spatial
SQL Serv-
er
Postgr-
eSQL
Oracle
(page
337)
(page
342)
(page
346)
(page
316)
(page
335)
Style
data
Style
data
Style
data
Style
data
Style data
(page 639)
Style data
(page 639)
Style data
(page 639)
Style data
(page 639)
Style data
(page 639)
Style data
(page 639)
(page
639)
(page
639)
(page
639)
(page
639)
Examine
or edit
Exam-
ine or
Examine
or edit
Examine
or edit
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
attributeedit at-attributeattributetributetributetributetributetributetribute
datatributedatadatadata (page
711)
data (page
711)
data (page
711)
data (page
711)
data (page
711)
data (page
711) (page
711)
data
(page
711)
(page
711)
(page
711)
Join
data to
Join
data to
Join
data to
Join data
to a dif-
Join data
to a dif-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
a WFSa differ-a differ-ferentferentent fea-ent fea-ent fea-ent fea-ent fea-ent fea-
feature.ent fea-ent fea-feature.feature.ture.
(page 509)
ture.
(page 509)
ture.
(page 509)
ture. (page
509)
ture. (page
509)
ture. (page
509) (page
509)
ture.
(page
509)
ture.
(page
509)
(page
509)
(page
509)
Create
a
Create a
schema
Create a
schema
(page 596)
Create a
schema
(page 596)
Create a
schema
(page 596)
Create a
schema
(page 596)
Create a
schema
(page 596)
Create a
schema
(page 596) schema(page
596) (page
596)
View a
schema
View a
schema
View a
schema
View a
schema
View a
schema
(page 608)
View a
schema
(page 608)
View a
schema
(page 608)
View a
schema
(page 608)
View a
schema
(page 608)
View a
schema
(page 608) (page
608)
(page
608)
(page
608)
(page
608)
Edit a
schema
Edit a
schema
(page 610)
Edit a
schema
(page 610)
Edit a
schema
(page 610)
Edit a
schema
(page 610)
Edit a
schema
(page 610)
Edit a
schema
(page 610) (page
610)
548 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
WFSESRI
ArcSDE
SHPSDFODBCMySQLSQLiteSQL Serv-
er Spatial
SQL Serv-
er
Postgr-
eSQL
Oracle
Delete a
schema
Delete a
schema
(page 613)
Delete a
schema
(page 613)
Delete a
schema
(page 613)
Delete a
schema
(page 613)
Delete a
schema
(page 613)
Delete a
schema
(page 613) (page
613)
Copy
data
Copy
data
Copy
data
Copy
data
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
to/fromto/fromto/fromto/fromdifferentdifferentdifferentdifferentdifferentdifferent
a differ-a differ-a differ-a differ-datadatadatadatadatadata
ent dataentent dataent dataformat
(page 615)
format
(page 615)
format
(page 618)
format
(page 615)
format
(page 615)
format
(page 615) formatdataformatformat
(page
615)
NOTE You
can
copy
data in-
to an
ArcSDE
schema
if the
data
store
and
schema
are
already
defined
in the
target.
format
(page
615)
(page
615)
(page
615)
Overview of Managing Data | 549
WFSESRI
ArcSDE
SHPSDFODBCMySQLSQLiteSQL Serv-
er Spatial
SQL Serv-
er
Postgr-
eSQL
Oracle
NOTE You
can use
Bulk
Copy to
copy
ODBC
data to a
different
provider,
such as
Oracle,
MySQL,
SQL Serv-
er, SDF,
and SHP.
You can
copy
data to
an
ODBC
data
store,
but you
must
define
the tar-
get
schema
properly,
and have
write per-
missions.
550 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and
Schemas
Overview of Geospatial Data
Geospatial data is organized as follows:
■Feature: The spatial representation of a real-world entity, such as a specific
road or an individual utility pole, that specifies the geometry and other
properties of the feature.
■Feature class: A category of features with rules that define the allowable
data types, default values, and constraints for its member features. For
example, you might have feature classes for a set of roads, utility poles,
and so on.
■Schema: A collection of related feature classes.
■Data store: A collection of feature data in a single storage location.
SDF data stores allow only one schema per file, but database stores such
as Oracle or SQL Server can have multiple schemas. (SHP files can include
only one geometry type per file, but you can be store and copy multiple
SHP files in a folder. You can use a configuration file to support multiple
schemas when you establish your connection to a SHP file.)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
managing drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your
Map File (page 140)
The data hierarchy
Geospatial data is stored in a hierarchical fashion, like a set of tables: each
row within a table is an individual feature, and each column is a property
(page 2071) of that feature. The entire table (including its name, column names,
data types, default values, and constraints) represents a feature class. The set
of related tables is called a schema, and the entire collection of data resides
in a data store.
For example, you might use a data store such as Oracle, which can encompass
multiple schemas. The database might define the utilities for a town, with
schemas for different types of utilities, such as electrical and water. The
electrical schema would include feature classes for utility poles and boxes,
while the water schema would include feature classes for pipes and hydrants.
About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas | 551
Properties
Each feature class has properties that define it. The Pole feature class would
have properties such as identification number, name, model, material, height,
installation date, and so on. The properties that define a feature class can have
data types, default values, and constraints. These can help ensure that a feature
meets certain criteria in order to be included in a particular feature class. For
example, the “Large Roads” feature class can include a field called “Lanes.”
The constraint for “Lanes” can specify that its value must be six or higher in
order for a road to be included in the “Large Roads” feature class.
Data stores
Features can be stored in a spatial database (such as Oracle, MySQL,
PostgreSQL/PostGIS, or SQLServer), or in the ESRI ArcSDE data store, which
can use either an Oracle- or SQL Server-based spatial database. Features can
be stored in a file (such as SQLite, SHP, or SDF). Related SHP files might be
stored in a folder.
Features can be accessed from a web-based service (such as WFS or WMS).
AutoCAD Map 3D also supports ODBC (Open Database Connectivity), a
standardized interface for accessing a database from a program.
A data store usually contains a spatial context, which describes the spatial
metadata or parameters within which geometry for a collection of features
resides. The spatial context can specify the coordinate system, extents, and
tolerance. A data store can include multiple spatial contexts, for example, one
context for ground-based data and another context for schematic data.
For more information about features, feature classes, and schemas (including
diagrams that illustrate these concepts), see “What Are Features?” and “What
is a Schema?” in Best Practices for Managing Geospatial Data, available from the
Help menu in AutoCAD Map 3D.
Working with features in your map
To add a feature to your map, you connect to its data store and select the
feature classes to include. After you connect to a data store in AutoCAD Map
3D, that data store is a feature source (page 2063) for the current map. Feature
sources are listed by provider (for example, all SDF feature sources are listed
together in Data Connect). Each feature class you add becomes a feature layer
(page 2063) in your map. You can apply filters and spatial queries to the layers
to show only some of the features within that layer. Filters are based on
attributes, and queries are based on spatial location.
552 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
See also:
■Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305)
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
To work with geospatial data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
managing drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your
Map File (page 140)
■Set up users for database data stores (page 585)
■Create data stores (page 588), if your data source supports that option.
■Add data to your map (page 308)
■Style the data (page 641)
■Examine or edit attribute data for any feature (page 712)
■View the schema (page 609) for any data source.
■Create a schema (page 598), if your data source supports that option.
■Edit a schema (page 612), if your data source supports that option.
■Delete a schema (page 614), if your data source supports that option.
■Copy data to/from a different data format (page 621), if your data source
supports that option.
Working with FDO Schemas
You can view a schema (page 2073), feature class (page 2063), or property (page 2071)
from any FDO provider (page 2063), but the ability to change them depends on
the provider and your access rights. You cannot edit or delete any schema,
feature class, or property if there are existing features that use it.
Working with FDO Schemas | 553
You can create schemas within AutoCAD Map 3D, or import existing FDO
schemas into your maps.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
managing drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your
Map File (page 140)
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
■Deleting Schemas (page 613)
To work with FDO schemas
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
managing drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your
Map File (page 140)
■View the schema (page 609) for any data source.
■Create a schema (page 598), if your data source supports that option.
■Import (page 608) existing FDO schemas into a map.
■Edit a schema (page 612), if your data source supports that option.
■Delete a schema (page 614), if your data source supports that option.
Working with Oracle Data
AutoCAD Map 3D, supports Oracle versions 10gr2, 11g, and XE. You can
create and edit an Oracle data store (page 2059) and schema (page 2073), and you
can access existing spatial schemas in Oracle that were created by other
applications. Oracle has comprehensive support for all the data types and
operations that AutoCAD Map 3D supports, including spatial index (page 2075),
long transaction (page 2067), and persistent locking (page 2070).
554 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
NOTE Functionality for OSE (the Oracle Spatial OO40, which is similar to OLE DB)
is not available in a 64-bit environment. The Oracle library that OSE is built on
(Oracle Object for OLE) is 32-bit only. There is no 64-bit version.
Before you add features to an Oracle data store, make sure your user privileges
for that Oracle data store are adequate and appropriate, and that the data in
that data store is accurate and current.
You can add a user for an Oracle data store using a utility (page 584) provided
with AutoCAD Map 3D.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and Oracle, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
What Oracle Schemas Support
An Oracle schema can support the following:
■Inheritance
■Multiple schemas
■Object properties (with limitations)
■Association properties (with limitations)
■Schema overrides
■Auto ID generation
■Data store scope unique ID generation
■Default values
■Inclusive value range constraints
■Exclusive value range constraints
■Value constraints list
■Null value constraints
■Unique value constraints
■Composite unique value constraints
■Spatial contexts
Working with Oracle Data | 555
■These geometry types: point, line string, polygon, multi-point, multi-line
string, multi-polygon, curve string, curve polygon, multi-curve string,
multi-curve polygon, linear ring, line string segment, circular arc segment,
and ring
■Multi-geometry
Restrictions of Oracle Schemas
When you create an Oracle schema, the following restrictions apply:
■A feature class (page 2063) must define or inherit at least one identity property
(page 2071).
■You cannot add a non-nullable data property to a class that already has
data.
■Identity properties cannot be nullable.
■Read-only identity properties must be auto-generated.
■The length for string properties must be between 1 byte and 4000 bytes,
inclusive.
■For decimal properties, precision must be between 1 and 38, inclusive, and
scale must be between -84 and 127, inclusive.
■A feature class can have multiple geometric properties. Although it is not
mandatory, having a main geometry as an attribute of the feature class
can help you to identify which geometry property to use as the default for
queries and rendering. Both HasMeasure and HasElevation are supported.
Version Enabling
The Autodesk FDO Provider for Oracle included with AutoCAD Map 3D 2011
creates tables in the FDO data store (page 2059) that are not automatically
version-enabled. Therefore, when you create a new Oracle data store using
the default options, the resulting table is not version-enabled, so persistent
locking (page 2070) and long transaction (page 2067) are not supported. (This differs
from previous releases.)
Oracle Workspace Manager (OWM) is used for versioning and persistent
locking support.
NOTE Versioning and persistent locking are not available with the Oracle XE
version.
556 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Setting Up Database Users (page 584)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Bringing In Features from Oracle (page 312)
■Creating a Join (page 509)
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
To enable versioning for an Oracle data store
1You enable versioning with the Oracle SQL*Plus tool, which you use to
execute the scripts. Before executing the scripts, make sure that the
following conditions are true:
■You connect directly to the Oracle user (or FDO data store) to be
processed.
■The Oracle user executing the script has sufficient privileges (has been
granted the Workspace Manager role WM_ADMIN_ROLE).
■The Oracle user executing the script is the only user processing or
accessing the current Oracle user (or FDO data store) during the
execution of the script. Otherwise, a script failure may result from a
session conflict.
2To create a script log file, execute the spool <log file name>; command
before invoking the scripts and the spool off; command after the
invoked script finishes. The log file can help you resolve any issues
encountered by the scripts.
3Read the documentation contained within the script files themselves to
determine what privileges are required for each script, how to run the
scripts, and what errors may occur.
Working with Oracle Data | 557
Problems can occur if you respond incorrectly to errors you encounter
while running a script.
4Execute the EnableVersioning.sql script in the /FDO/bin/com folder in your
AutoCAD Map 3D folder.
This will enable the tables for OWM.
NOTE The DisableVersioning.sql script in the same folder provides the opposite
functionality.
5If you create a data store in AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 that you want to use
with the 2007 version of AutoCAD Map 3D, you must set the value of
the lock and long transaction options in the table F_Options in the
generated data store to 2. You can do this with the supplied SQL script
EnableVersioning.sql, which also enables versioning for all tables and allows
the creation of conditional data. Do not make this change to F_Options
in the database if you do not plan to use it with the previous version of
AutoCAD Map 3D.
To work with Oracle data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and SDF format, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
■Set up users (page 584)
■Create data stores (page 586)
■Add Oracle features to your map (page 312)
■Style Oracle features (page 639)
■Join Oracle data to a different feature (page 509)
■Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
■Create an Oracle schema (page 596)
■View an Oracle schema (page 608)
■Edit an Oracle schema (page 610)
■Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615)
558 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Working with SQL Server Data
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server version 2005 and SQL Server Spatial
(page 561). Both provide comprehensive data support, along with spatial
indexing, optimistic concurrency, and read-committed transaction isolation.
It uses a revision number for optimistic concurrency.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server authentication for SQL Server data
stores. The FDO (page 2062) User is mapped to the SQL Server login. Grant access
to the databases whose data you want to use.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
What SQL Server Schemas Support
A SQL Server schema (page 2073) can support the following:
■Inheritance
■Multiple schemas
■Object properties (with limitations)
■Association properties (with limitations)
■Schema overrides
■Auto ID generation
■Default values
■Inclusive value range constraints
■Exclusive value range constraints
■Value constraints list
■Null value constraints
■Unique value constraints
■Composite unique value constraints
■Spatial contexts
Working with SQL Server Data | 559
■The following geometry types:
■Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon, curve polygon, multi-curve polygon,
circular arc segment
■Points: point, multi-point
■Rings: ring, linear ring
■Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string, curve
string, multi-curve string
■Multi-geometry
Restrictions of SQL Server Schemas
When you create a SQL Server schema, the following restrictions apply:
■A feature class (page 2063) must define or inherit at least one identity property
(page 2071).
■Identity properties cannot be nullable.
■Read-only identity properties must be auto-generated.
■A feature class can have multiple geometric properties. Although it is not
mandatory, having a main geometry as an attribute of the feature class
can help you to identify which geometry property to use as the default for
queries and rendering. Both HasMeasure and HasElevation are supported.
■The maximum length of a string is 8000 characters.
■For decimal properties, the precision must be between 1 and 38, inclusive,
and the scale must be between 0 and 38, inclusive.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Setting Up Database Users (page 584)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Bringing In Features from SQL Server (page 323)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Creating a Join (page 509)
560 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
■Deleting Schemas (page 613)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
To work with SQL Server data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
■Set up users (page 584)
■Create data stores (page 586)
■Add SQL Server features to your map (page 323)
■Style SQL Server features (page 639)
■Join SQL Server data to a different feature (page 509)
■Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
■Create a SQL Server schema (page 596)
■View a SQL Server schema (page 608)
■Edit a SQL Server schema (page 610)
■Delete a SQL Server schema (page 613)
■Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615)
Working with SQL Server Spatial Data
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server Spatial through version 2008 SP1. Use
SQL Server Spatial for the following:
■To connect to Microsoft® SQL Server™ Spatial data stores
Working with SQL Server Spatial Data | 561
■To read, create, and edit schemas for SQL Server Spatial data stores.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server authentication and Windows
authentication for SQL Server Spatial data stores. The FDO (page 2062) User is
mapped to the SQL Server login. Grant access to the databases whose data you
want to use.
SQL Server Spatial includes two spatial data types: geometry and geography.
Geography is used for geodetic data, such as latitude/longitude data. Geometry
is meant for all other spatial data. The two spatial data types support similar
operations.
Geometric properties have a Geometry or Geography column, depending on
the coordinate system of the associated spatial context for the property. If the
coordinate system is geodetic, it has a Geography column. Otherwise, it has
a Geometry column. A coordinate system is Geodetic if its “well known text”
(WKT) starts with GEOGCS.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
What SQL Server Spatial Schemas Support
A SQL Server schema (page 2073) can support the following:
■Inheritance
■Multiple schemas
■Object properties (with limitations)
■Association properties (with limitations)
■Schema overrides
■Auto ID generation
■Default values
■Inclusive value range constraints
■Exclusive value range constraints
■Value constraints list
■Null value constraints
562 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Unique value constraints
■Composite unique value constraints
■Spatial contexts
■The following geometry types:
■Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon
■Points: point, multi-point
■Line strings: line string, multi-line string
■Multi-geometry
Restrictions of SQL Server Spatial Schemas
When you create a SQL Server schema, the following restrictions apply:
■A feature class (page 2063) must define or inherit at least one identity property
(page 2071).
■M and Z dimensions are not supported.
■Identity properties cannot be nullable.
■Read-only identity properties must be auto-generated.
■A feature class can have multiple geometric properties. It is not mandatory,
but using a main geometry as an attribute of the feature class can help
identify the geometry property to use as the default for queries and
rendering.
■The maximum length of a string is 4000 characters.
■For decimal properties, the precision must be from 1 through 38, inclusive,
and the scale must be from 0 through 38, inclusive.
■Long transactions and persistent locking are not supported.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Setting Up Database Users (page 584)
■Creating FDO-Enabled SQL Server Spatial Data Stores (page 590)
Working with SQL Server Spatial Data | 563
■Bringing In Features from SQL Server (page 323)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Creating a Join (page 509)
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
To work with SQL Server Spatial data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
■Set up users (page 584)
■Create data stores (page 590)
A geographic type column is created for the geodetic coordinate system.
For other systems, a geometric type column is created.
You can include FDO metadata when you create a SQL Server data store.
Spatial indexes are created automatically for geometry properties (Microsoft
SQL Server Spatial geometry types), using default spatial index parameters.
You can override the defaults using the API.
■Connect to SQL Server Spatial data stores. (page 326)
Use either Windows or SQL Server authentication.
■Style SQL Server features (page 639)
■Join SQL Server data to a different feature (page 509)
■Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
■Create a SQL Server schema (page 596)
■View a SQL Server schema (page 608)
■Edit a SQL Server schema (page 610)
■Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615)
564 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Working with SQLite Data
The OSGeo FDO provider for SQLite is an open-source, file-based provider
developed by Autodesk. This read/write provider supports one update user at
a time with any number of read users.
You can do the following in AutoCAD Map 3D:
■Create a SQLite data store
■Connect to a SQLite data store
■Import from SQLite
■Export to SQLite
■Save a Display Manager layer to SQLite
Each SQLite data store can contain one schema and a single spatial context.
The name of the schema must be "Default.”
What SQLite Schemas Support
A SQLite schema (page 2073) can support the following:
■All FDO property types except raster, object, association, and LOB properties
■Auto-generated properties for int32 and int64 properties
■All FDO geometry and geometry component types, including arc segments
■2D, 3D, and measure (M)
■Single and composite primary keys
■Null value constraints
■Unique value constraints
■Range and list constraints
■Default values
■Select, Select Aggregate, Insert, Update, and Delete commands
■SQL commands
■Transactions with commit and rollback
■All FDO spatial operators except distance
Working with SQLite Data | 565
■Standard FDO expressions and filters
■Parameter binding for all commands (at the API level)
Restrictions of SQLite Schemas
When you create or modify a SQLite schema, the following restrictions apply:
■SQLite native data supports only the following base property types: int64,
double, string and Geometry.
■If there is data in the class, you cannot modify the primary key or
constraints.
■Persistent locking and long transactions are not supported.
■You cannot change the schema name for a SQLite data store. The schema
name must be “Default.”
■You cannot add comments in the Schema or Feature Class Description
fields.
To work with SQLite data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
■Create data stores (page 586).
■Connect to SQLite data. (page 330)
■Style SQLite features (page 639).
■Join SQLite data to a different feature (page 509).
■Examine or edit attribute data (page 711).
■View a SQLite schema (page 608)
■Edit a SQLite schema (page 610)
■Export drawing data to SQLite (page 1447).
■Save a Display Manager layer as an SQLite file. (page 1469)
■Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615)
566 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Working with MySQL Data
AutoCAD Map 3D supports MySQL 5.0.27 In AutoCAD Map 3D, you can
create, edit, and delete a MySQL data store (page 2059) or schema (page 2073). You
can also use MySQL to access databases created by other applications. AutoCAD
Map 3D supports native MySQL geometry, indexing, two-dimensional
geometry (compatible with the OGC Simple Feature specification), and spatial
query operations, but not transactions. Auto-generated properties are
automatically incremented (auto-incremented). MySQL uses a revision number
for optimistic concurrency.
NOTE If you cannot connect to your MySQL data source, you may see an error
message: "Specified credentials are not valid or the provider is unable to establish
a connection." To resolve the issue, copy the libmySQL.dll file into the AutoCAD
Map 3D\FDO\bin folder and try again.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
What MySQL Schemas Support
A MySQL schema can support the following:
■Inheritance
■Multiple schemas
■Object properties (with limitations)
■Association properties (with limitations)
■Schema overrides
■Auto ID generation
■Default values
■Null value constraints
■Unique value constraints
■Composite unique value constraints
■Spatial contexts
Working with MySQL Data | 567
■The following geometry types:
■Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon, curve polygon, multi-curve polygon,
circular arc segment
■Points: point, multi-point
■Rings: ring, linear ring
■Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string, curve
string, multi-curve string
■Multi-geometry
Restrictions of MySQL Schemas
When you create a MySQL schema, the following restrictions apply:
■A feature class (page 2063) must define or inherit at least one identity property
(page 2071).
■Inclusive value range constraints are not supported.
■Identity properties cannot be nullable.
■Read-only identity properties must be auto-generated.
■A feature class can have multiple geometric properties. It is not mandatory,
but using a main geometry as an attribute of the feature class can help
identify the geometry property to use as the default for queries and
rendering. Both HasMeasure and HasElevation are supported.
■The maximum length of a string is 65,535 bytes.
■For decimal properties, the precision must be from 1 through 65, inclusive,
and the scale must be from 0 through 30, inclusive.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Setting Up Database Users (page 584)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Bringing In Features from MySQL (page 332)
■Styling Features (page 639)
568 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Creating a Join (page 509)
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
■Deleting Schemas (page 613)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
To work with MySQL data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
■Set up users (page 584)
■Create data stores (page 586)
■Add MySQL features to your map (page 332)
■Style MySQL features (page 639)
■Join MySQL data to a different feature (page 509)
■Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
■Create a MySQL schema (page 596)
■View a MySQL schema (page 608)
■Edit a MySQL schema (page 610)
■Delete a MySQL schema (page 613)
■Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615)
Working with SDF Data
The Autodesk SDF file format is a standalone, file-based spatial database format.
It supports multiple features classes and properties in a single file. SDF provides
spatial indexing, interoperability, and high performance for large data sets.
Working with SDF Data | 569
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and SDF format, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
Characteristics of the SDF File Format
The SDF file format has the following characteristics:
■SDF files can be read on different platforms.
■One schema (page 2073) in a single SDF file supports multiple feature classes
(page 2063).
■SDF files have their own spatial indexing.
■SDF files can store geometric and non-geometric data with minimal
overhead.
■The SDF file format supports a single writer at any time, with multiple
readers.
What SDF Schemas Support
An SDF schema can support the following:
■Auto ID generation
■Default values
■Exclusive and inclusive value range constraints
■Value list constraints
■Null value constraints
■Spatial contexts
■The following geometry types:
■Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon, curve polygon, multi-curve polygon,
circular arc segment
■Points: point, multi-point
■Rings: ring, linear ring
■Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string, curve
string, multi-curve string
570 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Multi-geometry
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Setting Up Database Users (page 584)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Bringing In Features from SDF (page 337)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Creating a Join (page 509)
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
■Deleting Schemas (page 613)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
To work with SDF data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and SDF format, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
■Create data stores (page 586)
■Add SDF features to your map (page 337)
■Style SDF features (page 639)
■Join SDF data to a different feature (page 509)
■Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
■Create an SDF schema (page 596)
■View an SDF schema (page 608)
Working with SDF Data | 571
■Edit an SDF schema (page 610)
■Delete an SDF schema (page 613)
■Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615)
Working with SHP Data
The standalone ESRI SHP file format supports GIS data using the following
file types:
■SHP (shape geometry)
■SHX (shape index)
■PRJ (projection information)
■CPG (code page files)
■IDX (spatial index)
■DBF (shape attributes in dBASE format)
You must have either a SHP or DBF file present to connect to data or work
with schemas (page 2073). Otherwise, these files are optional. If they do not
exist initially, the system creates files with empty records.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
Characteristics of the SHP File Format
The Schema Editor treats each SHP file, and its associated DBF file, as a feature
class (page 2063) with a single geometry property (page 2071) and, optionally, data
attribute properties. The SHP file format supports a single writer at any time,
but can have multiple readers.
SHP files can include only one geometry type per file, but you can store and
copy multiple SHP files in a folder. You can use a configuration file to support
multiple schemas when you establish your connection to a folder containing
SHP files.
572 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
What SHP Schemas Support
A SHP schema can support the following:
■A single geometry type per file
■Spatial contexts (determined by coordinate system information in the PRJ
file)
■Auto ID generation
■Null value constraints
■The following geometry types:
■Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon
NOTE When you connect to or import SHP polygon data, AutoCAD Map
3D checks the geometry to see if there are multiple closed outer loops. If
so, it treats the geometry as multi-polygon (a polygon with multiple exterior
rings). It does not treat unclosed outer loops as multi-polygon. You can
create a multi-polygon in AutoCAD Map 3D and then save or export it to
SHP format. It then appears in its native SHP file as a multi-polygon.
■Points: point, multi-point
■Rings: linear ring
■Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Setting Up Database Users (page 584)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Bringing In Features from SHP (page 335)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Creating a Join (page 509)
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
Working with SHP Data | 573
To work with SHP data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
■Create data stores (page 586)
■Add SHP features to your map (page 335)
■Style SHP features (page 639)
■Join SHP data to a different feature (page 509)
■Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
■View a SHP schema (page 608)
■Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615)
Working with PostgreSQL/PostGIS Data
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the OSGeo FDO Provider for PostgreSQL/PostGIS,
which accesses Postgres and PostGIS databases and is certified with PostGIS
1.4.0 with PostgreSQL 8.4. PostGIS adds support for geographic objects to the
PostgreSQL object-relational database so that the PostgreSQL server can be
used as a back end spatial database for GIS.
What PostgreSQL/PostGIS Schemas Support
A PostgreSQL/PostGIS schema (page 2073) can support the following:
■Reading and writing data with database transaction support
■Creation and modification of schemas
■Feature classes and regular classes
■All basic FDO data types except for BLOB and Byte types
■All geometry types except curve types. Circular arcs are not supported
■2D geometry
■Multiple schemas
■Auto-ID generation for int32 and int64 data types
574 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Null value constraints
■Unique value constraints
■Range constraints
■List constraints
■Default values
■All spatial filters
■All FDO expression functions
Restrictions of PostgreSQL/PostGIS Schemas
When you create a PostgreSQL/PostGIS schema, the following restrictions
apply:
■Object properties and association properties are not supported
■Inheritance is not supported
■The Byte data type is not supported. Byte properties are converted to Int16.
■Z and M values are not supported.
To work with PostgreSQL/PostGIS data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
■Set up users (page 584)
■Create data stores (page 586)
■Add PostgreSQL/PostGIS features to your map (page 340)
■Style PostgreSQL/PostGIS features (page 639)
■Join PostgreSQL/PostGIS data to a different feature (page 509)
■Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
■Create a PostgreSQL/PostGIS schema (page 596)
■View a PostgreSQL/PostGIS schema (page 608)
Working with PostgreSQL/PostGIS Data | 575
■Edit a PostgreSQL/PostGIS schema (page 610)
■Delete a PostgreSQL/PostGIS schema (page 613)
■Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615)
Working with ODBC Data
To set up a Data Source Name (DSN) for your ODBC data store, you add a DSN
in Windows. The configuration options you specify depend on the type of
ODBC data store you use. The login ID and password you enter when setting
up your DSN are used only for defining the DSN. These credentials are not
when you connect with the ODBC provider through FDO.
NOTE For MySQL, be sure to install the MySQL driver from MyODBC 3.51 at
http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/connector/odbc/3.51.html.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
What ODBC Schemas Support
For ODBC, AutoCAD Map 3D supports point geometry, with X, Y, and
optionally, Z columns for defining points. Although the default column names
are X, Y, and Z, when you select the columns to represent these points, you
must override the defaults. This information is stored in the map file itself. If
you perform the same steps in another map, you must override the settings
again.
In some cases, ODBC schemas support default values.
Restrictions of ODBC Schemas
■There is no spatial indexing.
■Geometry points are stored as separate properties in the object definition.
■The existing schema (page 2073) is used; you cannot edit or delete it. You
cannot add a new schema or add FDO (page 2062) metadata to the data store
(page 2059).
576 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Accessing Data from ODBC (page 342)
■Creating a Join (page 509)
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
■To set up an ODBC data store for use with AutoCAD Map 3D (page 577)
■To set up a database range for Excel (page 578)
■To work with ODBC data (page 578)
To set up an ODBC data store for use with AutoCAD Map 3D
1From your Windows desktop, click Start menu ➤ Settings ➤ Control
Panel and open the Administrative Tools control panel.
2Double-click Data Sources (ODBC).
3Click Add.
4Select a driver.
■For a SQL Server data store, use the SQL Server or SQL Native Client
driver. Specify either Windows NT or SQL Server, and select the default
database that matches yours.
■For an Oracle provider, do not use the Microsoft ODBC for Oracle
driver because it is incompatible with AutoCAD Map 3D. Instead, use
the driver installed with the Oracle client.
5Click Finish.
6Specify the DSN information.
■For a MySQL Server data store, specify the Data Source Name, Server,
User, Password, and Database.
■For an Oracle provider, specify the following:
■Data Source Name
Working with ODBC Data | 577
■TNS Service Name (the service to which you are connecting)
■User ID (the database to access).
The User ID predefines the tables available in AutoCAD Map 3D.
It is the equivalent of the OWNER field in an Oracle metaschema.
If you do not specify it here, the entire schema of the Oracle
instance (based on your user privileges) is used. It is case sensitive
and must match the value in the Oracle instance (all uppercase is
the usual case). This process can take several minutes, depending
on your Oracle instance.
7Under Database, click Select and select the data store to use.
8Click OK in the Select Database and ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog
boxes.
9In the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, select the new data
source and click Configure.
10 Specify the appropriate configuration options for your data store type:
■For SQL Server, some column data types (for example, nchar) can cause
a failure when connecting to the SQL Server. They are converted to
unsupported formats by the ODBC driver.
■For a MySQL Server data store, some column types can return the
wrong length and prevent the ODBC provider from reporting the
column. To resolve this issue, check Don't Optimize Column Width.
■For a Microsoft Excel schemas, specify at least one named range. You
can then expose different named ranges in the worksheet as different
ODBC tables. Also, the ODBC tables map to FDO classes.
To set up a database range for Excel
1Open the Excel worksheet.
2Select all the data in the worksheet.
3Define a named range for all the data in the table.
Do not use DATABASE or any other reserved word as a range name.
To work with ODBC data
■Add data to your map (page 342)
578 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Join ODBC data to a different feature (page 509)
■Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data
You can connect through ArcSDE to an underlying Oracle or SQL Server
database. You can insert, select, update, and delete feature data in existing
ArcSDE schemas (page 2073). You cannot create or modify an ArcSDE schema
in AutoCAD Map 3D.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports ArcSDE 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, and 9.3.1.
The 9.3.1 version is available as either a 32-bit or 64-bit provider on Windows.
(For previous versions, and on Linux, it is available in 32-bit only.) The 64-bit
support is available only with the 64-bit ESRI ArcSDE 9.3.1 client libraries.
(The 64-bit client libraries were not available before version 9.3.1.)
Both 32-bit and 64-bit ArcSDE servers are supported for the 9.3.1 version. You
can access either server type with a 32-bit or 64-bit client. For example, if you
are using AutoCAD Map 3D in a 32-bit environment, you can access a 64-bit
ArcSDE server.
To work with ArcSDE, you must install ArcSDE 9.3.1 and a supported data
source (page 2059), such as Oracle 11g, in the network.
Install the following DLL files on the computer on which you run AutoCAD
Map 3D:
For version 9.2 through 9.3.1For version 9.1
pe.dllpe91.dll
sde.dllsde91.dll
sg.dllsg91.dll
For instructions on installing the DLL files and setting up your hosts and
services files for ArcSDE, see Bringing In Features from ArcSDE (page 316).
The PATH environment variable must reference the local folder containing
these DLLs. To accomplish this, you can install an ArcGIS 9.1 Desktop
application or the ArcSDE SDK. For more information about ArcGIS 9.1 Desktop
applications and the ArcSDE SDK, refer to the ESRI documentation.
Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data | 579
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and ArcSDE format, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page
628).
What ESRI ArcSDE Schemas Support
AutoCAD Map 3D uses facilities provided by ArcSDE for long transaction (page
2067) versioning (page 2078) and persistent locking (page 2070). (ArcSDE supports one
or the other, but not both, on the same class). AutoCAD Map 3D uses the
standard ArcSDE API and ArcSDE-supported storage on both the Oracle and
SQL Server platforms. AutoCAD Map 3D does not use FDO (page 2062) metadata
for ArcSDE schema—it uses existing metadata only.
Restrictions of ArcSDE Schemas
If ArcSDE encounters curved segments, it converts them to a series of line
segments that approximate the original arc segment (an approximation of
the original geometry).
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
■Bringing In Features from ArcSDE (page 316)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Creating a Join (page 509)
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and ArcSDE format, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page
628).
580 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
To work with ESRI ArcSDE data
■Add ArcSDE features to your map (page 316)
■Style ArcSDE features (page 639)
■Join ArcSDE data to a different feature (page 509)
■Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
■View an ArcSDE schema (page 608)
Working with WFS Data
An OGC Web Feature Service (WFS) provides access to geographic features
that are stored in an opaque data store (page 2059) in a client/server environment.
A client uses WFS to retrieve geospatial data that is encoded in Geography
Markup Language (GML) from a single or multiple WFS. The communication
between client and server is encoded in XML. If the WFS response includes
feature geometries, it is encoded in Geography Markup Language (GML),
which is specified in the OpenGIS Geographic Markup Language
Implementation Specification. WFS is a read-only provider.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only.There is no equivalent
for drawing data.
What WFS Schemas Support
A WFS schema (page 2073) can support the following:
■Inheritance
■Multiple schemas
■Object properties
■Association properties
■These geometry types: point, line string, polygon, multi-point, multi-line
string, multi-polygon, multi-geometry, curve string, curve polygon,
multi-curve string, multi-curve polygon, linear ring, line string segment,
circular arc segment, and ring
■Multi-geometry
Working with WFS Data | 581
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Bringing In Features from WFS (page 346)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Creating a Join (page 509)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. There is no equivalent
for drawing objects.
To work with WFS data
■Add WFS features to your map (page 346)
■Style WFS features (page 639)
■Join data to a WFS feature (page 509)
Working with Feature Sources
After you connect to a data store in AutoCAD Map 3D, that data store is a
feature source (page 2063) for the current map.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
Overview of Working with Feature Sources
After you connect to a data store in AutoCAD Map 3D, that data store is a
feature source (page 2063) for the current map. Feature sources are listed by
provider (for example, all SDF feature sources are listed together in Data
Connect (page 2059)).
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about managing
drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page
140).
582 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to create a new SDF file
and import a schema.
Procedure
■To create a data store for a database
provider (page 588)
■To create a data store for a file-based
data provider (page 589)
■To create a schema (page 598)
■To import an XML or XMI schema
(page 608)
Tutorial
■Exercise 3: Edit the schema
Workflow
■Prepare an Existing Oracle Database
for Use with AutoCAD Map 3D
GIS Skill
■Create a GIS data store (SDF) to be
populated from various sources
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about managing
drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page
140).
To set up a feature source (page 2063)
1Set up database users for the feature source, if necessary. (page 585)
Overview of Working with Feature Sources | 583
2Do one of the following:
■Create a database datastore. (page 588)
■Create an SDF or SHP data store. (page 589)
NOTE You can also delete a data store. (page 593)
Setting Up Database Users
You can use the FDO User Manager utility that comes with AutoCAD Map 3D
to set up database users for Oracle, SQL Server, PostgreSQL/PostGIS, and
MySQL.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about managing
drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page
140).
For an Oracle data store (page 2059), AutoCAD Map 3D separates the concept
of the Oracle user who owns the schema (page 2073) from the Oracle user who
accesses the schema.
When you create a new Oracle data store in AutoCAD Map 3D (page 586),
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically creates a new corresponding Oracle user who
is the owner of that data. For example, creating a data store called mycitydb
creates an Oracle user called mycitydb. However, you must also create separate
Oracle users for the purpose of accessing the data store. These Oracle users
match the end users who will access the data. For example, if an end-user
named JSmith will be connecting to the new data store, you create an Oracle
user with that name and grant him access to the new data store. This allows
different users who access the same data to have different privileges.
To access data that resides in a relational database, AutoCAD Map 3D requires
that database users have certain privileges. Use FDO User Manager to add a
new user with the appropriate roles. FDO User Manager is a command-line
utility that lets you manage database users and accounts consistently across
database management systems.
When you create users for an Oracle instance with the FDO User Manager
tool, those users have the privileges that support data access operations for
that data store. If you access the data store as an Oracle user who was not
created using FDO User Manager, the Database Administrator must ensure
584 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
that the user has sufficient privileges to work with the data. If you use Oracle
Workspace Manager, you must use separate users to create the data store and
to access the data store, because locking is tracked by individual user and will
not be effective if everyone connects as the same data store user.
In FDO User Manager, you choose an FDO provider (page 2063) and connection
and then perform provider-specific tasks, including:
■Adding, dropping, or listing users
■Assigning, revoking, or listing roles and privileges
■Granting, revoking, or listing access to data stores
NOTE Database users are not the same as AutoCAD Map 3D users, which are
managed separately (page 82).
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights (page 82)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about managing
drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page
140).
To manage database users and accounts
1Start FDO User Manager.
By default, FDO User Manager is located in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map
3D\FDO\bin\. To start it, either double-click FdoUserManager.exe in
Windows Explorer or enter FdoUserManager at a command prompt. (To
invoke FdoUserManager from any prompt, add its directory to your path.)
2At the Choose a Provider menu, enter the digit that corresponds to your
FDO Provider and press Enter.
3Enter each connection parameter when prompted and press Enter.
For example, enter the required service name and username/password.
For more information, contact your database administrator.
Setting Up Database Users | 585
4After you are connected, follow the instructions on the screen.
If you are adding a user, enter the user name and password.
New users you create with this utility automatically have the roles and
privileges required by the AutoCAD Map 3D FDO functionality. However,
FDO User Manager allows you to grant some additional privileges. Use
commas to separate the role names, with no spaces. You can enter ? to
see a list of roles. To verify the roles after you add them, select List All
Roles And Privileges Of A User.
5When you finish, enter 0 (a zero) to exit FDO User Manager.
Creating a Data Store
Features are stored in a data store (page 2059), which is a collection of feature
classes in a single data storage location. To add a feature to your map, you
connect to its data store and select each feature class (page 2063) to include.
The main reason to create a new data store is to migrate existing data (page
615) to the new FDO provider (page 2063), or to create new data in that provider
format.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial formats, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page
628).
You can create new data stores for database FDO Providers (Microsoft SQL
Server, SQL Server Spatial, MySQL, PostgreSQL/PostGIS, or Oracle) and
file-based FDO Providers (SDF, SHP, or SQLite) from within AutoCAD Map 3D
if you have the necessary privileges for the target database or directory. After
you create a data store, you can define or import a schema for it, which
specifies the feature classes available in that data store and their properties.
Before creating a database data store, make sure you have created a user for
the data store with the proper privileges (page 584).
To overwrite an existing data store, you must first delete the old one. For data
stores from database FDO Providers, use DBMS-specific tools to drop existing
tables.
After you create a data store and define a schema (page 596) for it, AutoCAD
Map 3D users can create, store, and access (page 303) geospatial data in that
data store.
586 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
If you have DWG data that you want to move to a feature source (page 2063),
see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
When you create a data store, you specify the minimum and maximum X
and Y spatial extents for new data store in the Create Data Store Dialog Box
(page 1747). This is especially important if you later use Bulk Copy (page 615) to
move data to that data store. You must make sure that the data you are moving
are inside the extents of the destination data store. MySQL and Oracle support
expanding the extents automatically if incoming data are beyond the scope
of the extents.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to create a new SDF file
and import a schema.
Procedure
■To create a data store for a database
provider (page 588)
■To create a data store for a file-based
data provider (page 589)
■To create a schema (page 598)
■To import an XML or XMI schema
(page 608)
Tutorial
■Exercise 3: Edit the schema
Workflow
■Prepare an Existing Oracle Database
for Use with AutoCAD Map 3D
GIS Skill
■Create a GIS data store (SDF) to be
populated from various sources
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Setting Up Database Users (page 584)
Creating a Data Store | 587
■Importing and Exporting a Schema
(page 606)
■Migrating Data (page 615)
■Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628)
Instructions for creating a data store are different for database data stores and
for file-based data stores.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial formats, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page
628).
■To create a data store for a database provider (page 588)
■To create a data store for a file-based data provider (page 589)
To create a data store for a database provider
1On the Task Pane, click either the Map Explorer (page 2068) or Display
Manager (page 2060) tab.
2Click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
3In the Data Connections By Provider list in the Data Connect window,
select the appropriate choice (for example, Add Oracle Connection).
4In the right-hand pane, enter a connection name (the name you will call
this data store in AutoCAD Map 3D) and the information required to
connect to the data store, for example, a service name.
NOTE Do not use the same name you used when you created a user for the
data store (page 584).
5Log into the service for the store.
6In the Data Store list, select Add New Data Store (or type a name that
does not appear in the list already) and press Enter.
You are asked if you want to create a new data store. Click Yes.
7In the Create Data Store Dialog Box (page 1747) for this provider, enter the
settings for the new data store.
588 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
If you are creating an FDO-enabled data store for SQL Server Spatial, see
Creating FDO-Enabled SQL Server Spatial Data Stores (page 590).
8Click OK.
If the data store is created successfully, you see a confirmation message
prompting you to edit its schema. Use the Schema Editor to create (page
596) or import (page 606) the schema for the data store.
You are connected to the new data store automatically.
To create a data store for a file-based data provider
1In Map Explorer, do one of the following:
■Click Schema ➤ Create SDF.
■Click Schema ➤ Create SHP.
■Click Schema ➤ Create SQLite.
2In the Create File dialog box, specify the path and file name of the data
store to create.
3Enter the coordinate system code for the new data store.
If you do not know the code, follow these steps to select a coordinate
system:
■Click .
■In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1598), select
a category.
■Select from a list of available coordinate systems.
Select a coordinate system that both the provider and AutoCAD Map
3D support.
■Click Properties to view the properties of the selected coordinate
system.
■Click OK.
4Click OK.
You must define a schema for the new data store. A confirmation message
prompts you to use the Schema Editor (page 1739) to create (page 596) or
import (page 606) the schema for the data store.
Creating a Data Store | 589
The new data store is created when you click Apply in the Schema Editor.
You are connected to it automatically.
Creating FDO-Enabled SQL Server Spatial Data Stores
You can create a SQL Server data store in native SQL Server format (page 559)
and you can create an extended SQL Server Spatial data store (page 561) with
FDO metadata.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial formats, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page
628).
FDO-enabled Data Stores
You specify whether the new data store will be FDO-enabled or not by selecting
Use FDO Enabled Schema when you create a data store.
FDO-enabled data stores include additional FDO metadata, but otherwise use
native SQL Server schema capabilities.
■Such metadata provides a mechanism for ensuring that class and property
names are maintained when you use Bulk Copy to move the data to a
different format and back again. For SQL Server, the cases where class and
property names are not maintained are rare, since SQL Server can handle
names with any Unicode characters. The names cannot be longer than
128 characters, which is not usually a problem.
■FDO data stores maintain class inheritance, while non-FDO data stores do
not. ApplySchema for non_FDO data stores maintains the inherited
properties for sub-classes but not the relationships between classes and
sub-classes.
■Object and object collection properties are supported only with FDO
metadata.
■Revision number support for optimistic concurrency is included only with
FDO metadata.
■If you select Use FDO Enabled Schema when you create a data store, some
columns or tables may be renamed in the SQL Server database to avoid
590 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
limitations in SQL Server. The data itself is not altered and can still be
queried by an external application. You can later delete the metadata table.
NOTE It is recommended that you use FDO-enabled schemas only if you need
their additional capabilities. Otherwise, choose the default, non-FDO-enabled
schema.
Selecting a Coordinate System for a Spatial Context
Once you create a data store, you create and apply a schema to it. The schema
defines the table and columns into which you will put data. For FDO geometry
properties, there are two possible SQL Server Spatial column types: geometry
and geography. The geography type is used for geodetic (lat/long) coordinate
systems and the geometry type is used for non-geodetic coordinate systems.
For both, a spatial index with default parameters is created automatically.
SQL Server Spatial includes a catalog of geodetic coordinate systems, but not
non-geodetic coordinate systems. Both geometry and geography column types
save SRID values, but only geography type columns reference an entry in the
catalog, and in this case the SRID numbers are EPSG numbers.
In AutoCAD Map 3D, when you define a spatial context, you select a
coordinate system from the Mentor catalog. To use this coordinate system
with SQL Server Spatial, AutoCAD Map 3D must translate the coordinate
system information from Mentor into an SRID. SRID is the only identifier that
SQL Server can use for both geodetic and non-geodetic coordinate systems.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the EPSG code of the coordinate system as the SRID.
The spatial context creation can fail if either of the following is true:
■The coordinate system does not have an EPSG code.
■The coordinate system is in the SQL Server catalog but its SQL Server WKT
definition is not recognized by Mentor.
To resolve these situations, use a translation table in the file
ExtendedCoordSys.txt. By default, this file is stored in FDO\bin\com in the
AutoCAD Map 3D installation folder.
If the coordinate system does not have an EPSG code, add it to
ExtendedCoordSys.txt and specify an SRIDfor it. Choose an SRID number that
is not an EPSG code. The ExtendedCoordSys.txt file contains instructions for
doing this.
If the SQL Server WKT definition is not recognized by mentor, add the
coordinate system to ExtendedCoordSys.txt (if it is not already there) and set
Creating FDO-Enabled SQL Server Spatial Data Stores | 591
the WKT to the Mentor version. The WKT specified in the file takes precedence
over the WKT in the SQL Server catalog.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial formats, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page
628).
To create a data store for SQL Server Spatial
1On the Task Pane, click either the Map Explorer (page 2068) or Display
Manager (page 2060) tab.
2Click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
3In the Data Connections By Provider list in the Data Connect window,
select Add SQL Server Spatial Connection).
4In the right-hand pane, enter a connection name (the name you will call
this data store in AutoCAD Map 3D) and the information required to
connect to the data store, for example, a service name.
NOTE Do not use the same name you used when you created a user for the
data store (page 584).
5Log into the service for the store, using either Windows authentication
or SQL Server authentication.
6In the Data Store list, select Add New Data Store (or type a name that
does not appear in the list already) and press Enter.
You are asked if you want to create a new data store. Click Yes.
7In the Create Data Store Dialog Box (page 1747) for this provider, enter the
settings for the new data store.
Specify whether the new data store will be FDO-enabled or not by selecting
or clearing Use FDO Enabled Schema. FDO-enabled data stores include
additional FDO metadata, but otherwise use native SQL Server schema
capabilities.
8Click OK.
If the data store is created successfully, a confirmation message prompts
you to edit its schema. Use the Schema Editor to create (page 596) or import
(page 606) the schema for the data store.
592 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
The Concept tab for this topic describes issues concerning geometric and
geogra[hic properties, as well as issues with coordinate systems for SQL
Server Spatial data stores.
You are connected to the new data store automatically.
Deleting a Feature Source
When you delete a feature source (page 2063), you remove all of its data and
stylization information from layers in the current map that reference its data
store. The data store (page 2059) itself is unaffected.
To delete a feature source, you must first disconnect from it.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
deleting the templates that link records in an external database to objects in a
drawing, see Editing a Link Template (page 538).
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Overview of Bringing In Data (page 291)
To delete a feature source
1In Map Explorer, click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
2In the Data Connections By Provider list in the Data Connect window,
right-click the feature source (page 2063) to delete and click Disconnect.
Feature source entries display page icons. Each entry below a feature
source is a feature class within that feature source.
3Right-click the feature source again and click Delete.
Working with Schemas
Use the Schema Editor to work with schemas
Deleting a Feature Source | 593
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
Overview of Working with Schemas
Geospatial data is stored in a hierarchical fashion, like a set of tables: each
row within a table is an individual feature, and each column is a property
(page 2071) of that feature. The entire table (including its name, column names,
data types, default values, and constraints) represents a feature class (page 2063).
The set of related tables is called a schema, and the entire collection of data
resides in a data store.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to create a new SDF file
and import a schema.
■Show me how to delete properties from
a schema.
■Show me how to append a feature class
to an SDF file.
■Show me how to limit what can be
entered in a field.
Procedure
■To edit a schema (page 612)
Tutorial
■Exercise 3: Edit the schema
Workflow
■Add a Property to an SDF Schema
594 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Add a New Feature Class to an FDO
Data Source
GIS Skill
■Create a GIS data store (SDF) to be
populated from various sources
■Edit an existing schema (SDF)
■Limit what can be entered in a field
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
Use this method...To do this...
In the Schema Editor, select Schemas in
the Schema tree. Click New Schema on
the Schema Editor toolbar.
See Creating a Schema (page 596)
Create a schema
In the Schema Editor, select Schemas in
the Schema tree. Click Import Schema on
the Schema Editor toolbar.
See Importing and Exporting a Schema
(page 606)
Import a schema
In the Schema Editor, select Schemas in
the Schema tree. Click Export Schema on
the Schema Editor toolbar.
See Importing and Exporting a Schema
(page 606)
Export a schema
Overview of Working with Schemas | 595
Use this method...To do this...
In the Schema Editor, click any schema
(page 2073), feature class (page 2063), or
property (page 2071).
See Viewing a Schema (page 608)
View a schema
In the Schema Editor, click any schema,
feature class, or property. Change any set-
tings.
See Editing a Schema (page 610)
Edit a schema
In the Schema Editor, right-click any
schema, feature class, or property. Click
Delete.
See Deleting Schemas (page 613)
Delete a schema
See also:
■Schema Editor (page 1739)
Creating a Schema
Use the Schema Editor to define a new schema (page 2073) in a new (page 586)
or existing feature source (page 2063) for a database FDO provider (page 2063)
(Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or Oracle) or for an SDF data store. You cannot
create a schema for an existing SHP feature source, but you can create a new
file-based data store (page 586) and create a schema for it during the creation
process. You must use ESRI tools to create an ArcSDE schema—you cannot
use AutoCAD Map 3D to create a schema for ArcSDE.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
Some FDO Providers allow the client to override the default logical and physical
mapping specified in their schema. You can use the Schema Editor to override
classes, physical table names (to create a new table), Oracle tablespace names,
MySQL storage engines, table-type mapping (base or concrete), properties,
596 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
and column names when you define a new schema. You cannot map to an
existing table.
If you are mapping to an existing table or view in another data store (page
2059), make sure all column overrides correctly map to existing columns. If you
map to a table or view with a different owner, have the owner of that table
grant access to the FDO data store. You can create a local view that selects
from the other table, and map to the local view, but this may not be necessary.
The local view is created automatically if it is not present when you apply
your changes.
If you are mapping to a table and column in the current data store that does
not yet exist, make sure that the column name is valid for your database.
You must create schema elements hierarchically: create the schema first, then
its feature classes (page 2063), and then its properties.
For feature sources from some FDO Providers, you can create multiple schemas
within the same feature source and change (page 610) the schemas after you
define and save them the first time.
You can view (page 608) a schema from any FDO Provider, but you cannot edit
or delete it if there are existing features that use it.
See also:
■Schema Editor (page 1739)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor (page 599)
■Importing and Exporting a Schema (page 606)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
■Deleting Schemas (page 613)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
Creating a Schema | 597
To create a schema
1Connect (page 303) to the feature source in which you want to create the
schema (page 2073).
2In Map Explorer, select the feature source (page 2063) in the connection
tree (at the top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor (page 1739), expand the Schema tree and do one of
the following:
■To create a schema, select Schemas (the top-most node in the Schema
tree) and click New Schema on the Schema Editor toolbar.
■To create a feature class (page 2063), select the parent schema in the
Schema tree and click New Feature Class on the Schema Editor toolbar.
■To create a property (page 2071), select the parent feature class in the
Schema tree and click New Property on the Schema Editor toolbar.
4Specify the settings for the new schema element (page 1739) in the
right-hand pane.
See Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor (page 599) for information
on limiting the valid values for a property.
5Repeat the preceding two steps as required to create other schema
elements.
6Click Apply to apply your changes and leave the Schema Editor open.
When you click Apply or OK, your changes are submitted to the data
store. You can add feature classes and properties, but you cannot edit
your previous work.
7Click OK to apply any unsaved changes and close the Schema Editor.
598 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor
When you create a schema, you can limit the values that are valid for particular
properties. The types of constraints supported by AutoCAD Map 3D are
described in the following table.
Data Table BehaviorDescriptionType of Con-
straint
Any value outside the specified
range generates an error and you
must enter a different value.
Valid values must be
within the range spe-
cified. You can include or
Range
exclude the minimum
and maximum values. For
example, you can specify
1-10 inclusive, and then
1 and 10 are both valid.
Click the down-arrow to display the
list, and then choose one of the
items as a value for the property.
You supply the list entries
that are valid for the
property.
List
If you leave the property value
empty when you close the Data
The value of the property
cannot be empty.
Not null
Table, an error message prompts
you to enter a value.
If you enter a value that is used by
any other feature in this feature
The value of the property
must be unique within
Unique
class, an error message prompts youthe feature class. If you
to change it. You will not see thedefine the property as an
error message until you check in the
feature.
If the table has two columns that
together must be unique (like
auto-generated field, or
if it is defined in the data
store as a key field, it will
have this constraint.
"Lastname" and "Firstname"), a
message appears on each column
involved in the paired uniqueness
constraint.
Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor | 599
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
When you edit the properties (page 711) in the Data Table, you can enter only
the values allowed by the constraint. For example, for a Roads feature, you
can specify that the values for the Number_Of_Lanes property be within the
range 1 through 8. If you enter 9 lanes, you will receive an error message.
You will see an error message as soon as you enter the invalid value. When
you check the feature in, your edits are validated again against the data store
and you may be notified of further errors, depending on the capabilities of
the data provider.
You cannot edit a schema to convert an existing field to use a different
constraint type if the table already contains data. The table must be empty.
Not every data provider supports all constraints. The following table shows
supported constraints by provider.
UniqueNot NullListRangeProvider
YesYesYesYesOracle
YesYesYesYesPostgr-
eSQL/PostGIS
YesYesYesYesSQL Server
YesYesYesYesSQL Server
Spatial
YesYesYesYesSQLite
YesYesNoNoMySQL
NoYesYesYesSDF
YesYesNoNoArcSDE
NoYesNoNoSHP
600 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
The Schema Editor checks the provider capability and allows only the
constraints supported by that provider.
A property that uses constraints can have any data type, except for Boolean
(which can have not-null constraints only). You cannot constrain properties
with BLOB or CLOB data types.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to limit what can be
entered in a field.
Procedure
■To create a constrained property (page
601)
Tutorial
■Exercise 4: Add a property
GIS Skill
■Limit what can be entered in a field
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
See also:
■Schema Editor (page 1739)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
To create a constrained property
1In the Schema Editor (page 1739), expand the Schema tree and select the
property to constrain.
Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor | 601
2Ensure that the data type for the property allows the constraint you want.
For example, Boolean properties can have not-null constraints only.
3Do one of the following:
■To specify a range for the property, set Constraint Type to Range and
specify the range values.
In the Constraint Type field, click the down-arrow and click Range.
Enter a minimum and maximum value for the range and, for each
one, specify whether the range is inclusive or exclusive of that value.
For example, if the range is 1-10, specify whether 1 and 10 are included
or not.
■To specify a list of possible values, set Constraint Type to List and
specify the list values.
In the Constraint Type field, click the down-arrow and click List. Click
Value List and click . Type the list, pressing Enter after each item.
If the data type for this property is String , specify the maximum
length of the string before entering values in the list.
If the data type for this property is Decimal , define the precision and
scale before entering values in the list. If you enter values in the list
that exceed the precision or scale, those values are rounded.
If the data type for this property is DateTime, the list editor displays
a calendar from which you can select specific dates. Once you choose
the first date, the list creates a new entry and you can choose the next
date.
When you click OK, AutoCAD Map 3D checks the values in the list.
If the values are not valid, for example, if they do not match the data
type or they exceed the length of the string definition, you will see
an error message.
■To ensure that the property is not allowed to have an empty value,
set Nullable to False.
In the Nullable field, click the down-arrow and click True or False. If
you set Nullable to False, you can enter a Default Value to ensure that
new features have an entry for this property.
4To specify a “uniqueness” constraint, select the appropriate feature class
in the tree on the left.
You can specify a single-property uniqueness constraint or a
composite-property uniqueness constraint. A single-property uniqueness
constraint ensures that the value for that property is unique within the
feature class. A composite-property uniqueness constraint (sometimes
602 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
called a “paired constraint”) specifies multiple properties whose combined
values are unique. For example, you can constrain the combined
Street_Number, Street_Name, and City fields to uniquely identify a
building address.
■Click New (under Specify Constraints (And The Order)).
■Select the boxes for the properties that must have unique values.
The properties designated as unique appear in the list at the bottom
of the dialog box.
■If desired, use the up and down arrows for the list to change the order
of the properties.
5Click Apply.
Exposing a Native Database View in a Schema
A database view is a virtual or logical table composed of the result set of a
query. Unlike ordinary tables in a relational database, a view is not part of the
physical schema. It is a dynamic, virtual table computed from data in the
database. Changing the data in a table alters the data shown in the view.
Views can provide advantages over tables:
■You can use a view to make a subset of data available to certain users.
■A view can join and simplify multiple tables into a single virtual table.
■Views can aggregate data (using a sum, average, or other function) to
calculate and present data.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
Exposing a Native Database View in a Schema | 603
Mapping Existing Views to Feature Classes
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically displays as classes existing database views
that are defined in their native databases. If the view includes geometry, it is
displayed as a feature class. The following restrictions apply:
■You cannot create or modify the view definition within AutoCAD Map
3D.
■In the Data Table, you can edit data in views only if you have permissions
to do so and only if the data store supports editing of view-based data.
■The ability to insert, update, and delete data in the view depends on how
the view is defined in its native data store.
■For existing Oracle schemas, geometry that is included in a view needs a
separate entry in the user_sdo_geom_metadata table. This allows AutoCAD
Map 3D to determine the correct spatial context to use when for that view
when displaying it as a feature class.
If you plan to use a database view with AutoCAD Map 3D, keep in mind the
following points :
■Your native view must contain a primary key.
■Your native view must use a spatial index.
In the Schema Editor, the columns defined for the view appear as properties,
but you cannot edit them. However, you can use the Schema Editor to create
feature classes and properties that mimic database views.
For example, although you have an Oracle table, Rivers, with 20 properties,
you may want certain people to see only six of those properties. You can use
the Schema Editor to create a new feature class based on the existing Rivers
table, and add the six properties you want to expose.
Schema Editor allows mapping directly into the physical database objects
(tables or views).
Accessing Views from Native Schema
In addition to mapping feature classes to existing views in a FDO-enabled
datastore, you can “reverse-engineer” views in native, existing,
non-FDO-enabled datastores into feature classes.
To do this, the following must be true:
■The primary key or unique index columns must be exposed in the view.
604 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
If the view contains a join, columns that identify each row uniquely must
also be exposed.
If a class has no primary key, you can still expose it in AutoCAD Map 3D,
but it will be read only.
■For Oracle data stores, if there is geometry in the view, there must be an
entry in user_sdo_geom_metadata for that geometry. This will provide the
spatial context and coordinate system information.
■For Oracle non-simple views, you can specify which columns to use for a
primary key for the resulting feature class. Provide this information with
the view, as shown in this example:
alter view <viewname> add constraint <constraintname> primary key
(columnnames) disable novalidate;
NOTE This procedure is needed only for FDO (page 2062)-enabled schemas. For
existing schema data stores, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically displays the view as
a feature class, with no further action on your part.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
To create a feature class that maps to a database view
1Create an FDO-enabled data store.
You can use the Schema Editor to do this. See Creating a Schema (page
596)
2Create a database view using the native tools for your database.
For Oracle, use sqlplus. For SQL Server, use sqlcmd. For MySQL, use
mysql.
3Reconnect to the data store in AutoCAD Map 3D.
4In the Schema Editor (page 1739), select the target schema Name and click
New Feature Class.
For information about creating feature classes and properties, see Editing
a Schema (page 610).
5If the Logical Feature Class tab is displayed, click the Physical
Configurations tab.
Exposing a Native Database View in a Schema | 605
6For Table Name, type the name of the view you created in step 1. Click
OK.
7Switch back to the Logical Feature Class tab and type the name, class
type, and other required information.
8Click New Property to add a property.
9Switch to the Physical Configuration tab.
10 Type the name of the view column (from the view you created in step 1)
to map to the new property. Click OK.
11 Switch back to the Logical Property tab and set the property attributes.
Attributes such as data type, length, scale, precision, nullability,
uniqueness, and other constraints must match the corresponding column
attributes. For example, you cannot create a property that has the string
data type and map it to a column that uses the number data type.
12 Repeat steps 8 through 11 to create the remaining properties.
13 Be sure to fill in the Primary Key column for the new view record before
you check it in (if it is not defined to be auto-generated).
Importing and Exporting a Schema
You can export a schema (page 2073) as an XML file to do any of the following:
■Share a schema you created in the Schema Editor with other AutoCAD
Map 3D or GIS-software users.
■Back up a schema you created in the Schema Editor as an XML file.
■Save your work in progress if the original data source or directory becomes
unavailable.
You can import an XML schema that you exported, and use it to define a new
schema for another data store. This is useful for creating multiple data stores
based on the same schema.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
606 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
The AutoCAD Map 3D XML schema format is a subset of the Geography
Markup Language (GML). For information about GML, go to
http://www.opengis.net/gml. GML was standardized by the Open Geospatial
Consortium (OGC). For information about OGC, go to
http://www.opengeospatial.org. You can also consult the FDO API Reference and
The Essential FDO.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to create a new SDF file
and import a schema.
Procedure
■To create a data store for a database
provider (page 588)
■To create a data store for a file-based
data provider (page 589)
■To create a schema (page 598)
■To import an XML or XMI schema
(page 608)
Tutorial
■Exercise 3: Edit the schema
Workflow
■Prepare an Existing Oracle Database
for Use with AutoCAD Map 3D
GIS Skill
■Create a GIS data store (SDF) to be
populated from various sources
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Setting Up Database Users (page 584)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
■Working with Schemas (page 593)
Importing and Exporting a Schema | 607
See also:
■Schema Editor (page 1739)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
To import an XML or XMI schema
1Connect to the feature source into which you want to import the schema.
2In Map Explorer, select the feature source in the connection tree (at the
top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor (page 1739), select Schemas (the top-most node in
the Schema tree) and click Import Schema on the Schema Editor toolbar.
4In the Open dialog box, choose the file format for the file you are
importing (XML or XMI). Navigate to the file you want and click Open.
The Schema tree displays the imported schema.
5Click Apply to make the changes permanent.
To export an XML schema
1Connect to the feature source whose schema you want to export.
2In Map Explorer, select the feature source in the connection tree (at the
top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor, select Schemas (the top-most node in the Schema
tree) and click Export Schema on the Schema Editor toolbar.
4In the Save dialog box, navigate to the desired directory and enter a name
for the file.
5Click Save.
Viewing a Schema
You can inspect a schema (page 2073) for any feature source (page 2063), including
those of FDO providers (page 2063) that don't support updateable schemas. When
608 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
you open an updateable schema, you can edit (page 610) it. If you change an
updateable schema mistakenly, click Cancel to undo (page 614) the changes.
Providers that support updateable schemas include Microsoft SQL Server,
MySQL, SDF, and Oracle.
When you open a non-updateable schema, you cannot edit it.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
See also:
■Schema Editor (page 1739)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
■Importing and Exporting a Schema (page 606)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
■Deleting Schemas (page 613)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
To view a schema
1Connect to the feature source whose schema you want to view.
2In Map Explorer, select the feature source in the connection tree (at the
top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor (page 1739), expand the Schema tree and then click
any schema, feature class, or property to view its settings in the right-hand
pane.
Viewing a Schema | 609
4When you finish inspecting the schema, click Cancel to close the Schema
Editor.
Editing a Schema
You can edit a schema (page 2073), feature class (page 2063), or property (page 2071)
if the FDO provider (page 2063) supports updateable schemas (for example,
Microsoft SQL Server, SQL Server Spatial, MySQL, Oracle, and SDF all support
updateable schemas). For more information about data types and supported
functionality, see Schema Editor (page 1739).
If you open a non-updateable schema in the Schema Editor you can view
(page 608) its settings, but you cannot change them.
You cannot edit or delete any schema, feature class, or property if there are
existing features that use it.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
Z and M Dimensions
The FDO Provider for SQL Server Spatial does not support Z and M dimensions,
due to limitations of their support by SQL Server 2008. When you define new
geometry properties for feature classes in the AutoCAD Map 3D Schema Editor,
the options to include Z and M will not be available.
Naming Restrictions
You can use the Schema Editor to import a feature schema collection from an
XML file. When importing, you can modify these schemas to conform to the
restrictions of the current provider connection.
For example, if you are connected to an Oracle data store, feature class names
may be limited to 22 characters. If you import a feature schema collection
that includes feature class names that are longer, you will need to rename
those feature classes during import to meet the restrictions of the Oracle
connection.
610 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
If you import an FDO-enabled SQL Server Spatial schema collection into a
non-FDO schema connection, Schema Editor will display error messages that
tell you which names need to be adjusted.
NOTE If you try to set a physical override (for example, name a property column
to something other than the property name), you'll see an error message about
accessing protected memory.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to delete properties from
a schema.
■Show me how to append a feature class
to an SDF file.
Procedure
■To edit a schema (page 612)
Tutorial
■Exercise 3: Edit the schema
Workflow
■Add a Property to an SDF Schema
■Add a New Feature Class to an FDO
Data Source
GIS Skill
■Edit an existing schema (SDF)
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
■Setting Up Constraints in the Schema
Editor (page 599)
■Importing and Exporting a Schema
(page 606)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
Editing a Schema | 611
See also:
■Schema Editor (page 1739)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
To edit a schema
NOTE If you edit the schema for a survey data store, make sure that you do not
inadvertently remove existing fields or classes. Doing so may affect the performance
of the survey data store.
1Connect to the feature source whose schema you want to edit.
2In Map Explorer, select the feature source in the connection tree (at the
top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor (page 1739), expand the Schema tree and click the
schema, feature class, or property to edit.
The current settings appear in the right-hand pane.
4Edit the settings for the schema element. (page 1739)
The settings you can change depend on what the provider supports and
which settings are editable. For example, the long transaction (page 2067)
section does not appear or is unavailable if the provider does not support
versioning.
5To add a new feature class, select the schema entry on the right and click
New Feature Class at the top of the window. Specify the information for
the new feature class on the left side of the window.
6To add a new property, select the feature class entry for that property on
the right and click New Property at the top of the window. Specify the
information for the property on the left side of the window.
See Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor (page 599) for information
on limiting the valid values for a property.
7For a feature class and property, click the Physical Configurations tab
and edit the physical settings if necessary.
612 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Each provider maps a correspondence between a schema element and a
physical object in a feature source. The physical structure of feature sources
varies by provider, as do the types of schema mappings and default
settings. Oracle, for example, maps each feature class onto a table in the
Oracle database where the feature source resides, giving the class and
table the same name. You can override these defaults by changing the
settings on the Physical Configurations tab. The settings on this tab vary
by provider. The tab is unavailable for providers whose defaults cannot
be changed.
8Click Apply.
9Repeat the preceding four steps as required to edit other schema elements.
10 Click OK to make all the changes permanent.
Deleting Schemas
When you delete a schema (page 2073), feature class (page 2063), or property (page
2071) in the Schema Editor, its icon disappears from the Schema tree, along with
the icons of its child elements (if any). However, the changes are not transferred
to the underlying feature source (page 2063) until you apply them. If you delete
a feature class, for example, the class and its properties are removed from the
Schema tree, but its table remains in the feature source until you click Apply.
You can undo (page 614) changes until you click Apply.
NOTE You cannot delete a schema, feature class, or property if feature data exist
for that item.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
See also:
■Schema Editor (page 1739)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
Deleting Schemas | 613
■Importing and Exporting a Schema (page 606)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
To delete schema elements
1Connect to the feature source containing the schema elements to delete.
2In Map Explorer, right-click the desired connection in the connection
tree and select Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor (page 1739), expand the Schema tree to see its feature
classes and properties.
4Right-click the schema, feature class, or property to delete, and click
Delete for that schema element.
5When prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The Schema tree updates to show the deletion.
6Repeat the preceding two steps as required to delete other schema
elements.
7Click OK to make all the deletions permanent.
Undoing Schema Changes
When you make changes in the Schema Editor, the Schema tree and right-hand
pane reflect your changes. However, the changes are not applied to the
underlying feature source until you click Apply. If you click Cancel before you
click Apply, all changes you made since the last Apply are canceled.
614 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
See also:
■Schema Editor (page 1739)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Creating a Schema (page 596)
■Importing and Exporting a Schema (page 606)
■Viewing a Schema (page 608)
■Editing a Schema (page 610)
■Deleting Schemas (page 613)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS
(page 628).
To discard all Schema Editor changes since the last Apply
■In the Schema Editor, click Cancel.
Migrating Data
Use Bulk Copy to copy data from one feature source (page 2063) to another,
either in the same format or in a different one.
NOTE For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data
stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
Migrating Data | 615
Overview of Migrating Data
You can use Bulk Copy to copy data from one feature source (page 2063) to
another, either in the same format or in a different one.
You can move DWG objects and their attributes to a variety of geospatial
formats and, in some cases, move the data back into AutoCAD drawings.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to copy data from one
data store to another.
Procedure
■To copy data from one feature source
to another (page 621)
■To fix a Bulk Copy geometry problem
in the original data store (page 626)
■To fix a Bulk Copy geometry problem
in the resulting data store (page 626)
Tutorial
■Lesson 3: Move SDF Data to a Different
Geospatial Format
Workflow
■Copy SHP File Data to Microsoft SQL
Server, MySQL, or Oracle
■Create ArcSDE Features from Unclassi-
fied Drawings
GIS Skill
■Bulk copy data from a SHP file to an SDF
file
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Creating a Data Store (page 586)
■Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628)
616 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Use this method...To move data...
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel
➤ Map 3D Export.
See Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
From DWG format to SDF
Click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer
panel ➤ As SDF 2.
See Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format
(page 1417).
From DWG format to SDF 2 (an earlier
version of SDF)
In the Display Manager, right-click a layer
➤ Export Layer Data To SDF.
See Saving or Exporting a Display Manager
Layer (page 1469).
From a Display Manager layer to SDF
In Map Explorer, click Tools ➤ Bulk Copy.
See Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page
617).
From one geospatial format to another
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy)
You can use Bulk Copy to copy data from one feature source (page 2063) to
another, either in the same format or in a different one.
NOTE For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data
stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
Using Bulk Copy, you can copy the complete feature source (page 2063) or a
subset based on a specified schema (page 2073), feature class (page 2063), or property
(page 2071). You can also filter a Display Manager layer using an expression,
and then use Bulk Copy to create a data store that contains only the filtered
data.
What You Can Do With Bulk Copy
Use Bulk Copy to do the following:
■Make your own copy of data owned by another department.
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) | 617
■Upgrade from file-based (SDF or SHP) data storage to multi-user database
storage (Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or Oracle), which provides advanced
features, such as versioning (page 2078) and long transaction (page 2067).
■Move joined data and calculated fields into a new data store.
■Transform coordinate systems easily. For example, you can do any of the
following:
■Assign a coordinate system to a data store that does not have one.
■Create a new data store whose coordinate system is different from the
source. The target class uses the override coordinate system as the
projection for the spatial context.
■Convert a foreign schema to a native format.
Bulk Copying To SDF Format
If you create a new SDF file (page 589) in AutoCAD Map 3D, you can use it as
a target for Bulk Copy. However, you must delete the default schema (page
614) before copying data to the new SDF file.
Bulk Copying to SHP Format
A single SHP file can hold only one class. To copy multiple classes, to an empty
folder through the FDO SHP provider. When you copy to that connection,
Bulk Copy creates a new SHP file for each class you copy. Do not create a new
SHP file in Schema Editor and use the new SHP as your Bulk Copy target.
A SHP schema cannot be modified once it is applied.To avoid this limitation
when you copy SDF data to SHP, export the SDF schema. Then, when you
create the target SHP schema, delete its default schema and import the SDF
schema. This way, you can fix any errors in the schema. During the Bulk Copy,
select the feature class and property names in the To column and match them
exactly to the From column.
Depending on the size of the file, you can also import the SDF data and export
it as SHP.
Bulk Copying To or From SQL Server Spatial
When you copy data from an FDO-enabled SQL Server Spatial data store to a
non-FDO data store, class and property names may not be accepted by the
destination data store because naming rules vary between providers. You can
618 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
use schema mappings to rename schema elements that you copy, to be sure
they meet the naming rules of the destination data store.
You can also pass in a set of schema capabilities to the target data store, so
the cloned schemas conform to the capabilities of that data store.
When you copy geodetic polygons with clockwise rings to SQL Server Spatial,
check Unmatched Data Or Geometric Type Errors as an error type to ignore.
For geography, SQL Server Spatial considers the inside of a polygon to be to
the left of the outer boundary. If a polygon with a clockwise boundary is
inserted, the polygon actually covers the rest of the world, excluding what
appears to be inside the polygon from an onscreen perspective. If you ignore
unmatched geometry type errors when using Bulk Copy, the geometry and
orientation are adjusted when the target is SQL Server Spatial. If you do not
check this option and you copy a polygon with the wrong orientation to SQL
Server Spatial, that object will fail to copy.
Also, SQL Server Spatial does not currently support such polygons that are
bigger than one hemisphere.
Other Ways to Migrate Data
If you are moving data from DWG format to any other format, you cannot
use Bulk Copy. Instead, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
If you are moving geospatial data into SDF format, it may be easier to save or
export its Display Manager layer to SDF, without going through Bulk Copy.
See Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer (page 1469).
Things to Remember
When using Bulk Copy, keep in mind the following points :
■The copied schema is created if it does not exist in the destination feature
source.
■The names of schemas, feature classes (page 2063), and properties in the
source feature source do not need to match the names in the destination
feature source.
■You can save or load an XML mapping file to set up the mapping between
the source and destination feature sources.
■You can copy geometry with no transformation of the coordinates.
■You must make sure that the data you are moving are inside the extents
of the destination data store. (When you create a data store (page 586), you
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) | 619
specify the minimum and maximum X and Y spatial extents for the new
data store.) MySQL and Oracle support expanding the extents automatically
if incoming data are beyond the scope of the extents.
■If you do not have adequate rights to the target data store, you must either
create a new, empty data store as the target or ask your administrator to
grant you the rights required to insert data in the target tables.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to copy data from one
data store to another.
Procedure
■To copy data from one feature source
to another (page 621)
■To fix a Bulk Copy geometry problem
in the original data store (page 626)
■To fix a Bulk Copy geometry problem
in the resulting data store (page 626)
Tutorial
■Lesson 3: Move SDF Data to a Different
Geospatial Format
Workflows
■Copy SHP File Data to Microsoft SQL
Server, MySQL, or Oracle
■Create ArcSDE Features from Unclassi-
fied Drawings
GIS Skill
■Bulk copy data from a SHP file to an SDF
file
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
■Understanding How Bulk Copy Con-
verts Data Types (page 623)
620 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Fixing Geometry Issues After a Bulk
Copy (page 625)
■Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Informa-
tion (page 626)
■Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628)
■Saving or Exporting a Display Manager
Layer (page 1469)
NOTE For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data
stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
To copy data from one feature source to another
1Connect (page 308) to the source and destination feature source (page 2063)
using Data Connect.
NOTE To copy data to SHP, connect to an empty folder through the FDO
SHP provider and use that connection as your Bulk Copy target. Do not create
a new SHP file in Schema Editor and use the new SHP as the target.
NOTE If you are copying data to a new SDF file that you created in AutoCAD
Map 3D, delete the default schema before you use Bulk Copy. See Deleting
Schemas (page 613).
2If necessary, use Data Connect to specify a new coordinate system for
the data stores you plan to use as the source and target in Bulk Copy.
For example, you can assign a coordinate system to a data store that does
not specify one, or change the coordinate system for a data store that has
one.
3Add any desired joins, calculated fields, or filters to the Display Manager
layers you plan to copy.
Bulk Copy will copy the resulting data to the target data store.
4In Map Explorer, click Tools ➤ Bulk Copy.
5In the Bulk Copy (page 1744) dialog box, under From, select a feature source
in the Connection Name list. This is the source, from which the data will
be copied.
Select from all Display Manager layers and connected feature sources.
Filtered layers display a filter icon in the list.
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) | 621
If you select a survey data store, you can select only a survey point group
as the source. To copy multiple point groups, copy them one by one.
You can also drag the originating feature source onto the target source
in the Data Connect dialog box to initiate a Bulk Copy. The item you
drag becomes the From entry and the item you drop it on becomes the
To entry.
6If the selected feature source supports versioning, select a version in its
Version list.
7Under To, select the destination feature source in the top list.
8If the destination feature source supports versioning, select a version in
its Version list.
The schema trees in Bulk Copy update automatically as you make your
choices.
9Under Select Items To Copy, check the boxes for the individual schemas,
features classes, and properties to copy to the destination feature source.
Selecting any schema element automatically selects all its child elements
(for example, selecting a feature class also selects all its properties). A
square (instead of a check) in a check box means that some of the children
of the element are not selected.
Calculated fields are appended after the native properties. If there are
joined fields, they are grouped under a node representing the join. If
there are multiple joins, they appear as they do in the Manage Layer Data
dialog box (page 1607).
In the right-hand tree, AutoCAD Map 3D displays a default name for the
item. Select the default name and enter a different one if you want.
The Info area displays the Class (or Connection), Source Coordinate
System, Filter Info, and Target Coordinate System. If there are multiple
coordinate systems for the classes under the selected connection, the
coordinate system field displays “VARIES.”
10 Select the error types to ignore during processing. For any error types
whose boxes are not selected, Bulk Copy stops processing and reports
errors when they occur.
If the coordinate system is unknown, it is best to select Coordinate System
under Ignore the Following Errors During the Copy Process. For more
information about these options, see Bulk Copy (page 1744).
When you copy geodetic polygons with clockwise rings to SQL Server
Spatial, check Unmatched Data Or Geometric Type Errors under Ignore
622 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
the Following Errors During the Copy Process to adjust the geometry and
orientation properly.
11 To save the current settings in an XML mapping file, click Save under
Schema Mapping. Click Load to open a saved mapping file.
NOTE Before loading a mapping file, connect to the source and destination
feature sources.
12 To begin the Bulk Copy operation, click Copy Now.
The data for the specified schema elements is copied from the source
feature source to the destination feature source.
Bulk Copy displays the progress of the operation. If you click Cancel
during the operation, the copying process stops but the data does not
return to its original state. There is no way to roll back the data from
within AutoCAD Map 3D once the process is initiated.
When the operation is complete, Bulk Copy reports the results. Click
View Log in the Bulk Copy Results dialog box to see details (page 626).
Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types
During copying, Bulk Copy retains the same data type when possible but
performs a conversion if needed. For example, if you are copying data from
a source that uses a Boolean data type and that data type is not available in
the target, Bulk Copy converts the data to byte values, if available. If byte is
not available, Int16 is used, and so on. The following table illustrates how
conversion is performed (for each source data type, Bulk Copy tries to create
target data type 1, but if that is not possible it tries data type 2, and so on):
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data
to GIS (page 628).
Target data
type 4
Target data
type 3
Target data
type 2
Target data
type 1
Source data
type
Int64Int32Int16ByteBoolean
Int64Int32Int16Byte
Int64Int32Int16
Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types | 623
Target data
type 4
Target data
type 3
Target data
type 2
Target data
type 1
Source data
type
Int64Int32
Int32Int64
SingleDoubleDecimal
DecimalDoubleSingle
SingleDecimalDouble
The following FDO providers (page 2063) support the following data types:
SQL Serv-
er and
SQL Serv-
er Spatial
WFSSHPSDFODBCMySQLArc-
SDE
Oracle
YYYYYYYBoolean
YYYYYYByte
YYYYYYYYDate/Time
YYYYYYYInt16
YYYYYYYYInt32
YYYYYYInt64
YYYYYYYDecimal
YYYYYYYSingle
YYYYYYYDouble
YYYYYYYYString
Bulk Copy copies geometry properties as is, except that it will convert an arc
to line segments if the destination does not support arcs.
624 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Bulk Copy uses the following rules when copying an auto-generated identifier
from the source feature source (page 2063):
■If the identifier exists in the destination schema (page 2073) and is not
auto-generated, the identifier is copied from the source feature source.
■If the identifier exists in the destination schema and is auto-generated, the
identifier is generated by the destination provider.
■If the identifier does not exist in the destination schema and the destination
schema does not support auto-generated identifiers, the schema is created
with a non-auto-generated identifier and the identifier is copied from the
source feature source.
■If the identifier does not exist in the destination schema and the destination
schema supports auto-generated identifiers, the schema is created with an
auto-generated identifier and the identifier is generated by the destination
provider.
See also:
■Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617)
■Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information (page 626)
■Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628)
To copy data from one feature source to another (page 621)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data
to GIS (page 628).
Fixing Geometry Issues After a Bulk Copy
For foreign schemas, the Bulk Copy operation uses the first geometry it finds
to create the geometry in the target data store. If there are multiple spatial
indexes for the geometry properties in the original data store, the geometry
property in the resulting data store’s schema will be different from the order
in the original data store. As a result, the geometry in the new data store may
not match the geometry in the source.
You can fix this problem in the original data store or in the resulting data
store. If you fix the problem in the resulting data store, you modify the XML
file schema and import the modified version into the data store.
Fixing Geometry Issues After a Bulk Copy | 625
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data
to GIS (page 628).
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data
to GIS (page 628).
To fix a Bulk Copy geometry problem in the original data store
■Remove the unwanted spatial indexes from the geometric properties in
the original data store.
If only one geometric property is indexed, it is chosen as the main geometry
for the feature class.
To fix a Bulk Copy geometry problem in the resulting data store
1Connect to the new data store before you perform the Bulk Copy
operation.
2Using the Schema Editor (page 610), save the source data store to an XML
file (page 608).
3Edit the XML file and add the following to the <xs:complexType> entry
for the feature class in question, where {geom_prop_name} is the name of
the geometric property to use:
fdo:geometryName="{geom_prop_name}"
4Import the modified XML file (page 608) into the target data store and
apply the changes.
5Bulk Copy the data from the source to the target data store, making sure
to map the geometry properties properly before executing the Bulk Copy.
Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information
When you perform a Bulk Copy operation, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a log
file that displays information about the source and target of the Bulk Copy
operation. It lists any schemas (page 2073) you created, information about feature
classes (page 2063), the number of objects that were copied, and how much time
the operation took. Here is an example:
626 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
“Source ConnectionProperty: 'File', Value: 'C:\San
Francisco\County\SDF\bayarea_county.sdf'
Property: 'ReadOnly', Value: 'false'Target ConnectionProperty: 'File',
Value: 'C:\old_version.sdf'
Property: 'ReadOnly', Value: 'false'Creating schema 'My_Schema'
Property My_Schema:bayarea_county.COUNTY: String length is 0, setting
to 255
Property My_Schema:bayarea_county.FIPSSTCO: String length is 0,
setting to 255
Inserting class 'My_Schema:bayarea_county'
9 objects inserted
Elapsed Time: 0.000110 seconds
Total: 9 objects inserted”
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data
to GIS (page 628).
See also:
■Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617)
■Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types (page 623)
■Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data
to GIS (page 628).
To view the Bulk Copy log
1Run the Bulk Copy operation. (page 615)
2Click View Log in the Bulk Copy Results dialog box to see the log file.
NOTE The Bulk Copy operation stores its log files under %temp%, using the naming
convention bulkcopyxxxxx.log, where the x characters are replaced by numbers.
Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information | 627
Migrating DWG Data to GIS
You can move DWG objects and their attributes to a variety of geospatial
formats and, in some cases, move the data back into AutoCAD drawings.
NOTE When you export AutoCAD drawing data from AutoCAD Map 3D to a
geospatial data store, attributes remain with the geometry data but any visual
stylization you applied is lost, due to the different ways that the two environments
deal with stylization.
You can do the following:
■Export DWG data to the file-based SDF format (page 387)
■Export DWG data to Oracle (page 1461)
■Export the current map to DWG format (page 1459)
■Perform a round-trip data migration (page 1465) from DWG to SDF or Oracle
and back again.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to export DWG objects to
SDF
■Show me how to export styled DWG ob-
jects
■Show me how to convert the current
map to DWG format.
Procedure
■To export drawing objects to other file
formats (page 1408)
■To move drawing data to a spatial data
store and back using the import
method (page 1467)
■To move drawing data to a spatial data
store and back using the Data Connect
method (page 1467)
Tutorial
■Lesson 1: Convert Drawing Layers to
Feature Classes
628 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Workflow
■Create ArcSDE Features from Unclassi-
fied Drawings
GIS Skill
■Convert styled DWG objects to features
Related topics
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data
Stores, and Schemas (page 551)
■Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data
Store (page 1461)
■Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data
Store and Back Again (page 1465)
To move DWG data to a geospatial format
1Decide whether you will move the data to an existing data store, or create
a new data store for it.
2Decide whether you will use an existing schema or a new schema for the
data.
3Query the data from the DWG into your map. (page 354)
4Export the data to SDF (page 1417), or to an FDO data store (Oracle or ESRI
ArcSDE) (page 1462).
5After the drawing data has been moved to a GIS format, add new data to
it (page 687) by right-clicking one of its feature class layers and creating
a new feature.
Migrating DWG Data to GIS | 629
630
Visualization and Styling
Overview of Visualization and Styling
Style both drawing objects and GIS features to enhance the content of a map and
make it easy to read.
The methods for styling features and drawing objects are different.
DescriptionFor FeaturesFor Drawing Objects
Use the Display Manager to
style features and drawing ob-
Show or hide the Display Manager
(page 635)
Show or hide the Display Man-
ager (page 635)
jects in your maps, and to adjust
the draw order.
5
631
DescriptionFor FeaturesFor Drawing Objects
A layer is a set of objects. When
you add objects to your map,
Create a feature layer (page 308).Create a drawing layer (page ?).
you add them to a Display
Manager layer. Each layer can
have its own style.
Add a subset of objects from a
drawing or feature source to a
Display Manager layer.
Use the Add To Map With Query
option to filter the data from the
feature source (page 308).
Query the current drawing (page
1291) or attached drawings (page
1235) to bring in objects that
match certain criteria.
Change color, linetype, linetype
scale, line weight, or plotstyle.
Create a feature style. (page 641)Create a drawing style (page 660).
You can choose the symbol
used to represent point objects.
For drawing objects, add hatch,
text, or annotation. For features,
add labels.
A theme varies the style based
on data associated with the ob-
ject.
Create a feature theme (page 1168).Create a drawing theme (page
1181).
Use scale thresholds or ranges
to change the style as you zoom
Use scale ranges. (page 643)Use scale thresholds. (page 668)
in or out, for example, to turn
off text as you zoom out.
Specify a symbol style for a
point drawing layer. Use the
Style a point layer. (page 646)Style points (page 660).
Point Style area of the Style Edit-
or to create a style for a point
feature layer.
Specify an entity style for a line
drawing layer. Use the Line Style
Style a line layer. (page 649)Style lines. (page 660)
area of the Style Editor to create
a style for a line feature layer.
Specify an entity or hatch style
for a polygon drawing layer. Use
Style areas or polygons. (page 650)Style polygons. (page 660)
632 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
DescriptionFor FeaturesFor Drawing Objects
the Area Style area of the Style
Editor to create a style for a
polygon feature layer.
Layers are drawn from the bot-
tom up. Objects in the layer at
Change the display order of layers
(page 302).
Change the display order of lay-
ers (page 302).
the top of the Display Manager
are drawn last and appear on
top of other objects. If an object
is a member of more than one
layer, it is drawn based on the
highest layer to which it be-
longs. The Draw Order view
takes precedence over the order
in the Layers By Group view.
If a layer is turned off, objects
from that layer are hidden.
Hide layers or styles (page ?).Hide layers or styles (page ?).
When a style is turned off,
drawing objects are displayed
without styles.
The legend lists the styles used
in the map.
Add a legend. (page 1118)Add a legend. (page 1118)
See also:
■Overview of Creating and Editing Data (page 681)
■Overview of the Display Manager (page 634)
■Styling Features (page 639)
■Styling Drawing Layers (page 652)
■Styling Raster Images (page 671)
Controlling the Display of Your Map
Use the Display Manager (page 2060) to determine which layers appear in your
map and the order of those layers. Use the scale control to set your current
stylization scale.
Controlling the Display of Your Map | 633
Overview of the Display Manager
The Display Manager (page 2060) displays styles for feature layers and drawing
object layers. The styles you create for the map do not affect the actual objects
in your map or in their original sources.
Drawing object layers are listed in italic text. Different operations are available
for feature and drawing layers. Right-click a layer to see the available
commands.
If a feature layer contains multiple geometry types, the Display Manager lists
each one under the feature class that contains them. You cannot hide
individual geometries from the Display Manager itself, but you can use the
Style Editor to turn them on or off in the layer list (page 641). Only layers that
are turned on in Display Manager will appear in a legend.
You can also use the Display Manager to change the display order and assign
different styles to different views based on scale.
Although Display Manager updates data automatically, you can update it
manually if things get out of synch. You can update the entire map or an
individual layer to reread attribute data, re-evaluate expressions for styles and
themes, and requery layers. You sometimes must refresh the items in the
Display Manager. This operation does not affect the drawing.
Use the Display Manager to apply styles to features
and drawing objects.
634 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to manage layers with
draw order and folders.
■Show me how to include AutoCAD layers
in the Display Manager.
Procedure
■To change the order of layers (page
637)
■To change the draw order (page 302)
Tutorial
■Exercise 2: Change the order of items
in the legend
■The Task Pane
GIS Skill
■Hide and show features as you zoom in
and out
■Include AutoCAD layers in the Display
Manager
Related topics
■Organizing Layers in Your Map (page
300)
■Setting Task Pane Options (page 220)
■To display the Display Manager (page 635)
■To update the map or a single layer (page 636)
■To refresh the Display Manager (page 636)
To display the Display Manager
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel
➤ Map Task Pane.
2In the Task Pane, click Display Manager.
Overview of the Display Manager | 635
To update the map or a single layer
1Right-click the Display Manager or an individual layer.
2Click Update.
To refresh the Display Manager
■On the command line, enter mapwsrefresh.
Controlling Display Order
Layers in the map are displayed in the order in which they appear in the
Display Manager (page 2060) draw order view: layers higher in the list are drawn
in front of layers lower down.
You can change the display order by moving layers up or down in the list.
For example, to display drawing objects in front of a raster image, put the
raster layer at the bottom of the list.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to manage layers with
draw order and folders.
636 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Procedure
■To change the order of layers (page
637)
■To change the draw order (page 302)
Tutorial
■Exercise 2: Change the order of items
in the legend
GIS Skill
■Hide and show features as you zoom in
and out
Related topics
■Organizing Layers in Your Map (page
300)
■To change the order of layers (page 637)
■To hide or show layers (page 638)
■To hide or show styles (page 638)
To change the order of layers
1In Display Manager (page 2060), make sure Draw Order is selected.
2Click the layer to move.
3Drag the layer up or down in the list.
Drawing objects from layers higher in the list are drawn on top of drawing
objects from layers lower in the list.
Controlling Display Order | 637
To hide or show layers
■In Display Manager (page 2060), select or clear the check box next to the layer
name.
To hide or show styles
■In Display Manager (page 2060), select or clear the check box next to the style
name.
Setting Map Scale
The scale control indicates and sets your current stylization scale. The list
includes all the scale ranges (for feature data) and thresholds (for drawing
data) defined in the current map. If you link scale to zoom, styles update
appropriately as you adjust the zoom, and zoom updates when you select a
scale. If you use the custom scale box, the correct style is applied based on
where the custom value lands within the scale ranges and thresholds.
See also:
■Defining Scale Ranges (page 643)
To set the map scale
1To link style to scale, close the lock icon on the Status Bar.
2On the Status Bar, select a scale from the list or click
Custom and enter a value in the Scale box.
Creating Multiple Display Maps
Each map file can contain multiple display maps. Each one has its own set of
layers, which are styled independently. For example, you can connect to a
data store that contains parcels and then create one display map that themes
the parcels by area and another that themes them by population.
If you use the same data store for multiple display maps, you connect to that
data store only once, but you add it to each display map separately. You can
copy a layer from one map to another and then change its styling.
638 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
NOTE If your map file contains data on its base layer, that data appears on all
display maps you create in that file. You can clear the check box for the base layer
to hide its data.
All display maps in a map file use the same coordinate system.
See also:
■Overview of the Display Manager (page 634)
To create multiple display maps
1Connect (page 291) to the data stores to include in the various maps.
You can attach drawings and connect to geospatial feature sources.
2Create a new display map in the Display Manager by clicking Data ➤
New Map.
3Type a name for the new map in the Current Map box at the top of the
Display Manager.
4To copy a layer from another display map, follow these steps:
■Switch to the display map containing the layer you want by choosing
its name in the Current Map box.
■Right-click the layer and click Copy.
■Switch to the target display map.
■Right-click a blank area in the Display Manager and choose Paste.
5Style (page 631) each layer in the new display map.
Styling Features
■To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641)
■To define scale ranges (page 644)
■To apply styles to points (page 646)
■To apply styles to lines (page 649)
■To apply styles to areas (page 650)
■To load a LAYER file (page 652)
Styling Features | 639
Overview of Styling Features
Styles control how features appear on a map. Default styles are applied to
features. When you add point and polygon features to the map, they appear
with default symbol, line, and fill styles. Polylines are given a default line
style. Each layer is given a distinctive color. For example, polygons are filled
with a color that is different from other polygon layers that are already in the
map. Change the default styles as needed.
For example, you can specify the scale ranges at which a feature is visible, set
line color, and add labels. To specify styles for a layer, you define a style for
a scale range. 0 - Infinity is the default scale range. Add narrower scale ranges
as you define styles to define how the data appears at various scales. For
example, you could create one scale range that displays roads with thick lines
when you zoom in, and create a second scale range that displays roads with
thin lines when you zoom out.
You can also create a theme that displays data in varying styles to indicate
different values.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing
layer, see Styling Drawing Layers (page 652).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to make a layer visible
only at a certain scale range.
■Show me how to create a scale range for
roads.
■Show me how to replace points with
symbols.
■Show me how to label features.
■Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
■Show me how to make the features on
a layer semi-transparent.
Procedure
■To apply styles to points (page 646)
■To apply styles to areas (page 650)
■To apply styles to lines (page 649)
640 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
■To label features (page 1093)
Tutorial
■Lesson 2: Style Map Features
Workflow
■Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skills
■Hide and show features as you zoom in
and out.
■Replace points in the map with symbols.
■Set transparency for parcels or other
features.
■Label features and optimize placement.
Related topics
■Defining Scale Ranges (page 643)
■Setting Map Scale (page 638)
■Styling Point Features (page 645)
■Styling Line Features (page 648)
■Styling Area Features (page 650)
■Adding Labels to Features (page 1091)
■Creating Themes (page 1162)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing
layer, see Styling Drawing Layers (page 652).
To create a map with styled feature layers
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ New Map.
2In the Current Map box, enter a name for the new display map.
3Assign a coordinate system (page 147) to the map.
4Connect (page 308) to the features you want and add them to the current
display map. Attach drawings and query in (page ?) the drawing objects
you want.
5Define the scale ranges. (page 643)
Overview of Styling Features | 641
6Click a layer in Display Manager and click Style to display the Style Editor.
If the feature layer you are styling contains multiple geometry types, each
one has its own Style Editor section.
7Specify a point (page 645), line (page 648), or polygon (page 650) style or
define a theme.
8Optionally:
■Change the display order (page 637) of layers. Layers at the top of the
list appear on top of other layers.
■Display or hide a geometry in Display Manager. Select or clear the
box labeled Show In Layer List for that geometry.
Only the displayed geometries appear in Display Manager and in any
legend you insert.
■Create a legend (page 1118).
DescriptionUse this method...To do this...
Use the Display Manager to
style features and drawing ob-
In the Tool-based Ribbon Work-
space, click View tab ➤ Palettes
Show or hide the Display Man-
ager
jects in your maps, and to adjust
the draw order.
panel ➤ Map Task Pane.
In the Task Pane, click Display
Manager.
When you connect to a feature
from your map, you add the
Add a feature to the map using
Data Connect. (page 308)
Create a feature layer.
objects in that feature to a Dis-
play Manager layer. Each layer
can have its own style.
Add a subset of objects from a
feature source to a Display
Manager layer.
Use the Add To Map With Query
option to filter the data from the
feature source (page 308).
Include only objects that match
certain criteria.
Options vary, depending on
whether you are styling points,
lines, or polygons.
Use the Style Editor (page 641).Create a style.
642 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
DescriptionUse this method...To do this...
A theme varies the style based
on data associated with the ob-
ject.
Use the Style Editor (page 1168).Create a theme.
You can define multiple styles
and assign each one to a differ-
ent scale range.
Use scale ranges. (page 643)Change the style as you zoom in
or out.
For each feature, the property
you assign for the style appears
at the scale ranges you specify.
Include labels as part of a style and
assign a property for the labels.
(page 1093)
Label individual features.
Layers are drawn from the bot-
tom up. Objects in the layer at
Use Display Manager to change
the Draw Order (page 302).
Change the display order of lay-
ers.
the top of the Display Manager
are drawn last and appear on
top of other objects.
If a layer is hidden, objects from
that layer are hidden. When a
Check the boxes in the Display
Manager for the layers or styles to
show (page ?).
Hide layers or styles.
style is hidden, drawing objects
are displayed without styles.
The legend lists the styles used
in the map.
Use the Display Manager to in-
clude and style the legend. (page
1118)
Add a legend.
Defining Scale Ranges
The first step in creating styles for geospatial features is to define your scale
ranges.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. If you are defining ranges
for a drawing layer, see Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold
(page 667).
A scale range specifies the zoom level at which a particular style is applied to
the display of your features. When the zoom level of the map is within the
specified scale range, AutoCAD Map 3D redraws the features using the style
associated with the scale range.
Defining Scale Ranges | 643
The style is applied when the zoom level is greater than or equal to the From
value and less than the To value. When setting up adjacent scale ranges, use
the same To value as the next range's From value. For example, if one range
is 0 - 20,000 set the next range to 20,000 - 40,000.
NOTE When setting up multiple scale ranges for a map, make sure that they do
not overlap. For example, the ranges 500,000 - 5,000,000 and 2,000,000 -
10,000,000 overlap. In such cases, when the zoom level is within the overlapping
scale range, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the features using the style of the first scale
range listed.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to make a layer visible
only at a certain scale range.
■Show me how to create a second scale
range.
Procedure
■To define scale ranges (page 644)
Tutorial
■Lesson 3: Change the Display by Zoom
Level
Workflow
■Style and Label a Linear Feature
Related topics
■Setting Map Scale (page 638)
■Overview of Visualization and Styling
(page 631)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing
layer, see Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold (page 668).
To define scale ranges
1In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click a feature layer.
2Click Edit Style to display the Style Editor.
644 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
3In the Style Editor, in the Scale Ranges area, under From, enter the lower
end of the scale range. Under To, enter the upper end of the scale range.
For example, to make a style visible when the map is zoomed anywhere
between 1:250,000 and 1:5,000,000, enter 250000 for From and enter
5000000 for To.
4To add a new scale range, click Add A Scale Range.
5Specify From and To values.
6When working with scale ranges:
■To copy a scale range, select the range and click Duplicate.
■To delete a scale range, select the range and click Delete.
■To change the position of a scale in the list, select the range and click
Move Up or Move Down.
Quick Reference
Update Display Manager
Refreshes the current display
Right-click the Display Manager. Click UpdateTask Pane
Styling Point Features
Use symbols to represent and display point features.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing
layer, see Creating a Style (page 658).
If precise placement of labels is important, you can display labels instead of
symbols at feature point locations. You can also specify whether other labels
on other layers obscure symbols on the current layer.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to replace points with
symbols.
Styling Point Features | 645
■Show me how to label features.
■Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
Procedure
■To apply styles to points (page 646)
■To label features (page 1093)
■To place fixed labels at points (page
1099)
■To allow labels to obscure points on
the selected layer (page 1097)
Tutorial
■Exercise 4: Try out the sample data
GIS Skills
■Replace points in the map with symbols.
■Label features and optimize placement.
Related topics
■Defining Scale Ranges (page 643)
■Adding Labels to Features (page 1091)
■Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Loca-
tions (page 1098)
■Allowing Labels to Obscure Points
(page 1096)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing
layer, see Creating a Style (page 658).
To apply styles to points
1In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click a feature layer that contains
points.
2Click Edit Style.
3In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
4In the Point Style area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
646 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
5In the Style Point dialog box (page 1637), select the Style A Point Symbol
check box.
6For Symbol, click .
7In the Select A Symbol dialog box, specify a symbol library and a symbol.
Click OK.
NOTE When creating a block for use as a symbol the Edge color applies to
any entities that are defined as ByBlock. The Fill color applies to any entities
that are defined as ByLayer.
8For Size Context, specify the type of units:
■Select Device Space to specify symbol widths and heights in screen
units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
■Select Map Space to specify symbol widths and heights in Mapping
Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards,
Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
9For Units, select the type of units to use.
10 For Width, enter the symbol width or specify the width using a number
expression.
For more information, see the Creating Numeric Expressions.
11 For Height, enter the symbol height or specify the height using a number
expression.
For more information, see the Creating Numeric Expressions.
12 To maintain width-to-height proportions when you change the width
or height of the symbol, select the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box.
13 To change the fill and edge colors of the symbol, use the Fill Color and
Edge Color lists.
If you do not change the colors, the default colors from the symbol are
used.
14 For Rotation, do one of the following:
■Select a value from the drop-down list.
■Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle
in the box. Click OK.
Styling Point Features | 647
■Click Expression. Specify the rotation using a number expression.
For more information, see the Creating Numeric Expressions.
15 Click OK.
Styling Line Features
Specify the thickness, color, and pattern of polyline features. Style a single
line or build a composite line with several components and then style each
component. For example, to illustrate a highway, create a thick black line and
add a thinner, dashed, yellow line.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing
layer, see Creating a Style (page 658).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to create a scale range for
roads.
■Show me how to label features.
■Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
Procedure
■To apply styles to lines (page 649)
■To label features (page 1093)
■To use expressions in labels
Tutorial
■Exercise 1: Use a composite style for
roads
GIS Skill
■Hide and show features as you zoom in
and out.
■Label features and optimize placement.
Related topics
■Defining Scale Ranges (page 643)
■Adding Labels to Features (page 1091)
648 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
■Allowing Labels to Obscure Points
(page 1096)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing
layer, see Creating a Style (page 658).
To apply styles to lines
1In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click a feature layer that contains
lines.
2Click Edit Style.
3In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges (page
643).
4In the Line Style area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
5In the Style Line dialog box (page 1636), select the Apply Styles To The Line
check box.
6To style a single line, do the following:
■For Units (Device Space), select the type of units to measure line
thickness.
Lines are specified in Device Space units.
■Use the lists to specify polyline thickness, color, and pattern.
NOTE Select 0 thickness to draw the line as thinly as possible.
7To build a composite line, do the following:
■Click Create Composite Lines to expand the Style Line dialog box.
■Style the first line in the composite.
■Click New to add a new component to the line.
■Style the new component as desired.
■Control the position of the selected component in the overall
composite line by clicking the up and down arrows.
8Click OK.
Styling Line Features | 649
Styling Area Features
Specify the fill style and color, background color, edge style and color, and
line thickness used to draw area (polygon) features.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing
layer, see Creating a Style (page 658).
See also:
■Defining Scale Ranges (page 643)
■Adding Labels to Features (page 1091)
■Allowing Labels to Obscure Points (page 1096)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing
layer, see Creating a Style (page 658).
To apply styles to areas
1In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click a feature layer that contains
polygons.
2Click Edit Style.
3In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges (page
643).
4In the Area Style area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
5To fill polygons, in the Style Polygon dialog box (page 1639), select the
Apply Fill To The Area check box.
6For Fill Pattern, select Solid or a pattern.
■If you specified Solid fill, specify Foreground Transparency and
Foreground Color.
■If you specified a pattern fill, specify colors for Foreground Color and
Background Color. If you do not want a background color for the
pattern, click Transparent for Background Color.
650 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
NOTE In polygons with transparent backgrounds, the colors you see on
the map may differ from the colors displayed in the preview frame because
the preview frame always uses a white background, which may differ from
the color beneath the transparent objects in your map.
7add borders to polygons, select the Apply A Border To The Area check
box and then do the following:
■For Line Pattern, specify the pattern for the area border.
■For Units (Device Space), select the type of units to use to measure
border thickness.
■For Line Thickness, specify a thickness for the area border.
NOTE Select 0 thickness to draw the border as thin as possible.
■For Line Color, specify a color for the area border.
8Click OK.
Labeling Features
You can label features on feature layers. For more information, see Adding
Labels (page 1091).
Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers
After you have styled feature layers, you can save the connection and styling
information to LAYER files that you can share with other users. A LAYER file
contains connection and style information only, no feature data.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To save drawing layer
styles, see Saving a Display Style in the Library (page 664).
When you load a LAYER file, AutoCAD Map 3D adds the source file to the
Map Explorer, creates the connection, adds the feature layer to the Display
Manager (page 2060), and styles the layer correctly. Drag and drop the LAYER
file from Windows Explorer to the Display Manager.
Labeling Features | 651
See also:
■Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer (page 1469)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. To save drawing layer styles,
see Saving a Display Style in the Library (page 664).
To load a LAYER file
■Drag and drop the LAYER file from Windows Explorer to the Display
Manager (page 2060).
Styling Drawing Layers
When you define a style for a drawing layer, you specify how AutoCAD Map
3D displays drawing objects on that layer.
■To create a map with styled drawing layers (page 654)
■To style a drawing layer (page 657)
■To create a display style (page 660)
■To add a display style to a layer (page 662)
■To modify a display style (page 663)
■To hide the drawing objects in a layer (page 664)
■To save a style to the Display Library (page 665)
■To create a new category in the Display Library (page 665)
■To reference a style from the Display Library (page 666)
■To turn off style referencing (page 667)
■To create or modify a scale threshold (page 668)
■To view a layer's styles at all scale thresholds (page 670)
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers
When you define a style for a layer, you specify how to display drawing objects
on that layer.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial
feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
Style the drawing objects in your map by creating layers and then applying
one or more styles to the selected layer.
652 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
TIP For better performance, create a new display map rather than modifying the
default map. There are circumstances when the default map is automatically
displayed, and if this map has a lot of objects, it could take a while to display.
■A single map can have many drawing layers.
■You can specify a different style for each drawing layer in your map, and
combine multiple styles for a single layer.
■You can create a theme for a drawing layer. A theme varies the style based
on data associated with the object, for example, a darker color to represent
a higher traffic volume.
You can apply one or more styles to layers in
your map.
If a drawing object is a member of more than one drawing layer, it inherits
the style of each layer of which it is a member. For example, if a line is in both
the Transportation layer and the Roads object class layer, it inherits the styles
of both layers. If the layers specify conflicting style or visibility settings, the
drawing object uses the style and visibility settings of whichever layer is higher
in the Display Manager list.
Style objects by changing one or more of the following:
■Color
■Linetype
■Linetype scale
■Lineweight
■Plot style
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers | 653
■Symbol or image used to represent objects
■Adding hatch
■Adding text
■Adding annotation
See also:
■Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 350)
■Creating Multiple Display Maps (page 638)
■Setting Map Scale (page 638)
■Theming Drawing Data (page 1176)
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial
feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
To create a map with styled drawing layers
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ New Map.
2In the Current Map box, enter a name for the new map.
3Select the objects to style. (page 350)
Each set of drawing objects is a drawing layer.
4For each layer, specify a style (page 658) or a theme (page 1178).
5Optionally:
■Change the display order (page 636) of drawing layers. Layers at the
top of the list appear on top of other layers.
■Specify different styles at different view scales.
■Create a legend (page 1118).
DescriptionClickTo Do This
Use the Display Manager to style features and
drawing objects in your maps, and to update
In the Tool-based Ribbon
Workspace, click View tab
Display the Display Man-
ager
the display for different drawing scale
thresholds.
➤ Palettes panel ➤
654 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
DescriptionClickTo Do This
Map Task Pane. In
the Task Pane, click Dis-
play Manager.
A drawing layer is a set of objects. Each layer
can have its own style. See Bringing In Drawing
Data From DWG Files (page 350).
In the Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add Draw-
ing Data. Click the type
of layer to create.
Create a drawing layer
A query lets you define conditions to select
specific objects. See Bringing In Drawing Data
From DWG Files (page 350).
In the Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add Draw-
ing Data ➤ Query Cur-
rent Drawing.
Query objects in the cur-
rent drawing
A query lets you define conditions to select
specific objects. See Bringing In Drawing Data
From DWG Files (page 350).
In the Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add Draw-
ing Data ➤ Query Source
Drawings.
Query objects in attached
drawings
Change color, linetype, linetype scale, line
weight, or plotstyle; change the symbol used
Right-click a layer. Click
Add Style, and then
Create a style
to represent the objects; or add hatch, text, orchoose the type of style
to create. annotation for objects using this style. See
Creating a Style (page 660).
A theme varies the style based on data associ-
ated with the object. See Overview of Theme
Styles (page 1181).
In the Display Manager,
right-click a layer ➤ Add
Style ➤ Theme.
Create a theme style
You can import a theme or map you created
in a previous version of AutoCAD Map 3D.
To import a theme: In the
Display Manager, click
Import a theme or map
from a previous version of
AutoCAD Map 3D Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Import Old
Theme.
To import a map: In the
Display Manager, click
Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Import Old Map.
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers | 655
DescriptionClickTo Do This
When a style is turned off, drawing objects are
displayed without styles.
Select or clear the check
box next to the style
Turn a style on or off
name in the Display
Manager.
Use scale thresholds to change drawing layer
styles as you zoom in or out, for example, turn
In the Display Manager,
click Tools ➤ Show
Create a new scale
threshold
text off as you zoom out. Close the lock icon
on the Status Bar to link scale and style.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing
layers only. Feature layers use scale ranges. For
more information, see Defining Scale Ranges
(page 643).
Thresholds. Click the thin
down arrow next to the
Threshold list, and then
click Duplicate. Enter the
new threshold and click
OK.
Layers are drawn from the bottom up. Objects
in the layer at the top of the Display Manager
In the Display Manager,
click Draw Order so it is
Change the display order
of layers
are drawn last and appear on top of other ob-active and drag the layer
up or down. jects. If an object is a member of more than
one layer, it is drawn based on the highest
layer to which it belongs. The Draw Order view
is useful for defining a display order that differs
from the layer organization in the Display
Manager or the legend.
If a layer is turned off, objects from that layer
are hidden.
Clear the check box next
to the layer name
Hide objects in a layer
The legend lists the styles used in the map. See
Adding a Legend (page 1116).
In the Display Manager,
click Tools ➤ Create Le-
gend.
Add a legend
Reloads the entire drawing, including rereading
attribute data, reevaluating expressions for
Right-click the Display
Manager. Click Update.
Update the drawing
styles and themes, and requerying layers. To
update a single layer, right-click the layer. Click
Update.
You sometimes must refresh the items in the
Display Manager. This operation does not affect
the drawing.
On the command line,
enter mapwsrefresh.
Refresh the Display Man-
ager
656 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Quick Reference
Update Display Manager
Refreshes the current display
Right-click the Display Manager. Click UpdateTask Pane
Styling a Drawing Layer
When you define a style for a layer, you specify how objects on that layer
appear in the current display map.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial
feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
See also:
■Creating Multiple Display Maps (page 638)
■Creating Themes for Drawing Layers (page 1178)
■Creating a Style (page 658)
■Combining Styles (page 661)
■Saving a Display Style in the Library (page 664)
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial
feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
To style a drawing layer
1Select the layer.
2Do one of the following:
■Create a new style. (page 660)
■Copy an existing style. (page 665)
■Reference a library style. (page 666)
■Create a theme (page 1181).
3If you want, add another style to the layer (page 662).
Styling a Drawing Layer | 657
Symbol styles can be combined only with other symbol styles. Themes
cannot be combined with any other styles.
4You can save your style (page 665) in the Display Library.
5If your map does not look exactly as desired, modify the style (page 663).
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Style
Creates a new Display Manager style
In Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤
(select a style type)
Task Pane
Creating a Style
You can define a style for a drawing layer in a map. All the drawing objects
on this layer display using the style.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial
feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
658 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
You can create more than one style for a drawing layer. The styles overlay
each other.
Style Types
Specifies color, linetype, linetype scale, line
weight, and plotstyle for drawing objects
using this style.
Entity
Adds annotation, such as text, blocks, im-
ages, and information based on object
Annotation
properties, to drawing objects using this
style.
Adds hatch to drawing objects using this
style.
Hatch
Uses symbols such as blocks or annotation
to represent drawing objects using this
Symbol
style. Can be combined with other symbol
styles only.
Adds text to drawing objects using this
style.
Text
Specifies brightness, contrast, and fade for
images using this style.
Raster Image
Displays the Thematic Mapping dialog
box, where you can create a theme style.
Theme
Creating a Style | 659
All the properties of the style are
displayed on the Display tab of the
Properties palette, where you can
view or modify them.
See also:
■Saving a Display Style in the Library (page 664)
■Referencing a Library Style (page 666)
■Creating Themes for Drawing Layers (page 1178)
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial
feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
To create a display style
1In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the layer to style. Click Add
Style, and then choose the type of style to create.
■Entity Style
■Hatch Style
■Text Style
■Raster Image Style
■Annotation Style
■Symbol Style
660 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
2Select the style.
3If the Properties palette is not already visible, right-click the layer and
select Properties.
4On the Display tab of the Properties palette, specify style settings.
NOTE When entering an expression, you may need to select an item from
the list first. Click to display the Edit Expression dialog box (page 1574).
NOTE Some drawing objects might not be styled. The Display Manager does not
style drawing objects that have been queried into the current drawing using a
standard Query. To style drawing objects from attached drawings, see Overview
of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351).
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Style
Creates a new Display Manager style
In Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤
(select a style type)
Task Pane
Combining Styles
You can combine styles for a single drawing layer.
Style roads by combining a thick continuous black line with a thin dotted yellow line.
Styles are rendered from bottom to top. That is, the bottom style in the list is
rendered first.
NOTE Symbol styles can only be combined with other symbol styles. Themes
cannot be combined with any other styles.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial
feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
Combining Styles | 661
See also:
■Creating a Style (page 658)
NOTE If the layer has a symbol style applied, you can only combine it with other
symbol styles. You cannot combine a theme with any other styles.
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial
feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
To add a display style to a layer
1Select the layer.
2Do one of the following:
■Create a new style. (page 660)
■Copy (page 665) an existing style.
■Reference a library style. (page 666)
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Style
Creates a new Display Manager style
In Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤
(select a style type)
Task Pane
Modifying a Style
The properties of the style are displayed on the Display tab of the Properties
palette. Modify the settings as desired.
662 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Modify style settings on the Properties palette.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial
feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
Style Referencing
If a style references another style, any changes to the style in one location are
automatically reflected in any other locations where the style is used. If you
turn off referencing for a style, any additional changes you make to that style
do not affect the other locations.
See also:
■Creating a Style (page 658)
■Referencing a Library Style (page 666)
■Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold (page 667)
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial
feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
To modify a display style
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click the style.
2If the Properties palette is not already visible, click the Style button.
3On the Display tab of the Properties palette, modify style settings.
Modifying a Style | 663
To hide the drawing objects in a layer
■Clear the check box next to the layer name in Display Manager.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Saving a Display Style in the Library
If you plan to use a style more than once, you can save it in the Display Library.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To save and reuse styles for
geospatial features, see Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers (page 651).
Once a style is saved in the library, you can drag it to a drawing layer.
NOTE If you drag a style from the Display Library to a drawing layer, the style is
referenced. If you copy and paste the style, a new style is created.
When you drag a style from the library, you can reference the library style.
When a style references a library style, any changes to the style in one location
are automatically reflected in the other location.
TIP To have a layer look the same at all scale thresholds, store the style in the
Display Library. Then, at every scale threshold, reference the Display Library style.
This way, you can automatically modify the style at every scale threshold by
updating the style in the Display Library.
See also:
■Creating a Style (page 658)
664 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
■Referencing a Library Style (page 666)
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. To save and reuse styles for
geospatial features, see Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers (page 651).
To save a style to the Display Library
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the style to save ➤ Copy.
2If the Display Library is not already displayed, in the Display Manager,
click Tools ➤ Show Library.
3On the Display Styles tab of the Display Library, right-click, and choose
Paste.
Note that the style is not referenced. Only dragging from the Display Library
to the drawing layer creates a referenced style.
TIP You can also create styles from within the Display Library. Right-click in the
Display Library. Click Add Style, and define the style. For more information on
creating styles, see Creating a Style (page 660).
To create a new category in the Display Library
1If the Display Library is not already displayed, in Display Manager (page
2060), click Tools ➤ Show Library.
2On the Display Library palette, right-click the Display Styles tab. Click
Add Category.
NOTE You must right-click the tab and not in the palette.
3To change the name of the tab, right-click the tab name. Click Rename.
Enter a name for the tab.
Quick Reference
Display Library Palette
Turns the Display Library palette on and off
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARYCommand Line
Saving a Display Style in the Library | 665
In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Library or
Hide Library
Task Pane
Copy Display Manager Style
Copies a Display Manager style
In Display Manager, right-click the style ➤ Copy
Task Pane
Referencing a Library Style
When you use a style from the library, the style in the layer references the style
in the Display Library.
Example: The Display Library has a style called "Pipes" that colors drawing
objects blue. Reference this style from any pipe layer.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To save and reuse styles for
geospatial features, see Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers (page 651).
If a style references a library style, any changes to the style in one location are
automatically reflected in any other locations where the style is used. That is,
if you modify the style in the Display Manager, the style in the Display
Libraryis automatically updated, as are any other styles that reference the style
in the Display Library.
If you turn off referencing for a style, any additional changes you make to
that style do not affect the other locations.
NOTE Once you turn off referencing for a style, you cannot turn it back on.
See also:
■Creating a Style (page 658)
■Saving a Display Style in the Library (page 664)
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. To save and reuse styles for
geospatial features, see Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers (page 651).
To reference a style from the Display Library
1If the Display Library is not already displayed, in Display Manager (page
2060), click Tools ➤ Show Library.
666 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
2Select the style in the Display Library.
3Drag it onto the drawing layer to style in the Display Manager.
To turn off style referencing
1In Display Manager (page 2060), click the style for which to turn off
referencing.
2If the Properties palette is not already displayed, right-click the style.
Click Properties.
3On the Display tab of the Properties palette, under Style, click the box
next to Reference and select No.
NOTE Once you turn off referencing for a style, you cannot turn it back on.
Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold
You can define different styles at different scale thresholds.
Example: Turn on the display of road names only when the drawing scale
factor is below 1:5000
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To use scale ranges with
geospatial features, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643).
Referenced Styles
To display a layer the same way at multiple scale thresholds, save the styles
to the Library. For each new scale threshold, reference the style in the Library.
Any changes you make to the style at one scale threshold are reflected at the
other scale thresholds.
Turn off referencing for the styles that change from one scale threshold to the
next.
Example: Reference the Library Style for the Road layer at all scale thresholds
except when you are zoomed out. For that scale threshold, turn off referencing
so you can change the display of roads when you zoom out.
See also:
■Setting Map Scale (page 638)
Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold | 667
■Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds (page 669)
■Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 350)
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. To use scale ranges with
geospatial features, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643).
To create or modify a scale threshold
1Zoom the drawing to the scale factor for which you want to create or
modify the threshold.
2To display the Threshold list, in the Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show
Thresholds.
3Click the thin down arrow next to the Threshold list and click Duplicate.
4In the New Threshold dialog box, enter the new threshold value. Click
OK.
5Modify any of the styles for this new scale threshold.
If the styles reference a Library Style, turn off referencing for the selected
style before you modify it. To turn off style referencing, select the style.
On the Display tab of the Properties palette, next to Reference, select No.
If you do not turn off Reference, any changes you make to the style in
this scale threshold are automatically reflected in any styles that reference
this style.
NOTE hen creating and modifying styles, you can specify how you want to display
styles as you change scale thresholds.
■Close the lock icon on the Status Bar to update the drawing window
using the appropriate styles for each drawing scale threshold. Styles change
as you adjust the scale threshold.
■Open the lock icon on the Status Bar to update the drawing window
using the styles for the current scale threshold. Styles do not change as
you zoom.
668 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Scale Threshold
Creates a new Display Manager scale threshold
In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Thresholds.
Click the thin down arrow next to the Threshold list
and choose Duplicate.
Task Pane
Compare Display Manager Scale Thresholds
For the selected layer, lists the Display Manager styles for each scale threshold
In Display Manager, right-click the layer and choose
Compare Thresholds
Task Pane
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds
You can view a layer's styles for each scale threshold in the map.
Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds | 669
For the layer Roads, the drawing layer styles display
more information as you zoom in.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To use scale ranges with
geospatial features, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643).
See also:
■Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold (page 667)
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. To use scale ranges with
geospatial features, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643).
To view a layer's styles at all scale thresholds
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the layer ➤ Show Thresholds.
For the selected layer, the Compare Thresholds palette lists the styles for
each scale threshold defined in the map.
2To view the styles for a different layer, select the layer in Display Manager.
The Compare Thresholds palette displays the styles for the new layer.
670 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
TIP You can add a style to a layer by dragging and dropping it from the Display
Library or another scale threshold.
Quick Reference
Compare Display Manager Scale Thresholds
For the selected layer, lists the Display Manager styles for each scale threshold
In Display Manager, right-click the layer and choose
Compare Thresholds
Task Pane
Styling Raster Images
You can style and view rasters brought into your map with Data Connect.
Overview of Styling Raster Images
For raster images you add to your map with Data Connect, you can do the
following:
■Adjust brightness and contrast.
■Display the image in grayscale or color.
■Make a single color in the raster transparent.
■Zoom to the raster image extents.
■Requery the raster at a different zoom level.
See also:
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 1186)
■Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
Styling Raster Images | 671
Use this method...To do this...
Select the raster and, in the Style Editor
under Raster Style, do one of the following:
Adjust brightness and contrast for images
you added with Data Connect.
■To adjust brightness, enter a value
between -50 and 50 in the Brightness
box.
■To adjust contrast, enter a value
between -50 and 50 in the Contrast
box.
See Changing Brightness, Color, or Trans-
parency for Raster Images (page 672)
Select the raster and, in the Style Editor
under Raster Style, click the Style drop-
down box. Select Color or Greyscale.
See Changing Brightness, Color, or Trans-
parency for Raster Images (page 672)
Display an image you added with Data
Connect in grayscale or color.
Select the raster and, in the Style Editor
under Raster Style, click Transparent.
See Changing Brightness, Color, or Trans-
parency for Raster Images (page 672)
Make a single color transparent in a raster
you added with Data Connect.
Right-click the image layer. Click Zoom To
Extents.
See Viewing Raster Images (page 674)
Zoom to the extents of a raster you added
with Data Connect.
Right-click the image layer. Click Resample
Raster.
See Viewing Raster Images (page 674)
Requery a raster you added with Data
Connect at a different zoom level.
Changing Brightness, Color, or Transparency for Raster Images
You can use the Style Editor to modify the appearance of raster images brought
in to your map using Data Connect. You can adjust the brightness and contrast,
set transparency for a single color, and display the image in color or grayscale.
NOTE If you added an image using the Insert An image command, you cannot
use this functionality. See Modifying Raster Images (page 489) instead.
672 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
See also:
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
■Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
■Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 1186)
■Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
NOTE If you added an image using the Insert An image command, you cannot
use this procedure. See Modifying Raster Images (page 489) instead.
■To adjust brightness and contrast in a raster image (page 673)
■To set transparency for a single color. (page 673)
■To display your image in color or grayscale (page 674)
To adjust brightness and contrast in a raster image
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the layer ➤ Edit Style.
2In the Style Editor, under Raster Style, do one of the following:
■To adjust brightness, enter a value between -50 and 50 in the
Brightness box.
■To adjust contrast, enter a value between -50 and 50 in the Contrast
box.
3Click Apply.
To set transparency for a single color.
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the layer ➤ Edit Style.
2In the Style Editor, under Raster Style, click Transparent.
3In the Transparency Color dialog box, click Select.
4Select a color on your map, then click OK.
5Click Apply.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays all parts of the raster image that match the
selected color with 100% transparency.
Changing Brightness, Color, or Transparency for Raster Images | 673
To display your image in color or grayscale
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the layer ➤ Edit Style.
2In the Style Editor, under Raster Style, click the Style drop-down box.
3Select Color or Grayscale.
4If you select grayscale, adjust the range for grayscale mapping with the
Cell Minimum and Cell Maximum values.
5Click Apply.
Viewing Raster Images
When you zoom in on a raster image AutoCAD Map 3D automatically requeries
the image from the source to improve the display. You can also use the
Resample Raster tool to improve the display of raster feature data if necessary
(if you are using server-based raster images, for example). This tool requeries
just the displayed portion of the image. When you zoom out, use the Zoom
To Extents tool for the feature layer to display the full extents for the zoom
position.
NOTE If you added an image using the Insert An image command, you cannot
use this functionality. See Modifying Raster Images (page 489) instead.
See also:
■Overview of the Display Manager (page 634)
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
NOTE If you added an image using the Insert An image command, you cannot
use this procedure. See Modifying Raster Images (page 489) instead.
To requery a raster image
1Display the raster image at the desired zoom level.
2In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the image layer. Click
Resample Raster.
To zoom to image extents
1Zoom out as desired.
674 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
2Right-click the image layer. Click Zoom To Extents.
Quick Reference
ZOOM
Increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport
View menu ➤ Realtime
Menu
Zoom
Icon
ZOOMCommand Line
Styling Point Clouds
You can style point cloud (page 2071)s based on Classification, Elevation,
Intensity, and RGB color values. AutoCAD Map 3D has default settings for
each style category except RGB. You can modify or change the style settings
in the Point Cloud Style dialog box (page 1902).
Styling Point Clouds | 675
The Point Cloud Style dialog box
LAS (page 2066) is an industry standard file format defined by the American
Society of Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing that includes a system of
point classification. A processed LAS file may have points classified as bare
earth, high or low vegetation, building, and so on. LAS files may also contain
LiDAR intensity values (laser pulse return intensity) and Red/Green/Blue color
values (if there is ancillary color data from a camera accompanying the LiDAR
scan). Your LAS files may include classification, intensity, and color values,
or it may contain only elevation data.
A point cloud styled by classification
676 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
NOTE If you are working with a point cloud index created using AutoCAD
commands (.PCG file), you can only style by elevation and RGB values.
See also:
■Overview of Point Clouds
■Overview of LiDAR DataLiDAR: data: overviewLiDAR: file types; LiDAR:
LAS file format; LiDAR: ASCII format
■Overview of Point Cloud Files and Objects (page 1013)
■Bringing in LiDAR Data (page 374)
■Using LiDAR Data to Create a Point Cloud Data Store (page 1019)
■Creating Surfaces From Point Cloud Data (page 1021)
■Managing LiDAR Data (page 1015)
■Filtering Point Cloud Data (page 1024)
■Exporting Point Cloud Data (page 1451)
To style point data by classification
1In the Display Manager, right-click the point cloud layer to style, then
select Style By ➤ Classification.
AutoCAD Map 3D applies the default Classification styling to your point
cloud.
2To change the default Classification style, right-click the point cloud
layer, then select Set Style.
3In the Point Cloud Style dialog box (page 1902), on the Classification tab,
select a new color for each class to change using the drop-down list.
4If you do not see the color that you want in the drop-down list, click
More Colors, then select an Index Color, True Color, or Color Book in
the Select Color dialog box.
5When you have made all the style changes, click OK.
To style point data by elevation
1In the Display Manager, right-click the point cloud layer to style, then
select Style By ➤ Elevation.
Styling Point Clouds | 677
AutoCAD Map 3D applies the default Elevation styling to your point
cloud.
2To change the default Elevation style, right-click the point cloud layer,
then select Set Style.
3In the Point Cloud Style dialog box (page 1902), on the Elevation tab, select
the number of rules to include in the style range.
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D uses five rules. The style range rules are
distributed evenly across the range of elevation values in your point cloud.
4To change the colors used for the style range, select new colors using the
drop-down lists.
5If you do not see the color that you want in the drop-down list, click
More Colors, then select an Index Color, True Color, or Color Book in
the Select Color dialog box.
6When you have made all the style changes, click OK.
To style point data by intensity
1In the Display Manager, right-click the point cloud layer you want to
style, then select Style By ➤ Intensity.
AutoCAD Map 3D applies the default Intensity styling to your point
cloud.
2To change the default Intensity style, right-click the point cloud layer,
then select Set Style.
3In the Point Cloud Style dialog box (page 1902), on the Intensity tab, select
the number of rules to include in the style range.
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D uses five rules. The style range rules are
distributed evenly across the range of intensity values in your point cloud.
4If you want to change the colors used for the style range, select new colors
using the drop-down lists.
5If you do not see the color that you want in the drop-down list, click
More Colors, then select an Index Color, True Color, or Color Book in
the Select Color dialog box.
6When you have made all the style changes, click OK.
678 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
To style point data by RGB values
■In the Display Manager, right-click the point cloud layer you want to style,
then select Style By ➤ RGB.
Styling Point Clouds | 679
680
Creating and Editing Data
Overview of Creating and Editing Data
AutoCAD Map 3D works on two types of objects: features and drawing objects.
■Features are GIS objects stored in external files and databases. Display and
edit them in your map and then save the changes back to the original source.
Use the options described in Working with Features (page 683).
■Drawing objects are AutoCAD objects stored within a map or retrieved from
attached drawings using queries. Save changes to drawing objects in the
current map or back to the attached source drawing depending on the source
of each object. Use the options described in Working with Drawing Objects
(page 727) and Working with Attribute Data and Object Data (page 1047).
Use both AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD to edit features and drawing objects.
Many AutoCAD commands work on both types of objects. Some AutoCAD
commands can only be performed on a feature after you extract its geometry
and edit it as a drawing object. You can then save your changes back to the
original data store with no loss of precision.
Most AutoCAD Map 3D operations are specific to one type of object or the
other. Use the right-click menus to see the commands that are available for the
selected feature or drawing object.
For drawing objects...For features...
Add drawing objects to your map by at-
taching drawings and querying in objects.
See Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data
From DWG Files (page 351).
Add features to your map using Data
Connect.
See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305).
6
681
For drawing objects...For features...
Query in drawing objects that match spe-
cified criteria and store them on a separate
Use a query to filter one or more layers.
See Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
drawing layer (page 368). Other objects
become part of the Map Base layer.
Edit objects directly with AutoCAD and
AutoCAD Map 3D commands.
See Overview of Using the Map Editing
Tools (page 927).
Edit features by checking them out and
using AutoCAD and AutoCAD Map 3D
commands.
See Checking Out Features (page 695), Us-
ing Feature Editing Commands (page 704),
and Using AutoCAD Commands on Fea-
tures (page 713).
Create objects with AutoCAD and Auto-
CAD Map 3D commands.
See Working with Drawing Objects (page
727).
Create new features using Display Man-
ager.
See Creating New Features (page 686).
Create drawing objects from features.
See Extracting Feature Geometry (page
715) and Exporting Maps to DWG Format
(page 1459).
Create features from drawing objects.
See Creating a New Feature from a Draw-
ing Object (page 691).
Lock or unlock objects or drawings. See
Sharing Attached Drawings (page 729)
Maintain data security. Use versioning (for
data stores that support it) and check out
data to lock it while you use it. See Man-
aging Versions (page 723)
Save drawing objects back to their sources
by adding them to a save set.
See Editing and Saving Objects in Attached
Drawings (page 737).
Save features back to their sources by
checking them in.
See Checking In Features (page 693).
Use Object Classification to group objects
by their properties or data. See Using Ob-
ject Classification (page 981).
Organize data in feature classes. Use
Schema Editor to create and edit these
classes. See Overview of Working with
Schemas (page 594)
682 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
For drawing objects...For features...
Work with object data in an object data
table.
See Entering and Editing Object Data
(page 1061).
Work with attribute data in the Data Table.
See Editing Features using the Data Table
(page 711).
Work with linked external data in Data
View.
See Overview of Viewing External Data
Sources for Drawing Objects (page 1048).
Work with joined external data in the Data
Table.
See Editing Joined Data (page 515).
Use special commands available only for
drawing objects.
See Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 765),
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topolo-
Use special commands available only for
features.
See Using Feature Editing Commands
(page 704).
gies (page 820), Using Map Editing Tools
(page 926), Digitizing Points Using Coordin-
ates (page 953), Working with Polygon
Objects (page 954), and Annotating Draw-
ing Objects (page 1100).
Save drawing objects back to their original
drawings (page 737) or export to a variety
Save features back to their original data
store (page 693), copy them to a different
of drawing and geospatial data formats
(page 1465).
spatial data format (page 617), or export to
DWG (page 1405).
Working with Features
■Overview of Working with Features (page 684)
■Creating New Features (page 686)
■Checking In Features (page 693)
■Checking Out Features (page 695)
■Canceling Checkout (page 697)
■Updating Edits Automatically (page 698)
■Editing Features (page 701)
■Working Offline (page 721)
■Managing Versions (page 723)
To work with features
■To edit features (page 686)
Working with Features | 683
■To create new features (page 686)
■To check in features (page 694)
■To check out features automatically (page 696)
■To check out features (page 696)
■To cancel check out (page 698)
■To update edits automatically (page 700)
■To edit features (page 701)
■To work offline (page 722)
■To return online (page 722)
■To clear the cache (page 723)
■To rebuild the cache (page 723)
■To create a new version (page 725)
■To activate a version (page 725)
■To commit changes back to the data store (page 726)
■To discard a version (page 726)
■To address errors (page 726)
Overview of Working with Features
When you connect to a geospatial data source and add it to your map, you
can see and edit the feature data. Features must be checked out to be edited.
By default, features are automatically checked out upon editing.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
working with drawing objects, see Working with Drawing Objects (page 727).
You can use most AutoCAD editing commands to edit feature data. For some
of the more advanced commands, you can use Update Feature Geometry (page
716) to convert a GIS feature to pure AutoCAD geometry. Once you have done
this, you can use these other AutoCAD commands, and then update the feature
without losing or affecting any of its attributes.
You can also create features from AutoCAD geometry (page 691). This gives
you the same functionality as Update Feature Geometry, but it creates a new
feature rather than changing an existing one.
Working in a Multiuser Environment
If you share data in a multiuser environment, be aware of the locking status
of the following providers.
■Oracle and ArcSDE support feature level locking that is persistent when
the connection with the source is closed and you go offline.
684 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■MySQL and SQL Server do not support feature level locking or persistent
locking. Locks are released when the connection is closed.
■SDF does not support locking. Be very careful when working in a multiuser
environment.
■SHP supports file locking only as long as you are connected to the data.
When you close your map, break the connection, or go offline, the file is
unlocked.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to draft a new feature for
an existing feature class.
■Show me how to edit features stored in
a database or data store.
■Show me how to check out features for
editing in the field.
Procedure
■To create new features (page 686)
■To edit features (page 701)
Tutorial
■Exercise 2: Check out and edit a fea-
ture
Workflow
■Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature
Source
■Add Features to an Existing ArcSDE
Feature Class
■Work Offline from an Enterprise Data-
base
GIS Skill
■Draft new features for an existing feature
class.
■Edit feature geometry directly in a SHP
file using CAD tools.
■Check out features to edit in the field and
update the database later.
Overview of Working with Features | 685
Related topics
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
■Checking Out Features (page 695)
NOTE These procedures are for geospatial features only. For information about
working with drawing objects, see To work with drawing objects (page 727).
To edit features
1Attach the data source. (page 308)
2If you do not have Auto Checkout turned on, check out the feature. (page
696)
3Do one or both of the following:
■Use feature-editing commands to make your changes. (page 705)
■Use AutoCAD commands to make your changes. (page 713)
4Check the feature back in. (page 694)
Creating New Features
To create new features
■To create new features (page 687)
■To create a new Point or MultiPoint feature (page 688)
■To create a new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature (page 689)
■To create a new LineString or MultiLineString feature (page 691)
■To create a new feature from geometry (page 692)
Overview of Creating New Features
You can create new features using feature-creation commands or by creating
a feature from a drawing object’s geometry.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
creating drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
686 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE If the feature class for a layer does not provide automatically generated IDs
for new features, AutoCAD Map 3D will not create new features on the layer. To
create new features in this case, turn off Update Edits Automatically (page 698) .
AutoCAD Map 3D will hold the features in a queue instead of attempting to save
them to the source immediately. Feature IDs are generated in the queue.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to draft a new feature for
an existing feature class.
■Show me how to create new features
from existing AutoCAD objects.
Procedure
■To create new features (page 686)
Tutorial
■Lesson 4: Create Map Features
Workflow
■Add Features to an Existing ArcSDE
Feature Class
GIS Skill
■Draft new features for an existing feature
class.
Related topics
■Updating Edits Automatically (page
698)
■Checking Out Features (page 695)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about creating
drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
To create new features
■Use Display Manager to create Point or MultiPoint (page 688) features,
Polygon or MultiPolygon (page 689) features, and LineString or
MultiLineString (page 690) features.
If the provider supports curves, the arc option is available in the LineString,
MultiLineString, Polygon, and MultiPolygon creation commands.
Creating New Features | 687
■Create a new feature from a drawing object’s geometry (page 691).
Creating New Point and MultiPoint Features
If you have point feature layers in your drawing, you can create new point
and multipoint features. Multipoint features are multiple points that behave
like a single point feature.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
creating drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
Use OSNAP to snap to any graphic within a block definition that is used to
symbolize a point. You can also use OSNAP Node to snap to the insertion
point of of an attribute, a block, a shape, or text. OSNAP Node is turned off
by default.
NOTE The feature creation commands available for a feature layer depend on the
capabilities of the feature class represented by the layer. Feature geometry follows
OGC specifications.
See also:
■Creating a New Feature from a Drawing Object (page 691)
■Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713)
■OSNAP
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about creating
drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
To create a new Point or MultiPoint feature
1Do one of the following:
■In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the feature layer for the
new feature ➤ Create ➤ New Point feature_name.
■In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the feature layer for the
new feature ➤ Create ➤ New MultiPoint feature_name.
Here, feature_name is the name of the Point or MultiPoint feature layer.
2At the MAPPOINTCREATE (page 1663) or MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE (page
1659) prompt, specify the location for the new Point or MultiPoint feature.
688 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
For MultiPoint features, specify the location of each point.
3For MultiPoint operations, press Enter to complete the operation.
The new feature is added to the Data Table. To add information to the
feature, see Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711).
4Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
Creating New Polygon and MultiPolygon Features
If you have polygon feature layers in your drawing, you can create new Polygon
and MultiPolygon features. MultiPolygon features behave like a single Polygon
feature. You cannot create a non-planar polygon. Every ring of a polygon must
be planar and all parts and all rings must be in the same plane.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
creating drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
NOTE The feature creation commands available for a feature layer depend on the
capabilities of the feature class represented by the layer. Feature geometry follows
OGC specifications.
A polygon has one outer ring and can have one or more inner rings. A ring
within a polygon is considered a hole. To create polygons with multiple outer
and inner rings, create a MultiPolygon feature.
See also:
■Creating a New Feature from a Drawing Object (page 691)
■Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about creating
drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
To create a new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature
1Do one of the following:
■In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the feature layer for the
new feature ➤ Create ➤ New Polygon feature_name.
Creating New Features | 689
■In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the feature layer for the
new feature ➤ Create ➤ New MultiPolygon feature_name.
Here, feature_name is the name of the Polygon or MultiPolygon feature
layer.
2When prompted, specify the location for the new Polygon or
MultiPolygon feature.
3Use the command line or right-click to complete the new feature.
For more information, see MAPPOLYGONCREATE (page 1663) and
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE (page 1660).
4Press Enter to complete the operation.
The new feature is added to the Data Table. To add information to the
feature, see Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711).
5Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
Creating New LineString and MultiLineString Features
If you have line feature layers in your drawing, you can create new LineString
and MultiLineString features. MultiLineString features are multiple lines that
behave like a single Line feature.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
creating drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
NOTE The feature creation commands available for a feature layer depend on the
capabilities of the feature class represented by the layer. Feature geometry follows
OGC specifications.
See also:
■Creating a New Feature from a Drawing Object (page 691)
■Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about creating
drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
690 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To create a new LineString or MultiLineString feature
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the feature layer for the new
feature ➤ Create ➤ New LineString feature_name.
■In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the feature layer for the new
feature ➤ Create ➤ New MultiLineString feature_name.
Here, feature_name is the name of the LineString or MultiLineString feature
layer.
2When prompted, specify the location for the new LineString or
MultiLineString feature.
3Use the command line or right-click to complete the new feature.
For more information, see MAPLINESTRINGCREATE (page 1654) and
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE (page 1656).
4Press Enter to complete the operation.
The new feature is added to the Data Table. To add information to the
feature, see Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711).
5Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
Creating a New Feature from a Drawing Object
You can create new features using drawing object geometry.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
creating drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to create new features
from existing AutoCAD objects.
Procedure
■To create a new feature from geometry
(page 692)
Creating New Features | 691
Workflow
■Add DWG Data to an Existing Feature
Source
GIS Skill
■Create new features from existing Auto-
CAD objects.
Related topics
■Overview of Working with Features
(page 684)
■Checking In Features (page 693)
■Using AutoCAD Commands on Fea-
tures (page 713)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about creating
drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
To create a new feature from geometry
1In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the layer to which you want
to add the feature. Click New Feature from Geometry.
2When prompted, select the object or objects to convert to features. Press
Enter.
All selected objects are converted into a single feature. To create multiple
features, perform this operation on one object at a time.
3When prompted to erase the drawing object, do one of the following:
■Click Yes to erase the original drawing object.
■Click No to keep the drawing object in the drawing.
Keep the object if you plan to use it to create other features. You can
store drawing objects on a separate layer and turn off visibility for the
layer.
To add information to the feature, see Editing Features using the Data
Table (page 711).
4Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
692 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
New Feature from Geometry
Creates a new feature from drawing object geometry
Click Create ➤ New Feature from Geometry.
Menu
New Feature From Geometry
Icon
MAPCREATEFEATUREFROMGEOMETRYCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer. Click
New Feature from Geometry
Task Pane
Checking In Features
Checking in features saves your changes and additions to the feature source
and releases any locks. Check in features before giving a map to someone else
to edit. If you and the other person have different versions of AutoCAD Map
3D, some features may not be recognized unless they are checked in.
You can update the source automatically as you edit or wait until you check
in the features. If you update the source with edits automatically, be sure to
check in features when you are finished working.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
locking and unlocking drawing files, see Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings
(page 730).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to check in features after
editing in the field.
Procedure
■To check in features (page 694)
Tutorial
■Exercise 3: Update information for the
edited feature
Checking In Features | 693
Workflow
■Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature
Source
GIS Skill
■Draft new features for an existing feature
class.
■Check out features to edit in the field and
update the database later.
Related topics
■Overview of Working with Features
(page 684)
■Updating Edits Automatically (page
698)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about locking
and unlocking drawing files, see Methods for Object Locking (page 731).
To check in features
1Select the features to check in using one of the following methods:
■Click a feature or features.
■Right-click the feature layer in the Display Manager (page 2060). Click
Select Checked-Out Features.
2Right-click the drawing. Click Check-In Feature.
Quick Reference
Check In Feature
Checks in features, saves your changes and additions to the feature source,
and releases locks
Click Edit ➤ Check-In.
Menu
Check-In Features
Icon
MAPCHECKINCommand Line
694 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Click Edit ➤ Select Checked-Out Features.
Menu
Select Checked-Out Features
Icon
MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click the feature layerTask Pane
Checking Out Features
Checking out features makes them available to edit. By default, features are
checked out automatically when you edit them. Check in features before
giving a map to someone else to edit. If you and the other person have different
versions of AutoCAD Map 3D, some features may not be recognized unless
they are checked in.
If the data source supports locking, features or files will be locked. Checking
in or canceling a checkout operation unlocks locked features.
If you plan to work offline, check out the features that you want to edit before
going offline.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
locking and unlocking drawing files, see Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings
(page 730).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to check out features for
editing in the field.
Procedure
■To check out features automatically
(page 696)
Tutorial
■Exercise 2: Check out and edit a fea-
ture
Checking Out Features | 695
Workflow
■Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature
Source
GIS Skill
■Check out features to edit in the field and
update the database later.
Related topics
■Overview of Working with Features
(page 684)
■Updating Edits Automatically (page
698)
■Working Offline (page 721)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about locking
and unlocking drawing files, see Methods for Object Locking (page 731).
To check out features automatically
■In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Feature Edit tab ➤ Edit Set
panel ➤ Auto Checkout.
To check out features
NOTE Use this procedure if you do not have Auto Checkout turned on.
1Click a feature or features.
2Right-click the drawing. Click Check-Out Feature.
Grips are displayed on the checked-out feature. If you do not edit using
grips you can turn them off. For more information, see Use Grip Modes
in the AutoCAD Help.
Quick Reference
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT
Automatically checks-out features that are edited
Not available on the menu in the current workspaceMenu
696 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
MAPAUTOCHECKOUTCommand Line
Check Out Feature
Checks out selected features and makes them available for editing
Click Edit ➤ Check-Out.
Menu
Check-Out Features
Icon
MAPCHECKOUTCommand Line
MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS
Specifies options for editing features
Feature Edit Options
Icon
MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONSCommand Line
Feature Editing Options dialog boxDialog Box
Canceling Checkout
You can cancel the checkout of all, selected, or erased features. You can also
cancel the checkout of features by layer. When you cancel check out, locks
are released and your changes are discarded.
NOTE If Update Edits Automatically is on, edits are made in the feature source
immediately. Canceling checkout will not discard changes or restore erased features.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
locking and unlocking drawing files, see Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings
(page 730).
See also:
■Overview of Working with Features (page 684)
■Working Offline (page 721)
■Updating Edits Automatically (page 698)
Canceling Checkout | 697
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about locking
and unlocking drawing files, see Methods for Object Locking (page 731).
To cancel check out
1Click Feature Edit tab ➤ Edit Set panel ➤ Cancel Feature Check-out.
2When prompted, click one of the following options:
DescriptionOption
Cancels check out of all featuresAll
Cancels check out of all erased featuresErased
Prompts for a layer and cancels check out
of all features on the selected layer. This
Layer
option is the same as All if there is only one
layer.
Prompts for features or cancels check out
of selected features
Select Objects
Quick Reference
Cancel Checkout
Cancels a checkout operation. If you have Update Edits Automatically
enabled, cancelling the checkout does not undo changes.
Click Edit ➤ Cancel Check-Out.
Menu
Cancel Feature Check-Out
Icon
MAPCANCELCHECKOUTCommand Line
Updating Edits Automatically
You can queue your edits and save them to the source all at once, or you can
save them as you work.
698 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
saving changes back to attached drawing files, see Setting Save Back Options
(page 763).
When Update Edits Automatically is off (the default), your changes remain
local until you check them in.
If you turn on Update Edits Automatically, AutoCAD Map 3D immediately
attempts to save any edits you have made to checked-out features back to the
feature source. If updating fails for any reason, the setting remains off. You
can reverse the changes you made (so your version matches the one that is
checked in), or check out the drawing, re-enter your edits and then check it
in.
NOTE Undo does not reverse this command. Canceling a checkout will not discard
changes or restore features to their state before the checkout.
You can change the default setting (page 84) for Update Edits Automatically.
When you create layers for SHP and SDF data, AutoCAD Map 3D may create
a local cache the first time you edit those layers. For large files this may be
time-consuming. To avoid this, turn on Update Edits Automatically for large
SDF and SHP files.
Persistent Locking
If the feature source provider supports persistent locking (page 2070), and Update
Edits Automatically is on, checking out a feature locks that feature; checking
in a feature unlocks it. You can release locks on features by checking them
out (if you are the user who locked them) and then checking them back in.
If the feature source provider supports persistent locking and Update Edits
Automatically is off, use Cancel Checkout to unlock features without saving
your changes to them. When you do this, you synchronize the state of the
feature you checked out with those in the feature source. That is, you delete
new features created locally, and replace locally modified or deleted features
with the versions from the feature source.
Revision Numbers
Some providers (for example, Oracle, SQL Server, and MySQL) support revision
numbers, which increment a numeric value in the feature every time you
commit a change to that feature in the feature source. This allows AutoCAD
Map 3D to see if a feature has been edited by another user. If another user
modifies a feature while you have it checked out, a revision-number conflict
can occur. This might happen if you check out the feature while you are
Updating Edits Automatically | 699
offline, or if the feature source provider does not support persistent locking.
In such cases, you cannot overwrite the other user’s changes to the features.
Instead, turn Update Edits Automatically off and choose Cancel Checkout for
the features that have conflicts.
See also:
■Customizing Your Work Environment (page 84)
■Working Offline (page 721)
■Canceling Checkout (page 697)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about saving
changes back to attached drawing files, see To set editing and save back options
(page 764).
To update edits automatically
■In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Feature Edit tab ➤ Edit Set
panel ➤ Automatic Update
NOTE To change the default setting for Automatic Update, at the Command
prompt, type MAPEDITSETAUTODESFAULT and specify Active (checked) or Deactive
(unchecked) as the default.
Quick Reference
MAPEDITSETAUTO
Turns on and off the setting for updating edits to the feature source
automatically
Click Edit ➤ Update Edits Automatically.
Menu
MAPEDITSETAUTOCommand Line
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT
Specifies the default setting for updating edits to the feature source
automatically
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULTCommand Line
700 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Check In Feature
Checks in features, saves your changes and additions to the feature source,
and releases locks
Click Edit ➤ Check-In.
Menu
Check-In Features
Icon
MAPCHECKINCommand Line
Editing Features
To edit features
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
■To split a feature (page 708)
■To turn Ignore Split And Merge Rules on or off (page 708)
■To set split prompt options (page 709)
■To merge features (page 710)
■To edit features using the Data Table (page 712)
■To use AutoCAD commands on features (page 713)
■To edit feature properties in the Properties palette (page 719)
Overview of Editing Features
Edit features in any of the following ways:
■Use AutoCAD commands
Most common AutoCAD editing commands (such as PEDIT, ROTATE, and
TRIM) are available to use with features. To perform an AutoCAD operation
that is not available for features, extract the geometry from the feature,
modify it using AutoCAD, and then update the feature geometry.
NOTE To use common AutoCAD editing commands on features, make sure
you have selected Check Out Features As AutoCAD Drawing Objects in the
Feature Checkout Options area of the Feature Editing Options dialog box (page
1929)
■Use specialized AutoCAD Map 3D commands for certain geometry types
Editing Features | 701
■Change entries in the Data Table
■Change entries in the Properties palette
Edit the same feature properties in the Data Table or Properties palette.
Edits in the Properties palette apply to all selected features in the selected
layer.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
editing native drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
Use this method...To edit this...
Use PEDIT for all features except MultiPoint
features.
■Point features
■MultiPoint features You can also use geospatial feature editing
commands for all features except Point
features:
■LineString features
■MultiLineString features
■Specify that features will be checked
out as geospatial features. (page 239)
■Polygon features
■MultiPolygon features
■Then change the geometry directly.
(page 705)
Modify a feature in the Data Table to
change its data. (page 712)
Change property values for all selected
features on the selected layer in the Prop-
erties palette. (page 719)
Feature properties
Specify that features will be checked out
as AutoCAD drawing objects. (page 239)
Feature geometry as AutoCAD drawing
objects
Then use any available AutoCAD com-
mands. (page 713)
NOTE In some cases, when feature geo-
metry is checked out as AutoCAD drawing
objects, geospatial feature editing com-
mands may still be available to use on the
geometry.
702 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to edit features stored in
a database or data store.
■Show me how to check out features for
editing in the field.
Procedure
■To edit features (page 701)
Tutorial
■Lesson 5: Find and Edit Features
Workflow
■Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature
Source
■Work Offline from an Enterprise Data-
base
GIS Skill
■Edit feature geometry directly in a SHP
file using CAD tools.
■Check out features to edit in the field and
update the database later.
Related topics
■Extracting Feature Geometry (page 715)
■Updating Feature Geometry (page 716)
■Using Feature Editing Commands
(page 704)
■Editing Features using the Data Table
(page 711)
■Using AutoCAD Commands on Fea-
tures (page 713)
■Viewing and Editing Feature Properties
(page 718)
Editing Features | 703
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit geometry, direction,
and resistance for selected topology objects
Click Modify ➤ Properties.
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select objects. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Using Feature Editing Commands
Feature editing commands are available for Point, MultiPoint, LineString,
MultiLineString, Polygon, or MultiPolygon features. If you do not have Auto
Checkout turned on, check out a feature to use the feature editing command
specific to the geometry of that feature.
You cannot perform edits that would create a non-planar polygon. Every ring
of a polygon must be planar and all parts and all rings must be in the same
plane.
NOTE To improve performance when editing features, turn Update Edits
Automatically off.
704 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
editing native drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
See also:
■Updating Edits Automatically (page 698)
■Editing Features (page 701)
■Checking Out Features (page 695)
■Checking In Features (page 693)
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
editing native drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands
1Make sure that you have specified that features will be checked out as
geospatial features in the Feature Editing Options dialog box (page 1929)
by selecting Geospatial Features in the Feature Checkout Options area.
2Check out the feature. (page 696)
For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
3Right-click the feature. Click Edit Feature.
The appropriate feature editing command for the geometry will apply to
the feature.
4Edit the Point, MultiPoint, LineString, MultiLineString, Polygon, or
MultiPolygon features.
For more information about editing these features see
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT (page 1659), MAPLINESTRINGEDIT (page 1655),
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT (page 1658), MAPPOLYGONEDIT (page 1665),
and MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT (page 1662).
5Check in the revised features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
Splitting Features
To split a feature into two parts, for example a parcel, use the
MAPFEATURESPLIT (page 1652) command. The resulting feature property values
Editing Features | 705
are determined by the rules specified in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box
(page 1669).
You can choose to ignore the rules specified in the Split and Merge Rules dialog
box (page 1669) by turning on Ignore Split and Merge Rules.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
splitting drawing objects, see Splitting Polygon Objects (page 968).
Split Prompt Options
When you split a feature, you are prompted during the operation. You can
set defaults for some of these options (page 1929) and specify whether to display
those prompts during the split operation or not.
■Create New/Create Multi-part: Click Create New to split the feature into
two pieces. To creating more pieces, click Create Multi-part.
■Generate New Feature ID/Use Existing: Click New to auto-generate a
unique identifier for the new features. Click Existing to assign the ID of
the original feature to all resulting features.
■Would You Like To Draw Or Select The Line For The Split: Click Draw to
draw a line through the original feature where the split should occur. Click
Select to select an existing line or polygon in the original feature that
indicates the location of the split.
Splitting Features with Polygons
If you use a polygon (or mpolygon) to split a feature, the output is divided
into two groups (inside and outside). The groups are collected into as few
multipart types as possible without creating heterogeneous geometric types.
A multipart feature is created for each distinct geometric type (point, line,
polygon) that was in the input.
In the following example, a polygon was used to split a line. The lines outside
the polygon become a multiline feature.
706 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
The line segment inside the polygon becomes a
line feature (shown in blue on the right). The line
segments outside the polygon become a multiline
feature (shown in red).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to split a parcel feature.
Procedure
■To create split/merge rules using ex-
pressions
■To set split prompt options (page 709)
■To turn Ignore Split And Merge Rules
on or off (page 708)
■To split a feature (page 708)
Tutorial
■Lesson 2: Split a Polygon Feature
Workflow
■Split a Feature
GIS Skill
■Split a parcel in two and divide attrib-
utes.
Related topics
■Editing Features (page 701)
■Using Expressions In Split/Merge Rules
■Creating Calculated Properties (page
1132)
Editing Features | 707
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about splitting
drawing objects, see To split a polygon object (page 969).
To split a feature
1Optionally, specify split rules.
NOTE To set these rules (page 1669), in the Data Table click Options ➤ Set
Split and Merge Rules.
2Optionally, specify split prompts.
NOTE To set these options (page 1929), in the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Feature Edit tab ➤ Edit Set Panel ➤ angle arrow.
3Select the feature.
4If you do not have Auto Checkout turned on, check out the feature.
For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
5Feature Edit tab ➤ Split/Merge panel ➤ Split Feature
6Follow the MAPFEATURESPLIT (page 1652) prompts to specify whether the
resulting feature will be a new or a multipart feature.
NOTE If you specified these options in the Feature Editing Options dialog
box (page 1929) and selected Do Not Show These Prompts When Executing
Split, you will not see the first two prompts.
7Follow the prompts to specify whether the resulting feature will use a
new or existing feature ID.
8Follow the prompts to select or draw a split line.
9Check in the revised features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
To turn Ignore Split And Merge Rules on or off
■In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Feature Edit tab ➤ Split/Merge
panel ➤ Ignore Rules .
708 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE To change the default setting for Ignore Split And Merge Rules, at the
Command prompt, type MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES (page 1653) and specify
Yes or No as the default.
To set split prompt options
1In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Feature Edit tab ➤ Edit Set
Panel ➤ angle arrow, or enter mapfeatureeditoptions at the Command
prompt.
2In the Feature Editing Options dialog box (page 1929), select the Split
Prompt Options you want.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPFEATURESPLIT
Splits features and assigns feature property values for resulting features
Modify menu ➤ Split
Menu
Split
Icon
MAPFEATURESPLITCommand Line
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES
Determines whether or not the rules for split and merge are used
Not available on the menu in the current workspaceMenu
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULESCommand Line
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULESDialog Box
Merging Features
When you want to merge two or more features, for example separate line
segments that represent the same road, use the MAPFEATUREMERGE (page
1651) command. The resulting feature property values are determined by the
rules specified in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669). To ignore
Editing Features | 709
rules specified in this dialog box, turn on Ignore Split and Merge rules (see To
turn Ignore Split And Merge Rules on or off (page 708)).
You can merge two or more features of the same class into one feature. You
can also merge features with drawing objects. You can specify a new or existing
feature ID for the resulting feature.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
working with drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
Tell me more
Procedure
■To create split/merge rules using ex-
pressions
■To turn Ignore Split And Merge Rules
on or off (page 708)
■To merge features (page 710)
Workflow
■Merge Features
Related topics
■Editing Features (page 701)
■Using Expressions In Split/Merge Rules
■Creating Calculated Properties (page
1132)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about working
with drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
To merge features
1Optionally, specify merge rules (page 1669).
NOTE To set these rules (page 1669), in the Data Table click Options ➤ Set
Split and Merge Rules.
2If you do not have Auto Checkout turned on, check out the feature(s).
For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
3Select at least two objects, including at least one feature.
710 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
4Click Feature Edit tab ➤ Split/Merge panel ➤ Merge Feature .
5Follow the MAPFEATUREMERGE (page 1651) prompts to specify whether
the resulting feature will use a new or existing feature ID.
6Check in the merged feature.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
Quick Reference
MAPFEATUREMERGE
Merges features and assigns feature property values for the resulting feature
Click Feature Edit tab ➤ Split/Merge panel ➤ Merge
Feature.
Menu
Merge
Icon
MAPFEATUREMERGECommand Line
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES
Determines whether or not the rules for split and merge are used
Not available on the menu in the current workspaceMenu
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULESCommand Line
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULESDialog Box
Editing Features using the Data Table
Use the Data Table to view and edit features. Select data in the Data Table
window or select areas of your map to see their data in the table.
NOTE When you edit feature data in the Data Table, the corresponding geometry
is checked out and locked, if possible. You must check in the geometry when you
are finished editing.
Editing Features | 711
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
editing attributes associated with drawing objects, see Working with Attribute
Data and Object Data (page 1047).
See also:
■Overview of the Data Table (page 1125)
■Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor (page 599)
■Checking Out Features (page 695)
■Checking In Features (page 693)
■Updating Edits Automatically (page 698)
■Editing Features (page 701)
■Viewing and Editing Feature Properties (page 718)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about editing
attributes associated with drawing objects, see To use attribute data and object
data (page 1047).
To edit features using the Data Table
1In Map Explorer (page 2068), expand the Data Source entry and select the
feature layer to edit.
2Click .
The Data Table window opens, displaying the feature data contained in
your map. If you have joined data (page 507) to a layer in your map, the
joined data is displayed, but it is gray. You cannot edit it in the Data
Table. Instead, select the original data source and update that in the Data
Table. Your changes will appear the next time you display this data as
joined data.
3Select and edit cells in the Data Table window.
When you edit data related to a feature, that feature is checked out
automatically (and the Update Edits Automatically setting is turned on).
Non-feature data cannot be checked out, so all edits to that type of data
are written back to their underlying sources immediately. You cannot
edit non-feature data unless you are connected to its source. See Updating
Edits Automatically (page 698).
712 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Some data fields are “constrained” to allow only certain values. When
you enter values for constrained fields, you are prompted to enter only
valid values. For example, the prompt might tell you to enter only values
between one and ten.
4Check in the revised features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
5Close the Data Table window when you are finished.
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
Using AutoCAD Commands on Features
To use AutoCAD commands on features
■To edit features with AutoCAD commands (page 715)
■To extract feature geometry (page 716)
■To update feature geometry (page 717)
Editing Features with AutoCAD Commands
By default, many common AutoCAD editing commands (such as PEDIT, JOIN,
ROTATE, and TRIM) can be used on features directly.
NOTE You can use these commands, as well as all other AutoCAD commands,
on drawing objects in AutoCAD Map 3D.
Editing Features | 713
Use PEDIT on a single or multipart feature. You can edit polygonal features
and linear features (with or without M or Z values), but not point features.
You can use the Join option to connect linear features. For single linear features,
the feature ID for the first feature you selected is used for the resulting feature.
For multipart linear features, you can join only features whose end points
touch; the first selected feature is updated using the current Merge rules.
You can use the JOIN command on non-closed linear features with or without
M or Z values. If the features are all on the same layer, the geometry and
attributes of the source feature are updated, using the current Merge rules.
The joined feature is removed.
You can use the AutoCAD OSNAP modes when editing features. Snap to any
graphic within a block definition that is used to symbolize a point. You can
also use OSNAP Node to snap to the insertion point of of an attribute, a block,
a shape, or text. OSNAP Node is turned off by default.
If there is an AutoCAD operation you cannot perform on a feature, you can
extract the feature geometry (page 715), edit it using AutoCAD commands, and
then update the feature geometry (page 716). Feature data and rules are
preserved.
You can also merge AutoCAD geometry with existing features directly, without
extracting feature geometry first.
NOTE When you use EXPLODE on features, they are converted to AutoCAD
drawing objects.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to edit features using
automatic check-out.
Procedure
■To edit features with AutoCAD com-
mands (page 715)
Workflow
■Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature
Source
GIS Skill
■Edit feature geometry directly in a SHP
file using CAD tools.
■Edit features as polylines using PEDIT.
714 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Related topics
■Extracting Feature Geometry (page 715)
■Updating Feature Geometry (page 716)
■Checking Out Features (page 695)
■Checking In Features (page 693)
■Updating Edits Automatically (page
698)
NOTE You can use these commands, as well as all other AutoCAD commands,
on drawing objects in AutoCAD Map 3D.
To edit features with AutoCAD commands
1If you do not have Auto Checkout turned on, check out the feature.
For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
2Do one of the following:
■Enter an AutoCAD command and follow the prompts to select and
edit the feature.
■Select the feature and use its grips to edit the feature.
■Select the feature and then enter an AutoCAD command and follow
its prompts.
NOTE For help with AutoCAD commands, search for the command name
in the Help file or press F1 while you are using the command.
3Check in the revised features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
Extracting Feature Geometry
Extract the geometry from a feature to use AutoCAD commands that are not
available for features.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. There is no equivalent for
drawing objects.
Editing Features | 715
See also:
■Editing Features (page 701)
■Checking Out Features (page 695)
■Checking In Features (page 693)
■Updating Feature Geometry (page 716)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. There is no equivalent for
drawing objects.
To extract feature geometry
1Check out the feature.
For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
2Right-click the feature. Click Extract Geometry From Feature.
After you make your changes, you can merge the updated geometry back into
the feature.
Quick Reference
Extract Feature Geometry
Creates new drawing objects from the selected feature geometry
Click Modify ➤ Advanced Feature Editing ➤ Extract
Geometry from Feature.
Menu
Extract Feature Geometry
Icon
MAPEXTRACTFEATUREGEOMETRYCommand Line
Updating Feature Geometry
You can merge new or existing drawing object geometry with a feature. If you
have extracted the geometry from a feature to edit it using AutoCAD, you
must update the feature geometry when you are finished editing.
716 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
You can use this command to combine spatially connected entities. For
example, you can use a line and an arc to update the geometry of a single
feature (resulting in one linestring or polyline). If the data store of a feature
does not support curves, this command transforms the curves into line
segments.
For polygons, this command allows you to work on the boundary geometry
instead of the polygon itself.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. There is no equivalent for
drawing objects.
See also:
■Editing Features (page 701)
■Checking Out Features (page 695)
■Checking In Features (page 693)
■Extracting Feature Geometry (page 715)
NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. There is no equivalent for
drawing objects.
To update feature geometry
1Right-click the feature you want to merge with a drawing object. Click
Update Feature From Geometry.
2When prompted, select the drawing object to merge. Press Enter.
3When prompted to erase the drawing object, do one of the following:
■Click Yes to erase the original drawing object.
■Click No to keep the drawing object in the drawing.
Keep the object if you plan to use it to create other features. You can
store drawing objects on an AutoCAD layer and turn off visibility of
the layer.
4Check in the edited feature.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
Editing Features | 717
Quick Reference
Update Feature from Geometry
Merges new or existing drawing object geometry with a feature
Click Modify ➤ Advanced Feature Editing ➤ Update
Feature from Geometry.
Menu
Update Feature Geometry
Icon
MAPUPDATEFEATUREGEOMETRYCommand Line
Viewing and Editing Feature Properties
View and edit the properties for one or more selected features in the Properties
palette. The properties are the same as those you can edit in the Data Table.
Your edits apply to all selected features in the selected layer. The feature source
is updated immediately if Update Edits Automatically is on.
You can select both drawing objects and geospatial features at the same time.
Use the drop-down list at the top of the Properties palette to switch between
viewing the properties of all selected entities, viewing feature properties only,
or viewing the properties for drawing objects by geometry type.
NOTE For more information about viewing properties for drawing objects, see
Properties Palette.
You can view the properties for up to 2000 features. If you select more features
than that, all of them will be selected in your map and in Data Table. However,
only the first 2000 features selected will be shown in the Properties palette.
When you select features on multiple layers, the drop-down list at the top of
the Properties palette indicates how many checked-out features are selected.
(If the features you selected are not checked out, the list shows only a single
selection for each layer.)
The General properties indicate whether the Feature Class shown is for one
or more layers, and whether the Feature ID is for one or more features. For
multiple layers or features, these fields contain the text “VARIES.”
Properties for all selected layers are shown. You can change the Filter By Layer
entry to see the properties for a single selected layer, or to switch between
718 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
selected layers. For example, if you selected features that are stored on four
different layers, select one of those layers to see its properties only. However,
any features that were selected on the other layers remain selected.
To set the value for a property to “NULL,” click in the value field and select
<NULL> from the drop-down list in that field. If <NULL> does not appear in
the list, the property cannot have a null value.
NOTE Do not enter the text string “Null.” This will not produce a null value, but
will be treated as a text string.
See also:
■Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
■Properties Palette
■Updating Edits Automatically (page 698)
■Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor (page 599)
■Displaying and Editing Object Data for a Drawing Object (page 1068)
NOTE For more information about viewing properties for drawing objects, see
Properties Palette.
To edit feature properties in the Properties palette
1Select the features and objects to edit.
To change a single value for multiple features (for example, to change
the zoning type for multiple parcels to Commercial), select only those
features.
NOTE You can select both features and drawing objects. However, you must
select either features or drawing object types to see any properties.
2Right-click any selected feature or object and click Properties on the menu
that appears.
3In the Properties palette, do any of the following:
■To view only features, or only a particular type of drawing object,
change the selection in the drop-down list at the top of the Properties
palette.
To see only features, select Map Features from the list.
Editing Features | 719
Drawing objects are listed by their geometry type. For example, to see
only the properties for the line objects you selected, select Lines from
the list.
■To see the properties for a single selected layer, or to switch between
selected layers, click the entry for Layer under Filter By Layer. Select
a layer.
For example, if you selected features that are stored on four different
layers, select one of those layers to see its properties only. Any features
that were selected on the other layers remain selected.
■To change a value, click in its field and enter a new value.
If you enter a value that uses the wrong data type (for example, if you
enter text in a field that allows only numerals), the value reverts back
to the last valid value. If you specify a invalid date value in a date
field, you will see an error message.
For properties that have value constraints, click in the field to see a
list with the available values. If you enter an invalid value for a
constrained property, you will see an error message.
For other fields, hover over the property name to see information on
the acceptable values.
To set the value for a property to “NULL,” click in the value field and
select <NULL> from the drop-down list in that field. If <NULL> does
not appear in the list, the property cannot have a null value.
NOTE Do not enter the text string “Null.” This will not produce a null
value, but will be treated as a text string.
Your edits apply to all selected features in the selected layer. The
feature source is updated immediately if Update Edits Automatically
is on.
For more information on changing drawing object properties, see
Displaying and Editing Object Data for a Drawing Object (page 1068).
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit geometry, direction,
and resistance for selected topology objects
720 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Click Modify ➤ Properties.
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select objects. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Working Offline
When you work offline, AutoCAD Map 3D caches all your feature data
connections.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
working with shared drawing files, see Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings
(page 730).
Clear the cache periodically to improve performance. To be sure that you are
working with the most current data for a data source, rebuild its cache by
refreshing its layer.
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how to check out features for
editing in the field.
■Show me how to edit features stored in
a database or data store.
■Show me how to check in features after
editing in the field.
Procedure
■To work offline (page 722)
Workflow
■Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature
Source
■Work Offline from an Enterprise Data-
base
Working Offline | 721
GIS Skill
■Check out features to edit in the field and
update the database later.
Related topics
■Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
■Editing Features (page 701)
■Checking Out Features (page 695)
■Checking In Features (page 693)
NOTE These procedures are for geospatial features only. For information about
working with shared drawing files, see Use these techniques for object locking.
(page 731)
■To work offline (page 722)
■To return online (page 722)
■To clear the cache (page 723)
■To rebuild the cache (page 723)
To work offline
1Click Edit Feature tab ➤ Edit Set panel ➤ Automatic Update.
2Check out the features you plan to use.
For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
3Click the Online/Offline toggle on the Status Bar.
NOTE AutoCAD Map 3D caches the feature source. This can take some time.
You can still check out and edit features while you are offline. When you
return online, AutoCAD Map 3D attempts to lock features that you checked
out while you were offline. Non-feature data cannot be checked out, so you
cannot edit it unless you are connected to its source.
To return online
1Click the Offline/Online toggle on the Status Bar.
722 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
2Check in the checked out features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693).
To clear the cache
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), click the System tab.
3Click Clear Cache. Click OK.
To rebuild the cache
➤ Right-click a feature layer in Display Manager ➤ Refresh Layer.
Quick Reference
MAPWORKOFFLINE
Caches all checked-out features so you can work without being connected.
Online/Offline toggle on the Status Bar
Icon
_MAPWORKOFFLINECommand Line
Managing Versions
For feature sources that support versioning, you can create a version, edit
objects in that version, and then merge (commit) changes from the child
version back to the parent version.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about
working with shared drawing files, see Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings
(page 730).
Managing Versions | 723
Support for versioning depends on the feature source. However, the following
guidelines apply to most feature sources that support versioning:
■Features queried from one version of the feature source can be saved back
to that version only. If you plan to edit features, be sure to query the
features from the version where you plan to save the edits.
■Objects locked in one version of the feature source are automatically locked
in all versions (if the feature source supports locking). This reduces the
chance of a conflict where an object is edited in two versions of the feature
source.
Conflicts can still occur, for example if one version is edited offline. In
these cases, you must specify how to resolve the conflicts before you save
the version.
■You must be working online and be connected to the data store to manage
versions.
■You cannot save or discard a version if it has children.
■You cannot save or discard a version if it has checked out features. You
must first unlock the objects by either checking them in or canceling check
out.
■When you save or discard a version, all features in the drawing that were
queried from that version are removed from the drawing.
■When you discard a version, all edits saved to that version are discarded.
■You cannot undo saving or discarding a version.
Error handling
Errors can occur when you add, activate, drop, or merge versions. Some errors
may be caused by actions within the Manage Versions dialog box (page 1748),
while others may be the result of activity within the data store itself.
The affected item in the dialog box displays an error indicator. To see the
cause of the error, hold your cursor over this indicator. If you create a version
and the operation fails, you will see a new version with an error indicator.
The version has not really been created. It is a placeholder to display the error.
Errors remain visible until you close the dialog box, fix the errors, and redisplay
the dialog box.
724 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305)
■Overview of Working with Features (page 684)
■To create a new version (page 725)
■To activate a version (page 725)
■To commit changes back to the data store (page 726)
■To discard a version (page 726)
NOTE These procedure are for geospatial features only. For information about
working with shared drawing files, see Use these techniques for object locking.
(page 731).
To create a new version
1In Map Explorer (page 2068), right-click the feature source and click Manage
Versions.
This command is available only for feature sources that support
versioning.
2In the Manage Versions dialog box (page 1748), select a version under
Version (in the lower half of the dialog box) and click Add.
3Enter a name for the new version and an optional comment.
4Click Close.
To activate a version
1In Map Explorer (page 2068), right-click the feature source and click Manage
Versions.
2In the Manage Versions dialog box (page 1748), select the version and click
Activate.
All queries are performed on the active version of the feature source.
Switching versions can take some time to execute, because the data store
may need to flush and reload the feature cache.
3Click Close.
Managing Versions | 725
To commit changes back to the data store
1Check in all features, or cancel checkout for them.
2In Map Explorer (page 2068), right-click the feature source and click Manage
Versions.
3In the Manage Versions dialog box (page 1748), select the version and click
Merge.
This option is available for child versions only. If you merge the active
version, its parent version is activated and then the selected version is
merged and removed from the Version tree.
You cannot merge a version if it has children.
4Click Close.
To discard a version
1Check in any checked out features, or cancel checkout for them.
2Make sure that the parent version is not connected in any other drawing.
3In Map Explorer (page 2068), right-click the feature source and click Manage
Versions.
4In the Manage Versions dialog box (page 1748), select the version and click
Drop.
All edits saved to the version are discarded. This option is available for
child versions only. If you drop the active version, its parent version is
activated and then the selected version is dropped and removed from the
Version list.
You cannot drop a version if it has children.
5Click Close.
To address errors
If an error occurs during version management, the affected item in the dialog
box displays an error indicator.
1To see the cause of the error, hold your cursor over the error indicator.
If you create a version and the operation fails, you will see a new version
with an error indicator. The version has not really been created. It is a
placeholder to display the error.
726 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
2If necessary, close the Manage Versions dialog box (page 1748) and correct
the error.
3Redisplay the dialog box to make sure that the error has been cleared.
Working with Drawing Objects
To work with drawing objects
■To edit data in attached drawings (page 729)
■To clean up drawing data (page 765)
■To create, edit, and manage topologies (page 821)
■To use Map editing tools (page 927)
■To work with polygon objects (page 954)
■To use object classification (page 981)
Overview of Working with Drawing Objects
Create and edit drawing objects using AutoCAD and AutoCAD-based
commands.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. However, you can use many
AutoCAD commands to edit geospatial features as well. See Using AutoCAD
Commands on Features (page 713).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how multi-user editing works.
■Show me how to clean up errors in my
data.
■Show me how to create a network topo-
logy.
Procedure
■Use the following techniques to work
with drawing data. (page 728)
Tutorial
■Exercise 2: Attach a drawing file
Working with Drawing Objects | 727
■Exercise 3: Query in data from the
drawing
Workflow
■Find and Edit Objects in Attached
Drawings
GIS Skill
■Edit DWG files in a multi-user environ-
ment.
■Clean up duplicates, gaps, and other
accuracy problems in DWG files.
■Create a network topology to show how
lines are connected.
Related topics
■Editing Data in Attached Drawings
(page 729)
■Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 765)
■Creating, Editing, and Managing Topo-
logies (page 820)
■Using Map Editing Tools (page 926)
■Working with Polygon Objects (page
954)
■Using Object Classification (page 981)
NOTE These procedures are for drawing objects only. However, you can use many
AutoCAD commands to edit geospatial features as well. See To use AutoCAD
commands on features (page 713).
Use the following techniques to work with drawing data.
Use this method...To do this...
Work in a multiuser environment. ■Turn on object locking. (page 733)
■Find out who locked an object. (page
735)
■Release locked objects for use by oth-
ers. (page 736)
728 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Use this method...To do this...
Query objects from attached drawings into
the current map, or edit objects from at-
Edit and save objects in attached drawings.
tached drawings and save them back.
(page 737)
Use drawing cleanup. (page 767)Correct common map errors resulting from
surveying, digitizing, and scanning errors,
and remove unnecessary detail.
Create node, network, or polygon topolo-
gies. (page 824)
Use topology to analyze a set of objects
and data and their relationship.
Use map editing tools. (page 927)Edit map-related data.
Specify the exact coordinates of the points.
(page 953)
Digitize new points in existing maps with
precision.
Use specialized polygon options. (page 954)Work with polygon objects.
Use annotation. (page ?)Indicate textual values on an object.
Use object classification. (page 1101)Organize drawing objects based on the
real-world features that they represent.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings
NOTE These procedures are for drawing objects only. However, you can use many
AutoCAD commands to edit geospatial features as well. See To use AutoCAD
commands on features (page 713).
To edit data in attached drawings
■To use object locking (page 730)
■To edit and save objects (page 737)
Sharing Attached Drawings
■Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings (page 730)
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 729
■Turning On Object Locking (page 733)
■Finding Out Who Locked an Object (page 734)
■Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User (page 736)
See also:
■Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings (page 737)
NOTE These procedures are for drawing objects only. For information about
locking geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
To use object locking
■To turn on object locking (page 733)
■To find out who locked an object (page 735)
■To release all locked objects (page 736)
Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings
Object locking lets multiple network users simultaneously retrieve, edit, and
save back different objects while working in the same attached drawing. If
object locking is not selected, only one user can have write access to an active
drawing.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about locking
geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how multi-user editing works.
Procedure
■To edit data in attached drawings
(page 729)
Tutorial
■Exercise 2: Attach a drawing file
■Exercise 3: Query in data from the
drawing
730 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Workflow
■Find and Edit Objects in Attached
Drawings
GIS Skill
■Edit DWG files in a multi-user environ-
ment.
Related topics
■Turning On Object Locking (page 733)
■Finding Out Who Locked an Object
(page 734)
■Releasing All Locked Objects for a
Specific User (page 736)
NOTE These procedures are for drawing objects only. For information about
locking geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 696).
Use these techniques for object locking.
Use this method...To do this...
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map pan-
el ➤ angle-arrow.
See Turning On Object Locking (page 733).
Turn on object locking.
Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤
➤ Show Who Has It.
See Finding Out Who Locked an Object
(page 734)
Find out who has locked an object.
Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤
➤ Drawing Maintenance.
See Releasing All Locked Objects for a
Specific User (page 736).
Release locked objects.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 731
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
ADEWHOHASIT
Displays the current owner of a selected locked object
Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Who Has
It?.
Menu
Show Who Has It
Icon
ADEWHOHASITCommand Line
Who Has It Information dialog boxDialog Box
ADEDWGMAINT
Removes locks from objects
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Maintenance
Menu
ADEDWGMAINTCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Maintenance
Task Pane
Drawing Maintenance dialog boxDialog Box
732 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Turning On Object Locking
If object locking is enabled, two network AutoCAD Map 3D users can edit
different objects in the same drawing at the same time, but cannot edit the
same object at the same time.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about locking
geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
Any objects that you add to the save set are locked. Other users can view these
objects, but cannot save modifications back to the attached drawings until
you unlock the objects.
When you finish editing the objects, save them back to their attached drawings.
The objects are automatically unlocked.
Only a superuser (page 2075) can change object locking settings. See Setting Up
Users and Assigning Rights (page 82).
See also:
■Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D (page 141)
■Sharing Attached Drawings (page 729)
NOTE You must have superuser (page 2075) privileges to change the Enable Object
Locking setting. See Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights (page 82).
NOTE These procedures are for drawing objects only. For information about
locking geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 696).
To turn on object locking
1In the Tool-based Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤
angle-arrow.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Multi User
tab.
3Under Multi User Options, select Enable Object Locking.
4Click OK.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 733
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Finding Out Who Locked an Object
Use the Who Has It operation at any time to find out who locked an object.
NOTE If the DWK file has been deleted, the user names are no longer available.
When this happens, AutoCAD Map 3D displays user names and drawing names
as *UNKNOWN*.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about locking
geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how multi-user editing works.
Procedure
■To edit data in attached drawings
(page 729)
Tutorial
■Exercise 2: Attach a drawing file
■Exercise 3: Query in data from the
drawing
734 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Workflow
■Find and Edit Objects in Attached
Drawings
GIS Skill
■Edit DWG files in a multi-user environ-
ment.
Related topics
■Turning On Object Locking (page 733)
■Sharing Attached Drawings (page 729)
■Releasing All Locked Objects for a
Specific User (page 736)
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. For information about locking
geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 696).
To find out who locked an object
1Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Show Who Has It
2Select the object.
The Who Has It Information dialog box (page 1889) displays the name of the
user who has the object locked, the drawing that the object comes from, the
name of the current drawing, and the date and time the object was locked.
Quick Reference
ADEWHOHASIT
Displays the current owner of a selected locked object
Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Who Has
It?.
Menu
Show Who Has It
Icon
ADEWHOHASITCommand Line
Who Has It Information dialog boxDialog Box
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 735
Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User
If a system failure occurs while objects are locked, you must manually release
the object locks. However, only a superuser (page 2075) can remove locks set by
other users.
NOTE If a drawing is activated in another user's drawing, you will not be able to
release locks in that drawing.
When you remove locks, the object is also removed from the save set. You
can restore the locks by adding the objects to the save set again.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about locking
geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
See also:
■Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D (page 141)
■Turning On Object Locking (page 733)
■Sharing Attached Drawings (page 729)
NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. For information about locking
geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 696).
To release all locked objects
1Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ ➤ Drawing Maintenance.
2In the Drawing Maintenance dialog box (page 1920), under Active Drawings,
select the drawing that contains the locks to release.
3Select User List.
The names of the users responsible for the locks appear under User Name.
The number of objects locked by each user appears under Number of
Objects Locked.
4Select Remove Locks.
If you do not have superuser (page 2075) privileges, you can remove only the
locks that you have set. AutoCAD Map 3D removes the objects from the save
set.
736 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
If you have superuser privileges, you can select a user name and remove all
the locks set by that user.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGMAINT
Removes locks from objects
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Maintenance
Menu
ADEDWGMAINTCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Maintenance
Task Pane
Drawing Maintenance dialog boxDialog Box
Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings
■Overview of Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings (page 738)
■Zooming to the Extents of Selected Drawings (page 743)
■Viewing All Objects in Selected Attached Drawings (page 745)
■Editing Objects in Attached Drawings (page 747)
■Adding an Object to the Save Set (page 750)
■Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 752)
■Saving Queried Objects Back to Attached Drawings (page 753)
■Saving New Objects to Attached Drawings (page 754)
■Saving Objects to the Current Drawing (page 756)
■Saving Objects to a New Drawing (page 758)
■Removing an Object from the Save Set (page 759)
■Solving Problems When Saving Back to Attached Drawings (page 760)
■Setting Save Back Options (page 763)
NOTE These procedures are for drawing objects only. For information about saving
geospatial feature data back to its source, see Checking In Features (page 694).
To edit and save objects
■To zoom to the extents of selected drawings (page 745)
■To view objects in source drawings (page 746)
■To edit objects in attached drawings (page 748)
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 737
■To save the edited objects back to their attached source drawings (page
749)
■To add objects to the save set and lock the objects (page 751)
■To view objects in the save set (page 752)
■To save queried objects back to attached source drawings (page 754)
■To save new objects to attached drawings (page 756)
■To save objects to the current drawing (page 757)
■To save objects to a new drawing (page 758)
■To remove objects from the save set and unlock the objects (page 759)
■To redefine block definitions on save back (page 761)
■To save back individual block components (page 762)
■To check that the hatch pattern is in the save set (page 762)
■To set editing and save back options (page 764)
Overview of Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings
When you use AutoCAD Map 3D with multiple drawings, you can query
objects from attached drawings into the current drawing and create new
drawings, or you can edit the objects from the attached drawings and then
save them back.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about saving
geospatial feature data back to its source, see Checking In Features (page 693).
Tell me more
Video
■Show me how multi-user editing works.
Procedure
■To edit and save objects (page 737)
Tutorial
■Exercise 2: Attach a drawing file
■Exercise 3: Query in data from the
drawing
Workflow
■Find and Edit Objects in Attached
Drawings
738 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data